MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide

MSC Nastran 2020

Service Pack 1
Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
(Last updated for version 2002)
Corporate Europe, Middle East, Africa
MSC Software Corporation MSC Software GmbH
4675 MacArthur Court, Suite 900 Am Moosfeld 13
Newport Beach, CA 92660 81829 Munich, Germany
Telephone: (714) 540-8900 Telephone: (49) 89 431 98 70
Toll Free Number: 1 855 672 7638 Email: [email protected]
Email: [email protected]

Japan Asia-Pacific
MSC Software Japan Ltd. MSC Software (S) Pte. Ltd.
Shinjuku First West 8F 100 Beach Road
23-7 Nishi Shinjuku #16-05 Shaw Tower
1-Chome, Shinjuku-Ku Singapore 189702
Tokyo 160-0023, JAPAN Telephone: 65-6272-0082
Telephone: (81) (3)-6911-1200 Email: [email protected]
Email: [email protected]

Worldwide Web
www.mscsoftware.com

Support
http://www.mscsoftware.com/Contents/Services/Technical-Support/Contact-Technical-Support.aspx

Disclaimer
MSC Software Corporation reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this document
without prior notice.
The concepts, methods, and examples presented in this text are for illustrative and educational purposes only, and are not intended
to be exhaustive or to apply to any particular engineering problem or design. MSC Software Corporation assumes no liability or
responsibility to any person or company for direct or indirect damages resulting from the use of any information contained herein.
User Documentation: Copyright  2020 MSC Software Corporation. Printed in U.S.A. All Rights Reserved.
This notice shall be marked on any reproduction of this documentation, in whole or in part. Any reproduction or distribution of this
document, in whole or in part, without the prior written consent of MSC Software Corporation is prohibited.
This software may contain certain third-party software that is protected by copyright and licensed from MSC Software suppliers.
Additional terms and conditions and/or notices may apply for certain third party software. Such additional third party software terms
and conditions and/or notices may be set forth in documentation and/or at http://www.mscsoftware.com/thirdpartysoftware (or successor
website designated by MSC from time to time).
PCGLSS 8.0, Copyright © 1992-2016, Computational Applications and System Integration Inc. All rights reserved. PCGLSS 8.0 is
licensed from Computational Applications and System Integration Inc.
MSC, Dytran, Marc, MSC Nastran, Patran, the MSC Software corporate logo, e-Xstream, Digimat, and Simulating Reality are
trademarks or registered trademarks of the MSC Software Corporation and/or its subsidiaries in the United States and/or other
countries. Hexagon and the Hexagon logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Hexagon AB and/or its subsidiaries.
NASTRAN is a registered trademark of NASA. FLEXlm and FlexNet Publisher are trademarks or registered trademarks of Flexera
Software. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Use, duplicate, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subjected to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer
Software) and DFARS 227.7202 (Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation), as
applicable.
U.S. Patent 9,361,413
July 24, 2020
NA:V2020SP1:Z:Z:Z:DC-THER-PDF
Documentation Feedback
At MSC Software, we strive to produce the highest quality documentation and welcome your feedback.
If you have comments or suggestions about our documentation, write to us at: documentation-
[email protected].
Please include the following information with your feedback:
 Document name
 Release/Version number
 Chapter/Section name
 Topic title (for Online Help)
 Brief description of the content (for example, incomplete/incorrect information, grammatical
errors, information that requires clarification or more details and so on).
 Your suggestions for correcting/improving documentation
You may also provide your feedback about MSC Software documentation by taking a short 5-minute
survey at: http://msc-documentation.questionpro.com.

Note: The above mentioned e-mail address is only for providing documentation specific
feedback. If you have any technical problems, issues, or queries, please contact Technical
Support.
 Contents
Thermal Analysis User’s Guide

Contents
Preface
List of MSC Nastran Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Training and Internet Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

1 Introduction

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
General Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Example Problem Input Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

2 Thermal Capabilities
Introduction to Thermal Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Conduction Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Conduction Elements Available for Heat Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Surface Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Surface Elements Available for Defining Heat Transfer Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Special Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Key Points Regarding Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Data Available on MAT4 Bulk Data Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Data Available on RADM Bulk Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Key Points Regarding Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Thermal Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Key Points in Requesting Loads from Case Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Available Thermal Loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Convection and Radiation Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Available Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Free Convection Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Main Index
 vi Thermal Analysis User’s Guide

Key Points - Free Convection Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Forced Convection Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Key Points - Forced Convection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Radiation to Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Key Points - Radiation Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Enclosure Radiation Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Temperature Boundary Conditions and Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Available Temperature Boundary Conditions and Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Key Points - Temperature Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Initial Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Steady State Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Transient Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

3 Interface and File Communication

Introduction to Interface and File Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Execution of MSC Nastran . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
NASTRAN Definition(s) (Optional Statement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
File Management Statements (Optional Section). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Executive Control Statements (Required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Case Control Commands (Required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Bulk Data Entries (Required). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Miscellaneous Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Files Generated by MSC Nastran . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Structural Plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
X-Y Plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

4 Method of Solution
Introduction to Solution Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Nonlinear Iteration Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Steady State Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Steady State Analysis Solution Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Convergence Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Iteration Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Iteration Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Transient Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Transient Analysis Solution Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Main Index
 Contents vii

Automatic Time Stepping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Integration and Iteration Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Iteration Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

5 Examples
Steady State and Transient Analysis Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Example 1a - Linear Conduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Demonstrated Principles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Example 1b - Nonlinear Free Convection Relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Demonstrated Principles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Calculating Heat Transfer Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Example 1c - Temperature Dependent Heat Transfer Coefficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Demonstrated Principles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Example 1d - Film Nodes for Free Convection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Demonstrated Principles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Example 1e - Radiation Boundary Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Demonstrated Principles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Example 2a - Nonlinear Internal Heating and Free Convection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Demonstrated Principles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Example 2b - Nonlinear Internal Heating and Control Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Demonstrated Principles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Discussion of Variation 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Results of Variation 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Discussion of Variation 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Results of Variation 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Example 2c - Nonlinear Internal Heating and Film Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Demonstrated Principles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Main Index
 viii Thermal Analysis User’s Guide

Discussion of Variation 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Results for Variation 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Discussion of Variation 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Results of Variation 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Example 3 - Axisymmetric Elements and Boundary Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Demonstrated Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Example 4a - Plate in Radiative Equilibrium, Nondirectional Solar Load with Radiation Boundary Condition . . 154
Demonstrated Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Example 4b - Plate in Radiative Equilibrium, Directional Solar Load with Radiation Boundary Condition . . . . . 159
Demonstrated Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Example 4c - Plate in Radiative Equilibrium, Directional Solar Load, Spectral Surface Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Demonstrated Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Example 5a - Single Cavity Enclosure Radiation with Shadowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Demonstrated Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Example 5b - Single Cavity Enclosure Radiation with an Ambient Element Specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Demonstrated Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Example 5c - Multiple Cavity Enclosure Radiation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Demonstrated Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Example 6 - Forced Convection Tube Flow - Constant Property Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Demonstrated Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Example 7a - Transient Cool Down, Convection Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Demonstrated Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Example 7b - Convection, Time Varying Ambient Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Demonstrated Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Main Index
 Contents ix

Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Example 7c - Time Varying Loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Demonstrated Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Example 7d - Time Varying Heat Transfer Coefficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Demonstrated Principles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Example 7e - Temperature Dependent Free Convection Heat Transfer Coefficient. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Demonstrated Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Example 7f - Phase Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Demonstrated Principles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Results - Variation 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Variation 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Example 8 - Temperature Boundary Conditions in Transient Analyses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Demonstrated Principles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Example 9a - Diurnal Thermal Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Demonstrated Principles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Example 9b - Diurnal Thermal Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Demonstrated Principles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Example 10 - Thermostat Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Demonstrated Principles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Example 11 - Transient Forced Convection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Demonstrated Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Fluid Problems - Consistent Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Example 12 - Thermostat Control with Deadband Applied to a Heat Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Demonstated Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Main Index
 x Thermal Analysis User’s Guide

Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Example - Lumped Heat Capacitance with Thermostat Control of a Volumetric Heat Source . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Example 13 - Cryogenic Heat Shielding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Demonstrated Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Model Geometry - Axisymmetric Analysis with Radiation Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

A Nomenclature
Commonly Used Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

B Executive Control Section

Frequently Used Executive Control Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

C Case Control Commands

Thermal Analysis Case Control Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

D Bulk Data Entries

Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

E View Factor Calculation Methods

Calculation of View Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Fundamentals of View Factor Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Using the VIEW Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Using the VIEW3D Module - 3D Geometries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Using the VIEW3D Module - Axisymmetric Geometries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Miscellaneous View Factor Capabilities (VIEW or VIEW3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490

F Radiation Enclosures
Method of Poljak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Method of Poljak - Radiation Exchange in Matrix Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Transformation from Element Heat Flows to Grid Point Heat Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Example of Element/Grid Transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Two Element Example for Radiant Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497

Main Index
 Contents xi

Resistive Network Approach to the Two Surface Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499

Radiation Enclosure Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Radiation Matrix Formation - General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Radiation Matrix Formation Using MSC Nastran View Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Radiation Matrix Formation Using User-Supplied Exchange Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502

G Radiation Exchange – Real Surface Approximation

Real Surface Approximation and Radiation Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Radiation Exchange Relationship for Diffuse Spectral Surface Behavior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Key Points regarding Spectral Radiation Band Analysis within MSC Nastran . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Input Example - Real Surface Behavior, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Main Index
 xii Thermal Analysis User’s Guide

Main Index
 Preface

Preface


List of MSC Nastran Books

Technical Support

Training and Internet Resources

Main Index
2

List of MSC Nastran Books

A list of some of the MSC Nastran documents is as follows:

Installation and Release Guides

 Installation and Operations Guide
 Release Guide
Reference Guides
 Quick Reference Guide
 DMAP Programmer’s Guide
 Reference Guide
 Utilities Guide
Demonstration Guides
 Linear Analysis
 Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 400)
 Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700)
User’s Guides
 Getting Started
 Linear Static Analysis
 Dynamic Analysis
 Embedded Fatigue
 Embedded Vibration Fatigue
 Thermal Analysis
 Superelements and Modules
 Design Sensitivity and Optimization
 Rotordynamics
 Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 400)
 Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700)
 Aeroelastic Analysis
 User Defined Services
 Non Linear (SOL 600)
 High Performance Computing
 DEMATD

You may find any of these documents from MSC Software at:
http://simcompanion.mscsoftware.com/infocenter/index?page=home
 CHAPTER 3
Preface

Technical Support
For technical support phone numbers and contact information, please visit:
http://www.mscsoftware.com/Contents/Services/Technical-Support/Contact-Technical-Support.aspx
Support Center (http://simcompanion.mscsoftware.com)

The SimCompanion link above gives you access to the wealth of resources for MSC Software products. Here
you will find product and support contact information, product documentations, knowledge base articles,
product error list, knowledge base articles and SimAcademy Webinars. It is a searchable database which
allows you to find articles relevant to your inquiry. Valid MSC customer entitlement and login is required to
access the database and documents. It is a single sign-on that gives you access to product documentation for
complete list of products from MSC Software, allows you to manage your support cases, and participate in
our discussion forums.

Training and Internet Resources

MSC Software (www.mscsoftware.com)

MSC Software corporate site with information on the latest events, products and services for the
CAD/CAE/CAM marketplace.
http://simcompanion.mscsoftware.com

The SimCompanion link above gives you access to the wealth of resources for MSC Software products. Here
you will find product and support contact information, product documentations, knowledge base articles,
product error list, knowledge base articles and SimAcademy Webinars. It is a searchable database which
allows you to find articles relevant to your inquiry. Valid MSC customer entitlement and login is required to
access the database and documents. It is a single sign-on that gives you access to product documentation for
complete list of products from MSC Software, allows you to manage your support cases, and participate in
our discussion forums.
http://www.mscsoftware.com/msc-training

The MSC-Training link above will point you to schedule and description of MSC Seminars. Following
courses are recommended for beginning Nastran users.
NAS101A - Linear Static and Normal Modes Analysis using MSC Nastran

This course serves as an introduction to finite element analysis. It includes discussion of basic features
available in MSC Nastran for solving structural engineering problems. In this course, all finite element
models will be created and edited using a text editor, not a graphical pre-processor. Proper data structure of
the MSC Nastran input file is covered. At the conclusion of seminar, the student will be familiar with
fundamental usage of MSC Nastran.
NAS101B - Advanced Linear Analysis using MSC Nastran

This course is a continuation of NAS101A - Linear Static and Normal Modes Analysis using MSC Nastran.
In this class, you will learn: Theory of buckling analysis and how to perform a buckling analysis About rigid

Main Index
 4 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Training and Internet Resources

elements - MPC, RBAR,RBE2, and RBE3 Modeling with interface element CINTC and connectors
Lamination theory and composite materials MSC Nastran composite theory Failure theories Linear contact
and permanent glued contact Different model checks Modeling tips and tricks
NAS120 - Linear Static Analysis using MSC Nastran and Patran

This seminar introduces basic finite element analysis techniques for linear static, normal modes, and buckling
analysis of structures using MSC Nastran and Patran. MSC Nastran data structure, the element library,
modeling practices, model validation, and guidelines for efficient solutions are discussed and illustrated with
examples and workshops. Patran will be an integral part of the examples and workshops and will be used to
generate and verify illustrative MSC Nastran models, manage analysis submission requests, and visualize
results. This seminar provides the foundation required for intermediate and advanced MSC Nastran
applications.

Main Index
 MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s Guide
Chapter 1: Introduction

Introduction
1

Introduction

Main Index
 6 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Introduction

Introduction
The Thermal Analysis User’s Guide describes the heat transfer-specific material within MSC Nastran required for
performing thermal analyses. This book emphasizes fundamental capabilities, describing them in basic
engineering format, and then detailing the interface to MSC Nastran through the Bulk Data entry
descriptions. A series of examples demonstrates a wide cross section of available features and their application
with complete MSC Nastran input listings.
This user’s guide is not intended to provide an exhaustive treatment of heat transfer or finite element theory.
Rather, it is designed to assist in building, analyzing, and designing basic thermal system models and to
numerically study their thermal performance. Some advanced material is included in the appendices to direct
the most efficient use of the more complicated features.
The information contained here can be augmented with material available in the MSC Nastran Getting Started
Guide, MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide, and the MSC Nastran Reference Manual as well as the MSC Nastran
Handbook for Nonlinear Analysis. These manuals can provide greater depth of coverage regarding finite
element basics, modeling, input file structure, and nonlinear solution techniques.
A complementary product, MSC Patran, is available for performing pre- and post-processing functions for
MSC Nastran Heat Transfer. This engineering graphics package automates the reading of CAD geometry,
automeshing of the finite element mesh, creation and application of the material properties, loads, boundary
conditions, nonlinear solution control, analysis job submittal, results access, and results visualization. This
product and its application are described in MSC Nastran Preference Guide, Volume II - Thermal Analysis.
Starting with Version 68 there have been substantial modifications made to the MSC Nastran heat transfer
capability. Along with many new and flexible features, a break with the past has occurred in terms of non-
upward compatible Bulk Data entries. The primary areas where non-upward compatibilities arise include the
specification of CHBDY surface elements, boundary and initial conditions, available solution sequences, and
temperature boundary conditions.

General Capabilities
 Solution methods:
• Steady state, linear and/or nonlinear (SOL 153).
• Transient, linear and/or nonlinear (SOL 159).
 Heat conduction:
• Temperature-dependent conductivity.
• Temperature-dependent specific heat.
• Anisotropic thermal conductivity.
• Latent heat of phase change.
• Temperature-dependent internal heat generation.
• Weighted temperature gradient dependent internal heat generation.
• Time-dependent internal heat generation.
 Free convection boundaries:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 1 7

• Temperature-dependent heat transfer coefficient.

• Weighted temperature gradient dependent heat transfer coefficient.
• Time-dependent heat transfer coefficient.
• Nonlinear functional forms.
• Weighted film temperatures.
 Forced convection:
• Tube fluid flow field relationships - H(Re,Pr).
• Temperature dependent fluid viscosity, conductivity, and specific heat.
• Time-dependent mass flow rate.
• Temperature-dependent mass flow rate.
• Weighted temperature gradient dependent mass flow rate.
 Radiation to space:
• Temperature-dependent emissivity and absorptivity.
• Wavelength dependent emissivity and absorptivity.
• Time-dependent exchange.
 Radiation enclosures:
• Temperature-dependent emissivity.
• Wavelength-dependent emissivity.
• Diffuse view factor calculations with self and third-body shadowing.
• Adaptive view factor calculations.
• Net view factors.
• User-supplied exchange factors.
• Radiation matrix control.
• Radiation enclosure control.
• Multiple radiation enclosures.
 Applied heat loads:
• Directional heat flux.
• Surface normal heat flux.
• Grid point nodal power.
• Temperature-dependent heat flux.
• Weighted temperature gradient dependent heat flux.
• Time-dependent heat flux.
 Temperature boundary conditions:
• Specified constant temperatures for steady state and transient.

Main Index
 8 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Introduction

• Specified time-varying temperatures for transient.

 Initial conditions:
• Starting temperatures for nonlinear steady state analysis.
• Starting temperatures for all transient analyses.
 Thermal control systems:
• Local, remote, and time-varying control points for free convection heat transfer coefficients.
• Local, remote, and time-varying control points for forced convection mass flow rates.
• Local, remote, and time-varying control points for heat flux loads.
• Local, remote, and time-varying control points for internal heat generation rates.
• Transient nonlinear loading functions.
• Perfect conductor algebraic constraint temperature relationships.
 Output graphical display - basic:
• Heat flows for conduction and boundary surface elements.
• Temperature versus time for grid points.
• Enthalpy versus time for grid points.
• Isothermal contour plots.
 Miscellaneous:
• MSC Nastran DMAP and DMAP Alter capability.
• MSC Nastran restart capability.
• Direct matrix input to conduction and heat capacitance matrices.
• Lumped mass and discrete conductor representations.

Example Problem Input Files

Example problem input files are supplied with delivery. Refer to the MSC.Nastran 2004 Installation and Operations
Guide for the location of these files.

Main Index
 MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s Guide
Chapter 2: Thermal Capabilities

2 Thermal Capabilities


Introduction to Thermal Capabilities

Elements

Material Properties

Thermal Loads

Convection and Radiation Boundary Conditions

Temperature Boundary Conditions and Constraints

Initial Conditions

Main Index
 10 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Introduction to Thermal Capabilities

Introduction to Thermal Capabilities

This chapter covers the following topics:
 Element types and uses.
 Material properties and consistent units.
 Thermal loads and application.
 Convection and radiation boundary conditions.
 Enclosure radiation.
 Temperature boundary conditions and constraints.
 Initial conditions.

Elements
MSC Nastran is an analysis code based on the finite element method. Fundamental to the method is an
element library, available for building discretized numerical models that approximate the structure or system
of interest. Several categories of elements exist to facilitate model generation: conduction elements, surface
elements, and specialty elements.

Conduction Elements
Conduction elements are defined by the configuration generated when geometric grid points are connected
in specific orientations and, for heat transfer, obey Fourier’s Law. These elements can be characterized
geometrically as being either one, two, or three dimensional, or axisymmetric. Besides being associated with
geometry, these elements have the material properties for thermal conductivity, density, and specific heat
associated with them. A typical element definition Bulk Data entry is given below for a 2-D element:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CQUAD4 EID PID G1 G2 G3 G4 THETA or ZOFFS
MCID
T1 T2 T3 T4

Conduction Elements Available for Heat Transfer

The following table presents the conduction elements available for heat transfer. These elements include one-
dimensional elements, shell elements, axisymmetric elements, and solid elements.

1-D 2-D AXIS 3-D

CBAR CQUAD4 CTRIAX6 CHEXA
CBEAM CQUAD8 CPENTA
CBEND CTRIA3 CTETRA

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 11
Thermal Capabilities

1-D 2-D AXIS 3-D

CONROD CTRIA6
CROD
CTUBE

Surface Elements
Wherever a boundary condition is applied to the surface of a conduction element, it must be interfaced with
a surface element. Surface elements provide the geometric connection between the structural conduction
elements and the applied convection, radiation, or heat flux loads. In particular, surfaces that participate in
radiation enclosures derive their cavity identity and their radiation material property pointers from the
surface element Bulk Data description. Similarly, free- and forced-convection Bulk Data entries are identified
through their mating surface element identification numbers.

Surface Elements Available for Defining Heat Transfer Boundaries

The following table presents the surface elements available for convection and radiation boundary conditions
and certain applied heat flux loads.

Element CHBDYE CHBDYG CHBDYP

Surface Types All REV POINT
AREA3 LINE
AREA4 ELCYL
AREA6 FTUBE
AREA8 TUBE

Surface element geometries are associated with surface types. Of the three forms of surface elements, the
CHBDYG and the CHBDYP have their TYPE explicitly defined on their Bulk Data entries. The CHBDYE
deals with the geometry type implicitly by reference to the underlying conduction element. The surface
element Bulk Data entries are given below:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CHBDYG EID TYPE IVIEWF IVIEWB RADMIDF RADMIDB

G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 G8

CHBDYE EID EID2 SIDE IVIEWF IVIEWB RADMIDF RADMIDB

CHBDYP EID PID TYPE IVIEWF IVIEWB G1 G2 GO

RADMIDF RADMIDB GMID CE E1 E2 E3

Main Index
 12 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Material Properties

Special Elements
Several types of special elements are available for added modeling flexibility. Simple resistive components are
represented by CELASi (i = 1, 2, 3, 4) elements. More complicated elements can be introduced into the
system through generalized matrix input in the form of DMI, DMIG, and TF.
Lumped thermal capacitance can be defined with the use of CDAMPi (i = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5) entries.

Key Points Regarding Elements

 All element Bulk Data connection inputs signify that an element connection is performed among
grid points.
 Every element must have a unique element identification number (EID) with respect to all other
elements in the problem. This requirement applies to conduction elements, surface elements, and
specialty elements.
 Element definitions reference Bulk Data property entries that supply supplemental information
about geometry and governing relationships, and subsequently refer to material property entries.

Material Properties
Material properties for heat transfer analysis are supplied on MAT4, MAT5, MATT4, MATT5, RADM, and
RADMT entries. The MAT4, MAT5, and RADM entries provide constant valued material properties, while
their companion entries MATT4, MATT5, and RADMT supply information about temperature-dependent
properties through reference to material tables (TABLEMi (i = 1, 2, 3, 4)). The fields available on the material
entries are described below.

Data Available on MAT4 Bulk Data Entry

The format of the MAT4 Bulk Data entry is:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MAT4 MID K CP r H m HGEN REFENTH
TCH TDELTA QLAT

MSC Nastran Material Properties

The following table describes the fields on the MAT4 Bulk Data entry.

Symbol Property Consistent Units

K(T) Thermal Conductivity* W/m °C
CP(T) Specific Heat* J/kg °C
ρ Density* kg/m3
H(T) Free Convection Heat Transfer Coefficient W/m2 °C

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 13
Thermal Capabilities

Symbol Property Consistent Units

μ (T) Dynamic Viscosity* N sec/m2
HGEN(T) Volumetric Internal Heat Generation W/m3
REFENT Reference Enthalpy J/kg
H
TCH Lower Temperature Limit for Phase Change °C
TDELTA Temperature Range for Phase Change °C
QLAT Latent Heat J/kg
* Thermal conductivity, specific heat, density, and dynamic viscosity cannot currently be time dependent.
Thermal heat flux loads can reference explicit functions of time. Thermal boundary conditions for
convection and radiation utilize control node techniques for specifying time dependent behavior (see
Convection and Radiation Boundary Conditions, 19).

Data Available on RADM Bulk Data Entry

The format of the RADM Bulk Data entry is as follows:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RADM RADMID ABSORP EMIS1 EMIS2 EMIS3 EMIS4 EMIS5 EMIS6
EMIS7 -etc.-

The following table describes the fields for the RADM Bulk Data entry.

Field Description Unit

ABSORP(T) Absorptivity for Directional Heat Flux and Radiation Boundary Nondimensional
Condition (QVECT and RADBC)
EMIS(λ,T) Emissivity for Radiation Boundary Condition and Enclosure Nondimensional
Radiation (RADBC and RADSET)

Key Points Regarding Material Properties

 It is the user’s responsibility to enforce consistent and rational units for material properties as well as
for applied loads, boundary conditions, geometry, and various physical constants.
 Although the surface characteristics for free convection (heat transfer coefficient) and radiation
(emissivity and absorptivity) are not normally considered to be material properties, they are
included in the above entries.
 Temperature dependence of the quantity of interest is ultimately defined on a TABLEMi entry. The
table is connected to the MAT4 through the MATT4 entry. Most material properties are directed
toward a structural element and are referenced by the property entry for the element of interest.

Main Index
 14 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Thermal Loads

Thermal Loads
MSC Nastran makes a clear distinction between loads and boundary conditions. This distinction refers more
to solution sequence methods than with the physical phenomena involved. In general, the specification of
surface flux and internal heat generation are defined as loads. Loads are readily identified from their Bulk
Data entries because they possess a load set identification (SID). This identifier has ramifications regarding
the application of the load via Case Control. Case Control is discussed briefly in Interface and File
Communication, 37, but is introduced here for clarity.
The Case Control Section:
 Selects loads and constraints (temperature boundary condition).
 Requests printing, plotting, and/or punching of input and output data (plot commands are
discussed in the MSC.Nastran Reference Manual and Interface and File Communication, 37 of this guide).
Punch files are generally intermediate files of data saved for use in a subsequent computation. Two
common examples for heat transfer are the punch files of view factors that result from an execution
of the VIEW MODULE, and a punch file of temperatures from a thermal solution to be used in a
subsequent thermal-stress analysis.
 Defines the subcase structure for the analysis.
For the current discussion, consider the selection of loads. In order to activate any of the loads stipulated in
the Bulk Data Section, a load request must be made from the Case Control Section.

Key Points in Requesting Loads from Case Control

 LOAD = SID; where SID is an integer used in steady state analysis (SOL 153) to request application
of the load Bulk Data labeled with the given SID. Only one LOAD command per subcase may be
specified in the Case Control Section.
 DLOAD = SID; used in transient analysis (SOL 159) to request the application of the dynamic load
Bulk Data with the given SID. Only one DLOAD command per subcase may be specified in the
Case Control Section.
 For steady state analysis, any number of loads defined in the Bulk Data may be referenced from a
single Case Control request by specifying all loads of interest to have the same SID.
 For transient analysis, the static load entries are not selected by the Case Control SID; rather, they
reference a TLOADi entry (DAREA field). The SID required for Case Control selection is given on
the TLOADi entry (SID field). The schematic for this process is illustrated below.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 15
Thermal Capabilities

Case Conrol DLOAD =

SID

TLOAD1 SID DAREA DELAY TYPE TID

“LOAD” SID S S1 L1 S2 L2 S3 L3

QVECT or other loading entries can be substituted for “LOAD”

(see , 15)

DELAY SID P1 C1 T1 P2 C2 T2

TABLED1 TID
x1 y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 x4 y4

 Unlike the steady state case where many loads may utilize the same SID, every TLOADi entry must
have a unique SID. To apply multiple loads in a transient analysis, the multiple TLOADi first must
be combined using a DLOAD Bulk Data entry. The SID on the DLOAD Bulk Data entry then
becomes the reference SID on the DLOAD Case Control command.
 Nonlinear transient forcing functions (NOLINi) are requested in Case Control with the
NONLINEAR = SID command. They are only available for transient analysis and cannot be
referenced on the DLOAD Bulk Data entry.

Available Thermal Loads

QVECT Directional heat flux from a distant source.
QVOL Volumetric internal heat generation.
QHBDY Heat flux applied to an area defined by grid points.
QBDY1 Heat flux applied to surface elements.
QBDY2 Heat flux applied to grid points associated with a surface element.

Main Index
 16 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Thermal Loads

QBDY3 Heat flux applied to surface elements with control node capability.
SLOAD Power into a grid or scalar point.
NOLIN Nonlinear transient load as a tabular function.
1
NOLIN Nonlinear transient load as a product of two variables.
2
NOLIN Nonlinear transient load as a positive variable raised to a power.
3
NOLIN Nonlinear transient load as a negative variable raised to a power.
4

A complete description of the capability of each load type may be found in the appropriate Bulk Data entry
description.

Thermal Load Flowchart

The schematic below illustrates the Bulk Data relationship for a directional surface heat flux where
temperature-dependent surface properties are important. Some typical surface loads are QVECT, QHBDY,
QBDY1, QBDY2, and QBDY3. The CONTRLT entry can be used in transient analysis. For loads
application, it is limited to QVOL, QVECT, and QBDY3.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 17
Thermal Capabilities

Main Index
 18 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Thermal Loads

Steady State Transient

Case Control Case Control
LOAD = SID DLOAD = SID

QVECT SID Q0 TSOUR CE E1 E2 E3 CNTRLND

+EID +EID -etc.-

CHBDYG EID TYPE IVIEWF IVIEWB RADMIDF RADMIDB

G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 G8

RADM RADMID ABSORP EMIS1 EMIS2 EMIS3 EMIS4 EMIS5 EMIS6

EMIS7 -etc.-

RADMT RADMID T(A) T( ε 1) T( ε 2) T( ε 3) T( ε 4) T( ε 5) T( ε 6)

T( ε 7) -etc.-

TABLEM2 TIDA X1
x1 y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 -etc.-

TLOAD1 SID EXCITEID DELAY TYPE TID

CONTROL ID SENSOR SFORM CTYPE PL PH PTYPE PZERO

DT DELAY TAUC

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 19
Thermal Capabilities

Convection and Radiation Boundary Conditions

The specification of boundary conditions was introduced in Elements, 10. MSC Nastran treats the application
of radiation and convection as boundary conditions. Unlike flux loads, convection and radiation are therefore
not Case Control selectable. The implications of this are twofold. In transient analysis, the transient load
methodology (see Thermal Loads, 14) is unavailable, and in steady state analysis, the solution sequence
mechanism for load incrementing does not apply. To mitigate these shortcomings, transient control is
introduced into the boundary conditions through the use of the control node. In addition, although the
ability to do load incrementing is lost for these boundary conditions, their inclusion in a comprehensive
tangent matrix significantly enhances both the overall stability and convergence rate.

Available Boundary Conditions

 CONV Free convection
 CONVM Forced convection (fluid “element”)
 RADBC Radiation exchange with space
 RADSET Radiation exchange within an enclosure

Free Convection Application

Free convection heat transfer is available through the CONV Bulk Data entry. In MSC Nastran, free
convection is governed by relationships of the following forms:

 q = H ⋅ ( T – TAMB ) expf ( T – TAMB )

 q = H ⋅ u CNT RL ND ( T – TAMB ) expf ( T – TAMB )

 q = H ( T expf – TAMB expf )

exp f exp f
 q = H ⋅ u CN TR LND ( T – TAMB )

where

H = free convection heat transfer coefficient

T = surface temperature
TAMB = ambient temperature

u CN TR LND = value of the control node (dimensionless)

Main Index
 20 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Convection and Radiation Boundary Conditions

Key Points - Free Convection Application

 Free convection allows thermal communication between a surface and an ambient environment
through a heat transfer coefficient (H) and a surface element (CHBDYi).
 Free convection heat transfer coefficients are supplied on MAT4 Bulk Data entries. The coefficient
can be made temperature dependent by using the MATT4 entry.
 The access temperature for the temperature-dependent coefficient can be varied by specifying the
film node field (FLMND on CONV).
 Time dependence can be introduced into the heat transfer coefficient through the control node
entry (CNTRLND on CONV).
The following schematic illustrates the Bulk Data relationships for temperature- dependent-free convection
and time-dependent-free convection.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 21
Thermal Capabilities

Free Convection - Temperature-Dependent Heat Transfer

Coefficient

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CQUAD4 EID PID G1 G2 G3 G4 Q ZOFFS

CHBDYE EID EID2 SIDE IVIEWF IVIEWB RADMIDF RADMIDB

CONV EID PCONID FLMND CNTRLND TA1 TA2 TA3 TA4

The temperature of the FLMND is the temperature accessed in the

TABLEMi entry

PCONV PCONID MID FORM EXPF

MAT4 MID K CP r H m HGEN REFENTH

TCH TDELTA QLAT

MATT4 MID T(K) T(CP) T(H) T(μ) T(HGEN)

TABLEM2 TID X1
x1 y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 -etc.-

CHBDYE Provides the surface element for convection application through reference to the underlying
conduction element (CQUAD4).
CONV Stipulates the application of free convection and identifies the film node, control node, and
ambient node or nodes.
PCONV Provides supplemental information on the form of the convection relationship to be applied.

Main Index
 22 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Convection and Radiation Boundary Conditions

MAT4 Provides the free convection heat transfer coefficient.

MATT4 Provides for the free convection heat transfer coefficient temperature dependence.
TABLEM Specifies the actual table data for the heat transfer coefficient versus temperature.
2

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 23
Thermal Capabilities

Free Convection - Time-Dependent Heat Transfer Coefficient

Main Index
 24 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Convection and Radiation Boundary Conditions

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CHBDYE EID EID2 SIDE IVIEWF IVIEWB RADMIDF RADMIDB

CQUAD4 EID PID G1 G2 G3 G4 Q ZOFFS

CONV EID PCONID FLMND CNTRLND TA1 TA2 TA3 TA4

PCONV PCONID MID FORM EXPF

MAT4 MID K CP ρ H μ HGEN REFENTH

TCH TDELTA QLAT

Case Control
DLOAD = SID

TLOAD1 SID EXCITEID DELAY TYPE TID

DELAY SID P1 C1 T1 P2 C2 T2

TABLED2 TID X1
x1 y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 -etc.-

TEMPBC SID TYPE TEMP1 GID1 TEMP2 GID2 TEMP3 GID3

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 25
Thermal Capabilities

Forced Convection Application

Streamwise-upwind Petrov-Galerkin Element (SUPG)
Forced convection is available through the CONVM Bulk Data entry. Forced convection in MSC Nastran
is limited to one-dimensional fluid flows. An SUPG element formulation allows for energy transport due to
streamwise advection and diffusion and displays good spatial and temporal accuracy. Heat transfer between
the fluid stream and the surroundings is accounted for through a forced convection heat transfer coefficient
based on locally computed Reynolds and Prandtl numbers. The pertinent heat transfer behavior is listed as
follows:
1. Streamwise energy transport due to advection plus streamwise diffusion
a. FLAG = 0 , no convective flow
b. FLAG = 1 , diffusion and convection transport
2. Heat transfer coefficient to fluid tube wall

a. If FORM = 0, then h = ( coef ⋅ Re E X PR ⋅ Pr E XP P )

hK
b. If FORM = 1, then ------- ( = coef ⋅ Re E X P R ⋅ Pr E X PP )
d
where

DVρ
Re = ------------
μ

Cp μ
Pr = ----------
k

Key Points - Forced Convection

 Controlling Mass Flow Rate. The actual mass flow rate is specified by using a control node for
mass flow, the CNTMDOT field on the CONVM Bulk Data entry. For forced convection, the
control node can supply active or passive/local or remote system mass flow rate control. It is the
user’s responsibility to ensure continuity of mass flow rate from element to element.
 The material properties of interest for determining energy transport and forced convection heat
transfer coefficients are given on the MAT4 Bulk Data entries. Temperature-dependent material
properties are given through the MATT4 statement, and a film node is available for the look-up
temperature. The heat transfer coefficient (H) given on the MAT4 statement is for free convection
ONLY.
 As with all boundary conditions, CONVM can only communicate to the structure through a
surface element. The CHBDYP specification is identified on the CONVM entry as the EID field.

Main Index
 26 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Convection and Radiation Boundary Conditions

 Courant Number for Forced Convection. Time dependence can be introduced into the flow
field mass flow rate through the control node (CNTMDOT on CONVM). Accurate resolution of
the evolving flow field (transient analysis) requires some user control over the Courant number
(CN).

Δt
CN ≡ V ⋅ -----
L

where:

V = Velocity of fluid
Δt = Time step size
L = Element length

For good resolution of transient flow fields, it is recommended that CN ≤ .10. Since the element
length and mass flow rate are specified, this implies that the user must control the time step size. This
may eliminate the use of the automatic time step selection scheme.

Radiation to Space
A radiation boundary condition can be specified with a RADBC Bulk Data entry. This form of radiant
exchange is solely between the surface element and a blackbody space node. The following relationships
apply:

1. If CNTRLND = 0, q = ( σ ⋅ FAMB ) ⋅ ( ε e T e4 – α e T a4m b )

2. If CNTRLND > 0, q = ( σ ⋅ FAMB ⋅ u CNT RL ND ( ε e T e4 – α e T a4m b ) )

Key Points - Radiation Boundary Conditions

 Two PARAMETERS are required for any radiation calculation to be performed:
TABS - Defines the absolute temperature scale.
SIGMA - The Stefan-Boltzmann constant.
PARAMETERS are discussed in Parameters (p. 785) in the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide. For
these Bulk Data Section PARAMETERS, the statement would look like:
PARAM,SIGMA,5.67E-08
PARAM,TABS,273.16
 The emissivity and absorptivity material surface properties are specified on the RADM Bulk Data
entry. They may be constant, temperature-dependent (RADM/RADMT), and/or wavelength band-
dependent (RADM/RADBND).

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 27
Thermal Capabilities

 Wavelength dependence is specified in a piecewise linear curve fashion with discrete break points
defined on a RADBND Bulk Data entry. There can only be one set of break points in any given
analysis, and any RADM definition must have break points that are coincident with those on the
solitary RADBND. The theoretical treatment within MSC Nastran of spectral radiation effects are
discussed in some detail in Radiation Exchange – Real Surface Approximation, 505.
 As with all boundary conditions, RADBC may only be used when it is applied to a surface element
(CHBDYi).
 Time dependence can be introduced into the RADBC in two ways. The Control Node Multiplier
(CNTRLND) can be made to follow a specified time function, and the temperature of the ambient
node (NODAMB) can be a function of time. Each has a unique effect on the overall heat transfer.
 RADBC is the only Bulk Data entry besides QVECT that uses the material’s absorptivity property
in its calculations. For all enclosure radiation calculations, absorptivity is assumed to be equal to
emissivity.

Enclosure Radiation Exchange

Thermal radiation exchange among a group of surface elements is treated as a radiation enclosure. Defining
radiation enclosures and accounting for the subsequent radiation heat transfer can be the most complicated
and computationally expensive thermal calculation. As with the radiation boundary condition, the material
surface properties can be constant, temperature dependent, and/or wavelength dependent. One of the more
troublesome aspects of enclosure exchange is the geometric concept of view factors that relate the relative
levels of radiant exchange between any and all individual surfaces in the enclosure set. A number of options
are available for the calculation of view factors for black or gray diffuse surface character. View Factor Calculation
Methods, 481 describes the basis for enclosure exchange and the view factor calculation methods.
1. Enclosure options:
MSC Nastran is used to calculate the diffuse view factors using one of its two view factor modules.
Once generated, the RADLST/RADMTX punch files can be retained for use in subsequent thermal
runs that utilize the same geometry. Since view factor calculations tend to be lengthy, calculating
them once and then reusing them is the preferable procedure. The INCLUDE Bulk Data entry is
used to identify the view factor files to be used in the subsequent thermal analyses.
View factors or exchange factors can be determined independently outside of MSC Nastran and used
in MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis if the formats are consistent with the RADLST/RADMTX files
that MSC Nastran generates. The RADLST Bulk Data entry defines the type of matrix being used.
2. Calculation process - Radiant enclosure exchange where the view factors exist
a. All conduction element surfaces involved in a radiation enclosure must be identified with
surface elements (CHBDYi). The CHBDYi description of the surface element identifies the
surface material entry (RADM). Multiple (and mutually exclusive) cavities may be defined
within MSC Nastran for modeling convenience, and to minimize the computation time.

Main Index
 28 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Convection and Radiation Boundary Conditions

b. When the RADLST/RADMTX entries are available for the analysis, view factors need not
be calculated. This is true as long as the existing RADLST/RADMTX entries are either
already in the Bulk Data Section or are included in the input file through the Bulk Data
INCLUDE entry. A punch file of view factors may have been generated in a prior run.
c. Including radiant enclosure exchange in an analysis is requested using the RADSET entry.
RADSET identifies those cavities to be considered for enclosure radiation exchange.
d. For an analysis where the view factors exist then, the following Bulk Data entries constitute
the minimum required subset:
CHBDYi
RADLST
RADMTX
RADSET
RADM / RADMT / RADBND
In addition to these entries, include the parameters SIGMA and TABS.
The above process is illustrated in the following schematic.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 29
Thermal Capabilities

Enclosure Radiation with Existing View Factors

Main Index
 30 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Convection and Radiation Boundary Conditions

CHBDYE EID TYPE IVIEWF IVIEWB RADMIDF RADMIDB

G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 G8

RADSET ICAVITY ICAVITY ICAVITY ICAVITY ICAVITY

RADLST ICAVITY MTXTYP +EID

RADMTX ICAVITY INDEX Fi,j Fi+1,j

RADM RADMID ABSORP EMIS1 EMIS2

RADMT RADMID TIDA TIDE1 TIDE2

TABLEM2 TID X1
x1 y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 -etc.-

RADBND NUMBER PLANCK2 LAMBD1 LAMBD2

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 31
Thermal Capabilities

RADSET Selects the radiation cavities to be included in the overall thermal analysis.
RADLST Specifies which elements are to participate in a cavity experiencing radiation exchange.
RADMTX Provides the F ij = A j f ji exchange factors for all the surface elements of a radiation enclosure specified in
the corresponding RADLST.
CHBDYG Identifies the radiation surface geometry and material.
RADM Provides the surface properties for absorptivitiy and emissivity.
RADMT Provides the identification for any surface material properties that are temperature dependent.
TABLEMi Defines a tabular function for use in generating temperature-dependent material properties.
RADBND Provides Planck’s second constant and the wavelength break points used for spectral radiation exchange
analysis. There can only be one RADBND statement in a given analysis, regardless of the number of
cavitities. While this forces every exchange surface to have identical waveband break points, there may be
different RADM/RADMT for potentially every surface.

3. Calculation process - Radiant enclosure exchange where the view factors must be calculated
a. All conduction element surfaces involved in a radiation enclosure must be identified with
surface elements (CHBDYi). The CHBDYi description of the surface element identifies the
surface material entry (RADM) as well as the cavity identification (VIEW). Multiple
cavities may be defined within MSC Nastran for flexible modeling, user convenience, and
eliminating shadowing calculations in determining view factors when groups of elements
see only themselves to the exclusion of other groups of elements.
b. Since no RADLST/RADMTX exists for this problem, they will be calculated. The
calculation of view factors is instigated by including the VIEW Bulk Data entry which is
referenced from the CHBDYi entries. VIEW lumps together those surface elements of a
common cavity identification and provides some guidance regarding how the elements
interact relative to any required shadowing calculations.
c. Only one RADCAV Bulk Data entry exists for each cavity. This entry has an array of
information available on it that is used to control the global aspects of the view factor
calculation for the cavity in question.
d. If the finite difference view factor module (default which may be described as an area
subdivision method) is to be used for the view factor calculation, the entries discussed thus
far are adequate for this part of the calculation. The minimum subset of Bulk Data entries
for this method of view factor calculation is:
For view factor calculation, use
CHBDYi
VIEW
RADCAV
To complete the thermal analysis, use

Main Index
 32 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Convection and Radiation Boundary Conditions

RADSET
RADM / RADMT / RADBND
In addition, include the parameters TABS and SIGMA.
e. If the Gaussian integration view factor calculation (the adaptive method) is desired, the
VIEW3D Bulk Data entry must be included. It too is associated with a cavity ID, and
includes fields which provide calculation control limits. The minimum subset of Bulk Data
entries for this method of view factor calculation is:
For view factor calculation, use
CHBDYi
VIEW
VIEW3D
RADCAV
To complete the thermal analysis, use
RADSET
RADM / RADMT / RADBND
In addition, include the parameters TABS and SIGMA.
View Factor Calculation Methods, 481 describes the calculation of view factors in added detail.
The schematic below illustrates the Bulk Data interrelationship involved in the
determination of view factors and depicts the additional entries required to complete the
thermal analysis.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 33
Thermal Capabilities

Enclosure Radiation - View Factor Calculation Required Input

CHBDYG EID TYPE IVIEWF IVIEWB RADMIDF RADMIDB

G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 G8

RADCAV ICAVITY ELEAMB SHADOW SCALE PRTPCH NFECI RMAX

SET11 SET12 SET21 SET22

VIEW IVIEW ICAVITY SHADE NB NG DISLIN

VIEW3D ICAVITY GITB BIPS CIER ETOL ZTOL WTOL RADCHK

CHBDYG Identifies the radiation surface geometry and material.

VIEW Groups the surface elements into their respective radiation cavities and provides control information for
using the finite difference method when determining view factors (VIEW module). The VIEW Bulk Data
entry also specifies that view factors be calculated.
RADCAV Identifies the characteristics of each radiation cavity and provides control information for using the finite
difference method when determining view factors (VIEW module).
VIEW3D Provides the control quantities involved in using the Gaussian integration adaptive view factor module
(VIEW3D module).

Main Index
 34 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Temperature Boundary Conditions and Constraints

Additional Enclosure Radiation Input Required to Determine the Radiation Exchange Thermal Response
See CHBDYG

RADM RADMID ABSORP EMIS1 EMIS2 EMIS3 EMIS4 EMIS5 EMIS6

EMIS7

RADSET ICAVITY ICAVITY ICAVITY ICAVITY ICAVITY ICAVITY ICAVITY ICAVITY

ICAVITY

RADM Provides the surface properties for absorptivity and emissivity.

RADSET Selects the radiation cavities to be included in the overall thermal analysis.

Temperature Boundary Conditions and Constraints

A temperature boundary condition can be useful in defining independent GRID point or SPOINT
temperature in an analysis. This applies to grid points associated with conduction elements, surface elements,
ambient points, control nodes, or film nodes as well as to scalar points. The methods available for specifying
these temperatures are discussed below. Temperature boundary conditions are treated like loads because they
are selected from the Case Control Section.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 2 35
Thermal Capabilities

Available Temperature Boundary Conditions and Constraints

SPC The single-point constraint is selected in the Case Control Section with SPC = SID. For heat transfer, an
SPC may be used to define a temperature for steady state analysis or transient analysis if the boundary
condition over all time is to remain at a constant value. This is the recommended approach to fixed
temperature specification for both steady state and transient analysis. In the constant value case, these degrees
of freedom are eliminated from the analysis set and therefore cannot influence the iterative convergence
criteria. In steady state analysis, SPCs are subcase selectable. In transient analysis, SPCs must be selected
above the subcase level. When used with SPCD, SPC1 can also be used to specify nonzero temperature
boundary conditions.
TEMPBC This form of boundary temperature specification is more flexible than the SPC definition since it can be used
to define a temperature that varies with time throughout a transient analysis. The basic procedure for
transient specification when the value varies with time is to use the dynamic load process as discussed in the
load section (see Thermal Loads, 14). The SID on the TEMPBC is referenced by a TLOADi Bulk Data entry
(DAREA field). The TLOADi entry must be selected using the Case Control command (DLOAD = SID).
Field 3 for TYPE is specified either as STAT or TRAN as desired. For steady state (STAT type) analysis, the
Case Control command is SPC = SID where the SID is field 2 of the TEMPBC entry.

For transient (type = TRAN) analysis, this boundary specification cannot eliminate the degrees of freedom
from the analysis set. Rather, it internally implements a penalty method for maintaining the desired
temperature value. The fixed matrix conductance term has a set value of 1.0E+10. In some instances, this
magnitude may overwhelm the convergence criteria. In these cases, there is another approach to specified
temperatures that can circumvent the problem (see the following discussion of CELASi).
CELASi These 1-D elements provide a convenient resistive network element that can be used for thermal system
modeling as well as for driving temperature boundary conditions. They may automatically have one end set
to a zero or grounded value. A heat load (QHBDY) applied at the free end can be constant or time varying.
The load and matrix conductance values can be adjusted to minimize the influence over the iterative
convergence criteria.
MPC Otherwise known as a multipoint constraint. This constraint can be used to specify a grid point temperature
to be a weighted combination of any number of other grid point temperatures. An MPC is requested in the
Case Control Section with the MPC = SID command. For transient analysis, an MPC must be requested
above the subcase level.

Key Points - Temperature Boundary Conditions

Key points for temperature boundary conditions are:
 No Bulk Data file may utilize more than one method for temperature specification. For example, an
SPC entry and a TEMPBC entry of the type = STAT cannot exist in the same file.
 Whenever a TEMPBC entry of type = TRAN temperature boundary condition is specified in an
analysis, the CONV field of the solution control entry (TSTEPNL) must be a U specification.
 Temperature initialization (see Initial Conditions, 36) should always be set for all TEMPBC entries of
type = TRAN temperature boundary conditions. Additionally, all temperature initial conditions
must agree with the specified boundary conditions. For the MPC relationship then the initial
temperature specifications must satisfy the given identity.
 In SOL 153, singularities in the stiffness matrix can be constrained automatically by Bulk Data
entry PARAM,AUTOSPC,YES. However, AUTOSPC does not provide the correct action for the
nonlinear stiffness matrix in SOL 159.

Main Index
 36 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Initial Conditions

Initial Conditions
Setting initial temperatures is required in several situations. In steady state analysis, temperatures are usually
required as a starting point for the nonlinear iteration process. In transient analysis, initial temperature
specifications define the state from which the solution evolves.

Steady State Analysis

Since most heat transfer problems are nonlinear due to material properties, variable boundary conditions, or
radiation exchange, iteration is employed in the solution of the system equations. An initial temperature guess
is required to initialize any temperature--dependent properties or boundary conditions. A good initial
estimate can be helpful in achieving a converged solution.

Case Control Required: TEMP(INIT) = SID

Bulk Data Entries: TEMP - Defines starting temperature on specific grid points.
TEMPD - Automatically defines starting temperature on any remaining grid points not
specified with a TEMP entry.

Transient Analysis
Transient analysis, whether linear or nonlinear, employs a starting temperature as the initial condition from
which the solution evolves. These starting temperatures are not, in general, arbitrary temperatures. Any
noninitialized temperatures are presumed to have a value of zero.

Case Control Required: IC = SID.

Bulk Data Entries: TEMP - Defines initial temperature on specific grid points.
TEMPD - Automatically defines initial temperature on any grid points not set with a TEMP
Bulk Data entry.

Main Index
 MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Interface and File Communication

Interface and File

3 Communication


Introduction to Interface and File Communication

Execution of MSC Nastran

Input Data

Files Generated by MSC Nastran

Plotting

Main Index
 38 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Introduction to Interface and File Communication

Introduction to Interface and File Communication

The formalities associated with MSC Nastran inputs and outputs are developed in this chapter. The input is
described in terms of an input data file that may be generated by hand or by a suitable preprocessor. Among
the five separate sections involved in the general input is a complete description of the model, including:
 The type of analysis being performed.
 The problem geometry as modeled.
 The conduction elements that approximate the structure.
 The surface elements that allow the structure to communicate with the boundary conditions.
 The boundary conditions associated with convection and radiation.
 The loads associated with applied fluxes for all load conditions of interest.
 The specification of the known temperatures in the analysis.
 Requests for the desired output quantities along with their format and form.

Execution of MSC Nastran

The MSC Nastran input file is a text file that is given a filename and a .dat extension (e.g., EXAMPLE1.dat).
To execute MSC Nastran, the user types a system command followed by the name of the input file. The .dat
extension is automatically assumed by MSC Nastran if there is no file extension associated with the specified
filename. A typical execution is

NASTRAN EXAMPLE1

Input Data
MSC Nastran input requires records that are 80 characters (or columns) in length. The input file is comprised
of five sections that must be assembled in the following sequence:

Optional
NASTRAN statement

Optional
File Management
statements

Required Section
Executive Control
statements

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 39
Interface and File Communication

CEND Required Delimiter

Required Section
Case Control
commands

BEGIN BULK Required Delimiter

Required Section
Bulk Data
entries

ENDDATA Required Delimiter

Figure 3-1 Structure of the MSC Nastran Input File

The records of the first four sections are input in free-field format, and only columns 1 through 72 are used
for data. Any information in columns 73 through 80 may appear in the printed echo, but is not used by the
program. If the last character in a record is a comma, then the record is continued to the next record.
The Bulk Data entries have special free-field rules, but may be specified as fixed field. Both options are
described in the MSC.Nastran Reference Manual. The Bulk Data entries may also make limited use of columns
73 through 80 for the purpose of continuation.

NASTRAN Definition(s) (Optional Statement)

The NASTRAN definition statement is optional and is used in special circumstances (see the Executing MSC
Nastran (p. 1) in the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide ).

File Management Statements (Optional Section)

The File Management Section is optional and follows the NASTRAN definition(s). It ends with the
specification of an Executive Control statement. This section provides for database initialization and
management along with job identification and restart conditions. The File Management statements are
described in the File Management Statements (p. 41) in the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide.

Main Index
 40 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Input Data

Executive Control Statements (Required)

The Executive Control Section begins with the first Executive Control statement and ends with the CEND
delimiter. It identifies the job and the type of solution to be performed. It also declares the general conditions
under which the job is to be executed, such as maximum time allowed and the type of system diagnostics
desired. If the job is to be executed with a solution sequence, the actual solution sequence is declared along
with any alterations to the solution sequence that may be desired. If Direct Matrix Abstraction is used, the
complete DMAP sequence must appear in the Executive Control Section. The Executive Control statements
and examples of their use are described in the File Management Statements (p. 41) in the MSC Nastran Quick
Reference Guide.

Case Control Commands (Required)

The Case Control Section follows CEND and ends with the BEGIN BULK delimiter. It defines the subcase
structure for the problem, defines sets of Bulk Data, and makes output requests for printing, punching, and
plotting. A general discussion of the functions of the Case Control Section and a detailed description of the
commands used in this section are given in the Case Control Commands (p. 191) in the MSC Nastran Quick
Reference Guide . Those commands used most commonly in thermal analysis are complied in Thermal Analysis
Case Control Commands, 310. Also, the Case Control highlights for heat transfer are given here.

Steady State Heat Transfer - SOL 153

 A separate subcase must be defined for each unique combination of thermal loads (LOAD Case
Control command), temperature constraints (SPC and MPC command), and nonlinear iteration
strategy (NLPARM command).
 The LOAD Case Control command references the static thermal load entries: QVOL, QVECT,
QHBDY, and QBDYi. Each subcase defines a set of loads that can then be subdivided into a
number of increments for the nonlinear solution process (NLPARM Bulk Data entry).
The load step is labeled by the cumulative load factor. The load factor varies from 0 to 1 in each
subcase. Specifically, the load step ends with 1, 2, 3, etc. for the first, the second, and the third
subcase, respectively. The data blocks containing solutions can be generated at each increment or at
the end of each subcase, depending on the intermediate output option specified on the INTOUT
field of the NLPARM Bulk Data entry. Data blocks are stored in the database for the output process
and restarts.
 The SPC Case Control command references the temperature boundary conditions in the SPC Bulk
Data entry. The applied temperature boundary condition is also subdivided in the subcase in an
incremental fashion.
 The MPC Case Control command references the algebraic temperature constraints in the MPC
Bulk Data entry. In heat transfer we can think of MPCs as perfect conductor networks.
 The TEMP(INIT) Case Control command references the initial temperatures that are required for
all nonlinear analyses. An initialized temperature distribution must be defined using TEMP and/or
TEMPD Bulk Data entries.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 41
Interface and File Communication

 Output requests for each subcase are processed independently. Requested output quantities for all
the subcases are appended after the computational process for actual output operation. Available
outputs are as follows:

THERMAL Temperatures for GRID points and SPOINTs.

FLUX Inner element temperature gradients. Heat flows for CHBDYi elements.
OLOAD Applied linear loads.
SPCF Steady state heat of constraint for maintaining specified temperature boundary
conditions.

 MSC Nastran data may be output in either SORT1 or SORT2 formats. SORT1 output provides a
tabular listing of all grid points or elements for each loading condition. SORT2 output is tabular
listings of loading conditions for each grid point or element. SORT1 output is the steady state
default format. SORT2 is generated by requesting XYPLOTS. See Case Control Commands for Output
(p. 25) in the for a discussion of SORT1 and SORT2 formats and their defaults.
 Restarts are controlled by the PARAMeters SUBID and LOOPID. The Case Control command
THERMAL(PUNCH) can be used to generate temperature punch files suitable for restart initial
conditions or thermal stress analysis loads.

Transient Heat Transfer - SOL 159

 Only one set of temperature constraints (via the MPC and SPC Case Control command) may be
requested and must be specified above the subcase level. Any DMIG and/or TF used must also be
selected above the subcase level.
 A subcase must be defined for each unique combination of transient thermal load conditions
(DLOAD command) and nonlinear iteration strategy (TSTEPNL command).
Each subcase defines a time interval starting from the last time step of the previous subcase, and the
time interval requested is subdivided into the appropriate time steps. The data blocks containing
solutions are generated at the end of each subcase to store in the database for output process and
restarts.
 The DLOAD and/or NONLINEAR command must be used to specify time-dependent loading
conditions. The static thermal load entries QVOL, QVECT, QHBDY, and QBDYi may be used in
defining a dynamic load as specified by the TLOADi entry. The set identification number (SID) on
the static load entries is specified in the DAREA field of the TLOADi entry. The TEMPBC (of
TRAN type) Bulk Data entry may be requested in the same fashion.
The input loading functions may be changed for each subcase or continued by repeating the same
DLOAD request. However, it is recommended to use the same TLOADi Bulk Data entry for all
subcases in order to maintain continuity, since the TLOADi entry defines the loading history as a
function of cumulative time.
 Temperature initial conditions are requested above the subcase level with the IC Case Control
command. Initial temperatures are specified on TEMP and/or TEMPD Bulk Data entries.

Main Index
 42 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Input Data

 Output requests for each subcase are processed independently. Requested output quantities for all
the subcases are appended after the computational process for the actual output operation. The
available output is as follows:

ENTHALPY Grid point enthalpies.

THERMAL Grid point temperatures.
FLUX Element gradient and fluxes.
OLOAD Applied linear loads.
SPCF Heat of constraint.
HDOT Enthalpy gradient with respect to time.

 MSC Nastran data may be output in either SORT1 or SORT2 output format. SORT1 output is a
tabular listing of all grid points or elements for each time step in transient analysis. In transient
analysis, SORT1 output is requested by placing a PARAM,CURVPLOT,+1 in the Bulk Data. See
Chapter 3: Interface and File CommunicationCase Control Commands for Output (p. 25) in the for a discussion
of SORT1 and SORT2 formats and their defaults.
SORT2 is the default format for transient analysis.
 Restarts are controlled by the parameters STIME, LOOPID, and SLOOPID. See the MSC Nastran
Handbook for Nonlinear Analysis, Section 9.2.2 for a discussion of restarts for nonlinear transient
analysis. The Case Control command THERMAL(PUNCH) can be used to generate temperature
punch files suitable for restart initial conditions or for thermal stress analysis loads.

Bulk Data Entries (Required)

The Bulk Data Section follows BEGIN BULK and ends with the ENDDATA delimiter. It contains all of the
details of the model and the conditions for the solution. BEGIN BULK and ENDDATA must be present
even though no new Bulk Data is being introduced into the problem or if all of the Bulk Data is coming from
an alternate source, such as user-generated input. The format of the BEGIN BULK entry is in free-field
format. The ENDDATA delimiter must begin in column 1 or column 2. In general, only one model can be
defined in the Bulk Data Section. However, some of the Bulk Data, such as the entries associated with loading
conditions, direct input matrices, and transfer functions, may exist in multiple sets. Only sets selected in the
Case Control Section are used in any particular solution. The Bulk Data entries associated primarily with
thermal analysis are included in Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries (App. D).

Miscellaneous Input
The input file might also include required resident operating system job control language (JCL) statements.
The type and number of JCL statements varies with the particular computer installation.
The input file may be formed by the insertion of other files with the INCLUDE statement. This INCLUDE
statement may be specified in any of the five parts of the input file.
Comments may be inserted in any of the parts of the input file. They are identified by a dollar sign ($) in
column 1. Columns 2 through 72 may contain any desired text.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 43
Interface and File Communication

Files Generated by MSC Nastran

Upon successful execution of an MSC Nastran job, a variety of files are automatically created. These files
have the following filename extensions and descriptions as shown below:

.dat The input file describing the model, the type of solution, the output requests, etc.
Generated with a text editor or preprocessor.
.f06 The main output file containing the printed output such as temperature, temperature
gradients, heat flows, etc.
.f04 A history of the assigned files, disk space usage, and modules used during the analysis.
Useful for debugging.
.log A summary of the command lines options used and the execution links.
.DBALL A database containing the input files, assembled matrices, and solutions. Used for
restarting the job for additional analysis.
.MASTER The file containing the master directory of the files used by the run and the physical
location of the files on the system. This file is also needed for a restart job.
.USRSOU Used only for advanced DMAP applications. This file may be deleted after the run is
finished. It is not needed for restarts.
.USROBJ Used only for advanced DMAP applications. This file may be deleted after the run is
finished. It is not needed for restarts.
.plt Contains the plot information requested with the NASPLT command specified in the
input file.
.pch Contains the punch output as requested in the input file.
.xdb Graphics database used by MSC XL and MSC Aries for postprocessing of the results.
miscellaneous Several scratch files are generated during the analysis which MSC Nastran
scratch files automatically deletes upon completion of the run.

SCR (scratch) Command. If no restarts or database manipulations are planned, then the
MASTER, DBALL, USRSOU, and USROBJ files can be automatically deleted (scratched) upon
completion of the run by adding the statement SCR = YES to the execution command. For example,

NASTRAN EXAMPLE1 SCR=YES

Failure to delete these files may prohibit subsequent reruns of the same input file.
The .dat, .f06, .f04, .log, and .pch files are ASCII files and can be viewed using any text editor. The remaining
files are binary, and as such, cannot be viewed. The binary files are not intended to be used directly; they are
used for additional analysis, such as restarts or postprocessing. If no restarts are planned, you may specify “scr
= yes” when submitting the input file for execution. The .DBALL, .MASTER, .USROBJ, and .USRSOU
files are placed on the scratch directory and are automatically deleted upon completion of the run.
The .USEROBJ and .USRSOU files are intended only for DMAP users and may be deleted after the run is
complete. The .plt file is a binary file that contains the plotting information generated by NASPLT, the MSC
Nastran internal plotting feature. If NASPLT is not used, the .plt file is deleted following the completion of

Main Index
 44 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Plotting

the run. If punch output is specified, the .pch file is retained when the run is complete. The .xdb binary file
is the graphic database used by MSC XL, MSC Aries, and other graphics pre- and postprocessors. It is
requested using PARAM,POST in the Bulk Data Section. (Refer to the description of PARAM,POST in
Parameters (p. 785) in the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide.)

Plotting
MSC Nastran has the ability to generate structural plots or X-Y plots rom batch program executions. Such
plots are requested by placing data commands at the end of the Case Control Section. Plot requests are
separated from the Case Control by the OUTPUT(PLOT), OUTPUT(XYPLOT), or OUTPUT(XYOUT)
commands. Data above this command is not recognized by the plotter.
For virtually any type of plotter hardware, the plotter programs are executed by

NASPLT ‘name.plt’

for a “CALCOMP-like” plot, or by

TEKPLT ‘name.plt’

for a “TEKTRONIX-like” plot. The ‘name.plt’ is the filename of the plot file generated from MSC Nastran.
These programs are delivered with the utility files.
The following discussion is limited to a description of all of the commands required to obtain undeformed
structure, thermal contour, and X-Y plots in thermal analysis.

Structural Plotting
In thermal analysis, structural plotting is applied to display the model geometry (undeformed structure plots)
and the temperature distribution across the model (thermal contour plots). The structural plotting is
requested in the Case Control Section by the plotting commands from an OUTPUT(PLOT) command to
either a BEGIN BULK, OUTPUT(XYPLOT), or OUTPUT(XYOUT) command.

Plot Set Selection. MSC Nastran plots consist of element images. Grid points are identified by the
intersection of the elements. Note that the surface elements CHBDYE, CONV, CONVM, and RADBC
cannot be plotted. The SET command is required to specify sets of elements for plotting. Examples are as
follows:

SET 1 = ALL
SET 2 = BAR, QUAD4, EXCEPT 10, 50 THRU 90 BY 20
SET 3 = 1, 5 THRU 10, 100 THRU 105, 210
SET 4 = ALL EXCEPT HBDY

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 45
Interface and File Communication

In these examples, SET 1 includes all elements, SET 2 includes all CBAR and CQUAD4 elements except
elements 10, 50, 70, and 90, SET 3 includes a subset of elements selected by their ID numbers, and SET 4
includes all elements except CHBDYi surface elements.
Only one set of elements can be selected for a particular plot. To request an undeformed structural plot, the
following two commands are required:

FIND SCALE, ORIGIN j, SET i

PLOT SET i, ORIGIN j

where i identifies one of the sets described in the SET command and j defines an origin for the plot. If j is
equal to i, the program finds the origin automatically and positions the plot in the center of the viewing
window. If some other origin is desired, the ORIGIN command should be used. In particular, the ORIGIN
command should be used if more than ten plot sets are requested.

Parameter Definition Commands

The parameter definition commands are described in the MSC.Nastran Reference Manual. A set of
commonly used commands is as follows:
 PLOTTER = {NAST}
Selects plotter. The default is NAST.
 AXES R, S, T
VIEW γ , β , α

where:
R, S, T = X or MX, Y or MY, Z or MZ (where “M” implies the negative axis)
γ, β, α = three angles of rotation in degrees (Real)

Defines the orientation of the object in relation to the observer. The observer’s coordinate system is
defined as R, S, T, and the basic coordinate system of the object is defined as X, Y, Z. The angular
relationship between the two systems is defined by the three angles α , β , and γ as follows:

Main Index
 46 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Plotting

S
β
α

R Direction of View
(Always in the negative R-direction. The
projection plane is always in, or parallel
to, the S-T plane.)

The two coordinate systems are coincident (i.e., X is coincident with R, etc.) for γ = β = α = 0.
The sequence in which the rotations are taken was arbitrarily chosen as: γ , the rotation about the T-
axis; followed by β , the rotation about the S-axis; followed by α , the rotation about the R-axis.
Normally, α is not used since it does not affect the appearance of the S-T projection, only its
orientation on the page. The default values of the rotations are γ = 34.27°, β = 23.17°, and α =
0.0°, which produce a plot in which unit vectors on the X-, Y-, and Z-axes have equal lengths.
The default view described above may be altered in two ways. The structural axes that coincide with
the R-, S-, T-axes may be interchanged by means of the “AXES R, S, T” command, and the view
angles can be rotated by the “VIEW γ , β , α ” command. The default forms of these commands are

AXES X, Y, Z
VIEW 34.27, 23.17,
0.0

To view the structure from the positive Y-axis, use the commands

AXES Y, Z, X
VIEW 0.0, 0.0, 0.0

that points the Z-axis toward the right and the X-axis upward in the plot, or use

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 47
Interface and File Communication

AXES Y, MX, Z
VIEW 0.0, 0.0, 0.0

that points the X-axis toward the left (in this expression MX means that the minus X-axis coincides
with S) and points the Z-axis upward. Note that the expression

AXES Y, X, Z

provides a mirror image of the structure. In order to avoid a mirror image, the sequence of axes must
obey the right-hand rule.
The structure can be viewed from the position Z-axis by the expression

AXES Z, X, Y
VIEW 0.0, 0.0, 0.0

Other combinations of AXES and VIEW commands produce any desired views of the structure. For
example,

VIEW 45.0, 0.0, 0.0

provides a view midway between the positive X- and Y-axes of the basic coordinate system.

 0.5 
 CSCALE =  ------
-
 cs 

 Controls the spacing of the characters; the default value is 0.5. A value of 1.8 produces good spacing
of output characters. The CSCALE command must immediately precede the PLOTTER selection
command. If a second CSCALE command is used, a second PLOTTER selection command must
also be used.
 PTITLE = {any legitimate character string}
Title to be printed at the top of the plot on the line below the sequence number. The default value
for the text is all blanks.

Undeformed Structural Plots

Requests for undeformed plots take the following general form:  GRID POINTS 
 
PLOT i 1 , i 2 THRU i 3 , i 4 , etc., SET j, ORIGIN k, LABEL  ELEMENTS 
 
The following entries are optional:  BOTH 

Main Index
 48 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Plotting

 i 1 , i 2 THRU i 3 , i 4 , etc. - List of subcases; the default is to plot all subcases.

 GRID POINTS 
 
 LABEL  ELEMENTS  - Label either the grid points and/or the
 
 BOTH 

elements with the ID numbers.

Thermal Contour Plots

Requests for thermal contour plots are similar to requests for undeformed structural plots. All axes, view, and
set commands are the same. The only changes are the addition of one CONTOUR command and one
modification to the PLOT command.
The CONTOUR command specifies that contour data is to be prepared for a subsequent plot command.
For thermal analysis, this command has the form

CONTOUR MAGNIT

where “MAGNIT” is a mnemonic for a “magnitude” data request that satisfies the data processing
requirement for thermal temperature contours. The CONTOUR command should be placed immediately
before the associated PLOT execution command. A THERMAL Case Control command must appear for all
grid points that are specified in the plot set definition of contour plots.
The only change necessary to the PLOT command is the specification of CONTOUR plots. The PLOT
command then appears as:

PLOT CONTOUR, SET i, OUTLINE

The OUTLINE entry (optional) requests that only the outline of all the elements in the specified set be
displayed. If this entry is not specified, all of the elements included in the specified set are displayed.
To plot thermal contours at any time step of a transient analysis, the PLOT command must specify the
desired time or time range. The PLOT command then takes the form

PLOT CONTOUR, TIME t1 , t2 , SET i, OUTLINE

Here the contour plot(s) is created for all parts of the model in SET i and at time steps within the range of
t 1 and t 2 . If only t 1 is specified, the plot is generated at t = t 1 .

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 49
Interface and File Communication

Examples of Structure Plot Requests

The following examples are typical plot packets for thermal analysis. BEGIN BULK or
OUTPUT(XYPLOT) command is shown as a reminder to the user to place the plot request packet properly
in the Case Control Section, i.e., at the end of the Case Control Section or just before any X-Y output
requests.

Example
The following sequence causes an undeformed structural plot to be selected for the entire model, using the
default values for AXES and VIEW.

OUTPUT (PLOT)
SET 1 = ALL
FIND SCALE, ORIGIN 1, SET 1
PLOT SET 1
BEGIN BULK

Example
The following sequence causes temperature contours over the entire model to be plotted using all default
orientation view angles.

OUTPUT (PLOT)
SET 1 = ALL
FIND SCALE, ORIGIN 1, SET 1
CONTOUR MAGNIT
PLOT CONTOUR, SET 1
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)

Example
The following sequence causes three plots to be generated.

Main Index
 50 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Plotting

OUTPUT (PLOT)
SET 1 = ALL
SET 2 = BAR, QUAD4
SET 3 = 14 THRU 44, 100 THRU 147, 210
$FIRST PLOT
FIND SCALE, ORIGIN 1, SET 1
PLOT SET 1, ORIGIN 1
$SECOND PLOT
AXES Z, X, Y
VIEW 0.0, 0.0, 0.0
FIND SCALE, ORIGIN 2, SET 2
PLOT SET 2, ORIGIN 2
$THIRD PLOT
FIND SCALE ORIGIN 3, SET 3
PLOT SET 3, ORIGIN 3, LABEL BOTH
BEGIN BULK

The first plot uses the default values for AXES and VIEW. The second plot uses the indicated overrides. The
third plot uses the same view options as the previous plot, which is the default for multiple plots. It also uses
the option to label both grid points and elements. Note that in all cases the FIND command immediately
precedes the PLOT command and follows any AXES or VIEW commands that are explicitly present. Any
other sequence for these commands results in improperly scaled plots.

Example
The following sequence generates three plots using more spacing of characters.

OUTPUT (PLOT)
CSCALE = 1.8
PLOTTER NAST
SET 1 = ALL
SET 2 = QUAD4
$FIRST PLOT
PTITLE = BASIC MODEL
FIND SCALE, ORIGIN 1, SET 1
PLOT SET 1, ORIGIN 1
$SECOND PLOT
PTITLE = LABEL GRIDS
FIND SCALE, ORIGIN 2, SET 2
PLOT SET 2 LABEL GRIDS
$THIRD PLOT
PTITLE = THERMAL CONTOURS
CONTOUR MAGNIT
PLOT CONTOUR, TIME 5.0, ORIGIN 1, SET 1, OUTLINE
BEGIN BULK

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 51
Interface and File Communication

The first plot is a simple undeformed structural plot of the entire model and has the title “BASIC MODEL”.
The second plot is the same type of plot for all CQUAD4 elements in the model. The plot title is “LABEL
GRIDS”. This plot has its own scale and magnification factor as requested by its unique FIND SCALE
command. The third plot is a contour plot over the entire model for the temperatures at time 5.0. Since this
plot does not have its own FIND SCALE command, the view has the same orientation as does the first plot.
Its title is “THERMAL CONTOURS.”

X-Y Plotting
In transient thermal analysis, X-Y plotting is used to track the temperature-time history or the heat flux/time
history of grid points. It can also be applied in steady state analysis to plot temperature versus a set of grid
points. In addition to the plots, X-Y tabular output may be printed or punched, and a summary of data (e.g.,
maximum and minimum values as well as the locations of these values) may be obtained for any X-Y output.
The X-Y output is requested via a packet in the Case Control Section. This packet includes all of the
commands between either OUTPUT(XYPLOT) or OUTPUT(XYOUT) and either BEGIN BULK or
OUTPUT(PLOT).

X-Y Plotter Terminology

A single set of plotted X-Y pairs is known as a “curve.” Curves are the entities that the user requests to be
plotted. The surface (paper, microfilm frame, etc.) on which one or more curves is plotted is known as a
“frame.” Curves may be plotted on a whole frame, an upper-half frame, or a lower-half frame. Grid lines, tic
marks, axes, and axis labeling may be chosen by the user. The program selects defaults for parameters that
are not selected by the user. Only two commands are required for an X-Y output request. They are
 X-Y output section delimiter - OUTPUT(XYPLOT) or OUTPUT(XYOUT).
 At least one operation command.
The terms OUTPUT(XYPLOT) and OUTPUT(XYOUT) are interchangeable and either form may be used
for any of the X-Y output requests. If the output is limited to printing and/or punching, a plotter selection
command is not required. The operation command(s) is used to request various forms of X-Y output.
If only the required commands are used, the graphic control options assume all the default values. Curves
using default parameters have the following general characteristics:
 Tic marks are drawn on all edges of the frame. Five spaces are provided on each edge of the frame.
 All tic marks are labeled with their values.
 Linear scales are used.
 Scales are selected such that all points fall within the frame.
 The plotter points are connected with straight lines.
 The plotted points are not identified with symbols.
The above characteristics may be modified by inserting any number of parameter definition commands
before the operation command(s). The following is an overview of the parameter definition commands and
the operation commands for thermal analysis. A more complete description is contained in X-Y PLOT
Commands (p. 651) in the .

Main Index
 52 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Plotting

Parameter Definition Commands

The parameter definition commands are described in X-Y Output Command Summary (p. 651) in the . A set of
commonly used commands is listed as follows:
 PLOTTER = {NAST}
Selects plotter. The default is NAST.
 CLEAR
Causes all parameter values except titles (XTITLE, YTITLE, YTTITLE, YBTITLE, TCURVE) to
revert to their default values.
 CSCALE = cs (Real)
See the Parameter Definition Commands Section of Structural Plotting.
 CURVELINESYMBOL = cls (Integer)
Request for points to be connected by lines (cls = 0), identified by symbol |cls| (cls < 0), or both (cls
> 0); default value is 0. The following symbols are available:

Symbol Number Symbol

0 no symbol
1 ¥
2 ²
3 +
4 -
5 Ž
6
7
8
9

If more than one curve per frame is required, the symbol number is incremented by 1 for each curve.
 TCURVE = {any legitimate character string}
Curve title.
 XTITLE = {any legitimate character string}
Title to be used with the x-axis.
 YTITLE = {any legitimate character string}
Title to be used with y-axis. This command pertains only to whole frame curves.
 XMIN = x1 (Real)
XMAX = x2 (Real)

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 53
Interface and File Communication

Specifies the limits of the abscissa of the curve; the default values are chosen to accommodate all
points.
 YMIN = y1 (Real)
YMAX = y2 (Real)
Specifies the limits of the ordinate of the curve; the default values are chosen to accommodate all
points. This command pertains only to whole frame curves.

 YES 
 XGRID =  
 NO 

Request for drawing in the grid lines parallel to the y-axis at locations requested for tic marks; the
default value is NO. This command pertains only to whole frame curves.

 YES 
 YGRID =  
 NO 

Request for drawing in the grid lines parallel to the x-axis at locations requested for tic marks; the
default value is NO. This command pertains only to whole frame curves.

Operation Commands
When a command operation is encountered, one or more frames is generated using the current parameter
specifications. The form of this command as applied in thermal analysis is

Main Index
 54 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Plotting

Operation Curve Type

one or more one only Subcase List Curve Request(s)
(required) (required) (optional) (required)
XYPLOT FLUX i 1, i 2, i 3 ,
XYPRINT OLOAD i 4 , THRU i 5 , “frames”
XYPUNCH SPCF i 6 , etc.
XYPEAK TEMP
XYPAPLOT VELO Default is all
subcases

Note: Continuation commands may not be used until the subcase list section is reached.

Operation
The entries in the operation field have the following meanings:

XYPLOT Generates X-Y plots for the selected plotter.

XYPRINT Generates tabular printer output for the X-Y pairs.
XYPUNCH Generates punched command output for the X-Y pairs. Each command contains the
following information:
x X-Y pair sequence number.
x X-value.
x Y-value.
x Command sequence number.
XYPEAK Output is limited to the printed summary page for each curve. This page contains the
maximum and minimum values of y for the range of x.
XYPAPLOT Generates X-Y plots on the printer. The x-axis moves horizontally along the page and the
y-axis moves vertically along the page. Symbol ‘*’ identifies the points associated with the
first curve of a frame, then for successive curves on a frame the points are designated by
symbols O, A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and H.

Curve Type
Only one type of curve field may appear in a single operation command. However, there is no limit to the
number of such commands. The entries in the curve type field have the following meaning:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 55
Interface and File Communication

Curve Type Meaning

FLUX Element flux output
OLOAD Load
SPCF Single-point force of constraint
TEMP Temperature in the physical set
VELO Enthalpy in the physical set

Subcase List
The subcase list generates output for the subcase numbers that are listed. The subcase list must be in
ascending order. Default is all subcases for which solutions were obtained.

Curve Request(s)
The word “frames” represents a series of curve identifiers of the following general form:

/a1(b1,c1) ,a2(b2,c2),etc./d1(e1,f1) ,d2(e2,f2) ,etc./etc.

The information between slashes (/) specifies curves that are to be drawn on the same frame. The symbol a1
identifies the grid point or element number associated with the first plot on the first frame. The symbol a2
identifies the grid point or element number associated with the second plot on the first frame. The symbols
d1 and d2 identify similar items for plots on the second frame, etc. AII plot requests on one command are
sorted by grid point or element ID to improve the efficiency of the plotting process. Symbols are assigned in
order by grid points or element identification number.
The symbols b1 and b2 are codes for the items to be plotted on the upper half of the first frame, and c1 and
c2 are codes for the items to be plotted on the lower half of the first frame. If any of the symbols b1, c1, b2,
or c2 are missing, the corresponding curve is not generated. If the comma (,) and c1 are absent along with
the comma (,) and c2, full frame plots are prepared on the first frame for the items represented by b1 and
b2. For any single frame, curve identifiers must all be of the whole frame type or all of the half frame type,
i.e., the comma (,) following b1 and b2 must be present for all entries or absent for all entries in a single
frame. The symbols e1, f1, e2, and f2 serve a similar purpose for the second frame, etc. If continuation
commands are needed, the previous command may be terminated with any one of the slashes (/) or commas
(,) in the general format.
Item codes are fully described in Item Codes (p. 1047) in the . For curve types OLOAD, SPCF, TEMP, and
VELO in thermal analysis, use item code T1. For X-Y plots of heat fluxes (curve type FLUX), the item codes
are

Main Index
 56 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Plotting

Element Type Code Item

Conductive Elements 4 x gradient
5 y gradient
6 z gradient
7 x flux
8 y flux
9 z flux
CHBDYi Elements 4 Applied load
5 Free convection
6 Forced convection
7 Radiation
8 Total

Examples of X-Y Output Request Packets

The following examples are applied in transient thermal analysis to display the temperature or heat flux as a
function of time. The BEGIN BULK or OUTPUT(PLOT) command is shown as a reminder to the user to
place the X-Y output request packet properly in the Case Control Section, i.e., at the end of the Case Control
Section or just ahead of any structure plot requests.

Example
The following sequence causes a single whole frame to be plotted for the temperature of grid point 5, using
the default parameter values:

OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
XYPLOT TEMP/5 (T1)
BEGIN BULK

Example
The following sequence causes a single frame (consisting of an upper half frame and a lower half frame) to be
plotted using the default parameter values:

OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
XYPLOT FLUX/70 (7,9) ,80(7,9)
OUTPUT (PLOT)

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 57
Interface and File Communication

Each half frame contains two curves. The x-direction heat fluxes of the CHEXA element number 70 and the
CPENTA element number 80 are plotted on the upper half frame. The z-direction heat fluxes are plotted on
the lower half frame for these two elements.

Example
The following sequence causes three whole frames to be plotted using the default parameter values:

OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
XYPLOT VELO /11(T1),12(T1)
XYPLOT OLOAD/21(T1),22(T1)
XYPLOT SPCF /31(T1),32(T1)
OUTPUT (PLOT)

Each frame contains two curves. The first plot is the enthalpy at grid points 11 and 12. The second plot is
the linear loads applied at grid points 21 and 22. The third plot is the single-point forces of constraint applied
at grid points 31 and 32.

Example
The following sequence causes two whole frame plots to be generated, one for CHBDYi element numbers
10 and 20 and the other for CHBDYi element numbers 30 and 40:

OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
XTITLE = TIME IN SECONDS
YTITLE = FREE CONVECTION AND RADIATION OF THE CHBDYi ELEMENTS
XGRID = YES
YGRID = YES
CURVELINESYMB = 6
XYPLOT FLUX/10(5),10(7) ,20(5) ,20 (7) /30(5) ,30(7) ,40(5) ,40(7)
BEGIN BULK

Each plot contains the free convection and radiation heat flows for two CHBDYi elements. The default
parameters are modified to include titles and grid lines in both the x-direction and y-direction. Distinct
symbols are used for each curve. The first curve is identified by circles ( ), the second curve by squares ( ),
the third curve by diamonds ( ), and the fourth curve by triangles ( ).

Example
The following sequence causes three whole frames to be generated:

Main Index
 58 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Plotting

OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
XTITLE = TIME
YTITLE = TEMPERATURE
XGRID = YES
YGRID = YES
XYPLOT TEMP/1(T1),2(T1),3(T1)
YTITLE = Y-FLUX OF THE QUAD4 ELEMENTS
XYPLOT FLUX/10(8)
YTITLE = FORCED CONVECTION OF THE CHBDYi ELEMENTS
XYPLOT FLUX/31(6), 32(6)
BEGIN BULK

The first plot is the temperatures for grid points 1, 2, and 3. The second plot is the heat flux in the y-direction
for CQUAD4 element number 10. The third plot is the forced convection heat flows for CHBDYi element
numbers 31 and 32. The default parameters are modified to include titles and grid lines in both the x-
direction and y-direction.

X-Y Plots for SORT1 Output

It is often convenient to display the distribution of temperature versus a sequence of grid points. The
identification numbers of the sequence of grid points to be plotted should be listed on a SET1 Bulk Data
entry.
The requests for X-Y plots appear in the Case Control Section in the standard form. For example,

OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
XTITLE = ZAXIS
YTITLE = TEMPERATURE
XGRID = YES
YGRID = YES
CURVELINESYMB = 6
XYPLOT TEMP/99(T1)
BEGIN BULK
.
.
.
PARAM,CURVPLOT,1
PARAM,DOPT,3
SET1,99,1,THRU,10

This example generates an X-Y plot from grid point temperatures. The abscissa of the curve reflects the grid
point IDs listed on the SET1 Bulk Data entry with an SID of 99, and the ordinate reflects the temperatures
at these grid points. In the Bulk Data, PARAM,CURVPLOT,1 suppresses SORT2-type processing and
requests that X-Y plots be made with the abscissas relating to grid point locations. Parameter DOPT controls
the x spacing of these curves. The allowable values of this parameter are shown in the following table:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 3 59
Interface and File Communication

Value of DOPT Scaling for Abscissa

0 (default) gj – gi
1 xj – xi
2 yj – yi
3 zj – zi
4 1

The default for DOPT is the length between grid points, with the first grid point listed on the referenced
SET1 command at the origin. For DOPT values 1, 2, or 3, the spacing between adjacent points on the
abscissa is proportional to one component of the distance between their grid points. DOPT = 4 spaces the
grid points equally along the abscissa.

Main Index
 60 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Plotting

Main Index
 MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s Guide
Chapter 4: Method of Solution

Method of Solution
4
 Introduction to Solution Methods

Nonlinear Iteration Scheme

Steady State Analysis

Transient Analysis

Main Index
 62 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Introduction to Solution Methods

Introduction to Solution Methods

This chapter describes the solution methods of MSC Nastran thermal analysis. Two types of heat transfer
problems, steady state analysis and transient analysis, are solved by MSC Nastran. The solutions of these
analysis types, their respective MSC Nastran solution sequences, and iteration methods are discussed in the
following sections.

Nonlinear Iteration Scheme

MSC Nastran applies a Newton-Raphson iteration scheme to solve thermal (and structural) analysis
problems. In finite element analysis, the general equilibrium equation is

[K]{u} = {F} (4-1)

where:

[ K ] =the conduction matrix (stiffness matrix)

{ u } =the unknown grid point temperature vector to be solved (displacement)
{ F } =the vector of known heat flows (forces)

Applying Newton’s method involves the specification of a correction vector

{ψ} = [K]{u} – {F} (4-2)

and the approximation of the vanished correction vector at the (i + 1)-th iteration, i.e.,
i
{ ψ }i + 1 ≈ { ψ }i + ∂ψ
------- { Δu } i = 0 (4-3)
∂u
where

{ Δu } i = { u i + 1 – u i } (4-4)
is the i-th incremental displacement vector. The above equation can be rewritten as

[ K T ] i { Δu } i = { R } i (4-5)

where:

=the tangential matrix which includes components related to conduction, convection

[ KT ] = ∂ψ advection, and radiation.
-------
∂u

{ R } = – { ψ } =the residual vector

Main Index
 CHAPTER 4 63

At each iteration, the left-hand side matrix [ K T ] i and the right-hand side vector { R } i are computed
based on the temperature vector { u } i . By solving the unknown vector { Δu } i , the displacement vector
at the (i + 1)-th iteration can be calculated from

{ u } i + 1 = { u } i + { Δu } i (4-6)
Since matrix decomposition is time consuming, MSC Nastran does not update the left-hand side matrix at
each iteration. The tangential matrix is updated only when the solution fails to converge or the iteration
efficiency can be improved. However, the residual vector is updated at each iteration.
In concert with Newton’s method, the following options are provided to improve the efficiency of the
iteration:
 Tangential matrix update strategy.
 Line search method.
 Bisection of loads.
 Quasi-Newton (BFGS) updates.
These options are specified on NLPARM (steady state analysis) or TSTEPNL (transient analysis) Bulk Data
entries. In general, if the solution diverges, a line search algorithm, a bisection of loads, and a quasi-Newton
update are implemented in an effort to improve the solution. If the solution still fails to converge with all the
above methods, the tangential stiffness is updated to resume the iteration. The user may refer to the MSC
Nastran Handbook for Nonlinear Analysis for detailed algorithms.

Steady State Analysis

Basic Equations. The steady state heat balance equation is
4
[ K ] { u } + [ ℜ ] { u + T abs } = { P } + { N } (4-7)

where:

[ K ] =a heat conduction matrix

[ ℜ ] =a radiation exchange matrix
{ P } =a vector of applied heat loads that are independent of temperature
{ N } =a vector of nonlinear heat loads that are temperature dependent
{ u } =a vector of grid point temperatures
T abs =the absolute temperature scale adjustment required for radiation heat transfer exchange or
radiation boundary conditions when all other temperatures and units are specified in deg-F or
deg-C.

Main Index
 64 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Steady State Analysis

The components of the applied heat flow vector { P } are associated either with surface heat transfer or with
heat generated inside the volume heat conduction elements. The vector of nonlinear heat flows { N } results
from boundary radiation, surface convection, and temperature-dependent thermal loads.
The equilibrium equation is solved by a Newton iteration scheme where the tangential stiffness matrix is
approximated by
i
 
[ KT ]i ≈ [ K ]i + 4[ ℜ ]i{ ui + T abs }3 –  ∂N
-------  (4-8)
 ∂u 
and the residual vector is

{ R } i = { P } + { N } i – [ K ] i { u } i – [ ℜ ] i { u i + T abs } 4 (4-9)

Steady State Analysis Solution Sequence

In MSC Nastran, steady state thermal analysis is solved by Solution Sequence 153. Since Solution 153 can
be used for both structural (default) and thermal analyses, the user must include the command

ANALYSIS = HEAT

in the Case Control Section of the input data for thermal analysis. The input data file may then appear as:

ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 153
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE
ANALYSIS = HEAT
NLPARM = 10
TEMP(INIT) = 20
.
.
BEGIN BULK
NLPARM,10,....
.
.
TEMP,20,.....
TEMPD,20,....
ENDDATA

Main Index
 CHAPTER 4 65

The NLPARM entry is required to control the incremental and iterative solution processes. For nonlinear
problems, a set of temperatures should be provided for an initial guess. These temperatures are specified on
TEMP and TEMPD Bulk Data entries and are selected by a TEMP(INIT) Case Control command.

Convergence Criteria
The convergence criteria are characterized by the dimensionless error functions and the convergence
tolerances. To ensure accuracy and efficiency, multiple criteria with errors measured about temperatures,
loads, and energy are provided.
1. Temperature error function
Since the error in temperatures is not known, a contraction factor q is introduced to formulate the
temperature error function, which is defined as

ui + 1 – ui Δu i
q = -------------------------------- = ------------------------ (4-10)
ui – ui – 1 Δu i – 1
To avoid fluctuation and ill-conditioning, an averaging scheme is applied to compute the contraction
factor

2 Δu i 1
q i = --- ------------------------ + --- q i – 1 (4-11)
3 Δu i – 1 3

with an initial value q 0 = 0.99. If q is assumed to be constant with a value less than unity, the
absolute error in temperatures can be estimated by

u – ui + 1 ≤ u – ui + n + ui + n – ui + n – 1 + … + ui + 2 – ui + 1

= Δu i ( q n + q n – 1 + … + q )

q
= Δu i -------------
1 – q (4-12)
The temperature error function is formulated by introducing the weighted normalization to the
above equation, i.e.,

 ω j Δu j
q ω ⋅ Δu q j
E u = ------------- ----------------------- = ------------- -------------------------- (4-13)
1–q ω⋅u 1–q
 ωj uj
j

Main Index
 66 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Steady State Analysis

where the weighting function { ω } is defined as the square root of the diagonal terms of the
tangential matrix [ K T ] , i.e.,

ωj = KT (4-14)
jj
2. Load error function
The load error function is defined as

 Rj uj
R⋅u j
E p = -------------------- = ----------------------- (4-15)
P' ⋅ u
 P'j u j
j
with
{ P' } = { P ld } + { ΔP ld } (4-16)

where { P ld } is the applied thermal load at the previous loading step, and { ΔP ld } is the
incremental load.
3. Energy error function
The energy (or work) error function is defined as

 R j Δu j
R ⋅ Δu j
E w = ----------------------- ---------------------------- (4-17)
P' ⋅ u
 P'j u j
j
At every iteration, error functions are computed and printed in the convergence table under the headings
EUI, EPI, and EWI. The convergence test is performed by comparing the error functions with the
convergence tolerances, i.e.,

E u < EPSU ( default = 10 – 3 )

E p < EPSP ( default = 10 – 3 )
E w < EPSW ( default = 10 – 7 )

where EPSU, EPSP, and EPSW are tolerances specified on the NLPARM Bulk Data entry. The solution has
converged if these tests are satisfied. However, only those criteria selected by the user (specified in the CONV
field of the NLPARM entry) are checked for convergence. Note that the tolerances should not be too tight

Main Index
 CHAPTER 4 67

to waste iteration time or too loose to affect accuracy. It is recommended that the default values be used until
better values are found through iteration experience.

Iteration Control
The incremental and iterative solution processes are controlled by the parameters specified on the NLPARM
Bulk Data entry, with the data format and default values described as follows:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
NLPARM ID NINC DT KMETHO KSTEP MAXITER CONV INTOUT
D
NLPARM AUTO 5 25 PW NO +NP1

EPSU EPSP EPSW MAXDIV MAXQN MAXLS FSTRESS LSTOL

+NP1 1.0E-3 1.0E-3 1.0E-7 3 MAXITER 4 0.5 +NP2

MAXBIS MAXR RTOLB

+NP2 5

In thermal analysis, the arc-length method (specified by NLPCI command) is disabled. The DT, FSTRESS,
MAXR, and RTOLB fields are also ignored and should be left blank for heat transfer.
The ID field specifies an integer selected by the Case Control request NLPARM. For each subcase, load and
SPC temperature changes are processed incrementally with a number of equal subdivisions defined by the
NINC value.
The KMETHOD and KSTEP fields specify the tangential matrix update strategy. Three separate options for
KMETHOD may be selected.
 AUTO
The program automatically selects the most efficient strategy based on convergence rates. At each
iteration, the number of steps required to converge as well as the computing time with and without
matrix update are estimated. The tangential matrix is updated if (a) the estimated number of
iterations to converge exceeds MAXITER, (b) the estimated time required for convergence with
current matrix exceeds the estimated time to converge with matrix update, or (c) the solution
diverges. The tangential matrix is also updated on convergence if KSTEP is less than the number of
steps required for convergence with the current matrix.
 SEMI
This option is identical to the AUTO option except that the program updates the tangential matrix
after the first iteration.
 ITER
The program updates the tangential matrix at every KSTEP iteration and on convergence if
KSTEP < MAXITER. However, the tangential matrix is never updated if KSTEP > MAXITER.
Note that the Newton-Raphson method is obtained if KSTEP = 1, and the modified Newton-
Raphson method is selected by setting KSTEP = MAXITER.

Main Index
 68 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Steady State Analysis

The number of iterations for a load increment is limited to MAXITER. If the solution does not converge in
MAXITER iterations, the load increment is bisected and the analysis is repeated. If the load increment cannot
be bisected (i.e., MAXBIS is reached or MAXBIS = 0) and MAXDIV is positive, the best attainable solution
is computed, and the analysis is continued to the next load increment. If MAXDIV is negative, the analysis
is terminated.
The convergence criteria are defined through the test flags in the CONV field and the tolerances in the
EPSU, EPSP, and EPSW fields. The requested criteria (combination of temperature error U, load error P, and
energy error W) are satisfied upon convergence.
The INTOUT controls the output requests for temperatures, heat fluxes, and heat flows. If the option ALL
or YES is selected, the output requests specified in the Case Control Data are processed for every computed
load increment. If the option is NO, the output requests are processed only for the last load step of the
subcase.

The MAXDIV limits the divergence conditions allowed for each iteration. The divergence rate E i is defined
by the ratio of energy errors before and after the iteration, i.e.,

{ Δu i } T { R i }
E i = ----------------------------------------- (4-18)
{ Δu i } T { R i – 1 }
Depending on the divergence rate, the number of diverging iterations NDIV is incremented as follows:

If E i ≥ 1 or E i < – 10 12, then NDIV = NDIV + 2

If – 10 12 < E i < – 1, then NDIV = NDIV + 1

The solution is assumed to diverge when NDIV > |MAXDIV|. If the solution diverges and the load
increment cannot be bisected (i.e., MAXBIS is reached or MAXBIS = 0), the tangential matrix is updated
and the analysis is continued. If the solution diverges again and MAXDIV is positive, the best attainable
solution is computed, and the analysis is continued to the next load increment. If MAXDIV is negative, the
analysis is terminated on the second divergence.
The BFGS update is performed if MAXQN > 0. As many as MAXQN quasi-Newton vectors can be
accumulated. The BFGS update with these QN vectors provides a secant modulus in the search direction. If
MAXQN is reached, the tangential matrix is updated, and the accumulated QN vectors are purged. The
accumulation resumes at the next iteration.
The line search is performed if MAXLS > 0. In the line search, the temperature increment is scaled to
minimize the energy error. The line search is not performed if the absolute value of the relative energy error
is less than the tolerance LSTOL or if the number of line searches reaches MAXLS.
The number of bisections for a load increment is limited to |MAXBIS|. Different actions are taken when the
solution diverges, depending on the sign of MAXBIS. If MAXBIS is positive, the tangential matrix is updated
on the first divergence, and the load is bisected on the second divergence. If MAXBIS is negative, the load is
bisected every time the solution diverges until the limit on bisection is reached. If the solution does not
converge after |MAXBIS| bisections, the analysis is continued or terminated depending on the sign of
MAXDIV.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 4 69

Iteration Output
At each iteration, the related output data is printed under the following heading:

ITERATIO Iteration count i.

N
EUI Relative error in terms of temperatures.
EPI Relative error in terms of loads.
EWI Relative error in terms of energy.
LAMBDA Rate of convergence.
DLMAG Absolute norm of the residual vector ( Rl i ) .
FACTOR Final value of the line search parameter.
E-FIRST Divergence rate, initial error before line search.
E-FINAL Error at the end of line search.
NQNV Number of quasi-Newton vectors appended.
NLS Number of line searches performed during the iteration.
ENIC Expected number of iterations for convergence.
NDV Number of occurrences of probable divergence during the iteration.
MDV Number of occurrences of bisection conditions during the iteration.

The solver also prints diagnostic messages requested by DIAG 50 or 51 in the Executive Control Section.
DIAG 50 only prints subcase status and NLPARM data, while DIAG 51 prints all data at each iteration. In
general, the user should be cautioned against using DIAG 51, because it is used for debugging purposes and
the volume of output is significant. It is recommended that DIAG 51 be used only for small test problems.
The diagnostic output is summarized as follows:
For each entry into NLITER, the following is produced:
 Subcase status data
 NLPARM data
 Core statistics (ICORE, etc.)
 Problem statistics (g-size, etc.)
 File control blocks
 Input file status
 External load increment for subcase: { ΔP ld }
 Initial nonlinear force vector: { F g } . In thermal analysis, { F g } is the heat flow vector associated
with nonlinear conduction, convection (CONV and CONVM), and boundary radiation
(RADBC), i.e.,

Main Index
 70 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Steady State Analysis

{ Fg } = [ Kg ] { ug } – { Ng } – { Ng } – { Ng }
nl CONV CONVM RADBC

 Initial sum of nonlinear forces including follower forces: { F l } . In heat transfer, { F l } is the heat
flow vector associated with nonlinear conduction, convection, radiation, and nonlinear thermal
loads (QBDY3, QVECT, and QVOL), i.e.,

{ F l } = [ K l ] { u l } + [ ℜ l ] ( u l + T abs ) 4 – { N l }
nl

 Initial temperature vector: { ul }

 KFSNL • DELYS: [ K f ] T { Δu s }
s
 Initial residual vector: { Rl }
For each iteration, the following is produced:

 Temperature increment: { Δu l }

 Initial energy: { Δu l } T { R l }
 New temperature vector: { ug }
 Nonlinear force vector: { Fg }
 Sum of nonlinear forces including follower forces: { Fl }
 New temperature vector: { ul }
 New residual vector: { Rl }
 Denominator of EUI
 Denominator of EPI
 Contraction factor: q
 Remaining time
For each quasi-Newton vector set, the following is produced:

 Condition number: λ2
 Quasi-Newton vector: δ
 Quasi-Newton vector: γ

Main Index
 CHAPTER 4 71

1
 Energy error: z = ----------
T
δj γj

For each line search, the following is produced:

 Previous line search factor: αk

 Previous error: Ek
 New line search factor: αk + 1

Recommendations
The following are recommendations, designed to aid the user.
 Initial temperature estimate:
For highly nonlinear problems, the iterative solution is sensitive to the initial temperature guess. It is
recommended to overshoot (i.e., make a high initial guess) the estimated temperature vector in a
radiation-dominated problem.
 Incremental load:
Incremental loading reduces the imbalance of the equilibrium equation caused by applied loads.
The single-point constraints (temperature specified by SPC in the Bulk Data) and the applied loads
(specified by QBDY1, QBDY2, QBDY3, QHBDY, QVECT, and QVOL) can be incremented. If
the solution takes more iterations than the default values of the maximum number of iterations
allowed for convergence (MAXITER), the increment size should be decreased. For linear problems,
no incremental load steps are required.
 Convergence criteria:
At the beginning stages of a new analysis, it is recommended that the defaults be used on all options.
However, the UPW option may be selected to improve the efficiency of convergence. For problems
with poor convergence, the tolerances EPSU, EPSP, and EPSW can be increased within the limits of
reasonable accuracy.

Transient Analysis
Basic Equations. The general equation solved in transient analysis has the form
[ B ] { u· } + [ K ] { u } + { ℜ } { u + T abs } 4 = { P } + { N } (4-19)

To take phase change into consideration, the heat diffusion equation is converted into

{ H· } + [ K ] { u } + [ ℜ ] { u + T abs } 4 = { P } + { N } (4-20)

Main Index
 72 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Transient Analysis

Note: In “” on page 71, H represents enthalpy, not the convection heat transfer coefficient.

where:

The equilibrium equation is solved by Newmark’s method with adaptive time stepping.

[ B ] = a heat capacity matrix

[ K ] = a heat conduction matrix
[ ℜ ] = a radiation exchange matrix
{ P } = a vector of applied heat loads that are constant or functions of time, but not functions of
temperature

{ N } = a vector of nonlinear heat loads that depend on temperature

{ H } = an enthalpy vector

{ H· } = { dH ⁄ dt }
{ u } = a vector of grid point temperature
{ u· } = { du ⁄ dt }
T abs = the absolute temperature scale adjustment required for radiation heat transfer exchange or
radiation boundary conditions when all other temperatures and units are specified in deg-F or
deg-C.

Based on this one-step integration scheme, the time derivative of the nodal temperatures at the (i + 1)-th
iteration of the time step (n + 1) is expressed as

1  i+1  1
{ u· n + 1 } i + 1 = ---------  u n + 1 – u n  +  1 – --- { u· n } (4-21)
θΔt   θ

where

{ u n + 1 } i + 1 = { u n + 1 } i + { Δu n + 1 } i (4-22)

and

--1- = 2 – 2η (4-23)
θ

Main Index
 CHAPTER 4 73

The parameter η is specified on the PARAM,NDAMP Bulk Data entry. When η = 0, ( θ = 0.5), no
numerical damping is requested. In this case, Newmark’s method is equivalent to the Crank-Nicolson
method.
For the Newton-Raphson scheme, the iteration equation is

1-
 -------- i i i i
 θΔt [ n + 1 ] + [ K T n + 1 ]  { Δu n + 1 } = { R n + 1 }
B (4-24)

The left-hand side matrices may be approximated by

1- 1
-------- [ Bn + 1 ]i + [ KT ] i ≈ --------- [ B n ] + [ K T ] (4-25)
θΔt n+1 θΔt n

where [ K T ] is the tangential stiffness matrix evaluated at the previous time step, i.e.,
n

 ∂N n 
[ K T ] ≈ [ K n ] + 4 [ ℜ n ] { u n + T abs } 3 –  ----------  (4-26)
n  ∂u n 
The residual vector is

i i i i i i
+ 1} = { Pn + 1 } + { Nn + 1 } – [ Kn + 1 ] { un + 1 } – [ ℜn + 1 ]  un + 1 + Ta

1
+  --- – 1 ( { P n } + { N n } – [ K n ] { u n } – [ ℜ n ] { u n + T abs
θ  (4-27)

1 i
– --------- ( { H n + 1 } – { H n } )
θΔt
At the first iteration, the initial conditions are
0 0 0 0
{ u n + 1 } = { u n }, [ K n + 1 ] = [ K n ], [ ℜ n + 1 ] = [ ℜ n ], and [ H n + 1 ] = { H n(4-28)
}
Thus, the initial residual vector can be expressed as

1
= { P n + 1 } + { N n + 1 } 0 +  --- – 1 ( { P n } + { N n } )
0
{ Rn + 1 }
θ
(4-29)
1 4
– --- ( [ K n ] { u n } + [ ℜ n ] { u n + T abs } )
θ

Main Index
 74 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Transient Analysis

Transient Analysis Solution Sequence

In MSC Nastran, transient thermal analysis is solved by Solution Sequence 159. Since Solution 159 can be
used for both structural (default) and thermal analyses, the user must include the command

ANALYSIS = HEAT

in the Case Control Section of the input data for thermal analysis. Additionally, the initial conditions
(temperatures) and the time integration (solution time, time step size, convergence criteria) must be specified.
The input data file may then appear as
ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 159
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE
ANALYSIS = HEAT
TSTEPNL = 10
IC = 20
.
.
BEGIN BULK
TSTEPNL,10,....
.
.
TEMP,20,.....
TEMPD,20,....
ENDDATA
The TSTEPNL entry is required to specify the initial time step and the iteration control. Initial temperatures
are specified on TEMP and TEMPD Bulk Data entries and are selected by an “IC” Case Control command.
As the solution progresses, the time steps are adjusted automatically by an adaptive time stepping scheme,
which is described in the following section. It is up to the user to specify a reasonable initial time step size. A
conservative estimate can be determined as follows.
Let:
2
χ
Δt o ≅ --------------- (4-30)
10 ⋅ α
where:

Δt o = initial time step size

Main Index
 CHAPTER 4 75

χ = smallest element dimension in the model

α = largest thermal diffusivity, α = k ⁄ ρC p

and,

k = thermal conductivity,

ρ = density

Cp = specific heat

Automatic Time Stepping

MSC Nastran estimates optimal time stepsize and the stepsize evolves based on the convergence condition.
The time step is doubled ( Δt n + 1 = 2Δt n ) as { Δu n } = { u n – u n – 1 } becomes small, i.e.,

u· n
------------------
- < UTOL ( default = 0.1 ) (4-31)
u· max

where u· max is the maximum value of the norms computed from previous time steps and UTOL is a
tolerance on the temperature increment specified on the TSTEPNL Bulk Data entry.
If the temperature increment exceeds the tolerance, a proper time step size can be predicted from the
following calculation where ω n is the inverse of the characteristic time.

T
{ Δu n } [ K T ] { Δu n } T
{ Δu n } { F n – F n – 1 }
n
ω n = ----------------------------------------------------- ~ --------------------------------------------------------- (4-32)
T T
{ Δu n } { ΔH n } { Δu n } { ΔH n }

In thermal analysis, { F n } is the heat flow vector associated with conduction, convection (CONV and
CONVM), and radiation (RADBC and RADSET), i.e.,
4
= [ K n ] { u n } + [ ℜ n ] { u n + T abs } – { N n } – { Nn } – { Nn } (4-33)
CONV CONVM R
The next time step is adjusted by

Δt n + 1 = f ( r )Δt n (4-34)

where r is a scaling factor defined as

Main Index
 76 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Transient Analysis

1 2π 1
r = --------------------  ------  -------- (4-35)
MSTEP ω n Δt n

with

f = 0.25 for r < 0.5 • RB

f = 0.5 for 0.5 • RB < r < RB
f = 1.0 for RB < r < 2.0
f = 2.0 for 2.0 < r < 3.0/RB
f = 4.0 for r > 3.0/RB
Values of MSTEP and RB are specified on the TSTEPNL Bulk Data. If MSTEP is not specified, the
default value is estimated by the stiffness ratio defined as
T
{ Δu n } { F n – F n – 1 }
λ = --------------------------------------------------------- (4-36)
T
{ Δu n } [ K T ] { Δu n }
n

The default value of MSTEP is determined based on the following criteria:

λ* = λ if λ ≥ 1
(4-37)
λ* = --1- if λ < 1
λ
and

MSTEP = 20 for λ * < 5

MSTEP = 40 for 5 ≤ λ * < 1000 (4-38)

No Adjust for λ * ≥ 1000

The adjusted time step size is limited to the upper and lower bounds, i.e.,

DT DT
MIN  ---------------------- , ------------------ ≤ Δt ≤ MAXR ⋅ DT (4-39)
 2 MAXBIS MAXR

where DT is the user-specified time increment and MAXR and MAXBIS are user-defined entries specified
on the TSTEPNL entry. The time step is set to the limit if it falls outside the bounds.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 4 77

When the time marches to a value close to the last time specified by the user, the adaptive stepping scheme
stops for the current subcase. The termination criterion is
N
Δt N
 Δt n + --------- ≤ DT ⋅ NDT
2
(4-40)
n = 1

where DT ⋅ NDT is the user-specified time duration for the current subcase. The adjusted time step
remains effective across the subcases.

Integration and Iteration Control

The incremental and iterative solution processes are controlled by the parameters specified on the TSTEPNL
Bulk Data entry with the data format and default values described as follows:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TSTEPNL ID NDT DT NO METHOD KSTEP MAXITER CONV
TSTEPNL 1 ADAPT 2 10 PW +TNL1

EPSU EPSP EPSW MAXDIV MAXQN MAXLS FSTRESS

+TNL1 1.0E-2 1.0E-3 1.0E-6 2 10 2 +TNL2

MAXBIS ADJUST MSTEP RB MAXR UTOL RTOLB

+TNL2 5 5 0 0.75 16.0 0.1

In thermal analysis, the options AUTO and TSTEP (specified in METHOD field) are disabled. The
FSTRESS and RTOLB fields are also ignored and should be left blank for heat transfer.
The ID field specifies an integer selected by the Case Control command TSTEPNL. The initial time
increment and the number of time steps are specified by DT and NDT. Since the time increment is adjusted
during the analysis, the actual number of time steps may not be equal to NDT. However, the total time
duration is close to NDT ⋅ DT .
For printing and plotting purposes, data recovery is performed at time steps O, NO, 2 • NO, ..., and the last
converged step. The Case Control command OTIME may also be used to control the output times.
Since both linear and nonlinear problems are solved by the same solution sequence, only the ADAPT option
can be selected in the METHOD field for heat transfer. The ADAPT method automatically adjusts the
incremental time and uses bisection. During the bisection process, the heat capacitance matrix and the
tangential stiffness matrix are updated every KSTEP-th converged bisection solution.
The number of iterations for a time step is limited to MAXITER. If MAXITER is negative, the analysis is
terminated on the second divergence condition during the same time step or when the solution diverges for
five consecutive time steps. If MAXITER is positive, the program computes the best solution and continues

Main Index
 78 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Transient Analysis

the analysis until divergence occurs again. If the solution does not converge in MAXITER iterations, the
process is considered divergent. Either bisection or matrix update is activated when the process diverges.
The convergence criteria are defined through the test flags in the CONV field and the tolerances in the
EPSU, EPSP, and EPSW fields. The requested criteria (combination of temperature error U, load error P, and
work error W) are satisfied upon convergence. Note that at least two iterations are required to check the
temperature convergence criterion.
MAXDIV limits the divergence conditions allowed for each iteration. Depending on the divergence rate, the
number of diverging iteration NDIV is incremented as follows:

NDIV = NDIV + 2 if E 1i ≥ 1 or E 1i < – 10 12

(4-41)
NDIV = NDIV + 1 if – 10 12 < E 1i ≥ –1 or E 2i >1

where:

i =
E1 T
{ Δu i } { R i }
-------------------------------------
{ Δu i } { R i – 1 }
i =
E2 E pi
-------------
-
E pi – 1

The solution is assumed to diverge when NDIV reaches MAXDIV. If the bisection option is used, the time
step is bisected upon divergence. Otherwise, the left-hand side matrices are updated, and the computation
for the current time step is repeated. If NDIV reaches MAXDIV again within the same time step, the analysis
is terminated.
The BFGS update and the line search process are performed in the same way as in steady state analysis.
Nonzero values of MAXQN and MAXLS activate the quasi-Newton update and the line search process,
respectively.
The number of bisections for a load increment is limited to |MAXBIS|. Different actions are taken when the
solution diverges, depending on the sign of MAXBIS. If MAXBIS is positive and the solution does not
converge after MAXBIS bisections, the best solution is computed and the analysis is continued to the next
time step. If MAXBIS is negative and the solution does not converge in |MAXBIS| bisections, the analysis is
terminated.
ADJUST controls the automatic time stepping in the following ways:
1. If ADJUST = 0, the automatic adjustment is deactivated.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 4 79

2. If ADJUST > 0, the time increment is continually adjusted for the first few steps until a good value
of Δt is obtained. After this initial adjustment, the time increment is adjusted every ADJUST-th
time step only.
3. If ADJUST is one order greater than NDT, the automatic adjustment is deactivated after the initial
adjustment.
Parameters MSTEP and RB are used to adjust the time increment. The upper and lower bounds of time step
size are defined with MAXR. If the solution approaches steady state (checked by tolerance UTOL), the time
step size is doubled. Detailed computations involving these parameters are described in the previous section.

Iteration Output
At each iteration or time step, the related output data are printed under the following heading:

TIME Cumulative time for the duration of the analysis.

ITER Iteration count for each time step.
DISP Relative error in terms of temperatures defined as

λi ui – ui – 1
E ui = -------------------------------------- (4-42)
( 1 – λ i )u max

where
u max = max ( u 1 , u 2 , …, u n ) and λ i = E pi ⁄ E pi – 1 .
LOAD Relative error in terms of loads defined as

R i
E pi = ------------------------------------------------- (4-43)
max ( F n , P t )
n

where
 
{ F n } and  P t  are internal heat flows and external applied heat loads, respectively.
 n
In thermal analysis, { F n } is a heat flow vector defined in the Automatic Time Stepping section,
and
 
 P t  is the total heat flow associated with conduction, convection, radiation, and applied
 n  loads, i.e.,

Main Index
 80 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Transient Analysis

 
 P t  = { P n } + { N n } ld – { F n } (4-44)
 n

where { Nn } = { Nn } + { Nn } + { Nn }
ld QBDY3 QVECT QVOL
WORK Relative error in terms of work defined as

{ ui – ui – 1 }T{ R }i
E wi = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ (4-45)
  
max  { u n } T { F n }, { u n } T  P t 
  n 

LAMDBA(I) Rate of convergence λ i ( = E pi ⁄ E pi – 1 ) .

DLMAG Absolute norm of the residual vector ( R ) . The absolute convergence is defined using DLMAG by .
R < 10 – 12
FACTOR Final value of the line search parameter.
E-FIRST Divergence rate, initial error before line search.
E-FINAL Error at the end of line search.
NQNV Number of quasi-Newton vectors appended.
NLS Number of line searches performed during the iteration.
ITR DIV Number of occurrences of divergence detected during the adaptive iteration.
MAT DIV Number of occurrences of bisection conditions during the iteration.
NO. BIS Number of bisections executed for the current time interval.
ADJUST Ratio of time step adjustment relative to DT.

Diagnostic messages are requested by DIAG 50 or 51 in the Executive Control Section. DIAG 50 only prints
subcase status, TSTEPNL data, and iteration summary, while DIAG 51 prints all data at each iteration. In
general, the user should be cautioned against using DIAG 51, because it is used for debugging purposes only
and the volume of output is significant. It is recommended that DIAG 51 be used only for small test
problems. The diagnostic output is summarized as follows:
For each entry into NLTRD2, the following is produced:
 Subcase status data.
 TSTEPNL data.
 Core statistics (ICORE, etc).
 Problem statistics (g-size, etc.).
 File control block.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 4 81

 Input file status.

For each time step, the following is produced:

 NOLINi vector: { Nd }
 External load vector: { Pd }
 Load vector including follower forces and NOLINs: { P td }
 Constant portion of residual vector: { R' d }
 Total internal force: { Fd }
 Initial residual vector: { Rd }
For each iteration, the following is produced:

 Initial energy for line search: { Δu d } T { R d }

 Nonlinear internal force: { F g } , which is

{ Fg } = { Kg } { ug } – { Ng } – { Ng } – { Ng } (4-46)
nl CONV CONVM RADBC

 Temperature vector: { ud }
 Nonlinear internal force: { F d } , which is
nl
4
= [ K d ] { u d } + [ ℜ d ] { u d + T abs } – { N d } – { Nd } – { Nd } (4-47)
nl nl CONV CONVM R

 Total internal force: { F d } , which is

{ Fd } = [ Kd ] { ud } + { Fd } (4-48)
l nl

 NOLINi vector: { Nd }
 Enthalpy vector: { Hd }
 Load vector including follower forces and NOLINs: { P td } , which is

{ P td } = { P d } + { N d } – { F d } (4-49)
ld

where { Nd } = { Nd } + { Nd } + { Nd }
ld QBDY3 QVECT QVOL

Main Index
 82 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Transient Analysis

 Residual vector: { Rd }
 Iteration summary (convergence factors, line search data, etc.)
For each quasi-Newton vector set, the following is produced:
2
 Condition number: λ
 quasi-Newton vector: δ
 quasi-Newton vector: γ
1-
---------
 Energy error: z =
T
δj γj

For each line search; the following is produced:

 Previous line search factor: αk

 Previous error: Ek
 New line search factor: αk + 1
For each converged time step, the following is produced:

 Time derivative of temperature: { u· d }

For each time step adjustment, the following is produced:

 Magnitude of the time derivative of temperature: { u· n }

 Magnitude of the new time derivative of temperature: { u· n + 1 }
T
 General conductance: DENOM1 = { Δu n } [ K T ] { Δu n }
n
T
 General enthalpy: DENOM2 = { Δu n } { ΔH n }
T
 Work: { Δu n } { ΔF n }
 Inverse of Characteristic time: ωn
 Conductance ratio: λ
 Number of steps for the period of dominant frequency: MSTEP
 Controlling ratio for time step adjustment: r

Main Index
 CHAPTER 4 83

Recommendations
The following are recommendations designed to aid the user.
 Time step size
To avoid inaccurate or unstable results, a proper initial time step associated with spatial mesh size is
suggested. The selection criterion is

1 2 ρc p
Δt = --- Δx --------- (4-50)
n k
where Δt is the time step, n is the modification number of the time scale, Δx is the mesh size
(smallest element dimension), ρ is the material density, c p is the specific heat, and k is the thermal
conductivity. A suggested value of n is 10. For highly nonlinear problems, a small step size is
recommended.
 Numerical stability
Numerical stability is controlled by the parameter η (specified on the PARAM,NDAMP Bulk Data
entry). For linear problems,η = 0 (i.e., no numerical damping) is adequate, but for nonlinear
problems a larger value of η may be advisable. Increasing the value of η improves numerical
stability; however, the solution accuracy is reduced. The recommended range of values is from 0.0 to
0.1 (default value is 0.01).
 Initial temperatures and boundary temperatures
The specification of initial temperatures and boundary condition temperatures should be consistent.
For a given point, the initial temperature should be equal to the boundary condition temperature at
t = 0.
 Convergence criteria
At the beginning stages of a new analysis, it is recommended that the defaults be used on all options.
However, the UPW option may be selected to improve the efficiency of convergence. For nonlinear
problems with time-varying boundary conditions, the U option must be selected, because the large
conductance (internally generated) affects the calculations of the PW error functions. For problems
with poor convergence, the tolerances EPSU, EPSP, and EPSW can be increased within the limits of
reasonable accuracy.
 Fixed time step
If a fixed time step is desired, the adaptive time stepping can be deactivated by setting ADJUST = 0
on the TSTEPNL Bulk Data.

Main Index
 84 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Transient Analysis

Main Index
 MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s Guide
Chapter 5: Examples

Examples
5
 Steady State and Transient Analysis Examples

Example 1a - Linear Conduction

Example 1b - Nonlinear Free Convection Relationships

Example 1c - Temperature Dependent Heat Transfer Coefficient

Example 1d - Film Nodes for Free Convection

Example 1e - Radiation Boundary Condition

Example 2a - Nonlinear Internal Heating and Free Convection

Example 2b - Nonlinear Internal Heating and Control Nodes

Example 2c - Nonlinear Internal Heating and Film Nodes

Example 3 - Axisymmetric Elements and Boundary Conditions
 Example 4a - Plate in Radiative Equilibrium, Nondirectional Solar Load with Radiation
Boundary Condition

Example 4b - Plate in Radiative Equilibrium, Directional Solar Load with Radiation Boundary
Condition

Example 4c - Plate in Radiative Equilibrium, Directional Solar Load, Spectral Surface
Behavior

Example 5a - Single Cavity Enclosure Radiation with Shadowing

Example 5b - Single Cavity Enclosure Radiation with an Ambient Element Specification

Example 5c - Multiple Cavity Enclosure Radiation

Main Index
 86 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide


Example 6 - Forced Convection Tube Flow - Constant Property Flow

Example 7a - Transient Cool Down, Convection Boundary

Example 7b - Convection, Time Varying Ambient Temperature

Example 7c - Time Varying Loads

Example 7d - Time Varying Heat Transfer Coefficient
 Example 7e - Temperature Dependent Free Convection Heat Transfer Coefficient

Example 7f - Phase Change

Example 8 - Temperature Boundary Conditions in Transient Analyses
 Example 9a - Diurnal Thermal Cycles

Example 9b - Diurnal Thermal Cycles

Example 10 - Thermostat Control
 Example 11 - Transient Forced Convection

Main Index
 CHAPTER 5 87

Steady State and Transient Analysis Examples

This chapter provides several examples of steady state and transient analysis. In each case, the general
“demonstrated principals” are listed at the beginning, followed by an example discussion and concluding
with a description of results. Where appropriate, plots and notes are provided.

Example 1a - Linear Conduction

Demonstrated Principles
 Specifying Grid Point Geometry
 Defining Element Connectivity
 Describing Material Properties
 Applying the “Load”
 Accessing the Results

Discussion
This simplest of examples demonstrates the organization of the MSC Nastran input data file including the
Executive, Case Control, and Bulk Data Sections for a typical heat transfer analysis. A complete description
of all available input data is available in the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide. The Executive Control Section, 295,
Case Control Commands, 309, and Bulk Data Entries, 343 of this User’s Guide describe the input data most
commonly applied to heat transfer problems.

o CROD elements o
T 1 = 1300 K T 6 = 300 K

1 2 3 4 5 6

o
K = 204.0 W ⁄ m K

A cross section = .007854 m 2

L = 0.5 m

Figure 5-1 Example 1a

The MSC Nastran input file is shown in Listing 5-1.

Main Index
 88 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 1a - Linear Conduction

Listing 5-1 Example 1a Input File

ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 153
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 1a
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
TEMP(INIT) = 20
NLPARM = 100
BEGIN BULK
NLPARM,100
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.1,0.0,0.0
GRID,3,,0.2,0.0,0.0
GRID,4,,0.3,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,0.4,0.0,0.0
GRID,6,,0.5,0.0,0.0
$
CROD,1,5,1,2
CROD,2,5,2,3
CROD,3,5,3,4
CROD,4,5,4,5
CROD,5,5,5,6
PROD,5,15,.0078540
MAT4,15,204.0
$
SPC,10,1,,1300.0
SPC,10,6,,300.0
TEMPD,20,1300.0
$
ENDDATA

Note: S SPC and NLPARM are requested in the Case Control Section.

SPCs are used to set the temperature boundary condition.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 5 89

Results
The abbreviated EX1A.f06 output file is shown in Listing 5-2. A plot of temperature versus distance is shown
in Figure 5-2.

Listing 5-2 Example 1a Results File

EXAMPLE 1A NOVEMBER 2, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 11/ 1/93 PAGE 11

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

T E M P E R A T U R E V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 1.300000E+03 1.100000E+03 9.000000E+02 7.000000E+02 5.000000E+02 3.000000E+02
EXAMPLE 1A NOVEMBER 2, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 11/ 1/93 PAGE 12

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

F O R C E S O F S I N G L E - P O I N T C O N S T R A I N T

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 3.204432E+03 .0 .0 .0 .0 -3.204432E+03
EXAMPLE 1A NOVEMBER 2, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 11/ 1/93 PAGE 13

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

F I N I T E E L E M E N T T E M P E R A T U R E G R A D I E N T S A N D F L U X E S

ELEMENT-ID EL-TYPE X-GRADIENT Y-GRADIENT Z-GRADIENT X-FLUX Y-FLUX Z-FLUX

1 ROD -2.000000E+03 4.080000E+05
2 ROD -2.000000E+03 4.080000E+05
3 ROD -2.000000E+03 4.079999E+05
4 ROD -2.000000E+03 4.080000E+05
5 ROD -2.000000E+03 4.080001E+05

Main Index
 90 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 1b - Nonlinear Free Convection Relationships

Temperature
(°K)
1400
(0.0, 1300.)
1300

1200
(0.1, 1100.)
1100
1000
(0.2, 900.)
900
800
(0.3, 700.)
700
600
(0.4, 500.)
500

400

300 (0.5, 300.)

200
100
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5

Distance (meters)

Figure 5-2 Temperature versus Distance

Example 1b - Nonlinear Free Convection Relationships

Demonstrated Principles
 Surface Elements and Boundary Conditions

Main Index
 CHAPTER 5 91

 Free Convection Forms

 Ambient Nodes

Discussion
We introduce the CHBDY surface element for the purpose of applying free convection boundary conditions
along the length of the rod. The Bulk Data entry CONV defines the convection character and the ambient
grid points. To take advantage of empirical relationships for this type of flow field, a hand calculation is
necessary to acquire the appropriate free convection heat transfer coefficient form. To facilitate this process,
we will assume a fluid film temperature of 800 degrees and use the fluid properties for air at that temperature
in our calculations. In Example 1c - Temperature Dependent Heat Transfer Coefficient, 102 we will account for the
variation of film temperature and corresponding fluid properties along the length of the rod.

o
h AVG = 1.83 W ⁄ m 2 K
o
o T ∞ = 300 K
T 1 = 1300 K

1 2 3 4 5 6

q CONV = h AVG ⋅ ( T – T ∞ ) .25 ⋅ ( T – T ∞ )

Figure 5-3 Example 1b

Calculating Heat Transfer Coefficients

First we must calculate the input coefficients and convert to MSC Nastran format. The symbols used in the
description of the analysis are defined herein.

C p Specific heat

ν Kinematic viscosity

k Thermal conductivity

Pr Prandtl number
Gr Grashof number
Nu Nusselt number
T w Wall temperature

Main Index
 92 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 1b - Nonlinear Free Convection Relationships

T ∞ Ambient temperature

d Diameter

β Volume coefficient of expansion

(For an ideal gas β = ( 1 ⁄ T ) where T is the absolute temperature of the gas)
g Acceleration due to gravity

Assume air properties at 800°K.

o
Cp = 1.098 KJ ⁄ Kg K

ν = .823 × 10 – 4 m 2 ⁄ s
o
k = .058 W ⁄ m K

Pr = .689
gβd 3 ( T w – T ∞ )
Gr = ------------------------------------------
ν2
=
m 1 o
9.80 ----- ⋅ ------------------ ⋅ ( .10 ) 3 m 3 ⋅ 1000 K
s 2 o
800 K
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
–4 m 4
( .823 × 10 ) -------
s2
= 1.8 × 10 6

Gr ⋅ Pr = 1.25 × 10 6
for

and for horizontal cylinders,

10 4 ≤ Gr ⋅ Pr ≤ 10 9
(see J. P. Holman, Heat Transfer)
COEF = .53

m = .25

so

Main Index
 CHAPTER 5 93

hd gβd 3 m
Nu = ------ = COEF  ------------- ⋅ Pr ⋅ ( T – T ∞ )
k  ν2 

or

.25
.53 ( .058 )  9.80 ( 1 ⁄ 800 ) ( .10 ) 3 ( .689 ) 
h = -------------------------  -------------------------------------------------------------------  ( T – T ∞ ) .25
.10 
2

( .823 × 10 – 4 )

Note: The equation for h is nonlinear.

therefore

o
h ≅ 1.83 ( T – T ∞ ) .25 W ⁄ m 2 K

This form may be input on the PCONV and MAT4 Bulk Data entries.
The MSC Nastran input file is shown in Listing 5-3.

Listing 5-3 Example 1b Input Files

Main Index
 94 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 1b - Nonlinear Free Convection Relationships

Listing 5-3 Example 1b Input Files (continued)

ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 153
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 1b
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
TEMP(INIT) = 20
NLPARM = 100
BEGIN BULK
NLPARM,100
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.1,0.0,0.0
GRID,3,,0.2,0.0,0.0
GRID,4,,0.3,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,0.4,0.0,0.0
GRID,6,,0.5,0.0,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CROD,1,5,1,2
CROD,2,5,2,3
CROD,3,5,3,4
CROD,4,5,4,5
CROD,5,5,5,6
PROD,5,15,.0078540
MAT4,15,204.0,,,1.83
$
CHBDYP,10,25,LINE,,,1,2,,+CHP10
+CHP10,,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
CHBDYP,20,25,LINE,,,2,3,,+CHP20
+CHP20,,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
CHBDYP,30,25,LINE,,,3,4,,+CHP30

Main Index
 CHAPTER 5 95

Listing 5-3 Example 1b Input Files (continued)

+CHP30,,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
CHBDYP,40,25,LINE,,,4,5,,+CHP40
+CHP40,,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
CHBDYP,50,25,LINE,,,5,6,,+CHP50
+CHP50,,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
PHBDY,25,.3141593
$
CONV,10,35,,,99,99
CONV,20,35,,,99,99
CONV,30,35,,,99,99
CONV,40,35,,,99,99
CONV,50,35,,,99,99
PCONV,35,15,0,0.25
$
SPC,10,1,,1300.0
SPC,10,99,,300.0
TEMPD,20,1300.0
$
ENDDATA

Note: COEF is given on the MAT4 entry.

Exponent is given on the PCONV entry.

Main Index
 96 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 1b - Nonlinear Free Convection Relationships

Listing 5-4

ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 153
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 1b
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
TEMP(INIT) = 20
NLPARM = 100
BEGIN BULK
NLPARM,100
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.1,0.0,0.0
GRID,3,,0.2,0.0,0.0
GRID,4,,0.3,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,0.4,0.0,0.0
GRID,6,,0.5,0.0,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CROD,1,5,1,2
CROD,2,5,2,3
CROD,3,5,3,4
CROD,4,5,4,5
CROD,5,5,5,6
PROD,5,15,.0078540
MAT4,15,204.0,,,1.83
$
CHBDYP,10,25,LINE,,,1,2,,+CHP10
+CHP10,,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
CHBDYP,20,25,LINE,,,2,3,,+CHP20
+CHP20,,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
CHBDYP,30,25,LINE,,,3,4,,+CHP30
+CHP30,,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
CHBDYP,40,25,LINE,,,4,5,,+CHP40
+CHP40,,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0

Main Index
 CHAPTER 5 97

Results
The abbreviated EX1B.f06 output file is shown in Listing 5-5. Because this analysis is nonlinear, note the
existence of numerical iteration until satifsfactory values of EPSP and EPSW (NLPARM entry defaults) have
been attained. A plot of temperature versus distance is shown in Figure 5-4.

Main Index
 98 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 1b - Nonlinear Free Convection Relationships

Main Index
 CHAPTER 5 99

Listing 5-5 Example 1b Results File

N O N - L I N E A R I T E R A T I O N M O D U L E O U T P U T
STIFFNESS UPDATE TIME .49 SECONDS SUBCASE 1
ITERATION TIME .01 SECONDS LOAD FACTOR 1.000
- - - CONVERGENCE FACTORS - - - - - - LINE SEARCH DATA - - -
ITERATION EUI EPI EWI LAMBDA DLMAG FACTOR E-FIRST E-FINAL NQNV NLS ENIC
NDV MDV
1 1.0228E-13 9.7786E-02 9.9926E-17 1.0000E-01 2.9097E+02 1.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0 0 0
1
2 1.6730E+01 1.9848E-02 3.6841E-03 1.5149E-01 6.5130E+01 1.0000E+00 -2.4629E-01 -2.4629E-01 0 0
0 1
3 2.7737E-02 1.3951E-04 3.4216E-06 7.9258E-02 4.3181E-01 1.0000E+00 4.7254E-03 4.7254E-03 1 0 0
0 1
4 2.9687E-05 3.3073E-06 4.8656E-10 5.1482E-02 1.0361E-02 1.0000E+00 -6.0088E-03 -6.0088E-03 2 0 -1
0 1
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 6186,
*** SOLUTION HAS CONVERGED ***
SUBID 1 LOADINC 1 LOOPID 1 LOAD STEP 1.000 LOAD FACTOR 1.00000
^^^ DMAP INFORMATION MESSAGE 9005 (NLSCSH) - THE SOLUTION FOR LOOPID= 1 IS SAVED FOR RESTART
EXAMPLE 1B NOVEMBER 2, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 11/ 1/93 PAGE 10

EXAMPLE 1B NOVEMBER 2, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 11/ 1/93 PAGE 11

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

T E M P E R A T U R E V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 1.300000E+03 1.225588E+03 1.169515E+03 1.130402E+03 1.107303E+03 1.099665E+03
99 S 3.000000E+02
EXAMPLE 1B NOVEMBER 2, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 11/ 1/93 PAGE 12

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

L O A D V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 1B NOVEMBER 2, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 11/ 1/93 PAGE 13

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

F O R C E S O F S I N G L E - P O I N T C O N S T R A I N T

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 1.352363E+03 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0
99 S -1.352382E+03
EXAMPLE 1B NOVEMBER 2, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 11/ 1/93 PAGE 14

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

Main Index
 100 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 1b - Nonlinear Free Convection Relationships

Listing 5-5 Example 1b Results File

H E A T F L O W I N T O H B D Y E L E M E N T S (CHBDY)

ELEMENT-ID APPLIED-LOAD FREE-CONVECTION FORCED-CONVECTION RADIATION TOTAL

10 0.000000E+00 -3.083314E+02 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -3.083314E+02
20 0.000000E+00 -2.824394E+02 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -2.824394E+02
30 0.000000E+00 -2.638446E+02 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -2.638446E+02
40 0.000000E+00 -2.518305E+02 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -2.518305E+02
50 0.000000E+00 -2.459362E+02 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -2.459362E+02
EXAMPLE 1B NOVEMBER 2, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 11/ 1/93

PAGE 15

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

F I N I T E E L E M E N T T E M P E R A T U R E G R A D I E N T S A N D F L U X E S

ELEMENT-ID EL-TYPE X-GRADIENT Y-GRADIENT Z-GRADIENT X-FLUX Y-FLUX Z-FLUX

1 ROD -7.441187E+02 1.518002E+05
2 ROD -5.607344E+02 1.143898E+05
3 ROD -3.911244E+02 7.978937E+04
4 ROD -2.309877E+02 4.712150E+04
5 ROD -7.638958E+01 1.558347E+04

Main Index
 CHAPTER 5 101

Temperature
(°K)

1400

(0.0, 1300.)
1300

(0.1, 1226.)

1200 (0.2, 1170.)

(0.3, 1130.)
(0.4, 1107.)
1100
(0.5, 1100.)

1000

900

800
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
Distance (meters)

Figure 5-4 Temperature versus Distance - Example 1b

Main Index
 102 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 1c - Temperature Dependent Heat Transfer Coefficient

Example 1c - Temperature Dependent Heat Transfer

Coefficient

Demonstrated Principles
 Temperature dependent free convection heat transfer coefficient
 Film node

Discussion
This problem introduces the generalized method for representation of temperature dependent properties
(MATT4,TABLEMi). In this case we wish to account for the fluid film temperature variation along the
length of our rod and consider its effect on the local heat transfer coefficient. By default, the look-up
temperature of the film node is the average temperature of the CHBDY surface and the ambient points. This
temperature varies along the length of the rod.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 5 103

2.5
(400., 2.27)
(600., 2.03)
2.0 (800., 1.83)
h(T)

W 
 -----------------
- 1.5
 2 o 
m K

1.0

400 600 800

o
T ( K)

h(T)
o
T ∞ = 300 K
o
T 1 = 1300 K

1 2 3 4 5 6

q CONV = h ( T ) ⋅ ( T – T ∞ ) .25 ⋅ ( T – T ∞ )

Figure 5-5 Example 1c

Main Index
 104 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 1c - Temperature Dependent Heat Transfer Coefficient

The MSC Nastran input file is shown in Listing 5-6.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 5 105

Listing 5-6 Example 1c Input File

ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 153
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 1c
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
TEMP(INIT) = 20
NLPARM = 100
BEGIN BULK
NLPARM,100
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.1,0.0,0.0
GRID,3,,0.2,0.0,0.0
GRID,4,,0.3,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,0.4,0.0,0.0
GRID,6,,0.5,0.0,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CROD,1,5,1,2
CROD,2,5,2,3
CROD,3,5,3,4
CROD,4,5,4,5
CROD,5,5,5,6
PROD,5,15,.0078540
MAT4,15,204.0,,,1.0
MATT4,15,,,,40
TABLEM2,40,0.0,,,,,,,+TBM
+TBM,400.0,2.27,600.0,2.03,800.0,1.83,ENDT
$
CHBDYP,10,25,LINE,,,1,2,,+CHP10
+CHP10,,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0

Main Index
 106 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 1c - Temperature Dependent Heat Transfer Coefficient

Listing 5-6 Example 1c Input File (continued)

CHBDYP,20,25,LINE,,,2,3,,+CHP20
+CHP20,,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
CHBDYP,30,25,LINE,,,3,4,,+CHP30
+CHP30,,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
CHBDYP,40,25,LINE,,,4,5,,+CHP40
+CHP40,,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
CHBDYP,50,25,LINE,,,5,6,,+CHP50
+CHP50,,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
PHBDY,25,.3141593
CONV,10,35,,,99,99
CONV,20,35,,,99,99
CONV,30,35,,,99,99
CONV,40,35,,,99,99
CONV,50,35,,,99,99
PCONV,35,15,0,0.25
$
SPC,10,1,,1300.0
SPC,10,99,,300.0
TEMPD,20,1300.0
$
ENDDATA

Note: MAT4/MATT4/TABLEM2 supply the temperature dependence of the heat transfer

coefficient.

Results
The abbreviated EX1C.f06 output file is shown in Listing 5-7. A plot of temperature versus distance is shown
in Figure 5-6.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 5 107

Listing 5-7 Example 1c Results File

EXAMPLE 1C NOVEMBER 2, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 11/ 1/93 PAGE 11

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

T E M P E R A T U R E V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 1.300000E+03 1.223213E+03 1.165064E+03 1.124369E+03 1.100287E+03 1.092315E+03
99 S 3.000000E+02
EXAMPLE 1C NOVEMBER 2, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 11/ 1/93 PAGE 12

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

L O A D V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 1C NOVEMBER 2, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 11/ 1/93 PAGE 13

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

F O R C E S O F S I N G L E - P O I N T C O N S T R A I N T

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 1.392052E+03 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0
99 S -1.392069E+03
EXAMPLE 1C NOVEMBER 2, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 11/ 1/93 PAGE 14

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

H E A T F L O W I N T O H B D Y E L E M E N T S (CHBDY)

ELEMENT-ID APPLIED-LOAD FREE-CONVECTION FORCED-CONVECTION RADIATION TOTAL

10 0.000000E+00 -3.110855E+02 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -3.110855E+02
20 0.000000E+00 -2.892279E+02 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -2.892279E+02
30 0.000000E+00 -2.729202E+02 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -2.729202E+02
40 0.000000E+00 -2.621092E+02 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -2.621092E+02
50 0.000000E+00 -2.567259E+02 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -2.567259E+02
EXAMPLE 1C NOVEMBER 2, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 11/ 1/93 PAGE 15

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

F I N I T E E L E M E N T T E M P E R A T U R E G R A D I E N T S A N D F L U X E S

ELEMENT-ID EL-TYPE X-GRADIENT Y-GRADIENT Z-GRADIENT X-FLUX Y-FLUX Z-FLUX

1 ROD -7.678735E+02 1.566462E+05
2 ROD -5.814849E+02 1.186229E+05
3 ROD -4.069491E+02 8.301761E+04
4 ROD -2.408249E+02 4.912827E+04
5 ROD -7.971770E+01 1.626241E+04

Main Index
 108 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 1c - Temperature Dependent Heat Transfer Coefficient

Temperature
(°K)
1400

(0.0, 1300.)
1300

(0.1, 1223.)

1200 (0.2, 1165.)

(0.3, 1124.)
(0.4, 1100.)
1100
(0.5, 1092.)

1000

900

800
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5

Distance (meters)

Figure 5-6 Temperature versus Distance - Example 1c

Main Index
 CHAPTER 5 109

Example 1d - Film Nodes for Free Convection

Demonstrated Principles
 Film nodes
 MPCs

Discussion
In the spirit of the previous example, we allow the free convection heat transfer coefficient to be temperature
dependent; however, we extend the notion of the film node to provide a film temperature look-up value more
heavily weighted toward the local surface temperatures than the ambient temperature. The MPC (multipoint
constraint) relationship is available for this purpose. In this example, the film node temperatures become the
average of the two CHBDY surface grid points each with a weight of 1.0, and the ambient temperature is
also given a weighting of 1.0. Note that the default film node has a temperature which is the average of the
average of the surface temperature and ambient point temperatures.
For example, consider the first CHBDY element:
Default calculation (see Listing 5-6):

T∞ + T∞
 T1 + T2 1 2
T FilmNode =  -------------------- + --------------------------- ⁄ 2
 2 2 
T 1 + T 2 + 2T ∞
= --------------------------------------
4
MPC calculation:

T1 + T2 + T∞
T Film Node = -----------------------------------
3
The MSC Nastran input file is shown in Listing 5-8.

Main Index
 110 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 1d - Film Nodes for Free Convection

Main Index
 CHAPTER 5 111

Listing 5-8 Example 1d Input File

ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 153
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 1d
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
TEMP(INIT) = 20
MPC = 30
NLPARM = 100
BEGIN BULK
NLPARM,100
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.1,0.0,0.0
GRID,3,,0.2,0.0,0.0
GRID,4,,0.3,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,0.4,0.0,0.0
GRID,6,,0.5,0.0,0.0
GRID,91,,91.0,91.0,91.0
GRID,92,,92.0,92.0,92.0
GRID,93,,93.0,93.0,93.0
GRID,94,,94.0,94.0,94.0
GRID,95,,95.0,95.0,95.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CROD,1,5,1,2
CROD,2,5,2,3
CROD,3,5,3,4
CROD,4,5,4,5
CROD,5,5,5,6
PROD,5,15,.0078540
MAT4,15,204.0,,,1.0
MATT4,15,,,,40
TABLEM2,40,0.0,,,,,,,+TBM
+TBM,400.0,2.27,600.0,2.03,800.0,1.83,ENDT
$
CHBDYP,10,25,LINE,,,1,2,,+CHP10
+CHP10,,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
CHBDYP,20,25,LINE,,,2,3,,+CHP20
+CHP20,,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
CHBDYP,30,25,LINE,,,3,4,,+CHP30
+CHP30,,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
CHBDYP,40,25,LINE,,,4,5,,+CHP40
+CHP40,,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
CHBDYP,50,25,LINE,,,5,6,,+CHP50
+CHP50,,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
PHBDY,25,.3141593

Main Index
 112 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 1d - Film Nodes for Free Convection

Listing 5-8 Example 1d Input File

$
CONV,10,35,91,,99,99
CONV,20,35,92,,99,99
CONV,30,35,93,,99,99
CONV,40,35,94,,99,99
CONV,50,35,95,,99,99
PCONV,35,15,0,0.25
$
MPC,30,91,,3.0,1,,-1.0,,+MPC91
+MPC91,,2,,-1.0,99,,-1.0
MPC,30,92,,3.0,2,,-1.0,,+MPC92
+MPC92,,3,,-1.0,99,,-1.0
MPC,30,93,,3.0,3,,-1.0,,+MPC93
+MPC93,,4,,-1.0,99,,-1.0
MPC,30,94,,3.0,4,,-1.0,,+MPC94
+MPC94,,5,,-1.0,99,,-1.0
MPC,30,95,,3.0,5,,-1.0,,+MPC95
+MPC95,,6,,-1.0,99,,-1.0
$
SPC,10,1,,1300.0
SPC,10,99,,300.0
TEMPD,20,1299.9
$
ENDDATA

Note: MPC must be requested in Case Control.

GRID points 91-95 represent the film nodes.

Results
The abbreviated EX1D.f06 output file is shown in Listing 5-9. A plot of temperature versus distance is shown
in Figure 5-7.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 5 113

Listing 5-9 Example 1d Results File

EXAMPLE 1D NOVEMBER 2, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 11/ 1/93 PAGE 15

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

T E M P E R A T U R E V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 1.300000E+03 1.228207E+03 1.173591E+03 1.135242E+03 1.112498E+03 1.104961E+03
91 S 9.427355E+02 9.005992E+02 8.696109E+02 8.492465E+02 8.391531E+02
99 S 3.000000E+02
EXAMPLE 1D NOVEMBER 2, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 11/ 1/93 PAGE 16

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

L O A D V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
91 S .0 .0 .0 .0 .0
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 1D NOVEMBER 2, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 11/ 1/93 PAGE 17

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

F O R C E S O F S I N G L E - P O I N T C O N S T R A I N T

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 1.297968E+03 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0
91 S .0 .0 .0 .0 .0
99 S -1.297969E+03

EXAMPLE 1D NOVEMBER 2, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 11/ 1/93 PAGE 18

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

H E A T F L O W I N T O H B D Y E L E M E N T S (CHBDY)

ELEMENT-ID APPLIED-LOAD FREE-CONVECTION FORCED-CONVECTION RADIATION TOTAL

10 0.000000E+00 -2.847656E+02 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -2.847656E+02
20 0.000000E+00 -2.681580E+02 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -2.681580E+02
30 0.000000E+00 -2.554733E+02 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -2.554733E+02
40 0.000000E+00 -2.469317E+02 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -2.469317E+02
50 0.000000E+00 -2.426400E+02 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -2.426400E+02
EXAMPLE 1D NOVEMBER 2, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 11/ 1/93 PAGE 19

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

F I N I T E E L E M E N T T E M P E R A T U R E G R A D I E N T S A N D F L U X E S

ELEMENT-ID EL-TYPE X-GRADIENT Y-GRADIENT Z-GRADIENT X-FLUX Y-FLUX Z-FLUX

1 ROD -7.179333E+02 1.464584E+05
2 ROD -5.461558E+02 1.114158E+05
3 ROD -3.834945E+02 7.823288E+04
4 ROD -2.274367E+02 4.639708E+04
5 ROD -7.536760E+01 1.537499E+04

Main Index
 114 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 1d - Film Nodes for Free Convection

Temperature
(°K)
1400

(0.0, 1300.)
1300

(0.1, 1228.)

1200 (0.2, 1174.)

(0.3, 1135.)
(0.4, 1112.)
1100 (0.5, 1105.)

1000

900

800
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5

Distance (meters)

Figure 5-7 Temperature versus Distance

Main Index
 CHAPTER 5 115

Example 1e - Radiation Boundary Condition

Demonstrated Principles
 Radiation Boundary Condition
 Temperature Dependent Emissivity
 Temperature Dependent Conductivity

Discussion
Radiation heat transfer is added along the length of the rod from our previous examples. For this case we treat
the problem as one in which radiant exchange occurs between the rod and an ambient environment at
300 °K. This can be modeled simply with a radiation boundary condition specification. Surface emissivity
variation with temperature is also accounted for. Radiation exchange from the end of the rod has been
included to illustrate the POINT type CHBDY element.

Main Index
 116 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 1e - Radiation Boundary Condition

o
T ∞ = 1300 K
Radiation Boundary Condition Radiation
o
T 1 = 1300 K Boundary
Condition
1 2 3 4 5 6

0.8

(450., .75)

0.7
(700., .65)

0.6 (800., .6)

ε(T)

0.5 (1100., .5)

0.4 (1500., .39)

(1900., .32)
0.3
250 500 750 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000

T (°K)

Figure 5-8 Example 1e - Emissivity as a Function of Temperature

The MSC Nastran input file is shown in Listing 5-10.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 5 117

Main Index
 118 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 1e - Radiation Boundary Condition

Listing 5-10 Example 1e Input File

ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 153
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 1e
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
TEMP(INIT) = 20
NLPARM = 100
BEGIN BULK
NLPARM,100
PARAM,SIGMA,5.67E-8
PARAM,TABS,0.0
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.1,0.0,0.0
GRID,3,,0.2,0.0,0.0
GRID,4,,0.3,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,0.4,0.0,0.0
GRID,6,,0.5,0.0,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CROD,1,5,1,2
CROD,2,5,2,3
CROD,3,5,3,4
CROD,4,5,4,5
CROD,5,5,5,6
PROD,5,15,.0078540
MAT4,15,1.0
MATT4,15,40
TABLEM2,40,0.0,,,,,,,+TBM1
+TBM1,173.16,215.0,273.16,202.0,373.16,206.0,473.16,215.0

Main Index
 CHAPTER 5 119

Listing 5-10 Example 1e Input File (continued)

+TBM2,573.16,228.0,673.16,249.0,ENDT
$
CHBDYP,10,25,LINE,,,1,2,,+CHP10
+CHP10,45,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
CHBDYP,20,25,LINE,,,2,3,,+CHP20
+CHP20,45,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
CHBDYP,30,25,LINE,,,3,4,,+CHP30
+CHP30,45,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
CHBDYP,40,25,LINE,,,4,5,,+CHP40
+CHP40,45,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
CHBDYP,50,25,LINE,,,5,6,,+CHP50
+CHP50,45,,,,0.0,1.0,0.0
CHBDYP,60,26,POINT,,,6,,,+CHP60
+CHP60,45,,,,1.0,0.0,0.0

PHBDY,25,.3141593
PHBDY,26,.0078540
$
RADBC,99,1.0,,10,THRU,60,BY,10
RADM,45,1.0,1.0
RADMT,45,41,41
TABLEM2,41,0.0,,,,,,,+TBM3
+TBM3,450.0,0.75,700.0,0.65,800.0,0.60,1100.0,0.50,+TBM4
+TBM4,1500.0,0.39,1900.0,0.32,ENDT
$
SPC,10,1,,1300.0
SPC,10,99,,300.0
TEMPD,20,1300.0
$
ENDDATA

Note: Parameters SIGMA and TABS are required for any radiation problem.

POINT type CHBDYP for radiation to space from the end of the rod.

Results
The abbreviated EX1E.f06 output file is shown in Listing 5-11. A plot of temperature versus distance is shown
in Figure 5-9.

Main Index
 120 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 1e - Radiation Boundary Condition

Listing 5-11 Example 1e Results File

EXAMPLE 1E SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 11

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

T E M P E R A T U R E V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 1.300000E+03 1.140835E+03 1.026327E+03 9.476805E+02 8.996806E+02 8.795513E+02
99 S 3.000000E+02
EXAMPLE 1E SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 12

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

L O A D V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 1E SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 13

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

F O R C E S O F S I N G L E - P O I N T C O N S T R A I N T

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 5.468448E+03 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 1E SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 14

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

H E A T F L O W I N T O H B D Y E L E M E N T S (CHBDY)

ELEMENT-ID APPLIED-LOAD FREE-CONVECTION FORCED-CONVECTION RADIATION TOTAL

10 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -1.838179E+03 -1.838179E+03
20 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -1.234006E+03 -1.234006E+03
30 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -9.011517E+02 -9.011517E+02
40 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -7.164666E+02 -7.164666E+02
50 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -6.278596E+02 -6.278596E+02
60 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -1.507721E+02 -1.507721E+02
EXAMPLE 1E SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 15

NONLINEAR
LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00
F I N I T E E L E M E N T T E M P E R A T U R E G R A D I E N T S A N D F L U X E S

ELEMENT-ID EL-TYPE X-GRADIENT Y-GRADIENT Z-GRADIENT X-FLUX Y-FLUX Z-FLUX

1 ROD -1.591654E+03 5.792411E+05
2 ROD -1.145073E+03 3.838152E+05
3 ROD -7.864676E+02 2.476643E+05
4 ROD -4.799988E+02 1.447721E+05
5 ROD -2.012931E+02 5.927191E+04

Main Index
 CHAPTER 5 121

Temperature
(°K)

1400

1300 (0.0, 1300.)

1200
(0.1, 1141.)

1100

(0.2, 1026.)

1000
(0.3, 948.)
(0.4, 900.)
900
(0.5, 880.)

800
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
Distance (meters)

Figure 5-9 Temperature versus Distance

Main Index
 122 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 2a - Nonlinear Internal Heating and Free Convection

Example 2a - Nonlinear Internal Heating and Free

Convection

Demonstrated Principles
 Heat Transfer “Loads” and their Descriptions
 Temperature-Dependent Loads
 AREA Type CHBDYs
 Film Node
 Free Convection Exponent

Discussion
Examples 2a, 2b, and 2c describe MSC Nastran heat transfer “loads”. While we tend to think of boundary
conditions in regard to heat transfer, there are several surface conditions which we define as loads. In an MSC
Nastran sense, a load has the flexibility of being subcase selectable. This concept, an early carryover from
structural analysis, allows the load vector to vary while the stiffness matrix and its decomposition remain
unchanged. This provided an economical method for evaluating the effects of multiple loading states and
superposition of loads. The load set/subcase capability is less significant for heat transfer since many
boundary conditions have contributions to the coefficient matrix and are fundamentally nonlinear,
eliminating any potential for superposition of loads. In this series of examples, a single CHEXA element is
used to demonstrate the application of internal heat generation, free convection, control nodes, film nodes,
and various nonlinear effects. The temperature dependence of the heat transfer coefficient and the heat
generation rate illustrated are used.
Example 2a - Nonlinear Internal Heating and Free Convection demonstrates the selection of the internal heat
generation load QVOL. A control node, which is a member of the element grid point set, has been chosen
to multiply the heat generation term as well as be the film node. We refer to this as local control. The free
convection exponent, EXPF, is set to 0.0 (FORM = 0). The analytic expression for this example is given in
(5-1).
The basic energy balance can be expressed as:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 123

Control Node T ∞ = 0.0

and Film Node
QVOL = 1000.0

5 8

6 7
4
1
X

2
3

Temperature Dependent Tabular Inputs

h(T) Q· ( T )
1000. + 1000.

h=T
Q· = 1000. – T

0 0
T T
1000. 1000.

Free Convection Heat Transfer Coefficient Internal Volumetric Heat Generation Rate

Figure 5-10 Example 2a

Main Index
 124 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 2a - Nonlinear Internal Heating and Free Convection

Analytic Solution of Example 2a

EXPF
VOL ⋅ U CN ⋅ HGEN ⋅ VOLUME = h ⋅ AREA ⋅ ( T – T ∞ ) ⋅ ( T – T∞ )

( 1000. ⋅ T ⋅ ( 1000. – T ) ⋅ 1.0 = T ⋅ 6.0 ⋅ T ( EXPF = 0.0 ) ) (5-1)

o
sulting in, T = 994.036 C

The MSC Nastran input file is shown in Listing 5-12.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 125

Main Index
 126 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 2a - Nonlinear Internal Heating and Free Convection

Listing 5-12 Example 2a Input File

ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 153
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 2a
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
TEMP(INIT) = 20
NLPARM = 100
LOAD = 200
BEGIN BULK
NLPARM,100
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,3,,1.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,4,,1.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,0.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,6,,0.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,7,,1.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,8,,1.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CHEXA,1,5,1,2,3,4,5,6,+CHX1
+CHX1,7,8
PSOLID,5,15
MAT4,15,204.0,,,1.0,,1.0
MATT4,15,,,,40,,41
TABLEM2,40,0.0,,,,,,,+TBM40
+TBM40,0.0,0.0,1000.0,1000.0,ENDT
TABLEM2,41,0.0,,,,,,,+TBM41
+TBM41,0.0,1000.0,1000.0,0.0,ENDT
$

Main Index
 CHAPTER 127

Listing 5-12 Example 2a Input File (continued)

CHBDYE,10,1,1
CHBDYE,20,1,2
CHBDYE,30,1,3
CHBDYE,40,1,4
CHBDYE,50,1,5
CHBDYE,60,1,6
$

CONV,10,35,1,,99
CONV,20,35,1,,99
CONV,30,35,1,,99
CONV,40,35,1,,99
CONV,50,35,1,,99
CONV,60,35,1,,99
PCONV,35,15,0,0.0
$
QVOL,200,1000.0,1,1
$
SPC,10,99,,0.0
TEMP,20,99,0.0
TEMPD,20,100.0
$
ENDDATA

Note: The load, in this case QVOL, must be requested in Case Control.

The temperature dependence on internal heat generation is requested through HGEN on the
MAT4/MATT4 entries.

Results
The abbreviated EX2A.f06 output file is shown in Listing 5-13.

Main Index
 128 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 2b - Nonlinear Internal Heating and Control Nodes

Listing 5-13 Example 2a Results File

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

T E M P E R A T U R E V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 9.940355E+02 9.940355E+02 9.940355E+02 9.940355E+02 9.940355E+02 9.940355E+02
7 S 9.940355E+02 9.940355E+02
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 2A SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 12

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

L O A D V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
7 S .0 .0
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 2A SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 13

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

F O R C E S O F S I N G L E - P O I N T C O N S T R A I N T

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
7 S .0 .0
99 S -5.928640E+06
EXAMPLE 2A SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 14

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

H E A T F L O W I N T O H B D Y E L E M E N T S (CHBDY)

ELEMENT-ID APPLIED-LOAD FREE-CONVECTION FORCED-CONVECTION RADIATION TOTAL

10 0.000000E+00 -9.881066E+05 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -9.881066E+05
20 0.000000E+00 -9.881066E+05 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -9.881066E+05
30 0.000000E+00 -9.881066E+05 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -9.881066E+05
40 0.000000E+00 -9.881066E+05 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -9.881066E+05
50 0.000000E+00 -9.881066E+05 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -9.881066E+05
60 0.000000E+00 -9.881066E+05 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -9.881066E+05
EXAMPLE 2A SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 15

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

F I N I T E E L E M E N T T E M P E R A T U R E G R A D I E N T S A N D F L U X E S

ELEMENT-ID EL-TYPE X-GRADIENT Y-GRADIENT Z-GRADIENT X-FLUX Y-FLUX Z-FLUX

1 HEXA -1.136868E-13 1.136868E-13 5.684342E-14 2.319211E-11 -2.319211E-11 -
1.159606E-11

Example 2b - Nonlinear Internal Heating and Control

Nodes

Demonstrated Principles
 Control Node Applied to Loads and Convection Boundaries

Main Index
 CHAPTER 129

 Free Convection Forms

Discussion of Variation 1
This problem extends Example 2a - Nonlinear Internal Heating and Free Convection in the implementation of local
control for the internal heat generation control node and the film node for convection. However, the same
control node is now used to multiply the convection heat transfer coefficient. The free convection exponent
EXPF remains at 0.0 (FORM = 0).
The basic energy balance can be expressed as:

EXPF
QVOL ⋅ U CN ⋅ HGEN ⋅ VOLUME = h ⋅ AREA ⋅ ( T – T ∞ ) ⋅ ( T – T ∞ ) ⋅ U CN

or, ( 1000 ⋅ T ⋅ ( 1000 – T ) ⋅ 1.0 = T ⋅ 6.0 ⋅ ( T – T ∞ ) ⋅ T ) (5-2)

o
Resulting in, T = 333.33 C

The MSC Nastran input file for Variation 1 is shown in Listing 5-14.

Main Index
 130 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 2b - Nonlinear Internal Heating and Control Nodes

Main Index
 CHAPTER 131

Listing 5-14 Example 2b1 Input File

ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 153
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE2b1
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
TEMP(INIT) = 20
NLPARM = 100
LOAD = 200
BEGIN BULK
NLPARM,100
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,3,,1.0,0.0,1.0

Main Index
 132 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 2b - Nonlinear Internal Heating and Control Nodes

Listing 5-14 Example 2b1 Input File (continued)

GRID,4,,1.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,0.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,6,,0.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,7,,1.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,8,,1.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CHEXA,1,5,1,2,3,4,5,6,+CHX1
+CHX1,7,8
PSOLID,5,15
MAT4,15,204.0,,,1.0,,1.0
MATT4,15,,,,40,,41
TABLEM2,40,0.0,,,,,,,+TBM40
+TBM40,0.0,0.0,1000.0,1000.0,ENDT
TABLEM2,41,0.0,,,,,,,+TBM41
+TBM41,0.0,1000.0,1000.0,0.0,ENDT
$
CHBDYE,10,1,1
CHBDYE,20,1,2
CHBDYE,30,1,3
CHBDYE,40,1,4
CHBDYE,50,1,5
CHBDYE,60,1,6
$
CONV,10,35,1,1,99
CONV,20,35,1,1,99
CONV,30,35,1,1,99
CONV,40,35,1,1,99
CONV,50,35,1,1,99
CONV,60,35,1,1,99
PCONV,35,15,0,0.0
$
QVOL,200,1000.0,1,1
$
SPC,10,99,,0.0
TEMP,20,99,0.0
TEMPD,20,100.0
$
ENDDATA

Results of Variation 1
The abbreviated EX2B1.f06 output file is shown in Listing 5-15.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 133

Listing 5-15 Example 2b1 Results File

EXAMPLE 2B1 SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 11

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

T E M P E R A T U R E V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 3.333339E+02 3.333339E+02 3.333339E+02 3.333339E+02 3.333339E+02 3.333339E+02
7 S 3.333339E+02 3.333339E+02
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 2B1 SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 12

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

L O A D V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
7 S .0 .0
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 2B1 SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 13

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

F O R C E S O F S I N G L E - P O I N T C O N S T R A I N T

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
7 S .0 .0
99 S -2.222233E+08
EXAMPLE 2B1 SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 14

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

H E A T F L O W I N T O H B D Y E L E M E N T S (CHBDY)

ELEMENT-ID APPLIED-LOAD FREE-CONVECTION FORCED-CONVECTION RADIATION TOTAL

10 0.000000E+00 -3.703721E+07 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -3.703721E+07
20 0.000000E+00 -3.703721E+07 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -3.703721E+07
30 0.000000E+00 -3.703721E+07 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -3.703721E+07
40 0.000000E+00 -3.703721E+07 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -3.703721E+07
50 0.000000E+00 -3.703721E+07 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -3.703721E+07
60 0.000000E+00 -3.703721E+07 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -3.703721E+07
EXAMPLE 2B1 SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 15

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

F I N I T E E L E M E N T T E M P E R A T U R E G R A D I E N T S A N D F L U X E S

ELEMENT-ID EL-TYPE X-GRADIENT Y-GRADIENT Z-GRADIENT X-FLUX Y-FLUX Z-FLUX

1 HEXA 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -2.842171E-14 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
5.798029E-12

Main Index
 134 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 2b - Nonlinear Internal Heating and Control Nodes

Discussion of Variation 2
A slight variation of Example 2a - Nonlinear Internal Heating and Free Convection is depicted in (5-3). The free
convection relationship has been altered by introducing an EXPF value of 1.0 (FORM = 0).
The basic energy balance can be written as:

EXPF
QVOL ⋅ U CN ⋅ HGEN ⋅ VOLUME = h ⋅ AREA ⋅ ( T – T ∞ ) ⋅ ( T – T ∞ ) ⋅ U CN

or, ( 1000 ⋅ T ⋅ ( 1000 – T ) ⋅ 1.0 = T ⋅ 6.0 ⋅ ( T – T ∞ ) ⋅ ( T – T ∞ ) ⋅ T )

(5-3)

Resulting in, T = 54.02

The MSC Nastran input file for Variation 2 is shown in Listing 5-16.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 135

Main Index
 136 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 2b - Nonlinear Internal Heating and Control Nodes

Listing 5-16 Example 2b2 Input File

ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 153
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 2b2
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
TEMP(INIT) = 20
NLPARM = 100
LOAD = 200
BEGIN BULK
NLPARM,100
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,3,,1.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,4,,1.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,0.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,6,,0.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,7,,1.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,8,,1.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CHEXA,1,5,1,2,3,4,5,6,+CHX1
+CHX1,7,8
PSOLID,5,15
MAT4,15,204.0,,,1.0,,1.0
MATT4,15,,,,40,,41
TABLEM2,40,0.0,,,,,,,+TBM40
+TBM40,0.0,0.0,1000.0,1000.0,ENDT
TABLEM2,41,0.0,,,,,,,+TBM41
+TBM41,0.0,1000.0,1000.0,0.0,ENDT
$

Main Index
 CHAPTER 137

Listing 5-16 Example 2b2 Input File (continued)

CHBDYE,10,1,1
CHBDYE,20,1,2
CHBDYE,30,1,3
CHBDYE,40,1,4
CHBDYE,50,1,5
CHBDYE,60,1,6
$

CONV,10,35,1,1,99
CONV,20,35,1,1,99
CONV,30,35,1,1,99
CONV,40,35,1,1,99
CONV,50,35,1,1,99
CONV,60,35,1,1,99
PCONV,35,15,0,1.0
$
QVOL,200,1000.0,1,1
$
SPC,10,99,,0.0
TEMP,20,99,0.0
TEMPD,20,100.0
$
ENDDATA

Results of Variation 2
The abbreviated EX2b2.f06 output file is shown in Listing 5-17.

Main Index
 138 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 2b - Nonlinear Internal Heating and Control Nodes

Listing 5-17 Example 2b2 Results File

EXAMPLE 2B2 SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 11

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

T E M P E R A T U R E V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 5.402279E+01 5.402279E+01 5.402279E+01 5.402279E+01 5.402279E+01 5.402279E+01
7 S 5.402279E+01 5.402279E+01
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 2B2 SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 12

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

L O A D V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
7 S .0 .0
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 2B2 SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 13

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

F O R C E S O F S I N G L E - P O I N T C O N S T R A I N T

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
7 S .0 .0
99 S -5.110450E+07
EXAMPLE 2B2 SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 14

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

H E A T F L O W I N T O H B D Y E L E M E N T S (CHBDY)

ELEMENT-ID APPLIED-LOAD FREE-CONVECTION FORCED-CONVECTION RADIATION TOTAL

10 0.000000E+00 -8.517416E+06 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -8.517416E+06
20 0.000000E+00 -8.517416E+06 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -8.517416E+06
30 0.000000E+00 -8.517416E+06 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -8.517416E+06
40 0.000000E+00 -8.517416E+06 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -8.517416E+06
50 0.000000E+00 -8.517416E+06 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -8.517416E+06
60 0.000000E+00 -8.517416E+06 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -8.517416E+06
EXAMPLE 2B2 SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 15

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

F I N I T E E L E M E N T T E M P E R A T U R E G R A D I E N T S A N D F L U X E S

ELEMENT-ID EL-TYPE X-GRADIENT Y-GRADIENT Z-GRADIENT X-FLUX Y-FLUX Z-FLUX

1 HEXA 0.000000E+00 5.329071E-15 8.881784E-15 0.000000E+00 -1.087130E-12 -
1.811884E-12

Main Index
 CHAPTER 139

Example 2c - Nonlinear Internal Heating and Film Nodes

Demonstrated Principles
 Free Convection Film Nodes
 Free Convection Forms

Discussion of Variation 1
This problem provides another example of the use of film nodes. In our previous examples, the film node
was chosen to be an element grid point, meaning that the TABLEM look-up temperature for the temperature
dependent heat transfer coefficient was the actual body temperature. More often than not, the look-up
temperature should be some weighted average of the surface temperature and ambient temperature. In this
case, the default value (a blank entry) for the film node depicts that the average of the CHBDY surface
element and the associated ambient point temperatures provide the TABLEM look up temperature
(FORM = 0). The analytic expression for this case is given in (5-4):
The basic energy balance can be expressed as:

QVOL ⋅ U CN ⋅ HGEN ⋅ VOLUME = h ⋅ AREA ⋅ ( T – T ∞ ) ⋅ U CN

 1000 ⋅ T ⋅ ( 1000 – T ) =  T
--- 
 2 ⋅ 6.0 ⋅ ( T – T ∞ ) ⋅ T
or, (5-4)

o
Resulting in, T = 434.26 C

The MSC Nastran input file for Variation 1 is shown in Listing 5-18.

Main Index
 140 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 2c - Nonlinear Internal Heating and Film Nodes

Main Index
 CHAPTER 141

Listing 5-18 Example 2c1 Input File

ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 153
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 2c1
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
TEMP(INIT) = 20
NLPARM = 100
LOAD = 200
BEGIN BULK
NLPARM,100
$

Main Index
 142 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 2c - Nonlinear Internal Heating and Film Nodes

Listing 5-18 Example 2c1 Input File (continued)

GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,3,,1.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,4,,1.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,0.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,6,,0.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,7,,1.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,8,,1.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CHEXA,1,5,1,2,3,4,5,6,+CHX1
+CHX1,7,8
PSOLID,5,15
MAT4,15,204.0,,,1.0,,1.0
MATT4,15,,,,40,,41
TABLEM2,40,0.0,,,,,,,+TBM40
+TBM40,0.0,0.0,1000.0,1000.0,ENDT
TABLEM2,41,0.0,,,,,,,+TBM41
+TBM41,0.0,1000.0,1000.0,0.0,ENDT
$
CHBDYE,10,1,1
CHBDYE,20,1,2
CHBDYE,30,1,3
CHBDYE,40,1,4
CHBDYE,50,1,5
CHBDYE,60,1,6
$
CONV,10,35,,1,99
CONV,20,35,,1,99
CONV,30,35,,1,99
CONV,40,35,,1,99
CONV,50,35,,1,99
CONV,60,35,,1,99
PCONV,35,15,0,0.0
$
QVOL,200,1000.0,1,1
$
SPC,10,99,,0.0
TEMP,20,99,0.0
TEMPD,20,100.0
$
ENDDATA

Main Index
 CHAPTER 143

Results for Variation 1

The abbreviated EX2C1.f06 output file for Variation 1 is shown in Listing 5-19.

Listing 5-19 Example 2c1 Results File

EXAMPLE 2C1 SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 11

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

T E M P E R A T U R E V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 4.342588E+02 4.342588E+02 4.342588E+02 4.342588E+02 4.342588E+02 4.342588E+02
7 S 4.342588E+02 4.342588E+02
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 2C1 SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 12

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

L O A D V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
7 S .0 .0
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 2C1 SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 13

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

F O R C E S O F S I N G L E - P O I N T C O N S T R A I N T

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
7 S .0 .0
99 S -2.456784E+08
EXAMPLE 2C1 SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 14

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

H E A T F L O W I N T O H B D Y E L E M E N T S (CHBDY)

ELEMENT-ID APPLIED-LOAD FREE-CONVECTION FORCED-CONVECTION RADIATION TOTAL

10 0.000000E+00 -4.094640E+07 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -4.094640E+07
20 0.000000E+00 -4.094640E+07 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -4.094640E+07
30 0.000000E+00 -4.094640E+07 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -4.094640E+07
40 0.000000E+00 -4.094640E+07 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -4.094640E+07
50 0.000000E+00 -4.094640E+07 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -4.094640E+07
60 0.000000E+00 -4.094640E+07 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -4.094640E+07
EXAMPLE 2C1 SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 15

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

F I N I T E E L E M E N T T E M P E R A T U R E G R A D I E N T S A N D F L U X E S

ELEMENT-ID EL-TYPE X-GRADIENT Y-GRADIENT Z-GRADIENT X-FLUX Y-FLUX Z-FLUX

1 HEXA 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -2.842171E-14 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 5.798029E-
12

Main Index
 144 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 2c - Nonlinear Internal Heating and Film Nodes

Discussion of Variation 2
(5-5) describes a variation of this problem which has the control nodes removed and the value of 0.2
introduced for EXPF (FORM = 0). It should be noted that the elimination of the control nodes alone would
have no effect on the analysis since they would have cancelled out of the prior equations.
The basic energy balance can be expressed as:

.20
QVOL ⋅ HGEN ⋅ VOLUME = h ⋅ AREA ⋅ ( T – T ∞ ) ⋅ ( T – T∞ )

 T
1000 ⋅ ( 1000 – T ) =  --- ⋅ 6.0 ⋅ ( T ) ⋅ ( T )
.20
or,  2
(5-5)

o
Resulting in, T = 280. C
The MSC Nastran input file for Variation 2 is shown in Listing 5-20.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 145

Main Index
 146 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 2c - Nonlinear Internal Heating and Film Nodes

Listing 5-20 Example 2c2 Input File

ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 153
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 2c2
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
TEMP(INIT) = 20
NLPARM = 100
LOAD = 200
BEGIN BULK
NLPARM,100
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,3,,1.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,4,,1.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,0.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,6,,0.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,7,,1.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,8,,1.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CHEXA,1,5,1,2,3,4,5,6,+CHX1
+CHX1,7,8
PSOLID,5,15
MAT4,15,204.0,,,1.0,,1.0
MATT4,15,,,,40,,41
TABLEM2,40,0.0,,,,,,,+TBM40
+TBM40,0.0,0.0,1000.0,1000.0,ENDT
TABLEM2,41,0.0,,,,,,,+TBM41
+TBM41,0.0,1000.0,1000.0,0.0,ENDT
$
CHBDYE,10,1,1
CHBDYE,20,1,2
CHBDYE,30,1,3
CHBDYE,40,1,4
CHBDYE,50,1,5
CHBDYE,60,1,6
$

Main Index
 CHAPTER 147

Listing 5-20 Example 2c2 Input File (continued)

CONV,10,35,,1,99
CONV,20,35,,1,99
CONV,30,35,,1,99
CONV,40,35,,1,99
CONV,50,35,,1,99
CONV,60,35,,1,99
PCONV,35,15,0,0.2
$
QVOL,200,1000.0,1,1
$
SPC,10,99,,0.0
TEMP,20,99,0.0
TEMPD,20,100.0
$
ENDDATA

Results of Variation 2
The abbreviated EX2c2.f06 output file for Variation 2 is shown in Listing 5-21.

Main Index
 148 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 2c - Nonlinear Internal Heating and Film Nodes

Listing 5-21 Example 2c2 Results File

EXAMPLE 2C2 SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 11

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

T E M P E R A T U R E V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 2.791197E+02 2.791197E+02 2.791197E+02 2.791197E+02 2.791197E+02 2.791197E+02
7 S 2.791197E+02 2.791197E+02
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 2C2 SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 12

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

L O A D V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
7 S .0 .0
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 2C2 SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 13

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

F O R C E S O F S I N G L E - P O I N T C O N S T R A I N T

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
7 S .0 .0
99 S -2.012106E+08
EXAMPLE 2C2 SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 14

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

H E A T F L O W I N T O H B D Y E L E M E N T S (CHBDY)

ELEMENT-ID APPLIED-LOAD FREE-CONVECTION FORCED-CONVECTION RADIATION TOTAL

10 0.000000E+00 -3.353510E+07 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -3.353510E+07
20 0.000000E+00 -3.353510E+07 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -3.353510E+07
30 0.000000E+00 -3.353510E+07 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -3.353510E+07
40 0.000000E+00 -3.353510E+07 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -3.353510E+07
50 0.000000E+00 -3.353510E+07 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -3.353510E+07
60 0.000000E+00 -3.353510E+07 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -3.353510E+07
EXAMPLE 2C2 SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 15

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

F I N I T E E L E M E N T T E M P E R A T U R E G R A D I E N T S A N D F L U X E S

ELEMENT-ID EL-TYPE X-GRADIENT Y-GRADIENT Z-GRADIENT X-FLUX Y-FLUX Z-FLUX

1 HEXA 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -2.842171E-14 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
5.798029E-12

Main Index
 CHAPTER 149

Example 3 - Axisymmetric Elements and Boundary

Conditions

Demonstrated Principles
 Axisymmetric Modeling
 Axisymmetric Surface Elements

Discussion
Axisymmetric geometric models may be constructed using the CTRIAX6 element only. For this element,
the grid point locations are input as R,THETA,Z where the axis of symmetry is the Z axis. The grid points
lie in the RZ plane (THETA = 0.0). In this example we demonstrate the CHBDYE statement for identifying
the surface element to which the boundary condition is to be applied. The surface type is automatically
accounted for with this specification. If the CHBDYG had been used, a TYPE field of REV would be
specified. For reference, any applied loads of a flux nature have a total load applied to the structure that is
calculated based on the entire circumferential surface area.
z

R o = 2.0 m

R i = 1.5 m

11 12 13 14 15
o
o h = 10.0 W ⁄ m 2 K
T = 300 K 6 10
o
T ∞ = 1300 K
1 2 3 4 5

CL
o
K = 204.0 W ⁄ m K

Figure 5-11 Example 3

The MSC Nastran input file is shown in Listing 5-22.

Main Index
 150 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 3 - Axisymmetric Elements and Boundary Conditions

Main Index
 CHAPTER 151

Listing 5-22 Example 3 Input File

ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 153
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 3
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
TEMP(INIT) = 20
NLPARM = 100
BEGIN BULK
NLPARM,100
$
GRID,1,,1.500,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,1.625,0.0,0.0
GRID,3,,1.750,0.0,0.0
GRID,4,,1.875,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,2.000,0.0,0.0
GRID,6,,1.500,0.0,0.125
GRID,7,,1.625,0.0,0.125
GRID,8,,1.750,0.0,0.125
GRID,9,,1.875,0.0,0.125
GRID,10,,2.000,0.0,0.125
GRID,11,,1.500,0.0,0.250
GRID,12,,1.625,0.0,0.250
GRID,13,,1.750,0.0,0.250
GRID,14,,1.875,0.0,0.250
GRID,15,,2.000,0.0,0.250
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CTRIAX6,1,15,1,2,3,8,13,7
CTRIAX6,2,15,11,12,13,7,1,6
CTRIAX6,3,15,3,4,5,10,15,9
CTRIAX6,4,15,13,14,15,9,3,8
MAT4,15,204.0,,,10.0
$
CHBDYE,10,3,2
CONV,10,35,,,99
PCONV,35,15,0,0.0
$

Main Index
 152 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 3 - Axisymmetric Elements and Boundary Conditions

Listing 5-22 Example 3 Input File

SPC,10,99,,1300.0
SPC,10,1,,300.0,6,,300.0
SPC,10,11,,300.0
TEMP,20,99,1300.0
TEMPD,20,300.0
$
ENDDATA

Results
The abbreviated EX3.f06 output file is shown in Listing 5-23.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 153

Listing 5-23 Example 3 Results File

EXAMPLE 3 NOVEMBER 2, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 11/ 1/93 PAGE 11

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

T E M P E R A T U R E V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 3.000000E+02 3.076283E+02 3.147016E+02 3.212750E+02 3.274322E+02 3.000000E+02
7 S 3.076319E+02 3.146983E+02 3.212766E+02 3.274309E+02 3.000000E+02 3.076353E+02
13 S 3.146945E+02 3.212776E+02 3.274268E+02
99 S 1.300000E+03
EXAMPLE 3 NOVEMBER 2, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 11/ 1/93 PAGE 12

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

L O A D V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
13 S .0 .0 .0
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 3 NOVEMBER 2, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 11/ 1/93 PAGE 13

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

F O R C E S O F S I N G L E - P O I N T C O N S T R A I N T

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S -5.102459E+03 .0 .0 .0 .0 -2.036143E+04
7 S .0 .0 .0 .0 -5.090287E+03 .0
13 S .0 .0 .0
99 S 3.055418E+04
EXAMPLE 3 NOVEMBER 2, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 11/ 1/93 PAGE 14

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

H E A T F L O W I N T O H B D Y E L E M E N T S (CHBDY)

ELEMENT-ID APPLIED-LOAD FREE-CONVECTION FORCED-CONVECTION RADIATION TOTAL

10 0.000000E+00 3.055420E+04 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 3.055420E+04
EXAMPLE 3 NOVEMBER 2, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 11/ 1/93 PAGE 15

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

F I N I T E E L E M E N T T E M P E R A T U R E G R A D I E N T S A N D F L U X E S

ELEMENT-ID EL-TYPE X-GRADIENT Y-GRADIENT Z-GRADIENT X-FLUX Y-FLUX Z-FLUX

1 TRIAX6 5.728976E+01 0.000000E+00 9.583211E-03 -1.168711E+04 0.000000E+00 -
1.954975E+00
2 TRIAX6 6.029604E+01 0.000000E+00 1.792225E-02 -1.230039E+04 0.000000E+00 -
3.656140E+00
3 TRIAX6 4.979697E+01 0.000000E+00 1.273317E-03 -1.015858E+04 0.000000E+00 -
2.597566E-01
4 TRIAX6 5.206061E+01 0.000000E+00 -4.323532E-03 -1.062036E+04 0.000000E+00
8.820006E-01

Main Index
 154 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 4a - Plate in Radiative Equilibrium, Nondirectional Solar Load with Radiation Boundary Condition

Example 4a - Plate in Radiative Equilibrium,

Nondirectional Solar Load with Radiation Boundary
Condition

Demonstrated Principles
 Flux Load Application
 Radiation to Space

Discussion
This series of radiative equilibrium problems illustrates various methods of flux load application and radiation
exchange with space. The first example uses a nondirectional heat flux load to represent a solar source. A
simple radiation boundary condition to space represents the loss mechanism. A blackbody surface is initially
presumed.

o
T ∞ = 0.0 R
ε = α = 1.0
3
7

4 6

Q o = 442. Btu ⁄ hr ft 2
8
2 AREA = 1.0 ft 2
5
1

Figure 5-12 Example 4a

The basic energy balance can be expressed as:

Q = σ A ε F ( T e4 – T ∞
4)

o
or, 442. Btu ⁄ hr = .1714 × 10 – 8 Btu ⁄ hr ft 2 R 4 ⋅ 1.0 ft 2 ⋅ 1.0 ⋅ 1.0 ( T e4 – ( 460. ) 4 )
o
Resulting in, T e ≅ 281.7 F
(5-6)
The MSC Nastran input file is shown in Listing 5-24.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 155

Main Index
 156 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 4a - Plate in Radiative Equilibrium, Nondirectional Solar Load with Radiation Boundary Condition

Listing 5-24 Example 4a Input File

ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 153
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 4a
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
TEMP(INIT) = 20
NLPARM = 100
LOAD = 200
BEGIN BULK
PARAM,TABS,459.67
PARAM,SIGMA,.1714E-8
NLPARM,100
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,3,,1.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,4,,1.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,0.0,0.0,0.5
GRID,6,,0.5,0.0,1.0
GRID,7,,1.0,0.0,0.5
GRID,8,,0.5,0.0,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CQUAD8,1,5,1,2,3,4,5,6,+CQD8
+CQD8,7,8
PSHELL,5,15,0.1
MAT4,15,204.0
$
CHBDYG,10,,AREA8,,,45,,,+CHG10
+CHG10,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
$
RADM,45,1.0,1.0
RADBC,99,1.0,,10
$
QHBDY,200,AREA8,442.0,,1,2,3,4,+QHBDY
+QHBDY,5,6,7,8
$

Main Index
 CHAPTER 157

Listing 5-24 Example 4a Input File

SPC,10,99,,0.0
TEMPD,20,0.0
$
ENDDATA

Results
The abbreviated EX4a.f06 output file is shown in Listing 5-25.

Main Index
 158 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 4a - Plate in Radiative Equilibrium, Nondirectional Solar Load with Radiation Boundary Condition

Listing 5-25 Example 4a Results File

EXAMPLE 4A SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 11

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

T E M P E R A T U R E V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 2.819637E+02 2.819637E+02 2.819637E+02 2.819637E+02 2.819637E+02 2.819637E+02
7 S 2.819637E+02 2.819637E+02
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 4A SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 12

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

L O A D V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S -3.683333E+01 -3.683333E+01 -3.683334E+01 -3.683333E+01 1.473333E+02 1.473333E+02
7 S 1.473333E+02 1.473333E+02
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 4A SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 13

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

F O R C E S O F S I N G L E - P O I N T C O N S T R A I N T

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
7 S .0 .0
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 4A SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 14

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

H E A T F L O W I N T O H B D Y E L E M E N T S (CHBDY)

ELEMENT-ID APPLIED-LOAD FREE-CONVECTION FORCED-CONVECTION RADIATION TOTAL

10 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -4.420000E+02 -4.420000E+02
EXAMPLE 4A SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 15

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

F I N I T E E L E M E N T T E M P E R A T U R E G R A D I E N T S A N D F L U X E S

ELEMENT-ID EL-TYPE X-GRADIENT Y-GRADIENT Z-GRADIENT X-FLUX Y-FLUX Z-FLUX

1 QUAD8 -5.454024E-08 7.243386E-09 1.112621E-05 -1.477651E-06

Main Index
 CHAPTER 159

Example 4b - Plate in Radiative Equilibrium, Directional

Solar Load with Radiation Boundary Condition

Demonstrated Principle
 Directional Solar Heat Flux Loads

Discussion
Heat loads from a distant source can be treated in a directional sense with the QVECT Bulk Data entry. The
absorptivity is made available from a RADM Bulk Data entry. In this case, the radiation boundary condition
also uses this absorptivity in its exchange relationship. For illustrative purposes, the angle of incidence was
varied to create a plot of equilibrium temperature versus θ.

3 n̂

θ
4
Q0
2

Figure 5-13 Example 4b

Main Index
 160 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 4b - Plate in Radiative Equilibrium, Directional Solar Load with Radiation Boundary Condition

Qx 
Q x = sin θ = E1 
QVECT 
Q y = cos θ = E2  vary θ
θ 
Qy Q Z = 0 = E3 


Q 0 = 442. Btu ⁄ hr ft 2
o
ε = α = 1.0, T ∞ = 0.0 F

Direction Cosines

θ (deg) T plate (°F) E1 E2

0 282.0 0.0 -1.0

10 279.6 0.173648 -0.984808

20 272.2 0.342020 -0.939693

30 259.8 0.5 -0.866025

40 241.8 0.642788 -0.766044

50 217.6 0.766044 -0.642788

60 185.8 0.866025 -0.5

70 144.1 0.939693 -0.342020

80 87.2 0.984808 -0.173648

90 0.0 1.0 0.0

Main Index
 CHAPTER 161

Note: θ = 80° case is illustrated in the input file listing.

The MSC Nastran input file is shown in Listing 5-26.

Main Index
 162 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 4b - Plate in Radiative Equilibrium, Directional Solar Load with Radiation Boundary Condition

Listing 5-26 Example 4b Input File

ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 153
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 4b
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
TEMP(INIT) = 20
NLPARM = 100
LOAD = 200
BEGIN BULK
PARAM,TABS,459.67
PARAM,SIGMA,.1714E-8
NLPARM,100
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,3,,1.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,4,,1.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CQUAD4,1,5,1,2,3,4
PSHELL,5,15,0.1
MAT4,15,204.0
RADM,45,1.0,1.0
$
CHBDYG,10,,AREA4,,,45,,,+CHG10
+CHG10,1,2,3,4
QVECT,200,442.0,,,.984808,-.173648,0.0,,+QVCT1
+QVCT1,10
RADBC,99,1.0,,10
$
SPC,10,99,,0.0
TEMPD,20,0.0
$
ENDDATA

Main Index
 CHAPTER 163

Results
The abbreviated EX4b.f06 output file is shown in Listing 5-27. Figure 5-14 describes equilibrium temperature
versus angle of incident radiation.

Listing 5-27 Example 4b Results File

EXAMPLE 4B SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 11

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

T E M P E R A T U R E V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 8.717700E+01 8.717700E+01 8.717700E+01 8.717700E+01
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 4B SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 12

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

L O A D V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 1.918810E+01 1.918810E+01 1.918810E+01 1.918810E+01
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 4B SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 13

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

F O R C E S O F S I N G L E - P O I N T C O N S T R A I N T

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S .0 .0 .0 .0
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 4B SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 14

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

H E A T F L O W I N T O H B D Y E L E M E N T S (CHBDY)

ELEMENT-ID APPLIED-LOAD FREE-CONVECTION FORCED-CONVECTION RADIATION TOTAL

10 7.675242E+01 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -7.675240E+01 2.288818E-05
EXAMPLE 4B SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 15

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

F I N I T E E L E M E N T T E M P E R A T U R E G R A D I E N T S A N D F L U X E S

ELEMENT-ID EL-TYPE X-GRADIENT Y-GRADIENT Z-GRADIENT X-FLUX Y-FLUX Z-FLUX

1 QUAD4 -7.105427E-15 7.105427E-15 1.449507E-12 -1.449507E-12

Main Index
 164 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 4b - Plate in Radiative Equilibrium, Directional Solar Load with Radiation Boundary Condition

Temperature
(°F)

300
(10.0, 279.6)
(20.0, 272.2)
(0.0, 282.0) (30.0, 259.8)
250 (40.0, 241.8)

(50.0, 217.6)
200
(60.0, 185.8)

150 (70.0, 144.1)

100
(80.0, 87.2)

50

(90.0, 0.0)
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90

θ (degrees)

Figure 5-14 Temperature versus Angle of Incident Radiation

Main Index
 CHAPTER 165

Example 4c - Plate in Radiative Equilibrium, Directional

Solar Load, Spectral Surface Behavior

Demonstrated Principles
 Solar Loads
 Spectral Radiation Surface Behavior

Discussion
Wavelength dependent surface properties can be incorporated in the radiation boundary condition or any
radiation enclosure. For this simple radiative equilibrium problem, we demonstrate the principles by using a
perfectly selective surface-a surface that behaves like a perfect blackbody ( ε = 1.0) below some finite cutoff
wavelength and does not participate above that wavelength. Appendix G describes the mathematics
underlying the waveband approximation to spectral radiation exchange. The RADBND Bulk Data entry
supplies the wavelength break points and the RADM Bulk Data entry provides the band emissivities. The
solar source (QVECT) for the analysis is treated as a blackbody at a temperature of 10400 °R .

Qe
3
Qa

αλ ( λ ) 2
4

1.0
1

λc λ

Figure 5-15 Surface Absorptivity versus Wavelength - Example 4c

Main Index
 166 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 4c - Plate in Radiative Equilibrium, Directional Solar Load, Spectral Surface Behavior

4000

(3275)
3000 (2760)
The input listing
(2410)
(°R) corresponds to the
(2150) λ = 0.6 μm
(1890) c
2000 condition.

1000
α = ε = 1.0, 0 ≤ λ ≤ ∞
713

0
0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6

λ c ( μm )

Figure 5-16 Radiative Equilibrium Temperature versus Cutoff Wavelength

The MSC Nastran input file is shown in Listing 5-28.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 167

Main Index
 168 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 4c - Plate in Radiative Equilibrium, Directional Solar Load, Spectral Surface Behavior

Listing 5-28 Example 4c Input File

ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 153
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 4c
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPCF = ALL
SPC = 10
TEMP(INIT) = 20
NLPARM = 100
LOAD = 200
BEGIN BULK
PARAM,TABS,0.0
PARAM,SIGMA,.1714E-8
NLPARM,100

Main Index
 CHAPTER 169

Listing 5-28 Example 4c Input File (continued)

$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,1.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,3,,1.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,4,,0.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CQUAD4,1,5,1,2,3,4
PSHELL,5,15,0.1
MAT4,15,204.0
$
CHBDYG,10,,AREA4,,,45,,,+CHG10
+CHG10,1,2,3,4
$
RADM,45,1.0,1.0,0.0
RADBND,3,25898.0,0.6,0.6
RADBC,99,1.0,,10
$
QVECT,200,442.0,10400.0,,0.0,0.0,-1.0,0,+QVECT
+QVECT,10
$
SPC,10,99,,0.0
TEMP,20,99,0.0
TEMPD,20,2500.0
$
ENDDATA

Note: Only one RADBND may exist in any analysis.

Results
The abbreviated EX4c.f06 output file is shown in Listing 5-29.

Main Index
 170 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 5a - Single Cavity Enclosure Radiation with Shadowing

Listing 5-29 Example 4c Results File

EXAMPLE 4C DECEMBER 10, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 12/ 9/93 PAGE 8

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

T E M P E R A T U R E V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 3.275139E+03 3.275139E+03 3.275139E+03 3.275139E+03
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 4C DECEMBER 10, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 12/ 9/93 PAGE 9

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

L O A D V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 4.153704E+01 4.153704E+01 4.153704E+01 4.153704E+01
99 S .0

EXAMPLE 4C DECEMBER 10, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 12/ 9/93 PAGE 10

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

F O R C E S O F S I N G L E - P O I N T C O N S T R A I N T

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S .0 .0 .0 .0
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 4C DECEMBER 10, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 12/ 9/93 PAGE 11

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

H E A T F L O W I N T O H B D Y E L E M E N T S (CHBDY)

ELEMENT-ID APPLIED-LOAD FREE-CONVECTION FORCED-CONVECTION RADIATION TOTAL

10 1.661482E+02 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -1.661480E+02 1.678467E-04
EXAMPLE 4C DECEMBER 10, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 12/ 9/93 PAGE 12

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

F I N I T E E L E M E N T T E M P E R A T U R E G R A D I E N T S A N D F L U X E S

ELEMENT-ID EL-TYPE X-GRADIENT Y-GRADIENT Z-GRADIENT X-FLUX Y-FLUX Z-FLUX

1 QUAD4 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
EXAMPLE 4C DECEMBER 10, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 12/ 9/93 PAGE 13

EXAMPLE 4C DECEMBER 10, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 12/ 9/93 PAGE 14

Example 5a - Single Cavity Enclosure Radiation with

Shadowing

Demonstrated Principles
 Surface to Surface Radiation Exchange
 Radiation Cavity / Enclosure
 View Factor Calculation with Shadowing

Main Index
 CHAPTER 171

Discussion
A simple geometry composed of four plate elements is used to demonstrate radiant exchange in an enclosure.
Every surface to participate in the exchange is identified with an CHBDYi Bulk Data entry surface element,
in this case providing five surface elements. Only one RADCAV Bulk Data entry is defined in this example
indicating that a single enclosure cavity has been defined. For this configuration, shadowing must be
considered when calculating the view factors.
The statements essential to the radiation solution process are described as follows:

RADSET Requests which cavities are to be included as radiation enclosures for the thermal analysis.
RADLST / RADMTX Provides the view factors required for generation of the radiation matrix. Since they are not
provided by the user in this example, they are determined by use of the view module in the
course of the analysis.
RADCAV Provides various global controls used for the calculation of view factors within the identified
cavity.
VIEW Provides the connection between a surface element and its assigned cavity and requests that
view factors be calculated among those surface elements assigned to the same cavity.
VIEW3D Requests that the view factors be calculated using the adaptive gaussian integration view
factor routine as opposed to the default finite difference calculation.
CHBDYi Describes the surface elements used in the enclosure, and associates them with the VIEW and
RADM Bulk Data entries.
RADM Provides the radiative surface properties (emissivity), in this case a constant value of 1.0.

Main Index
 172 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 5a - Single Cavity Enclosure Radiation with Shadowing

15 14

2 6 10
13
16
3 7 11

~
1 x
5 9

2000 °K 4
8 12

Figure 5-17 Example 5a.

The MSC Nastran input file is shown in Listing 5-30.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 173

Main Index
 174 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 5a - Single Cavity Enclosure Radiation with Shadowing

Listing 5-30 Example 5a Input File

ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 153
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 5a
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
TEMP(INIT) = 20
NLPARM = 100
BEGIN BULK
PARAM,TABS,0.0
PARAM,SIGMA,5.67E-08
NLPARM,100
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,3,,0.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,4,,0.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,5,,1.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,6,,1.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,7,,1.0,1.0,1.0

Main Index
 CHAPTER 175

Listing 5-30 Example 5a Input File (continued)

GRID,8,,1.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,9,,2.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,10,,2.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,11,,2.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,12,,2.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,13,,1.5,0.0,-1.0
GRID,14,,1.5,1.0,-1.0
GRID,15,,0.5,1.0,-1.0
GRID,16,,0.5,0.0,-1.0
$
CQUAD4,1,5,1,2,3,4
CQUAD4,2,5,5,6,7,8
CQUAD4,3,5,9,12,11,10
CQUAD4,4,5,13,14,15,16
PSHELL,5,15,0.1
MAT4,15,204.0
$
CHBDYG,10,,AREA4,55,,45,,,+CHG10
+CHG10,1,2,3,4
CHBDYG,20,,AREA4,56,,45,,,+CHG20
+CHG20,5,6,7,8
CHBDYG,21,,AREA4,56,,45,,,+CHG21
+CHG21,5,8,7,6
CHBDYG,30,,AREA4,55,,45,,,+CHG30
+CHG30,9,12,11,10
CHBDYG,40,,AREA4,57,,45,,,+CHG40
+CHG40,13,14,15,16
$
RADM,45,1.0,1.0
RADSET,65
RADCAV,65,,YES
VIEW,55,65,KBSHD
VIEW,56,65,KSHD
VIEW,57,65,NONE
VIEW3D,65,,,,,,,3
$
SPC,10,1,,2000.0,2,,2000.0
SPC,10,3,,2000.0,4,,2000.0
TEMPD,20,2000.0
$
ENDDATA

Main Index
 176 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 5a - Single Cavity Enclosure Radiation with Shadowing

Note: The CQUAD4 element with an EID = 2 has two surface elements associated with it.

The direction of the CHBDYG surface normals are important for any radiation exchange.

Shadowing flags can save vast amounts of computation time for large problems.

Results
The abbreviated EX5a.f06 output file is shown in Listing 5-31. Included in this output is a tabulation of the
view factor calculation. The details of this output are discussed inView Factor Calculation Methods, 481. Because
the view factor summations are less than 1.0, there is considerable energy lost to space. The punch file of
radiation view factors is shown in Listing 5-32.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 177

Main Index
 178 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 5a - Single Cavity Enclosure Radiation with Shadowing

Listing 5-31 Example 5a Results File

EXAMPLE 5A SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 6

*** VIEW FACTOR MODULE *** OUTPUT DATA *** CAVITY ID = 65 ***
ELEMENT TO ELEMENT VIEW FACTORS C* PARTIAL
SURF-I SURF-J AREA-I AI*FIJ FIJ ERROR SHADING ERROR SCALE
10 - 21 1.0000E+00 1.97750E-01 1.97750E-01 2.5529E-01 NO YES
10 30 1.0000E+00 6.84135E-02 6.84135E-02 7.3895E-02 NO NO
10 40 1.0000E+00 4.08547E-02 4.08547E-02 6.6278E-02 NO NO
10 30 1.0000E+00 0.00000E+00 0.00000E+00 0/256
10 21 1.0000E+00 1.99944E-01 1.99944E-01
10 -SUM OF 2.40799E-01 2.40799E-01
20 - 30 1.0000E+00 1.97750E-01 1.97750E-01 2.5529E-01 NO YES
20 40 1.0000E+00 1.31841E-02 1.31841E-02 2.0133E-02 YES NO
20 40 1.0000E+00 1.16713E-02 1.16713E-02
20 30 1.0000E+00 1.99944E-01 1.99944E-01
20 -SUM OF 2.11616E-01 2.11616E-01
21 - 40 1.0000E+00 1.31841E-02 1.31841E-02 2.0133E-02 YES NO
21 40 1.0000E+00 1.16713E-02 1.16713E-02
21 -SUM OF 2.11616E-01 2.11616E-01
30 - 40 1.0000E+00 4.08547E-02 4.08547E-02 6.6278E-02 NO NO
30 -SUM OF 2.40799E-01 2.40799E-01
40 -SUM OF 1.05052E-01 1.05052E-01
^^^ DMAP INFORMATION MESSAGE 9048 (NLSCSH) - LINEAR ELEMENTS ARE CONNECTED TO THE ANALYSIS SET (A-SET).
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4534, 5 ELEMENTS HAVE A TOTAL VIEW FACTOR (FA/A) LESS THAN 0.99, ENERGY MAY BE LOST TO
SPACE.
LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00
T E M P E R A T U R E V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 2.000000E+03 2.000000E+03 2.000000E+03 2.000000E+03 1.132229E+03 1.132229E+03
7 S 1.132229E+03 1.132229E+03 7.732046E+02 7.732046E+02 7.732046E+02 7.732046E+02
13 S 9.168311E+02 9.168311E+02 9.168311E+02 9.168311E+02
EXAMPLE 5A SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE
24

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

L O A D V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
13 S .0 .0 .0 .0
EXAMPLE 5A SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE
25

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

F O R C E S O F S I N G L E - P O I N T C O N S T R A I N T

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 2.217105E+05 2.217105E+05 2.217105E+05 2.217105E+05 .0 .0
13 S .0 .0 .0 .0
EXAMPLE 5A SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE
26

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

Main Index
 CHAPTER 179

Listing 5-31 Example 5a Results File (continued)

H E A T F L O W I N T O H B D Y E L E M E N T S (CHBDY)

ELEMENT-ID APPLIED-LOAD FREE-CONVECTION FORCED-CONVECTION RADIATION TOTAL

10 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -8.868420E+05 -8.868420E+05
20 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -8.865096E+04 -8.865096E+04
21 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 8.865097E+04 8.865097E+04
30 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -3.671037E-04 -3.671037E-04
40 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 6.051011E-03 6.051011E-03
EXAMPLE 5A SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93 PAGE 27

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

F I N I T E E L E M E N T T E M P E R A T U R E G R A D I E N T S A N D F L U X E S

ELEMENT-ID EL-TYPE X-GRADIENT Y-GRADIENT Z-GRADIENT X-FLUX Y-FLUX Z-FLUX

1 QUAD4 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
2 QUAD4 2.273737E-13 1.136868E-13 -4.638423E-11 -2.319211E-11
3 QUAD4 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
4 QUAD4 -5.684342E-14 0.000000E+00 1.159606E-11 0.000000E+00

Listing 5-32 Example 5a Punch File (EX5a.pch)

RADMTX 65 1 0.0 0.0 .199944 0.0 .040855

RADMTX 65 2 0.0 0.0 .199944 .011671
RADMTX 65 3 0.0 0.0 .011671
RADMTX 65 4 0.0 .040855
RADMTX 65 5 0.0
RADLST 65 1 10 20 21 30 40

Example 5b - Single Cavity Enclosure Radiation with an

Ambient Element Specification

Demonstrated Principles
 Enclosure Radiation Exchange
 Radiation Ambient Element

Discussion
Example 5a involves four plates in radiative equilibrium which exhibit considerable energy loss to space since
there is no defined exchange mechanism between them and their environment. This undefined environment
behaves mathematically the same as blackbody space at a temperature of absolute zero. A convenient method
for introducing an ambient environment into the problem capitalizes on the use of the ambient element as
selected on the RADCAV Bulk Data entry. For any group of surface elements we wish to consider as a partial
enclosure, we can define a single unique ambient element which will mathematically complete the enclosure.
This surface element must have a specified temperature boundary condition.

Main Index
 180 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 5b - Single Cavity Enclosure Radiation with an Ambient Element Specification

The ambient element concept relies on our knowledge that the individual elemental view factors must add
up to a value of 1.0 for a complete enclosure. Any elemental surfaces which have a view factor sum of less
than 1.0 as determined by the view module will automatically have the remainder assigned to the ambient
element. This environmental view factor is not listed in the view module output, but is identified in the
generated RADLST/RADMTX punch files. If the ambient element is to model space, it should be made
appropriately large relative to the other elements in the enclosure. As discussed in View Factor Calculation
Methods, 481, whenever an ambient element is requested for a cavity, a symmetric conservative radiation
matrix is generated.
The MSC Nastran input file is shown in Listing 5-33.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 181

Main Index
 182 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 5b - Single Cavity Enclosure Radiation with an Ambient Element Specification

Listing 5-33 Example 5b Input File

ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 153
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 5b
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
TEMP(INIT) = 20
NLPARM = 100
BEGIN BULK
PARAM,TABS,0.0
PARAM,SIGMA,5.67E-08
NLPARM,100
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,3,,0.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,4,,0.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,5,,1.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,6,,1.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,7,,1.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,8,,1.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,9,,2.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,10,,2.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,11,,2.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,12,,2.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,13,,1.5,0.0,-1.0
GRID,14,,1.5,1.0,-1.0
GRID,15,,0.5,1.0,-1.0
GRID,16,,0.5,0.0,-1.0
GRID,17,,0.0,100.0,0.0
GRID,18,,100.0,100.0,0.0
GRID,19,,100.0,100.0,100.0
GRID,20,,0.0,100.0,100.0
$
CQUAD4,1,5,1,2,3,4
CQUAD4,2,5,5,6,7,8
CQUAD4,3,5,9,12,11,10
CQUAD4,4,5,13,14,15,16
CQUAD4,5,5,17,18,19,20

Main Index
 CHAPTER 183

Listing 5-33 Example 5b Input File (continued)

PSHELL,5,15,0.1
MAT4,15,204.0
$
CHBDYG,10,,AREA4,55,,45,,,+CHG10
+CHG10,1,2,3,4
CHBDYG,20,,AREA4,56,,45,,,+CHG20
+CHG20,5,6,7,8
CHBDYG,21,,AREA4,56,,45,,,+CHG21
+CHG21,5,8,7,6
CHBDYG,30,,AREA4,55,,45,,,+CHG30
+CHG30,9,12,11,10
CHBDYG,40,,AREA4,57,,45,,,+CHG40
+CHG40,13,14,15,16
CHBDYG,99,,AREA4,,,45,,,+CHG99
+CHG99,17,18,19,20
$
RADM,45,1.0,1.0
RADSET,65
RADCAV,65,99,YES
VIEW,55,65,KBSHD
VIEW,56,65,KSHD
VIEW,57,65,NONE
VIEW3D,65,,,,,,,3
$
SPC,10,1,,2000.0,2,,2000.0
SPC,10,3,,2000.0,4,,2000.0
SPC,10,17,,500.0,18,,500.0
SPC,10,19,,500.0,20,,500.0
TEMPD,20,2000.0
$
ENDDATA

Note: Ambient element EID = 99 is defined with a large area to represent space.

Results
The abbreviated EX5b.f06 output file is shown in Listing 5-34. Note that the ambient element does not appear
in the view factor .f06 output. The punch file is shown in Listing 5-35, and does include the ambient element.

Main Index
 184 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 5b - Single Cavity Enclosure Radiation with an Ambient Element Specification

Main Index
 CHAPTER 185

Listing 5-34 Example 5b Results File

EXAMPLE 5B FEBRUARY 14, 1994 MSC/NASTRAN 2/ 4/94 PAGE 7

*** VIEW FACTOR MODULE *** OUTPUT DATA *** CAVITY ID = 65 ***

ELEMENT TO ELEMENT VIEW FACTORS C* PARTIAL

SURF-I SURF-J AREA-I AI*FIJ FIJ ERROR SHADING ERROR SCALE

10 - 21 1.0000E+00 1.97750E-01 1.97750E-01 2.5529E-01 NO YES

10 30 1.0000E+00 6.84135E-02 6.84135E-02 7.3895E-02 NO NO
10 40 1.0000E+00 4.08547E-02 4.08547E-02 6.6278E-02 NO NO
10 30 1.0000E+00 0.00000E+00 0.00000E+00 0/256
10 21 1.0000E+00 1.99944E-01 1.99944E-01
10 -SUM OF 2.40799E-01 2.40799E-01
20 - 30 1.0000E+00 1.97750E-01 1.97750E-01 2.5529E-01 NO YES
20 40 1.0000E+00 1.31841E-02 1.31841E-02 2.0133E-02 YES NO
20 40 1.0000E+00 1.16713E-02 1.16713E-02
20 30 1.0000E+00 1.99944E-01 1.99944E-01
20 -SUM OF 2.11616E-01 2.11616E-01
21 - 40 1.0000E+00 1.31841E-02 1.31841E-02 2.0133E-02 YES NO
21 40 1.0000E+00 1.16713E-02 1.16713E-02
21 -SUM OF 2.11616E-01 2.11616E-01
30 - 40 1.0000E+00 4.08547E-02 4.08547E-02 6.6278E-02 NO NO
30 -SUM OF 2.40799E-01 2.40799E-01
40 -SUM OF 1.05052E-01 1.05052E-01
LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00
T E M P E R A T U R E V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 2.000000E+03 2.000000E+03 2.000000E+03 2.000000E+03 1.141790E+03 1.141790E+03
7 S 1.141790E+03 1.141790E+03 8.044109E+02 8.044109E+02 8.044109E+02 8.044109E+02
13 S 9.356503E+02 9.356503E+02 9.356503E+02 9.356503E+02 5.000000E+02 5.000000E+02
19 S 5.000000E+02 5.000000E+02
EXAMPLE 5B FEBRUARY 14, 1994 MSC/NASTRAN 2/ 4/94
PAGE 11

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

L O A D V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
19 S .0 .0
EXAMPLE 5B FEBRUARY 14, 1994 MSC/NASTRAN 2/ 4/94
PAGE 12

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

F O R C E S O F S I N G L E - P O I N T C O N S T R A I N T

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 2.208269E+05 2.208269E+05 2.208269E+05 2.208269E+05 .0 .0
13 S .0 .0 .0 .0 -2.208285E+05 -2.208285E+05
19 S -2.208285E+05 -2.208285E+05
EXAMPLE 5B FEBRUARY 14, 1994 MSC/NASTRAN 2/ 4/94 PAGE
13

Main Index
 186 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 5c - Multiple Cavity Enclosure Radiation

Listing 5-34 Example 5b Results File (continued)

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

H E A T F L O W I N T O H B D Y E L E M E N T S (CHBDY)

ELEMENT-ID APPLIED-LOAD FREE-CONVECTION FORCED-CONVECTION RADIATION TOTAL

10 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -8.833074E+05 -8.833074E+05
20 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -8.830299E+04 -8.830299E+04
21 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 8.830428E+04 8.830428E+04
30 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -7.230929E+00 -7.230929E+00
40 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -5.820249E-01 -5.820249E-01
99 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 8.833141E+05 8.833141E+05
EXAMPLE 5B FEBRUARY 14, 1994 MSC/NASTRAN 2/ 4/94 PAGE
14

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

F I N I T E E L E M E N T T E M P E R A T U R E G R A D I E N T S A N D F L U X E S

ELEMENT-ID EL-TYPE X-GRADIENT Y-GRADIENT Z-GRADIENT X-FLUX Y-FLUX Z-

FLUX
1 QUAD4 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
2 QUAD4 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
3 QUAD4 -5.684342E-14 -1.136868E-13 1.159606E-11 2.319211E-11
4 QUAD4 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
5 QUAD4 -5.204170E-17 5.204170E-17 1.061651E-14 -1.061651E-14

Listing 5-35 Example 5b Punch File (EX5b.pch)

RADMTX 65 1 0.0 0.0 .199944 0.0 .040855 .759201

RADMTX 65 2 0.0 0.0 .199944 .011671 .788384
RADMTX 65 3 0.0 0.0 .011671 .788384
RADMTX 65 4 0.0 .040855 .759201
RADMTX 65 5 0.0 .894948
RADMTX 65 6 0.0
RADLST 65 4 10 20 21 30 40 99

Example 5c - Multiple Cavity Enclosure Radiation

Demonstrated Principles
 Multiple Radiation Cavities
 View Factor Calculation for Multiple Cavities

Discussion
The concept of multiple radiation cavities is investigated in this problem. The primary use of this capability
is to reduce the computation time associated with the identification and calculation of view factors when total

Main Index
 CHAPTER 187

separation exists between regions. If defined as a single enclosure, this problem would involve third body
shadowing calculations, the most laborious and expensive part of any view factor calculation. As a three cavity
problem, these calculations are eliminated.
RADSET selects three cavities and the RADCAV entry for SHADOW is denoted as NO indicating that no
third body shadowing calculations are to be performed within the individual cavities. The fields on the
VIEW Bulk Data entry concerning SHADE are ignored when SHADOW is set to NO on the RADCAV
Bulk Data entry. When hundreds or thousands of surfaces are involved, the savings may be crucial to the
economics of the total analysis.

2000 °K
6 10 14
2

11 15
3 ~ 7
x
1 5 9 13

4 8 12 16

Figure 5-18 Example 5c

The MSC Nastran input file is shown in Listing 5-36.

Main Index
 188 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 5c - Multiple Cavity Enclosure Radiation

Main Index
 CHAPTER 189

Listing 5-36 Example 5c Input File

ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 153
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 5c
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
TEMP(INIT) = 20
NLPARM = 100
BEGIN BULK
PARAM,TABS,0.0
PARAM,SIGMA,5.67E-08
NLPARM,100
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,3,,0.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,4,,0.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,5,,1.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,6,,1.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,7,,1.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,8,,1.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,9,,2.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,10,,2.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,11,,2.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,12,,2.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,13,,3.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,14,,3.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,15,,3.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,16,,3.0,0.0,1.0
$
CQUAD4,1,5,1,2,3,4
CQUAD4,2,5,5,6,7,8
CQUAD4,3,5,9,10,11,12
CQUAD4,4,5,13,16,15,14
PSHELL,5,15,0.1
MAT4,15,204.0
$

Main Index
 190 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 5c - Multiple Cavity Enclosure Radiation

Listing 5-36 Example 5c Input File (continued)

CHBDYG,10,,AREA4,55,,45,,,+CHG10
+CHG10,1,2,3,4
CHBDYG,20,,AREA4,55,,45,,,+CHG20
+CHG20,5,8,7,6
CHBDYG,30,,AREA4,56,,45,,,+CHG30
+CHG30,5,6,7,8
CHBDYG,40,,AREA4,56,,45,,,+CHG40
+CHG40,9,12,11,10
CHBDYG,50,,AREA4,57,,45,,,+CHG50
+CHG50,9,10,11,12
CHBDYG,60,,AREA4,57,,45,,,+CHG60
+CHG60,13,16,15,14
$
RADM,45,1.0,1.0
RADSET,65,75,85
RADCAV,65,,NO
RADCAV,75,,NO
RADCAV,85,,NO
VIEW,55,65
VIEW,56,75
VIEW,57,85
VIEW3D,65,,,,,,,3
VIEW3D,75,,,,,,,3
VIEW3D,85,,,,,,,3
$
SPC,10,1,,2000.0,2,,2000.0
SPC,10,3,,2000.0,4,,2000.0
TEMPD,20,2000.0
$
ENDDATA

Results
The abbreviated EX5c.f06 output file is shown in Listing 5-37. The punch file is shown in Listing 5-38. Note
the multiple cavity information.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 191

Main Index
 192 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 5c - Multiple Cavity Enclosure Radiation

Listing 5-37 Example 5c Results File

EXAMPLE 5C SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93
PAGE 7
*** VIEW FACTOR MODULE *** OUTPUT DATA *** CAVITY ID = 65 ***
ELEMENT TO ELEMENT VIEW FACTORS C* PARTIAL
SURF-I SURF-J AREA-I AI*FIJ FIJ ERROR SHADING ERROR SCALE
10 - 20 1.0000E+00 1.97750E-01 1.97750E-01 2.5529E-01 NO YES
10 20 1.0000E+00 1.99944E-01 1.99944E-01
10 -SUM OF 1.99944E-01 1.99944E-01
20 -SUM OF 1.99944E-01 1.99944E-01
EXAMPLE 5C SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93
PAGE 8

*** VIEW FACTOR MODULE *** OUTPUT DATA *** CAVITY ID = 75 ***
ELEMENT TO ELEMENT VIEW FACTORS C* PARTIAL
SURF-I SURF-J AREA-I AI*FIJ FIJ ERROR SHADING ERROR SCALE
30 - 40 1.0000E+00 1.97750E-01 1.97750E-01 2.5529E-01 NO YES
30 40 1.0000E+00 1.99944E-01 1.99944E-01
30 -SUM OF 1.99944E-01 1.99944E-01
40 -SUM OF 1.99944E-01 1.99944E-01
EXAMPLE 5C SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93
PAGE 9

*** VIEW FACTOR MODULE *** OUTPUT DATA *** CAVITY ID = 85 ***
ELEMENT TO ELEMENT VIEW FACTORS C* PARTIAL
SURF-I SURF-J AREA-I AI*FIJ FIJ ERROR SHADING ERROR SCALE
50 - 60 1.0000E+00 1.97750E-01 1.97750E-01 2.5529E-01 NO YES
50 60 1.0000E+00 1.99944E-01 1.99944E-01
50 -SUM OF 1.99944E-01 1.99944E-01
60 -SUM OF 1.99944E-01 1.99944E-01
^^^ DMAP INFORMATION MESSAGE 9048 (NLSCSH) - LINEAR ELEMENTS ARE CONNECTED TO THE ANALYSIS SET (A-SET).
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4534, 2 ELEMENTS HAVE A TOTAL VIEW FACTOR (FA/A) LESS THAN 0.99, ENERGY MAY BE
LOST TO SPACE.
LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00
T E M P E R A T U R E V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 2.000000E+03 2.000000E+03 2.000000E+03 2.000000E+03 1.127462E+03 1.127462E+03
7 S 1.127462E+03 1.127462E+03 6.371667E+02 6.371667E+02 6.371667E+02 6.371667E+02
13 S 4.260592E+02 4.260592E+02 4.260592E+02 4.260592E+02
EXAMPLE 5C SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93
PAGE 43

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

L O A D V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
13 S .0 .0 .0 .0
EXAMPLE 5C SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93
PAGE 44

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

Main Index
 CHAPTER 193

Listing 5-37 Example 5c Results File (continued)

F O R C E S O F S I N G L E - P O I N T C O N S T R A I N T

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 2.221976E+05 2.221976E+05 2.221976E+05 2.221976E+05 .0 .0
13 S .0 .0 .0 .0
EXAMPLE 5C SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93
PAGE 45

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

H E A T F L O W I N T O H B D Y E L E M E N T S (CHBDY)

ELEMENT-ID APPLIED-LOAD FREE-CONVECTION FORCED-CONVECTION RADIATION TOTAL

10 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -8.887904E+05 -8.887904E+05
20 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 8.974247E+04 8.974247E+04
30 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -8.974246E+04 -8.974246E+04
40 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 8.970887E+03 8.970887E+03
50 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -8.970880E+03 -8.970880E+03
60 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -5.437486E-04 -5.437486E-04
EXAMPLE 5C SEPTEMBER 24, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 9/23/93
PAGE 46

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

F I N I T E E L E M E N T T E M P E R A T U R E G R A D I E N T S A N D F L U X E S

ELEMENT-ID EL-TYPE X-GRADIENT Y-GRADIENT Z-GRADIENT X-FLUX Y-FLUX

Z-FLUX
1 QUAD4 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
2 QUAD4 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
3 QUAD4 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
4 QUAD4 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00

Listing 5-38 Example 5c Punch File

RADMTX 65 1 0.0 .199944

RADMTX 65 2 0.0
RADLST 65 1 10 20
RADMTX 75 1 0.0 .199944
RADMTX 75 2 0.0
RADLST 75 1 30 40
RADMTX 85 1 0.0 .199944
RADMTX 85 2 0.0
RADLST 85 1 50 60

Main Index
 194 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 6 - Forced Convection Tube Flow - Constant Property Flow

Example 6 - Forced Convection Tube Flow - Constant

Property Flow

Demonstrated Principles
 Forced Convection Fluid Elements
 Control Node for Mass Flow Rate
 Relationships for Tube Flows
 Film Nodes for Forced Convection
 Constant Heat Transfer Coefficient

Discussion
A forced convection element (CONVM) is available for the simulation of 1-D fluid flow networks. The
formulation takes into account conduction and convection in the streamwise direction as well as the
convection resistance between the fluid and the adjoining structure or environment. The mass flow rate is
specified by the value of the control node (CNTMDOT). Fluid properties which vary with temperature are
available through the MAT4/MATT4 entries for conductivity, specific heat, and dynamic viscosity. In this
example, the forced convection heat transfer coefficient has been input at a constant value of 200.
2
W ⁄ m °C . For tube flow, the heat transfer coefficient could easily have been calculated internally based
on the relationships available through the CONVM/PCONVM.
It may be desirable to consider a fluid flow problem in an evolutionary sense. This allows for a much broader
interpretation of load incrementing through time stepping, as well introducing the stabilizing effects
associated with heat capacitance and implicit time integration. The steady state solution may then be likened
to the long time solution from a transient analysis.

o
Tw = 0 C
o
T in = 100 C
T exit

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

5.0 m

Figure 5-19 Example 6

Working Fluid = Water:

Main Index
 CHAPTER 195

o
K = .065 W ⁄ m C
o
Cp = 4200. J ⁄ kg C
3
ρ = 1000.kg ⁄ m
–3
μ = 1.0 × 10 kg ⁄ m sec
2 o
h = 200. W ⁄ m C = constant
·
m = 0.1 kg ⁄ sec

DIA = .05 m

The MSC Nastran input file is shown in Listing 5-39.

Main Index
 196 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 6 - Forced Convection Tube Flow - Constant Property Flow

Main Index
 CHAPTER 197

·
Listing 5-39 Example 6 Input File, m = .10
ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 153
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 6
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
TEMP(INIT) = 20
NLPARM = 100
BEGIN BULK
NLPARM,100
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.5,0.0,0.0
GRID,3,,1.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,4,,1.5,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,2.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,6,,2.5,0.0,0.0
GRID,7,,3.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,8,,3.5,0.0,0.0
GRID,9,,4.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,10,,4.5,0.0,0.0
GRID,11,,5.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,50,,50.0,50.0,50.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$

Main Index
 198 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 6 - Forced Convection Tube Flow - Constant Property Flow

·
Listing 5-39 Example 6 Input File, m = .10 (continued)
CHBDYP,10,25,FTUBE,,,1,2
CHBDYP,20,25,FTUBE,,,2,3
CHBDYP,30,25,FTUBE,,,3,4
CHBDYP,40,25,FTUBE,,,4,5
CHBDYP,50,25,FTUBE,,,5,6
CHBDYP,60,25,FTUBE,,,6,7
CHBDYP,70,25,FTUBE,,,7,8
CHBDYP,80,25,FTUBE,,,8,9
CHBDYP,90,25,FTUBE,,,9,10
CHBDYP,100,25,FTUBE,,,10,11
PHBDY,25,,0.05,0.05
$
CONVM,10,95,,50,99
CONVM,20,95,,50,99
CONVM,30,95,,50,99
CONVM,40,95,,50,99
CONVM,50,95,,50,99
CONVM,60,95,,50,99
CONVM,70,95,,50,99
CONVM,80,95,,50,99
CONVM,90,95,,50,99
CONVM,100,95,,50,99
$
PCONVM,95,15,0,1,200.0,0.0,0.0,0.0
MAT4,15,0.65,4200.0,1000.0,,1.0E-03
$
SPC,10,1,,100.0
SPC,10,99,,0.0
SPC,10,50,,0.1
$
TEMP,20,1,100.0
TEMP,20,99,0.0
TEMP,20,50,0.1
TEMPD,20,100.0
$
ENDDATA

·
Note: The input file reflects a mass flow rate of m = .10 kg/sec.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 199

Results
The abbreviated EX6.f06 output file is shown in Listing 5-40. A plot of temperature versus mass flow rate is
shown in Figure 5-20.

Main Index
 200 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 6 - Forced Convection Tube Flow - Constant Property Flow

·
Listing 5-40 Example 6 Results File, m = .10 Case
EXAMPLE 6 DECEMBER 3, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 12/ 2/93
PAGE 8

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

T E M P E R A T U R E V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
1 S 1.000000E+02 9.639484E+01 9.291965E+01 8.956976E+01 8.634062E+01 8.322791E+01
7 S 8.022740E+01 7.733508E+01 7.454703E+01 7.185950E+01 6.926884E+01
50 S 1.000000E-01
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 6 DECEMBER 3, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 12/ 2/93
PAGE 9

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

L O A D V E C T O R

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
7 S .0 .0 .0 .0 .0
50 S .0
99 S .0
EXAMPLE 6 DECEMBER 3, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 12/ 2/93
PAGE 10

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

F O R C E S O F S I N G L E - P O I N T C O N S T R A I N T

POINT ID. TYPE ID VALUE ID+1 VALUE ID+2 VALUE ID+3 VALUE ID+4 VALUE ID+5 VALUE
7 S .0 .0 .0 .0 .0
50 S .0
99 S -1.338981E+04
EXAMPLE 6 DECEMBER 3, 1993 MSC/NASTRAN 12/ 2/93
PAGE 11

LOAD STEP = 1.00000E+00

H E A T F L O W I N T O H B D Y E L E M E N T S (CHBDY)

ELEMENT-ID APPLIED-LOAD FREE-CONVECTION FORCED-CONVECTION RADIATION TOTAL

10 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -1.542481E+03 0.000000E+00 -1.542481E+03
20 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -1.486873E+03 0.000000E+00 -1.486873E+03
30 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -1.433269E+03 0.000000E+00 -1.433269E+03
40 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -1.381597E+03 0.000000E+00 -1.381597E+03
50 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -1.331788E+03 0.000000E+00 -1.331788E+03
60 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -1.283775E+03 0.000000E+00 -1.283775E+03
70 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -1.237493E+03 0.000000E+00 -1.237493E+03
80 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -1.192879E+03 0.000000E+00 -1.192879E+03
90 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -1.149874E+03 0.000000E+00 -1.149874E+03
100 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -1.108419E+03 0.000000E+00 -1.108419E+03

Main Index
 CHAPTER 201

100
(0.40, 91.1) (0.50, 92.8)

90 (0.30, 88.3)

(0.45, 92.1)
(0.20, 83.1) (0.25, 86.2)
(0.35, 90.0)
80
(0.15, 78.2)

T exit 70 (0.10, 69.3)

o
( C)
60

50
(0.05, 48.6)

40
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
·
m ( kg ⁄ sec )

Figure 5-20 Exit Temperature versus Mass Flow Rate

Example 7a - Transient Cool Down, Convection

Boundary

Demonstrated Principles
 Transient Solution Sequence
 Transient Solution Control
 Transient Temperature Specification
 Initial Conditions

Main Index
 202 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 7a - Transient Cool Down, Convection Boundary

 Transient Plots

Discussion
This example demonstrates the simplest of transient thermal responses. A single CHEXA element at an initial
temperature of 1000. °C is exposed to a free convection environment maintained at 0.0 °C. Transient
analysis involves the time-dependent storage as well as transport of thermal energy. Therefore, relative to
steady state analysis, the heat capacitance (storage) must be accounted for as well as any time dependencies
on loads and boundary conditions. A starting point or initial condition is required and a solution duration is
specified.
There are various techniques available for specifying temperature boundary conditions or ambient node
temperatures for transient analyses. If the temperature is to remain constant throughout the analysis, an SPC
should be used to set the boundary condition just as in steady state analysis.
Fundamental MSC Nastran X-Y plotting is demonstrated here for simple transient plots. Interface and File
Communication, 37 discusses this capability in more detail.
The MSC Nastran input file is shown in Listing 5-41.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 203

Main Index
 204 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 7a - Transient Cool Down, Convection Boundary

Listing 5-41 Example 7a Input File

ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 159
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 7A
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
IC = 20
TSTEPNL = 100
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)

Main Index
 CHAPTER 205

Listing 5-41 Example 7a Input File (continued)

XTITLE = TIME, SECONDS

YTITLE = TEMPERATURE DEGREES CELSIUS
TCURVE = TEMPERATURE VS. TIME

XYPLOT TEMP/1(T1)
BEGIN BULK
TSTEPNL,100,1500,100.0,1
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,3,,1.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,4,,1.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,0.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,6,,0.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,7,,1.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,8,,1.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CHEXA,1,5,1,2,3,4,5,6,+CHX1
+CHX1,7,8
PSOLID,5,15
MAT4,15,204.0,896.0,2707.0,10.0
$
CHBDYE,10,1,1
CHBDYE,20,1,2
CHBDYE,30,1,3
CHBDYE,40,1,4
CHBDYE,50,1,5
CHBDYE,60,1,6
$
CONV,10,35,,,99
CONV,20,35,,,99
CONV,30,35,,,99
CONV,40,35,,,99
CONV,50,35,,,99
CONV,60,35,,,99
PCONV,35,15,0,0.0
$
SPC,10,99,,0.0
TEMP,20,99,0.0
TEMPD,20,1000.0
$
ENDDATA

Main Index
 206 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 7a - Transient Cool Down, Convection Boundary

Note: TSTEPNL is identified in the Case Control Section, as are the NASPLT plot requests.

TSTEPNL provides the solution timing information in the Bulk Data Section.

MAT4 must have density and specific heat field data for transient analysis.

Results
An MSC Nastran X-Y plot of temperature versus time is shown in Figure 5-21. These plots were examined by
typing NASPLT EX7A.plt subsequent to the analysis. The EX7A.f06 file has large lists of temperature vs.
time for each grid point, and have been omitted here for the sake of brevity.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 207

Figure 5-21 Temperature versus Time

Main Index
 208 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 7b - Convection, Time Varying Ambient Temperature

Example 7b - Convection, Time Varying Ambient

Temperature

Demonstrated Principles
 General Time Varying Methodology
 Time-Varying Ambient Temperature

Discussion
The simple CHEXA element example is extended to illustrate convection with a time-varying ambient
temperature. In this case, the nonconstant temperature disallows the use of an SPC for this specification. The
transient form of the TEMPBC Bulk Data entry is demonstrated. The TEMPBC is treated with the same
methodology as a thermal load for transient analysis (see Figure 5-22 for input schematic). Note the Case
Control request for DLOAD = SID.

y
2 o
h = 100. W ⁄ m C

5 T∞ = f ( t ) (see Figure 5-23)

8
o
T element ( t = 0.0 ) = 0 C

6 7
4 x
1

2 3

Figure 5-22 Example 7b

Main Index
 CHAPTER 209

500.

T∞ ( t )

1000. 2000. 3000.

t ( sec )

Figure 5-23 T ∞ versus Time

Main Index
 210 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 7b - Convection, Time Varying Ambient Temperature

CASE CONTROL
DLOAD = SID

TLOADn SID DAREA DELAY TYPE TID

“LOAD” SID

DELAY SID P1 C1 T1 P2 C2 T2

TABLEDi ID X1
x1 y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 x4 y4

Figure 5-24 General Transient Load Methodology

The MSC Nastran input file is shown in Listing 5-42.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 211

Main Index
 212 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 7b - Convection, Time Varying Ambient Temperature

Listing 5-42 Example 7b Input File

ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 159
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 7B
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
IC = 20
TSTEPNL = 100
DLOAD = 200
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
XTITLE = TIME, SECONDS
YTITLE = GRID 1 TEMPERATURE DEGREES CELSIUS
TCURVE = GRID 1 TEMPERATURE VS. TIME
XYPLOT TEMP/1(T1)
XTITLE = TIME, SECONDS
YTITLE = AMBIENT TEMPERATURE DEGREES CELSIUS
TCURVE = AMBIENT TEMPERATURE VS. TIME
XYPLOT TEMP/99(T1)
BEGIN BULK
TSTEPNL,100,7500,1.0,1,,,,U
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,3,,1.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,4,,1.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,0.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,6,,0.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,7,,1.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,8,,1.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CHEXA,1,5,1,2,3,4,5,6,+CHX1
+CHX1,7,8
PSOLID,5,15
MAT4,15,204.0,896.0,2707.0,100.0
$
CHBDYE,10,1,1
CHBDYE,20,1,2
CHBDYE,30,1,3
CHBDYE,40,1,4

Main Index
 CHAPTER 213

Listing 5-42 Example 7b Input File (continued)

CHBDYE,50,1,5
CHBDYE,60,1,6
$
CONV,10,35,,,99
CONV,20,35,,,99
CONV,30,35,,,99
CONV,40,35,,,99
CONV,50,35,,,99
CONV,60,35,,,99
PCONV,35,15,0,0.0
$
TLOAD1,200,300,,,400
TABLED1,400,,,,,,,,+TBD1
+TBD1,0.0,0.0,1000.0,1.0,2000.0,1.0,3000.0,0.0,+TBD2
+TBD2,4000.0,0.0,ENDT
TEMPBC,300,TRAN,500.0,99
TEMP,20,99,0.0
TEMPD,20,0.0
$
ENDDATA

Results
An MSC Nastran X-Y plot of ambient temperature versus time is shown in Figure 5-25. An MSC Nastran X-
Y plot of grid 1 temperature versus time is shown in Figure 5-26.

Main Index
 214 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 7b - Convection, Time Varying Ambient Temperature

Figure 5-25 Ambient Temperature versus Time

Main Index
 CHAPTER 215

Figure 5-26 Grid 1 Temperature versus Time

Main Index
 216 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 7c - Time Varying Loads

Example 7c - Time Varying Loads

Demonstrated Principle
 Time-Varying Loads

Discussion
As discussed in regard to steady state analysis (see Thermal Loads, 14), internal heat generation is considered to
be a thermal load and as such is Case Control selectable. In a transient analysis, this allows for using the time
loading scheme illustrated in the previous example (see Figure 5-24). This methodology can be applied to any
SID selectable load.

2 o
h = 100. W ⁄ m C
y
HGEN = 10.
o
5 8 T ∞ = 0. C
o
T element ( t = 0.0 ) = 0. C

6 7
x
1 4

2 3

Figure 5-27 Example 7c

Main Index
 CHAPTER 217

10,000.

QVOL
3
(W ⁄ m )

1000. 2000.

t ( sec )

Figure 5-28 Internal Heat Generation Rate versus Time

The MSC Nastran input file is shown in Listing 5-43.

Main Index
 218 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 7c - Time Varying Loads

Main Index
 CHAPTER 219

Listing 5-43 Example 7c Input File

ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 159
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 7C
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
SPC = 10
IC = 20
TSTEPNL = 100
DLOAD = 200
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
XTITLE = TIME, SECONDS
YTITLE = GRID 1 TEMPERATURE DEGREES CELSIUS
TCURVE = GRID 1 TEMPERATURE VS. TIME
XYPLOT TEMP/1(T1)
BEGIN BULK
TSTEPNL,100,5900,1.0,1
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,3,,1.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,4,,1.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,0.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,6,,0.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,7,,1.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,8,,1.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$

Main Index
 220 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 7c - Time Varying Loads

Listing 5-43 Example 7c Input File (continued)

CHEXA,1,5,1,2,3,4,5,6,+CHX1
+CHX1,7,8
PSOLID,5,15
MAT4,15,204.0,896.0,2707.0,100.0,,10.0
$
CHBDYE,10,1,1
CHBDYE,20,1,2
CHBDYE,30,1,3
CHBDYE,40,1,4
CHBDYE,50,1,5
CHBDYE,60,1,6
$
CONV,10,35,,,99
CONV,20,35,,,99
CONV,30,35,,,99
CONV,40,35,,,99
CONV,50,35,,,99
CONV,60,35,,,99
PCONV,35,15,0,0.0
$
TLOAD1,200,300,,,400
TABLED1,400,,,,,,,,+TBD1
+TBD1,0.0,0.0,1000.0,1.0,2000.0,0.0,3000.0,0.0,+TBD2
+TBD2,ENDT
QVOL,300,10000.0,,1
$
SPC,10,99,,0.0
TEMP,20,99,0.0
TEMPD,20,0.0
$
ENDDATA

Note: HGEN field on MAT4 is 10.0. It multiplies the QVOL entry.

Results
An MSC Nastran X-Y plot of grid 1 temperature versus time is shown in Figure 5-29.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 221

Figure 5-29 Grid 1 Temperature versus Time

Main Index
 222 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 7d - Time Varying Heat Transfer Coefficient

Example 7d - Time Varying Heat Transfer Coefficient

Demonstrated Principles
 Specification of Multiple Loads.

Discussion
There are a number of boundary conditions which are not defined as loads (Thermal Capabilities, 9) and as a
result cannot be made time varying in the same fashion as described in Example 7c - Time Varying Loads, 216. In
most cases, transient behavior can be introduced into the boundary condition (convection or radiation)
through specification of a control node. The control node can be a simple free grid point, an SPOINT, or an
active degree of freedom in the system. In this example we drive the value of the control node explicitly via
TEMPBC and related TLOAD1 and TABLED1 statements to produce a free convection heat transfer
coefficient which varies with time. We also demonstrate the use of the DLOAD statement in the Bulk Data
for applying more than one TLOADi in the same analysis.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 223

y o
h = 1000. W ⁄ m 2 C
o
T ∞ = 0. C (grid point 99)

Q 0 = 6. ⋅ (50,000.) W
o
T element ( t = 0.0 ) = 0. C
5
8

6 7
x
1 4

2 3

Figure 5-30 Example 7d

Main Index
 224 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 7d - Time Varying Heat Transfer Coefficient

1.0

U CN

0.0
1000. 2000.

t ( sec )

Figure 5-31 Control Node (Grid Point 50) for Free Convection Boundary Condition

The MSC Nastran input file is shown in Listing 5-44.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 225

Main Index
 226 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 7d - Time Varying Heat Transfer Coefficient

Listing 5-44 Example 7d Input File

ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 159
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 7D
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
IC = 20
TSTEPNL = 100
DLOAD = 200
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
XTITLE = TIME, SECONDS
YTITLE = GRID 1 TEMPERATURE DEGREES CELSIUS
TCURVE = GRID 1 TEMPERATURE VS. TIME
XYPLOT TEMP/1(T1)
XTITLE = TIME, SECONDS
YTITLE = GRID 50 TEMPERATURE DEGREES CELSIUS
TCURVE = GRID 50 TEMPERATURE VS. TIME
XYPLOT TEMP/50(T1)
BEGIN BULK
TSTEPNL,100,490,10.0,,,,U
$

Main Index
 CHAPTER 227

Listing 5-44 Example 7d Input File (continued)

GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,3,,1.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,4,,1.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,0.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,6,,0.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,7,,1.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,8,,1.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,50,,50.0,50.0,50.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CHEXA,1,5,1,2,3,4,5,6,+CHX1
+CHX1,7,8
PSOLID,5,15
MAT4,15,204.0,896.0,2707.0,1000.0
$
CHBDYE,10,1,1
CHBDYE,20,1,2
CHBDYE,30,1,3
CHBDYE,40,1,4
CHBDYE,50,1,5
CHBDYE,60,1,6
$
CONV,10,35,,50,99
CONV,20,35,,50,99
CONV,30,35,,50,99
CONV,40,35,,50,99
CONV,50,35,,50,99
CONV,60,35,,50,99
PCONV,35,15,0,0.0
$
DLOAD,200,1.0,1.0,300,1.0,400
$
TLOAD1,300,500,,,700
TABLED1,700,,,,,,,,+TBD700
+TBD700,0.0,1.0,1000.0,1.0,ENDT
QBDY3,500,50000.0,,10,THRU,60,BY,10
$
TLOAD1,400,600,,,800
TABLED1,800,,,,,,,,+TBD800
+TBD800,0.0,0.0,1000.0,0.0,2000.0,1.0,5000.0,1.0,+TBD801
+TBD801,ENDT
TEMPBC,600,TRAN,1.0,50

Main Index
 228 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 7d - Time Varying Heat Transfer Coefficient

Listing 5-44 Example 7d Input File (continued)

SPC,10,99,,0.0
TEMP,20,99,0.0
TEMPD,20,0.0
$
ENDDATA

Results
An MSC Nastran X-Y plot of the control node, grid point 50, temperature versus time is shown in Figure 5-32.
An MSC Nastran X-Y plot of grid point 1 temperature versus time is shown in Figure 5-33.

Figure 5-32 Grid 50 Temperature versus Time

Main Index
 CHAPTER 229

Figure 5-33 Grid 1 Temperature versus Time Examples

Main Index
 230 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 7e - Temperature Dependent Free Convection Heat Transfer Coefficient

Example 7e - Temperature Dependent Free Convection

Heat Transfer Coefficient

Demonstrated Principle
 Temperature Dependent Heat Transfer Coefficient

Discussion
The extension of the temperature dependent free convection heat transfer coefficient is demonstrated for
transient analysis. The user specification of this capability is treated the same as in the steady state case, but
due to the evolutionary nature of the transient problem, the heat transfer coefficient becomes an implicit
function of time.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 231

o o
h ( T ) = 0. W ⁄ m 2 C ( T ≤ 100. C )
o o o
h ( T ) = 10. ⋅ T – 1000. W ⁄ m 2 C ( 100. C > T > 200. C )
o o
h ( T ) = 1000. W ⁄ m 2 C ( T ≥ 200. C )
o
y T ∞ = 0. C (grid point 99)

Q 0 = 6. ⋅ (50,000.) W

o
T element ( t = 0.0 ) = 0. C

5
8

6 7
x
1 4

2 3

Figure 5-34 Example 7e

Main Index
 232 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 7e - Temperature Dependent Free Convection Heat Transfer Coefficient

1000.

h(T)
o
( W ⁄ m2 C )

100. 200.

o
T ( C)

Figure 5-35 h(T) versus T

The MSC Nastran input file is shown in Listing 5-45.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 233

Main Index
 234 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 7e - Temperature Dependent Free Convection Heat Transfer Coefficient

Listing 5-45 Example 7e Input File

ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 159
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 7E
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
IC = 20
TSTEPNL = 100
DLOAD = 300
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
XTITLE = TIME, SECONDS
YTITLE = GRID 1 TEMPERATURE DEGREES CELSIUS
TCURVE = GRID 1 TEMPERATURE VS. TIME
XYPLOT TEMP/1(T1)
BEGIN BULK
TSTEPNL,100,390,10.0,1
$

Main Index
 CHAPTER 235

Listing 5-45 Example 7e Input File (continued)

GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,3,,1.0,0.0,1.0
GRID,4,,1.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,0.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,6,,0.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,7,,1.0,1.0,1.0
GRID,8,,1.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CHEXA,1,5,1,2,3,4,5,6,+CHX1
+CHX1,7,8
PSOLID,5,15
MAT4,15,204.0,896.0,2707.0,1000.0
MATT4,15,,,,40
TABLEM2,40,0.0,,,,,,,+TBM1
+TBM1,0.0,0.0,100.0,0.0,200.0,1.0,1000.0,1.0,+TBM2
+TBM2,ENDT
$
CHBDYE,10,1,1
CHBDYE,20,1,2
CHBDYE,30,1,3
CHBDYE,40,1,4
CHBDYE,50,1,5
CHBDYE,60,1,6
$
CONV,10,35,,,99
CONV,20,35,,,99
CONV,30,35,,,99
CONV,40,35,,,99
CONV,50,35,,,99
CONV,60,35,,,99
PCONV,35,15,0,0.0
$
TLOAD1,300,500,,,700
TABLED1,700,,,,,,,,+TBD700
+TBD700,0.0,1.0,1000.0,1.0,ENDT
QBDY3,500,50000.0,,10,THRU,60,BY,10
$
SPC,10,99,,0.0
TEMP,20,99,0.0
TEMPD,20,0.0
$
ENDDATA

Main Index
 236 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 7e - Temperature Dependent Free Convection Heat Transfer Coefficient

Results
An MSC Nastran X-Y plot of grid 1 temperature versus time is shown in Figure 5-36.

Figure 5-36 Grid 1 Temperature versus Time

Main Index
 CHAPTER 237

Example 7f - Phase Change

Demonstrated Principles
 Capturing Latent Heat Effects
 Appropriate Convergence Criteria
 Numerical Damping
 Consistent Units
 Enthalpy

Discussion
Latent heat effects can be captured by specifying phase change material properties on the MAT4 Bulk Data
entry. The information required includes the latent heat and a finite temperature range over which the phase
change is to occur. For pure materials, this range can physically be quite small whereas for solutions or alloys
the range can be quite large. Numerically, the wider the range the better. It is not recommended to make
this range less than a few degrees.
Phase change involves the release of considerable amounts of heat while the temperature remains nearly
constant. In this case, it is beneficial to consider the change in enthalpy as illustrated in Figure 5-37. The
calculated enthalpies are available with the use of DIAG 50, 51, or by the Case Control command
ENTHALPY = ALL. The solution sequence for the phase change specific algorithm is discussed in Method
of Solution, 61.
In the cases that follow, the first variation illustrates freezing. Variation 2 demonstrates melting.

Main Index
 238 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 7f - Phase Change

o
y h = 100. W ⁄ m 2 C

QLAT = 3.34 × 10 5 J ⁄ kg
o
TCH = 0. C
o
TDELTA = 2. C
5 o
8 T ∞ = – 20. C

o
T element ( t = 0 ) = – 20. C
6 7
x
1 4

2 3

Figure 5-37 Example 7f1 Variation 1

The MSC Nastran input file is shown in Listing 5-46.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 239

Main Index
 240 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 7f - Phase Change

Listing 5-46 Example 7f1 Variation 1 Input File

ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 159
DIAG 51
TIME 10
CEND
$
TITLE = EXAMPLE 7F1
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
ENTHALPY = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
IC = 20
TSTEPNL = 100
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
XTITLE = TIME, SECONDS

Main Index
 CHAPTER 241

Listing 5-46 Example 7f1 Variation 1 Input File (continued)

YTITLE = TEMPERATURE DEGREES CELSIUS

TCURVE = TEMPERATURE VS. TIME
XYPLOT TEMP/1(T1)
BEGIN BULK
PARAM,NDAMP,0.1
TSTEPNL,100,980,5.0,1,,,,,+TSTP
+TSTP,0.001
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.0,0.0,0.1
GRID,3,,0.1,0.0,0.1
GRID,4,,0.1,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,0.0,0.1,0.0
GRID,6,,0.0,0.1,0.1
GRID,7,,0.1,0.1,0.1
GRID,8,,0.1,0.1,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CHEXA,1,5,1,2,3,4,5,6,+CHX1
+CHX1,7,8
PSOLID,5,15
MAT4,15,0.569,4217.0,1000.0,100.0,,,0.0,+MAT4
+MAT4,0.0,2.0,3.34E5
$
CHBDYE,10,1,1
CHBDYE,20,1,2
CHBDYE,30,1,3
CHBDYE,40,1,4
CHBDYE,50,1,5
CHBDYE,60,1,6
$
CONV,10,35,,,99
CONV,20,35,,,99
CONV,30,35,,,99
CONV,40,35,,,99
CONV,50,35,,,99
CONV,60,35,,,99
PCONV,35,15,0,0.0
$
SPC,10,99,,-20.0
TEMP,20,99,-20.0
TEMPD,20,20.0
$
ENDDATA

Main Index
 242 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 7f - Phase Change

Note: NDAMP provides numerical damping for the phase change phenomenon.

Results - Variation 1
An MSC Nastran X-Y plot of temperature versus time is shown in Figure 5-38.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 243

Figure 5-38 Temperature versus Time (Variation 1)

Main Index
 244 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 7f - Phase Change

Variation 2
o
h = 100. W ⁄ m 2 C
y
QLAT = 3.34 × 10 5 J ⁄ kg
o
TCH = 0. C
o
TDELTA = 2. C
o
5 T ∞ = – 20. C
8
o
T element ( t = 0 ) = 20. C

6 7
x
1 4

2 3

Figure 5-39 Example 7f2 Variation 2

Main Index
 CHAPTER 245

Listing 5-47 Example 7f2 Variation 2 Input File

ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 159
DIAG 51
TIME 10
CEND
$
TITLE = EXAMPLE 7F2
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
IC = 20
TSTEPNL = 100
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)

Main Index
 246 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 7f - Phase Change

Listing 5-47 Example 7f2 Variation 2 Input File (continued)

XTITLE = TIME, SECONDS

YTITLE = TEMPERATURE DEGREES CELSIUS
TCURVE = TEMPERATURE VS. TIME
XYPLOT TEMP/1(T1)
BEGIN BULK
PARAM,NDAMP,0.1
TSTEPNL,100,980,5.0,1,,,,U,+TSTP
+TSTP,0.001
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.0,0.0,0.1
GRID,3,,0.1,0.0,0.1
GRID,4,,0.1,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,0.0,0.1,0.0
GRID,6,,0.0,0.1,0.1
GRID,7,,0.1,0.1,0.1
GRID,8,,0.1,0.1,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CHEXA,1,5,1,2,3,4,5,6,+CHX1
+CHX1,7,8
PSOLID,5,15
MAT4,15,1.88,2040.0,920.0,100.0,,,0.0,+MAT4
+MAT4,0.0,2.0,3.34E5
$
CHBDYE,10,1,1
CHBDYE,20,1,2
CHBDYE,30,1,3
CHBDYE,40,1,4
CHBDYE,50,1,5
CHBDYE,60,1,6
$
CONV,10,35,,,99
CONV,20,35,,,99
CONV,30,35,,,99
CONV,40,35,,,99
CONV,50,35,,,99
CONV,60,35,,,99
PCONV,35,15,0,0.0
$
SPC,10,99,,20.0
TEMP,20,99,20.0
TEMPD,20,-20.0
$
ENDDATA
Main Index
 CHAPTER 247

Results - Variation 2
An MSC Nastran X-Y plot of temperature versus time is shown in Figure 5-40.

Figure 5-40 Temperature versus Time (Variation 2)

Main Index
 248 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 8 - Temperature Boundary Conditions in Transient Analyses

Example 8 - Temperature Boundary Conditions in

Transient Analyses

Demonstrated Principles
 SPC for Transient Analysis
 TEMPBC for Transient Analysis
 SLOAD and CELASi for Transient Analysis
 Nodal Lumped Heat Capacitance
 POINT type CHBDYi

Discussion
A radiative equilibrium analysis is used to demonstrate different methods of temperature specification for
transient analyses. As discussed in Thermal Capabilities, 9, an SPC is used when the temperature is to remain
constant for the duration of the analysis (Variation 1). When the temperature is to vary during the analysis,
two methods are available. A TEMPBC of type TRAN, or a CELASi with applied SLOAD can be used.
When a TEMPBC is implemented (Variation 2), a thermal conductivity matrix element of magnitude of
1.0E+10 is imposed internally in the form of a penalty method. For many problems this will be adequate for
maintaining the grid point temperature while facilitating convergence. In some cases, however, the size of
this conductance can be overwhelming with respect to those of the rest of the model. In such a case, it may
be difficult to satisfy the convergence criteria due to the dominance of one matrix conductance value.
The alternative approach to this problem is to use a CELASi element and specify a consistent conductance
or stiffness value for the model in question (Variation 3). The QHBDY power level can be adjusted to
maintain the desired temperature.

o
RADBC T ∞ = 300 C
o
QHBDY
T element ( t = 0 ) = 0 K

Q 0 = 10,000. W ⁄ m 2
Area = 1.0 m 2
ε = α = 1.0
m = 10. kg

Figure 5-41 Example 8

The MSC Nastran input file is shown in Listing 5-48.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 249

Listing 5-48 Example 8a Input File

ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 159
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 8A
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
IC = 20
TSTEPNL = 100
DLOAD = 200
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
XTITLE = TIME, SECONDS
YTITLE = GRID 1 TEMPERATURE KELVIN
TCURVE = GRID 1 TEMPERATURE VS. TIME
XYPLOT TEMP/1(T1)
BEGIN BULK
PARAM,TABS,0.0
PARAM,SIGMA,5.67E-8
TSTEPNL,100,1500,1.0,1
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CDAMP5,1,5,1
PDAMP5,5,15,10.0
MAT4,15,204.0,896.0
$
CHBDYP,10,25,POINT,,,1,,,+CHP10
+CHP10,45,,,,1.0,0.0,0.0
PHBDY,25,1.0
$
RADM,45,1.0,1.0
RADBC,99,1.0,,10
$
TLOAD1,200,300,,,400
TABLED1,400,,,,,,,,+TBD400
+TBD400,0.0,1.0,1000.0,1.0,ENDT
QHBDY,300,POINT,10000.0,1.0,1
$

Main Index
 250 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 8 - Temperature Boundary Conditions in Transient Analyses

Listing 5-48 Example 8a Input File (continued)

SPC,10,99,,300.0
TEMP,20,99,300.0
TEMPD,20,0.0
$
ENDDATA

Main Index
 CHAPTER 251

An MSC Nastran X-Y plot of grid 1 temperature versus time is shown in Figure 5-42.

Figure 5-42 Grid 1 Temperature versus Time

Main Index
 252 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 8 - Temperature Boundary Conditions in Transient Analyses

Main Index
 CHAPTER 253

Listing 5-49 Example 8b Input File

ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 159
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 8B
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
IC = 20
TSTEPNL = 100
DLOAD = 700
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
XTITLE = TIME, SECONDS
YTITLE = GRID 1 TEMPERATURE KELVIN
TCURVE = GRID 1 TEMPERATURE VS. TIME
XYPLOT TEMP/1(T1)
BEGIN BULK
PARAM,TABS,0.0
PARAM,SIGMA,5.67E-8
TSTEPNL,100,1500,1.0,1,,,,U
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CDAMP5,1,5,1
PDAMP5,5,15,10.0
MAT4,15,204.0,896.0
$
CHBDYP,10,25,POINT,,,1,,,+CHP10
+CHP10,45,,,,1.0,0.0,0.0
PHBDY,25,1.0
$
RADM,45,1.0,1.0
RADBC,99,1.0,,10
$
DLOAD,700,1.0,1.0,200,1.0,500
TABLED1,400,,,,,,,,+TBD400
+TBD400,0.0,1.0,1000.0,1.0,ENDT
$
TLOAD1,200,300,,,400
QHBDY,300,POINT,10000.0,1.0,1
$

Main Index
 254 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 8 - Temperature Boundary Conditions in Transient Analyses

Listing 5-49 Example 8b Input File

TLOAD1,500,600,,,400
TEMPBC,600,TRAN,300.0,99
TEMP,20,99,300.0
TEMPD,20,0.0
$
ENDDATA

Main Index
 CHAPTER 255

Figure 5-43 Grid 1 Temperature versus Time

Main Index
 256 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 8 - Temperature Boundary Conditions in Transient Analyses

Main Index
 CHAPTER 257

Listing 5-50 Example 8c Input File

ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 159
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 8C
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
IC = 20
TSTEPNL = 100
DLOAD = 700
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
XTITLE = TIME, SECONDS
YTITLE = GRID 1 TEMPERATURE KELVIN
TCURVE = GRID 1 TEMPERATURE VS. TIME
XYPLOT TEMP/1(T1)
BEGIN BULK
PARAM,TABS,0.0
PARAM,SIGMA,5.67E-8
TSTEPNL,100,1500,1.0,1
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CDAMP5,1,5,1
PDAMP5,5,15,10.0
MAT4,15,204.0,896.0
$
CHBDYP,10,25,POINT,,,1,,,+CHP10
+CHP10,45,,,,1.0,0.0,0.0
PHBDY,25,1.0
$
RADM,45,1.0,1.0
RADBC,99,1.0,,10
$
DLOAD,700,1.0,1.0,200,1.0,500
TABLED1,400,,,,,,,,+TBD400
+TBD400,0.0,1.0,1000.0,1.0,ENDT
$
TLOAD1,200,300,,,400
QHBDY,300,POINT,10000.0,1.0,1
$

Main Index
 258 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 8 - Temperature Boundary Conditions in Transient Analyses

Listing 5-50 Example 8c Input File

TLOAD1,500,600,,,400
CELAS2,999,1.0E5,99,1
SLOAD,600,99,300.0E5
TEMP,20,99,300.0
TEMPD,20,0.0
$
ENDDATA

Main Index
 CHAPTER 259

Figure 5-44 Grid 1 Temperature versus Time

Main Index
 260 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 9a - Diurnal Thermal Cycles

Example 9a - Diurnal Thermal Cycles

Demonstrated Principles
 Diurnal Heat Loads
 Multiple Loads / Multiple CHBDYi’s

Discussion
A diurnal heat transfer analysis is performed over a two day cycle. The TLOAD2 Bulk Data entry is used to
specify the load function (QVECT) in convenient sinusoidal format. A radiation boundary condition
provides the heat loss mechanism to an ambient environment at 300 degrees. In Example 9a, the absorptivity
and emissivity are constant and the loading is a function of time based on the load magnitude which reflects
a projected area without treating the QVECT as a vector load.
In Example 9b - Diurnal Thermal Cycles, 267, the variation of absorptivity with respect to time is added to the
problem.

Period T = 24 hr = 86,400 sec 3 QVECT

1 4 RADBC
Frequency F = --- = 1.157 × 10 – 5 Hz
T
2
1
750.0

QVECT
( W ⁄ m2 ) 0 21,600 43,200 64,800 86,400 108,000 129,600 151,200 172,800 t ( sec )

Day 1 Day 2

Main Index
 CHAPTER 261

Day 1 Day 2

Sunrise t=0 t = 86,400

Noon t = 21,600 t = 108,000

Sunset t = 43,200 t = 129,600

Night 43,200 < t < 86,400 129,600 < t < 172,800

Figure 5-45 Example 9a

 Sun heating aluminum plate over two days.

 Solar flux = 750 W/m2 at noon. Plate is one square meter and 0.005 meters thick. Ambient
temperature is 300°K.
2
 Solar flux magnitude varies sinusoidally with an amplitude of 750.0 W ⁄ m , and a period of one
day.
 CHBDYG 10 absorbs heat for the first day.
 CHBDYG 20 absorbs heat for the second day.
 CHBDYG 30 radiates heat both days.
Example 9b only:
 Grid 50 is the control node on the QVECT entry. It is forced to vary with time as absorptivity (a)
varies with the “attack” angle of the sun, i.e.,

U CNTRLND α(θ)

t θ

 So the value of U CNTRLND equals α ( θ ) at any given time (or any given angle:
o o
180 → 12 hr = 43,200 sec, 1 → 240 sec ).
 Absorptivity is set to 1.0 on the RADM card so that U CNTRLND will act as absorptivity:

Main Index
 262 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 9a - Diurnal Thermal Cycles

P in = α [ e ( t ) ⋅ n ] F ( t – τ ) Q 0 U CNTRLND

{
1.0 α(θ)

P in = α [ e ( t ) ⋅ n ] F ( t – τ ) Q 0 α ( θ )
Ex9a. - α = constant
 Ex9b. - α = f(θ)
The MSC Nastran input file is shown in Listing 5-51.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 263

Main Index
 264 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 9a - Diurnal Thermal Cycles

Listing 5-51 Example 9a Input File

ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 159
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 9A
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
FLUX = ALL
SPCF = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
SPC = 10
IC = 20
TSTEPNL = 100
DLOAD = 200
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
XTITLE = TIME, SECONDS
YTITLE = PLATE TEMPERATURE KELVIN
TCURVE = PLATE TEMPERATURE VS. TIME
XYPLOT TEMP/1(T1)
BEGIN BULK
PARAM,TABS,0.0
PARAM,SIGMA,5.67E-08
TSTEPNL,100,1728,100.0,1,,,,U
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,1.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,3,,1.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,4,,0.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CQUAD4,1,5,1,2,3,4
PSHELL,5,15,0.005
MAT4,15,204.0,896.0,2707.0
$
CHBDYG,10,,AREA4,,,45,,,+CHG10
+CHG10,1,2,3,4
CHBDYG,20,,AREA4,,,45,,,+CHG20
+CHG20,1,2,3,4
CHBDYG,30,,AREA4,,,45,,,+CHG30
+CHG30,4,3,2,1
$
DLOAD,200,1.0,1.0,300,1.0,400
TLOAD2,300,1000,,,0.0,43200.0,1.157E-5,-90.0,+TLD300
+TLD300,0.0,0.0

Main Index
 CHAPTER 265

Listing 5-51 Example 9a Input File (continued)

TLOAD2,400,2000,,,86400.0,129600.0,1.157E-5,-90.0,+TLD400
+TLD400,0.0,0.0
QVECT,1000,750.0,,,0.0,0.0,-1.0,,+QVCT1
+QVCT1,10
QVECT,2000,750.0,,,0.0,0.0,-1.0,,+QVCT2
+QVCT2,20
RADM,45,0.6,0.6
RADBC,99,1.0,,30
$
SPC,10,99,,300.0
TEMPD,20,300.0
$
ENDDATA

Results
An MSC Nastran X-Y plot of plate temperature versus time is shown in Figure 5-46.

Main Index
 266 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 9a - Diurnal Thermal Cycles

Figure 5-46 Plate Temperature versus Time

Main Index
 CHAPTER 267

Example 9b - Diurnal Thermal Cycles

Demonstrated Principles
 Diurnal Heat Loads
 Multiple Loads / Multiple CHBDYi’s
 Control Node for Directionally Dependent Radiation Surface Properties

Discussion
The loading pattern is substantially unchanged from the previous example; however, the effect of variation
of surface absorptivity with angle of incident solar radiation is taken into account implicitly via the control
node. As in the previous example, we provide independent CHBDY surface elements for each load and
boundary condition specification resulting in a total of three surface elements attached to the conduction
element. This can sometimes be convenient for postprocessing if we wish to isolate applied load segments
of the same type.
The MSC Nastran input file is shown in Listing 5-52.

Main Index
 268 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 9b - Diurnal Thermal Cycles

Main Index
 CHAPTER 269

Listing 5-52 Example 9b Input File

ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 159
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 9B
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
SPC = 10
IC = 20
TSTEPNL = 100
DLOAD = 200
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
XTITLE = TIME, SECONDS
YTITLE = PLATE TEMPERATURE KELVIN
TCURVE = PLATE TEMPERATURE VS. TIME
XYPLOT TEMP/1(T1)
XTITLE = TIME, SECONDS--THETA, DEGREES -- (1.0 DEGREE = 240.0 SECONDS)
YTITLE = ABSORPTIVITY
TCURVE = ABSORPTIVITY VS. TIME--THETA
XYPLOT TEMP/50(T1)
XTITLE = TIME, SECONDS--THETA, DEGREES -- (1.0 DEGREE = 240.0 SECONDS)
YTITLE = ABSORPTIVITY
TCURVE = ABSORPTIVITY VS. TIME--THETA
XMIN = 21600.0
XMAX = 43200.0
XYPLOT TEMP/50(T1)
BEGIN BULK
PARAM,TABS,0.0
PARAM,SIGMA,5.67E-08
TSTEPNL,100,1728,100.0,1,,,,U
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,1.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,3,,1.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,4,,0.0,1.0,0.0
GRID,50,,50.0,50.0,50.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CQUAD4,1,5,1,2,3,4
PSHELL,5,15,0.005
MAT4,15,204.0,896.0,2707.0
RADM,45,1.0,0.6
RADM,46,0.6,0.6
$

Main Index
 270 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 9b - Diurnal Thermal Cycles

Listing 5-52 Example 9b Input File (continued)

CHBDYG,10,,AREA4,,,45,,,+CHG10
+CHG10,1,2,3,4
CHBDYG,20,,AREA4,,,45,,,+CHG20
+CHG20,1,2,3,4
CHBDYG,30,,AREA4,,,46,,,+CHG30
+CHG30,4,3,2,1
DLOAD,200,1.0,1.0,300,1.0,400,1.0,500
TLOAD2,300,1000,,,0.0,43200.0,1.157E-5,-90.0,+TLD300
+TLD300,0.0,0.0
TLOAD2,400,2000,,,86400.0,129600.0,1.157E-5,-90.0,+TLD400
+TLD400,0.0,0.0
QVECT,1000,750.0,,,0.0,0.0,-1.0,50,+QVCT1
+QVCT1,10
QVECT,2000,750.0,,,0.0,0.0,-1.0,50,+QVCT2
+QVCT2,20
RADBC,99,1.0,,30
$
TLOAD1,500,600,,,700
TABLED1,700,,,,,,,,+TBD1
+TBD1,0.0,0.15,2400.0,0.50,3600.0,0.60,4800.0,0.55,+TBD2
+TBD2,7200.0,0.375,9600.0,0.275,12000.0,0.225,14400.0,0.20,+TBD3
+TBD3,16800.0,0.16,19200.0,0.15,21600.0,0.15,24000.0,0.15,+TBD4
+TBD4,26400.0,0.16,28800.0,0.20,31200.0,0.225,33600.0,0.275,+TBD5
+TBD5,36000.0,0.375,38400.0,0.55,39600.0,0.60,40800.0,0.50,+TBD6
+TBD6,43200.0,0.15,86400.0,0.15,88800.0,0.50,90000.0,0.60,+TBD7
+TBD7,91200.0,0.55,93600.0,0.375,96000.0,0.275,98400.0,0.225,+TBD8
+TBD8,100800.0,0.20,103200.0,0.16,105600.0,0.15,108000.0,0.15,+TBD9
+TBD9,110400.0,0.15,112800.0,0.16,115200.0,0.20,117600.0,0.225,+TBD10
+TBD10,120000.0,0.275,122400.0,0.375,124800.0,0.55,126000.0,0.60,+TBD11
+TBD11,127200.0,0.50,129600.0,0.15,172800.0,0.15,ENDT
TEMPBC,600,TRAN,1.0,50
$
SPC,10,99,,300.0
TEMP,20,50,0.15
TEMPD,20,300.0
$
ENDDATA

Results
MSC Nastran X-Y plots showing absorptivity versus time are shown in Figure 5-48 and Figure 5-49. Plate
temperature versus time is shown in Figure 5-50.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 271

Figure 5-47

Main Index
 272 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 9b - Diurnal Thermal Cycles

QVECT
n̂

Figure 5-48 α ( θ ) versus θ

Figure 5-49 α ( θ ) versus θ

Main Index
 CHAPTER 273

Figure 5-50 Plate Temperature versus Time

Main Index
 274 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 10 - Thermostat Control

Example 10 - Thermostat Control

Demonstrated Principles
 NOLINs and MPCs
 Thermostat Control

Discussion
A thermostat is modeled using the nonlinear transient forcing function (NOLIN3) as a heating element and
the multi-point constraint (MPC) relationship to provide the thermostat connections. One end of the rod
element structure has the thermocouple attached to it and is subject to convective losses to the ambient
environment at 0.0 °C . When this local temperature drops below 100.0 °C , heating occurs at the opposite
end of the structure at a constant rate. Conversely, when the thermocouple temperature exceeds 100.0 °C ,
the heat load is removed. There is an inherent delay in this system associated with the distance between the
thermocouple and the point of application of the heat load as well as the delay generated as a result of the
thermal diffusivity of the material.

P IN ( t ) T ∞ = 0.0

h = 200.
(NOLIN3) 1 2 3 4 5 6
MPC
o
T 0 = 110

(Initial Condition)

– T 50 + 100. ⋅ T 51 – T 6 = 0
 
 50,000. , T 50 > 0 
P IN ( t ) =   Let T 51 = 1.0
 0.0 , T 50 ≤ 0 
  T 50 = – 1.0 ( – 100. + T 6 )

Dummy Grid Points: 50, 51, 99

Figure 5-51 Example 10

The MSC Nastran input file is shown in Listing 5-53.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 275

Main Index
 276 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 10 - Thermostat Control

Listing 5-53 Example 10 Input File

ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 159
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 10
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
SPC = 10
IC = 20
MPC = 30
TSTEPNL = 100
NONLINEAR = 300
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
XTITLE = TIME, SECONDS
YTITLE = GRID 1 TEMPERATURE DEGREES CELSIUS
TCURVE = GRID 1 TEMPERATURE VS. TIME
XYPLOT TEMP/1(T1)
XTITLE = TIME, SECONDS
YTITLE = GRID 6 TEMPERATURE DEGREES CELSIUS
TCURVE = GRID 6 TEMPERATURE VS. TIME
XYPLOT TEMP/6(T1)
BEGIN BULK
TSTEPNL,100,30000,1.0,1
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.1,0.0,0.0
GRID,3,,0.2,0.0,0.0
GRID,4,,0.3,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,0.4,0.0,0.0
GRID,6,,0.5,0.0,0.0
GRID,50,,50.0,50.0,50.0
GRID,51,,51.0,51.0,51.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CROD,1,5,1,2
CROD,2,5,2,3
CROD,3,5,3,4
CROD,4,5,4,5
CROD,5,5,5,6
PROD,5,15,1.0
MAT4,15,204.0,896.0,2707.0,200.0
$
CHBDYE,60,5,3
$

Main Index
 CHAPTER 277

Listing 5-53 Example 10 Input File (continued)

CONV,60,35,,,99
PCONV,35,15,0,0.0
$
NOLIN3,300,1,,50000.0,50,1,0.0
SPC,10,51,,1.0
SPC,10,99,,0.0
TEMP,20,51,1.0
$
MPC,30,6,,-1.0,50,,-1.0,,+MPC
+MPC,,51,,100.0
$
TEMP,20,99,0.0
TEMP,20,50,-10.0
TEMPD,20,110.0
$
ENDDATA

Results
An MSC Nastran X-Y plot of grid 1 temperature versus time is shown in Figure 5-53.
An MSC Nastran X-Y plot of grid 6 temperature versus time is shown in Figure 5-54.

Main Index
 278 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 10 - Thermostat Control

Figure 5-52 Grid 1 Temperature versus Time

Main Index
 CHAPTER 279

Figure 5-53 Grid 6 Temperature versus Time

Main Index
 280 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 11 - Transient Forced Convection

Example 11 - Transient Forced Convection

Demonstrated Principle
 Evolving Fluid Transients

Discussion
It may be desirable to consider fluid flow problems from a transient view point. In particular, fluid loops
when used in conjunction with the thermostat control described in Example 10 - Thermostat Control, 274 are most
useful in transient analysis. Accurate temporal response requires some user control be exerted over the
Courant Number as discussed in Thermal Capabilities, 9.
In some cases, where steady state convergence is difficult or impossible to achieve, it may prove beneficial to
let the transient system evolve toward its long time solution, thereby achieving the steady state equivalent.
The transient analysis has inherent damping associated with the heat capacitance and can also utilize
numerical damping through the NDAMP parameter. Additionally, loading patterns can be applied gradually
with respect to time in an ad hoc load incrementing scheme which may prove more flexible than the load
incrementing which is available in the steady state solution sequence.

Fluid Problems - Consistent Units

H20 Example:

o
C p ∼ 4200. J ⁄ kg C ( 1J = 1W ⁄ sec )

ρ ∼ 1000. kg ⁄ m 3
kg
μ ∼ 10 – 3 ------------------
m ⋅ sec
m· ∼ kg ⁄ sec
l∼m
ν ∼ m ⁄ sec
o
h ∼ W ⁄ m2 C
o o
k ∼ W ⁄ m C ( .65 W ⁄ m C )

m· = ρνA  kg ⁄ m 3 ⋅ m ⁄ sec ⋅ m 2  kg ⁄ s

Main Index
 CHAPTER 281

Dνρ m ⋅ m ⁄ sec ⋅ kg ⁄ m 3
Re = -----------  -----------------------------------------------------  NONDIMENSIONAL
μ kg ⁄ m sec
Cp μ o
J ⁄ kg C ⋅ kg ⁄ m sec
Pr = ----------  ---------------------------------------------------------  NONDIMENSIONAL
k W⁄m C
o

2 o
hx W⁄m C⋅m
Nu = ------  --------------------------------------  NONDIMENSIONAL
k W⁄m C
o

o
T wall = 0 C
o T exit
T in = 100 C

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

L = 1.0 m, D = 0.01 m, m· = 0.1 kg ⁄ sec

K n = 0.4 (heating of fluid)
H = 0.023 ---- Re 0.8 Pr n
D
n = 0.3 (cooling of fluid)

valid for 0.7 ≤ Pr ≤ 160.

Re ≤ 10,000.
L-
--- ≥ 10.
D

Use water properties at T = 82.22 °C (Heat Transfer, J. P. Holman).

Figure 5-54 Example 11

The MSC Nastran input file is shown in Listing 5-54.

Main Index
 282 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 11 - Transient Forced Convection

Main Index
 CHAPTER 283

Listing 5-54 Example 11 Input File

ID MSC-NASTRAN V68
SOL 159
TIME 10
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE 11
ANALYSIS = HEAT
THERMAL = ALL
SPC = 10
IC =20
TSTEPNL = 100
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
XTITLE = TIME, SECONDS
YTITLE = EXIT TEMPERATURE DEGREES CELSIUS
TCURVE = EXIT TEMPERATURE VS. TIME
XYPLOT TEMP/11(T1)
BEGIN BULK
TSTEPNL,100,400,0.005,1,,,,U,+TSTP
+TSTP,0.05
$
GRID,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,2,,0.1,0.0,0.0
GRID,3,,0.2,0.0,0.0
GRID,4,,0.3,0.0,0.0
GRID,5,,0.4,0.0,0.0
GRID,6,,0.5,0.0,0.0
GRID,7,,0.6,0.0,0.0
GRID,8,,0.7,0.0,0.0
GRID,9,,0.8,0.0,0.0
GRID,10,,0.9,0.0,0.0
GRID,11,,1.0,0.0,0.0
GRID,50,,50.0,50.0,50.0
GRID,99,,99.0,99.0,99.0
$
CHBDYP,10,25,FTUBE,,,1,2
CHBDYP,20,25,FTUBE,,,2,3
CHBDYP,30,25,FTUBE,,,3,4
CHBDYP,40,25,FTUBE,,,4,5
CHBDYP,50,25,FTUBE,,,5,6
CHBDYP,60,25,FTUBE,,,6,7
CHBDYP,70,25,FTUBE,,,7,8
CHBDYP,80,25,FTUBE,,,8,9
CHBDYP,90,25,FTUBE,,,9,10
CHBDYP,100,25,FTUBE,,,10,11
PHBDY,25,,0.01,0.01

Main Index
 284 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 11 - Transient Forced Convection

Listing 5-54 Example 11 Input File (continued)

$
CONVM,10,35,,50,99
CONVM,20,35,,50,99
CONVM,30,35,,50,99
CONVM,40,35,,50,99
CONVM,50,35,,50,99
CONVM,60,35,,50,99
CONVM,70,35,,50,99
CONVM,80,35,,50,99
CONVM,90,35,,50,99
CONVM,100,35,,50,99
PCONVM,35,15,1,1,0.023,0.8,0.4,0.3
MAT4,15,0.673,4195.0,970.2,,8.6E-4
$
SPC,10,1,,100.0
SPC,10,50,,0.1
SPC,10,99,,0.0
TEMP,20,1,100.0
TEMP,20,50,0.1
TEMP,20,99,0.0
TEMPD,20,100.0
$
ENDDATA

Results
Temperature versus distance is shown in Figure 5-55. Exit temperature versus time is shown in Figure 5-56. Exit
temperature versus mass flow rate is shown in Figure 5-57.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 285

100
(0.0, 100.)
(0.1, 95.3)

(0.2, 90.8)
90
(0.3, 86.6)

(0.4, 82.5)
80 (0.5, 78.6)
T (0.6, 75.0)
o
( C)
(0.7, 71.4)
70
(0.8, 68.1)

(0.9, 64.9)

60 (1.0, 61.8)

50
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0

Figure 5-55 Temperature versus Distance

Main Index
 286 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 11 - Transient Forced Convection

Figure 5-56 Exit Temperature versus Time

Main Index
 CHAPTER 287

80

(1.3, 74.8)
75 (1.1, 74.1)
(0.9, 73.2) (1.2, 74.4)
(0.7, 72.0) (1.0, 73.7)
(0.8, 72.6)
(0.5, 70.4) (0.6, 71.3)
70
T exit (0.3, 67.9) (0.4, 69.3)
o
( C)
65 (0.2, 65.7)

(0.1, 61.8)

60 (0.075, 60.2)

(0.05, 58.2)

55
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4

Figure 5-57 Exit Temperature versus Mass Flow Rate at Equilibrium

(Constant Properties)

Example 12 - Thermostat Control with Deadband

Applied to a Heat Source

Demonstated Principles
 Thermal Control Mechanisms

Main Index
 288 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 12 - Thermostat Control with Deadband Applied to a Heat Source

Discussion
Thermal loads (QVOL, QVECT, QBDY3) can be thermostatically controlled by including a CONTRLT
Bulk Data entry in the model. A schematic of the process is given in Figure 5-58.

Switch Status = Off

PL

PH T Sensor

Switch Status = On

Figure 5-58

This capability provides thermal control for heating elements with these features:
1. Sensor temperature can be measured from any GRID or scalar point in the model.
2. Numerous switch formats are available with user-defined deadbands.
3. The sensor (thermacouple) can be continuously monitored or it can be evaluated at a user-defined
sampling rate starting from TIME = 0.0 When the sensor is sampled, the control logic is evaluated
and any necessary control action is enforced.
4. The control device can account for physical actuator time delay and rise and decay time constants.

Main Index
 CHAPTER 289

5. Automatic time stepping is handled internaly giving priority to any controller action which is in
effect. Outside of the control action regions, the time steps size reverts back to the time step size, DT,
specified by the user on the TSTEPNL statement. The standard nonlinear time-step adjustment
algorithm is not implemented for control logic analysis.

Example - Lumped Heat Capacitance with Thermostat Control of a Volumetric

Heat Source
QVOL

h, T ∞

Figure 5-59

ρ ⋅ Vol ⋅ C p = 6000. J ⁄ °C
QVOL = 12000. W
T(o) = 0.0 °C
h⋅A = 100.0 W ⁄ °C
T∞ = 0.0 °C

PL = 80.0 °C

PH = 100.0 °C
B = h⋅A - 1 1
------------------------------ = ------ ----------
ρ ⋅ Vol ⋅ C p 60 sec

T(t) =
120. ⋅ ( 1 – e
– Bt
)
T ( 107.5 ) = 100.0 °C

Input

Main Index
 290 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 13 - Cryogenic Heat Shielding

Example 13 - Cryogenic Heat Shielding

Demonstrated Principles
 Axisymmetric View Factors
 Multiple Cavities
 Radiation Matrix Control

Discussion
A study is performed to examine the effects of multiple radiation shields for maintaining a cryogenic
environment. The number of cylindrical layers of material as well as the surface emissivities are varied and
the total heat flow for each variation is recovered.
The radiation exchange can be modeled in several ways. If each radiation gap is treated as an individual cavity,
then the minimum number of view factor calculations will be performed. In this case, the surface exchange
elements should be designated as can shade for the element on the inner radius and can be shaded for the
element on the outer radius. These designations are made on the shade field on the VIEW Bulk Data entry.
For axisymmetric view factor calculations, it will often be difficult to set the shadowing flags correctly. The
user may find it easier to make shade = both in these instances and pay a penalty in CPUs.
If a multiple cavity approach is used, then there will be a RADLST and RADMTX for each cavity. Using a
single cavity approach, all the radiation surface elements are entered on a single RADLST, and the VIEW3D
routine automatically sorts out those that can see each other and determines the magnitude of the
axisymmetric view factors between each active pair. The accuracy of the axisymmetric view factors can be
controlled in several ways. The process used in MSC Nastran relies on internally creating a semi-circle of
computational elements and applying symmetry arguments in forming the view factor between REV type
surface elements. This is described in greater detail in Appendix . Since the core or component view factors
are computed using the generalized 3D methods (Gaussian/contour integrations with error corrections),
similar modeling principles apply. A good model will select NCOMP (field 9 on RADCAV) to generate
elements that are approximately square.
The model represents az-slice of a container configuration, however, nothing special has been included in the
model to prevent the exchange surfaces from communicating with the external environment. This can be
controlled by setting the MTXTYP = 4 on the RADLST Bulk Data entry. The flow of heat is then purely
radial with no exchange with space.

Model Geometry - Axisymmetric Analysis with Radiation Exchange

Ti = 77°k

To = 293°k

ho =
10.0 w ⁄ m °k
2

Main Index
 CHAPTER 291

1.50 .25

1.0 .25
T o,
k

n̂ n̂ n̂ n̂
Ti n̂ .50

. . .
n = 1 n = 2

Dimensions in Centimeters

k =
.01 w ⁄ m k
2

∈ = .1, .5, .9

n = 1, 2, 3, 4

Main Index
 292 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example 13 - Cryogenic Heat Shielding

Main Index
 Appendix A: Nomenclature

Nomenclature

A Nomenclature


Commonly Used Terms

Main Index
 294 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Terms

Commonly Used Terms

This appendix provides nomenclature for terms commonly used in thermal analysis.

k Thermal conductivity
ρ Density
Cp Specific heat
h, H Free convection heat transfer coefficient
H Enthalpy
V Velocity
μ Dynamic viscosity
υ Kinematic viscosity
Nu Nusselt’s number
Re Reynolds’ number
Pr Prandtl’s number
Gr Grashof’s number
β Volume coefficient of expansion
q Heat flux
Q Heat flow
T, u Temperature
g Acceleration due to gravity
Tw Wall temperature
T∞ Ambient temperature
σ Stefan-Boltzmann constant
υ Planck’s Second constant
F ij View factor
t Time
ε Emissivity
α Absorptivity
m· Mass flow rate

Main Index
 MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s Guide
Appendix B: Executive Control Section

Executive Control Section

B
 Frequently Used Executive Control Statements

Main Index
 296 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Frequently Used Executive Control Statements

Frequently Used Executive Control Statements

This appendix lists the Executive Control statements that are often used for thermal analysis. The Executive
Control statements are listed alphabetically. The description of each statement is similar to that found in the
MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
The MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide describes all of the Executive Control statements.

Main Index
 CHAPTER B 297

CEND End of Executive Control Delimiter

Designates the end of the Executive Control Section.

Format:
CEND

Remark:
1. CEND is required unless an ENDJOB statement appears in the File Management Section.

Main Index
 298 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Frequently Used Executive Control Statements

DIAG Request Diagnostic Output

Requests diagnostic output or special options.

Format:
DIAG [=] k1[k2, ..., kn]

Describer Meaning
ki A list separated by commas and/or spaces of desired diagnostics.

Remarks:
1. The DIAG statement is optional.
2. Multiple DIAG statements are allowed.
3. The following table lists the possible values for ki and their corresponding actions:

k=1 Dumps memory when a nonpreface fatal message is generated.

k=2 Prints database directory information before and after each DMAP statement. Prints
bufferpooling information.
k=3 Prints “DATABASE USAGE STATISTICS” after execution of each functional module.
This message is the same as the output that appears after the run terminates. See the Output
Description (p. 339) in the MSC Nastran Reference Guide.
k=4 Prints cross-reference tables for compiled sequences. Equivalent to the COMPILER REF
statement.
k=5 Prints the BEGIN time on the operator’s console for each functional module. See the
Output Description (p. 339) in the MSC Nastran Reference Guide.
k=6 Prints the END time for each functional module in the log file or day file and on the
operator’s console. Modules that consume less time than the threshold set by
SYSTEM(20) do not create a message. See the Output Description (p. 339) in the MSC
Nastran Reference Guide.
k=7 Prints eigenvalue extraction diagnostics for the Complex Determinate method.
k=8 Prints matrix trailers as the matrices are generated in the Execution Summary Table. See
the Output Description (p. 339) in the MSC Nastran Reference Guide.
k=9 Not used.
k=10 Uses alternate nonlinear loading in linear transient analysis. Replaces N n + 1 with
( Nn + 1 + Nn + Nn – 1 ) ⁄ 3
k=11 DBLOAD, DBUNLOAD, and DBLOCATE diagnostics.

Main Index
 CHAPTER B 299

k=12 Prints eigenvalue extraction diagnostics for complex Inverse Power and complex Lanczos
methods.
k=13 Prints the open core length (the value of REAL on VAX computers). See the Output
Description (p. 339) in the MSC Nastran Reference Guide.
k=14 Prints solution sequence. Equivalent to the COMPILER LIST statement.
k=15 Prints table trailers.
k=16 Traces real inverse power eigenvalue extraction operations
k=17 Punches solution sequences. Equivalent to the COMPILER DECK statement.
k=18 In aeroelastic analysis, prints internal grid points specified on SET2 Bulk Data entries.
k=19 Prints data for MPYAD and FBS method selection in the Execution Summary Table.
k=20 Similar to DIAG 2 except the output appears in the Execution Summary Table and has a
briefer and more user-friendly format. However, the .f04 file will be quite large if DIAG
20 is specified with an MSC Nastran solution sequence. A DMAP Alter with
DIAGON(20) and DIAGOFF(20) is recommended. DIAG 20 also prints DBMGR,
DBFETCH, and DBSTORE subDMAP diagnostics. See the MSC Nastran DMAP
Programmer’s Guide.
k=21 Prints diagnostics of DBDIR and DBENTRY table.
k=22 EQUIV and EQUIVX module diagnostics.
k=23 Not used.
k=24 Prints files that are left open at the end of a module execution. Also prints DBVIEW
diagnostics.
k=25 Outputs internal plot diagnostics.
k=26 Dynamic file allocation diagnostics on IBM/MVS computers.
k=27 Prints Input File Processor (IFP) table. See the MSC Nastran Programmer’s Manual,
Section 4.5.9.
k=28 Punches the link specification table. (XBSBD). The Bulk Data and Case Control
Sections are ignored, and no analysis is performed.
k=29 Process link specification table update. The Bulk Data and Case Control Sections are
ignored, and no analysis is performed. See the MSC Nastran Programmer’s Manual,
Section 6.10.3.1.
k=30 In link 1, punches the XSEMii data (i.e., set ii via DIAG 1 through 15). The Bulk Data
and Case Control Sections are ignored, and no analysis is performed. After link 1, this
turns on BUG output. Used also by MATPRN module. See also Remark 5 on the TSTEP,
3287 Bulk Data entry.
k=31 Prints link specification table and module properties list (MPL) data. The Bulk Data and
Case Control Sections are ignored, and no analysis is performed.
k=32 Prints diagnostics for XSTORE and PVA expansion.

Main Index
 300 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Frequently Used Executive Control Statements

k=33 Not used.

k=34 Turns off plot line optimization.
k=35 Prints diagnostics for 3-D slideline contact analysis in SOLs 106 and 129.
k=36 Prints extensive tables generated by the GP0 module in p-version analysis.
k=37 Disables the superelement congruence test option and ignores User Fatal Messages 4277
and 4278. A better alternative is available with PARAMeter CONFAC. See Parameters,
785.
k=38 Prints material angles for CQUAD4, CQUAD8, CTRIA3, and CTRIA6 elements. The
angle is printed only for elements that specify MCID in field 8 of the connection entry.
k=39 Traces module FA1 operations and aerodynamic splining in SOLs 145 and 146.
k=40 Print constraint override/average information for edges and faces in p-adaptive analysis
k=41 Traces GINO OPEN/CLOSE operations.
k=42 Not used.
k=43 Not used.
k=44 Prints a mini-dump for fatal errors and suppresses user message exit.
k=45 Prints the same database directory information as DIAG 2 except that it prints only after
each DMAP statement.
k=46 Used by MSC development for GINO printout.
k=47 Prints DBMGR, DBFETCH, and DBSTORE subDMAP diagnostics.
k=48 Used by MSC development for GINO printout.
k=49 DIAG 49 is obsolete and should not be used. The utility f04rprt should be used to
summarize the f04 Execution Summary instead..
k=50 Traces the nonlinear solution in SOLs 106, 129, 153, and 159. Prints subcase status;
echoes NLPARM, NLPCI, and TSTEPNL entry fields; and prints initial arc-length.
Prints iteration summary only in SOLs 129, and 159.
In static aeroelastic analysis (SOL 144), prints transformation information associated with
the generation of the DJX matrix in the ADG module and intermediate solutions
information in the ASG module.
k=51 Prints intermediate displacement, load error vectors, and additional iteration information
helpful to debugging in SOLs 106, 129, 153, and 159.
k=52 Disables the printing of errors at each time step in SOLs 129 and 159.
k=53 MESSAGE module output will also be printed in the execution summary table. See the
Output Description (p. 339) in the MSC Nastran Reference Guide.
k=54 Linker debug print.
k=55 Performance timing.
k=56 Extended print of Execution Summary table (prints all DMAP statements and RESTART
deletions). See the Output Description (p. 339) in the MSC Nastran Reference Guide.

Main Index
 CHAPTER B 301

k=57 Executive table (XDIRLD) performance timing and last-time-used (LTU) diagnostics.
k=58 Data block deletion debug and timing constants echo.
k=59 Buffpool debug printout.
k=60 Prints diagnostics for data block cleanup at the end of each module execution in
subroutines DBCLN, DBEADD, and DBERPL.
k=61 GINO block allocator diagnostics.
k=62 GINO block manager diagnostics.
k=63 Prints each item checked by the RESTART module and its NDDL description.
k=64 Requests upward compatibility DMAP conversion from Version 65 only. Ignored in
Version 70.5 and later systems.

Examples:
DIAG 8,53
or
DIAG 8
DIAG 53

Main Index
 302 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Frequently Used Executive Control Statements

ECHO Control Printed Echo

Controls the echo (printout) of the Executive Control Section.

Formats:
ECHOOFF
ECHOON

Remarks:
1. The ECHO statement is optional.
2. ECHOOFF suppresses the echo of subsequent Executive Control statements. ECHOON reactivates
the echo after an ECHOOFF statement.

Main Index
 CHAPTER B 303

ID Comment

Specifies a comment.

Format:
ID [=] i1, i2

Describer Meaning
i1, i2 Character strings (1 to 8 characters in length and the first character must be alphabetic).

Remark:
1. The ID statement is optional and not used by the program.

Main Index
 304 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Frequently Used Executive Control Statements

SOL Execute a Solution Sequence

Specifies the solution sequence or main subDMAP to be executed.

Format:

 n 
SOL   [ SOLIN = obj-DBset NOEXE ]
 subDMAP-name 

Describer Meaning
n Solution number. See Remark 6. for the list of valid numbers. (Integer>0)
subDMAP- The name of a main subDMAP. See the MSC Nastran DMAP Programmer’s Guide.
name (Character; 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters in length and the first character must be
alphabetic.)
obj-DBset The character name of a DBset where the OSCAR is stored. See Remarks 1. and 2.
(Character; 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters in length and the first character must be
alphabetic.)
NOEXE Suppresses execution after compilation and/or linkage of the solution is complete. Also,
the Bulk Data and Case Control Sections are not read or processed.

Remarks:
1. If SOLIN keyword is not given and if there are no LINK statements within the input data, the
program will perform an automatic link. The program will first collect the objects created in the
current run by the COMPILE statement and the remaining objects stored in the MSCOBJ DBset.
The program will then perform an automatic link of the collected objects.
2. If the SOLIN keyword is not given but a LINK statement is provided, the SOLIN default will be
obtained from the SOLOUT keyword on the LINK statement.
3. The OSCAR (Operation Sequence Control ARray) defines the problem solution sequence. The
OSCAR consists of a sequence of entries with each entry containing all of the information needed to
execute one step of the problem solution. The OSCAR is generated from information supplied by
the user’s entries in the Executive Control Section.
4. The SOLIN keyword will skip the automatic link and execute the OSCAR on the specified DBset.
5. The DOMAINSOLVER may be used in conjunction with Solution Sequences 101, 103, 108, and
111 to select domain decomposition solution methods.
6. The following Solution Sequences are currently available in MSC Nastran:

Main Index
 CHAPTER B 305

Table 0-1 Structured Solution Sequences

SOL Number SOL Name Description

101 SESTATIC Statics with Options:

Linear Steady State Heat Transfer
Alternate Reduction
Inertia Relief
Design Sensitivity - Statics

103 SEMODES Normal Modes with Option:

Design Sensitivity - Modes

105 SEBUCKL Buckling with options:

Static Analysis
Alternate Reduction
Inertia Relief
Design Sensitivity - Buckling

106 NLSTATIC Nonlinear or Linear Statics

107 SEDCEIG Direct Complex Eigenvalues

108 SEDFREQ Direct Frequency Response

109 SEDTRAN Direct Transient Response

110 SEMCEIG Modal Complex Eigenvalues

111 SEMFREQ Modal Frequency Response

112 SEMTRAN Modal Transient Response

114 CYCSTATX Cyclic Statics with Option:

Alternate Reduction

115 CYCMODE Cyclic Normal Modes

116 CYCBUCKL Cyclic Buckling

118 CYCFREQ Cyclic Direct Frequency Response

129 NLTRAN Nonlinear or Linear Transient Response

144 AESTAT Static Aeroelastic Response

145 SEFLUTTR Aerodynamic Flutter

146 SEAERO Aeroelastic Response

Main Index
 306 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Frequently Used Executive Control Statements

Table 0-1 Structured Solution Sequences (continued)

SOL Number SOL Name Description

153 NLSCSH Static Structural and/or Steady State Heat Transfer Analysis with Options:
Linear or Nonlinear Analysis

159 NLTCSH Transient Structural and/or Transient Heat Transfer Analysis with Options:
Linear or Nonlinear Analysis

190 DBTRANS Database Transfer, Output Description (p. 339) in the MSC Nastran Reference
Guide.

200 DESOPT Design Optimization

Table 0-2 Unstructured Solution Sequences

SOL SOL
Number Name Description

1 STATICS1 Statics and Linear Heat Transfer

3 MODES Normal Modes

4 GNOLIN Geometric Nonlinear

5 BUCKLING Buckling

7 DCEIG Direct Complex Eigenvalues

8 DFREQ Direct Frequency Response

9 DTRAN Direct Transient Response

10 MCEIG Modal Complex Eigenvalues

11 MFREQ Modal Frequency Response

12 MTRAN Modal Transient Response

14 CYCSTAT Cyclic Statics

15 CYCMODES Cyclic Modes

16 CYCBUCK Cyclic Buckling

Examples:
1. In the following example, SOL 103 is executed from MSCOBJ.
SOL 103

Main Index
 CHAPTER B 307

2. In the following example, the PHASE0 subDMAP is altered, SOL 103 is relinked onto the OBJSCR
DBset (which is the default for SOLOUT), and SOL 103 is executed.
SOL 103
COMPILE PHASE1
ALTER ’DTIIN’
TABPT SETREE,,,,// $
.
.
.
ENDALTER $
3. In the following example, the solution sequence called DYNAMICS is executed from the USROBJ
DBset.
SOL DYNAMICS SOLIN = USROBJ

Main Index
 308 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Frequently Used Executive Control Statements

TIME
Sets the maximum CPU and I/O time.

Format:
TIME[=]t1[,t2]

Describer Meaning
t1 Maximum allowable execution time in CPU minutes. (Real or Integer>0; Default=1.89E9
seconds)
t2 Maximum allowable I/O limit in minutes. (Real or Integer>0; Default is infinity, which is
machine dependent.)

Remarks:
1. The TIME statement is optional.
2. If t2 is specified then t1 must be specified.

Examples:
1. The following example designates a runtime of 8 hours:
TIME 480
2. The following example designates 90 seconds:
TIME 1.5

Main Index
 MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s Guide
Appendix C: Case Control Commands

Case Control Commands

C

Thermal Analysis Case Control Commands

Main Index
 310 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Thermal Analysis Case Control Commands

Thermal Analysis Case Control Commands

This appendix lists the Case Control commands that are often used for thermal analysis. The Case Control
commands are listed alphabetically. The description of each command is similar to that found in the MSC
Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
The MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide describes all of the Case Control commands.

Main Index
 CHAPTER C 311

$ Comment

Used to insert comments into the input file. Comment statements may appear anywhere within the input
file.

Format:
$ followed by any characters out to column 80.

Example:
$ TEST FIXTURE-THIRD MODE

Remarks:
1. Comments are ignored by the program.
2. Comments will appear only in the unsorted echo of the Bulk Data.

Main Index
 312 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Thermal Analysis Case Control Commands

ANALYSIS Analysis Discipline Subcase Assignment

Specifies the type of analysis being performed for the current subcase.

Format:
ANALYSIS=type

Examples:
ANALYSIS=STATICS
ANALYSIS=MODES

Main Index
 CHAPTER C 313

Describer Meaning
type Analysis type. Allowable values and applicable solution sequences (Character):
STATICS Statics
MODES Normal Modes also in SOL 110, 111, 112
Buckling
BUCK Direct Frequency
DFREQ Modal Frequency
MFREQ Modal Transient
MTRAN Direct Complex
DCEIG Eigenvalue Analysis
Modal Complex
MCEIG Eigenvalue Analysis (SOL 200 only)
Static Aeroelasticity
SAERO Static Aeroelastic Divergence
DIVERGE Flutter
Heat Transfer Analysis
FLUTTER Structural Analysis
HEAT
STRUCTURE

(SOLs 153 and 159 only)

Remarks:
1. ANALYSIS=STRUC is the default in SOLs 153 and 159.
2. In SOL 200, all subcases, including superelement subcases, must be assigned by an ANALYSIS
command either in the subcase or above all subcases. Also, all subcases assigned by
ANALYSIS=MODES must contain a DESSUB.
3. ANALYSIS=DIVERG is only available for analysis in SOL 200. Sensitivity and optimization are not
supported for this analysis type.
4. In order to obtain normal modes data recovery in SOLs 110, 111, and 112, ANALYSIS = MODES
must be specified under one or more separate subcases(s) which contain requests for data recovery
intended for normal modes only. For example, in SOL 111:

Main Index
 314 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Thermal Analysis Case Control Commands

METH=40
SPC=1
SUBCASE 1 $ Normal Modes
ANALYSIS=MODES
DISP=ALL
SUBCASE 2 $ Frequency response
STRESS=ALL
DLOAD=12
FREQ=4

All commands which control the boundary conditions (SPC, MPC, and SUPORT) and METHOD
selection should be copied inside the ANALYSIS=MODES subcase or specified above the subcase
level.

Main Index
 CHAPTER C 315

DLOAD Dynamic Load Set Selection

Selects a dynamic load or an acoustic source to be applied in a transient or frequency response problem.

Format:
DLOAD=n

Example:
DLOAD=73

Describer Meaning
n Set identification of a DLOAD, RLOAD1, RLOAD2, TLOAD1, TLOAD2, or ACSRCE Bulk
Data entry. (Integer>0)

Remarks:
1. RLOAD1 and RLOAD2 may only be selected in a frequency response problem.
2. TLOAD1 and TLOAD2 may be selected in a transient or frequency response problem.
3. Either a RLOADi or TLOADi entry (but not both) must be selected in an aeroelastic response
problem. If RLOADi is selected, a frequency response is calculated. If TLOADi is selected, then
transient response is computed by Fourier transform. When there are only gust loads (GUST entry),
the DLOAD selects a TLOADi or RLOADi entry with zero load along with field 3 of the GUST
command.
4. The DLOAD command will be ignored if specified for upstream superelements in dynamic analysis.
To apply loads to upstream superelements, please see the LOADSET command.

Main Index
 316 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Thermal Analysis Case Control Commands

ENTHALPY Heat Transfer Enthalpy Output Request

Requests form of enthalpy vector output in transient heat transfer analysis (SOL 159).

Format:

 ALL 
 PRINT, PUNCH   
ENTHALPY  SORT1 ,  =  n 
 SORT2 PLOT   
 NONE 

Example:
ENTHALPY=5

Describer Meaning
SORT1 Output will be presented as a tabular listing of grid points for each time.
SORT2 Output will be presented as a tabular listing of time for each grid point.
PRINT The printer will be the output medium.
PUNCH The punch file will be the output medium.
PLOT Generates but does not print enthalpies.
ALL Enthalpy for all points will be output.
NONE Enthalpy for no points will be output.
n Set identification of previously appearing SET command. Only enthalpies of points with
identification numbers that appear on this SET command will be output. (Integer>0)

Remark:
1. ENTHALPY=NONE is used to override a previous ENTHALPY=n or ENTHALPY=ALL
command.

Main Index
 CHAPTER C 317

FLUX Heat Transfer Gradient and Flux Output Request

Requests the form and type of gradient and flux output in heat transfer analysis.

Format:

 ALL 
 
FLUX [ ( PRINT, PLOT, PUNCH ) ] =  n 
 
 NONE 

Examples:
FLUX=ALL
FLUX(PUNCH,PRINT)=17
FLUX=25

Describer Meaning
PRINT The printer will be the output medium.
PUNCH The punch file will be the output medium.
PLOT The output will be sent to the plot file.
ALL Flux for all elements will be output.
NONE Flux for no elements will be output.
n Set identification of a previously appearing SET command. Only fluxes of elements with
identification numbers that appear on this SET command will be output. (Integer>0)

Remarks:
1. FLUX=ALL in SOL 159 may produce excessive output.
2. FLUX=NONE overrides an overall request.

Main Index
 318 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Thermal Analysis Case Control Commands

HDOT Heat Transfer Rate of Change of Enthalpy Output Request

Requests form of rate of change of enthalpy vector output in transient heat transfer analysis (SOL 159).

Format:

 ALL 
 PRINT, PUNCH   
HDOT  SORT1 ,  =  n 
 SORT2 PLOT   
 NONE 

Example:
HDOT=5

Describer Meaning
SORT1 Output will be presented as a tabular listing of grid points for each time.
SORT2 Output will be presented as a tabular listing of time for each grid point.
PRINT The printer will be the output medium.
PUNCH The punch file will be the output medium.
PLOT Generates but does not print rate of change of enthalpy.
ALL Rate of change of enthalpy for all points will be output.
NONE Rate of change of enthalpy for no points will be output.
n Set identification of previously appearing SET command. Only rates of change of enthalpy for
points with identification numbers that appear on this SET command will be output. (Integer>0)

Remark:
1. HDOT=NONE is used to override a previous HDOT=n or HDOT=ALL command.

Main Index
 CHAPTER C 319

IC Transient Analysis Initial Condition Set Selection

Selects the initial conditions for transient analysis (SOLs 109, 112, 129 and 159).

Format:

PHYSICAL
IC MODAL = n
STATSUB[,DIFFK]

Examples:
IC = 10
IC(PHYSICAL) = 100
IC(MODAL) = 200
IC(STATSUB) = 1000
IC(STATSUB,DIFFK) = 2000

Describer Meaning
PHYSICAL The TIC Bulk Data entries selected by set n define initial conditions for coordinates involving
grid, scalar and extra points. (Default).
MODAL The TIC Bulk Data entries selected by set n define initial conditions for modal coordinates and
extra points. See Remark 3.
STATSUB Use the solution of the static analysis subcase n as the initial condition. See Remark 4.
DIFFK Include the effects of differential stiffness in the solution. See Remarks 4. and 5.
n For the PHYSICAL (the default) and MODAL options, n is the set identification number of
TIC Bulk Data entries for structural analysis (SOL 109, 112 and 129) or TEMP and TEMPD
entries for heat transfer analysis (SOL 159). For the STATSUB option, n is the ID of a static
analysis subcase. (Integer > 0)

Main Index
 320 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Thermal Analysis Case Control Commands

Remarks:
1. For structural analysis, TIC entries will not be used (therefore, no initial conditions) unless selected
in the Case Control Section.
2. Only the PHYSICAL option (the default) may be specified in heat transfer analysis (SOL 159).
3. IC(MODAL) may be specified only in modal transient analysis (SOL 112).
4. IC(STATSUB) and IC(STATSUB,DIFFK) may not both be specified in the same execution.
5. The DIFFK keyword is meaningful only when used in conjunction with the STATSUB keyword.
6. The following examples illustrate the usage of the various options of the IC Case Control command.
$ SPECIFY INITIAL CONDITIONS FOR PHYSICAL COORDINATES
$ IN SOL 109 OR SOL 112
IC(PHYSICAL) = 100
or
IC = 100
$ SPECIFY INITIAL CONDITIONS FOR MODAL COORDINATES
$ IN SOL 112
IC(MODAL) = 200

$ SPECIFY STATIC SOLUTION AS INITIAL CONDITION

$ IN SOL 109 OR SOL 112
$ (DIFFERENTIAL STIFFNESS EFFECT NOT INCLUDED)
SUBCASE 10 $ STATIC ANALYSIS
LOAD = 100
SUBCASE 20 $ TRANSIENT ANALYSIS
IC(STATSUB) = 10 $ POINTS TO STATIC ANALYSIS SUBCASE ID

$ SPECIFY STATIC SOLUTION AS INITIAL CONDITION

$ IN SOL 109 OR SOL 112
$ (DIFFERENTIAL STIFFNESS EFFECT INCLUDED
SUBCASE 100 $ STATIC ANALYSIS
LOAD = 1000
SUBCASE 200 $ TRANSIENT ANALYSIS
IC(STATSUB,DIFFK) = 100 $ POINTS TO STATIC ANALYSIS SUBCASE ID

Main Index
 CHAPTER C 321

INCLUDE Insert External File

Inserts an external file into the input file. The INCLUDE statement may appear anywhere within the input
data file.

Format:
INCLUDE ’filename’

Describer Meaning
filename Physical filename of the external file to be inserted. The user must supply the name according to
installation or machine requirements. It is recommended that the filename be enclosed by single
right-hand quotation marks (’).

Example:
The following INCLUDE statement is used to obtain the Bulk Data from another file called
MYBULK.DATA:
SOL 101
CEND
TITLE = STATIC ANALYSIS
LOAD = 100
INCLUDE ’MYCASE.DATA’
BEGIN BULK
ENDDATA

Remarks:
1. INCLUDE statements may be nested; that is, INCLUDE statements may appear inside the external
file. The nested depth level must not be greater than 10.
2. The total length of any line in an INCLUDE statement must not exceed 72 characters. Long file
names may be split across multiple lines. For example the file:
/dir123/dir456/dir789/filename.dat
may be included with the following input:
INCLUDE ‘/dir123
/dir456
/dir789/filename.dat’
3. See the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide for more examples.

Main Index
 322 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Thermal Analysis Case Control Commands

LOAD External Static Load Set Selection

Selects an external static load set.

Format:
LOAD=n

Example:
LOAD=15

Describer Meaning
n Set identification of at least one external load Bulk Data entry. The set identification must
appear on at least one FORCE, FORCE1, FORCE2, FORCEAX, GRAV, MOMAX,
MOMENT, MOMENT1, MOMENT2, LOAD, PLOAD, PLOAD1, PLOAD2, PLOAD4,
PLOADX, QVOL, QVECT, QHBDY, QBDY1, QBDY2, QBDY3, PRESAX, RFORCE,
SPCD, or SLOAD entry. (Integer>0)

Remarks:
1. A GRAV entry cannot have the same set identification number as any of the other loading entry types.
If it is desired to apply a gravity load along with other static loads, a LOAD Bulk Data entry must be
used.
2. LOAD is only applicable in linear and nonlinear statics, inertia relief, differential stiffness, buckling,
and heat transfer problems.
3. The total load applied will be the sum of external (LOAD), thermal (TEMP(LOAD)), element
deformation (DEFORM), and constrained displacement (SPC) loads.
4. Static, thermal, and element deformation loads should have unique set identification numbers.

Main Index
 CHAPTER C 323

MPC Multipoint Constraint Set Selection

Selects a multipoint constraint set.

Format:
MPC=n

Example:
MPC=17

Describer Meaning
n Set identification number of a multipoint constraint set. This set identification number must
appear on at least one MPC or MPCADD Bulk Data entry. (Integer>0)

Remarks:
1. In cyclic symmetry analysis, this command must appear above the first SUBCASE command.
2. Multiple boundary (MPC sets) conditions are not allowed in superelement analysis. If more than one
MPC set is specified per superelement (including the residual), then the second and subsequent sets
will be ignored.

Main Index
 324 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Thermal Analysis Case Control Commands

NLPARM Nonlinear Static Analysis Parameter Selection

Selects the parameters used for nonlinear static analysis.

Format:
NLPARM=n

Example:
NLPARM=10

Describer Meaning
n Set identification of NLPARM and NLPCI Bulk Data entries. (Integer>0)

Remarks:
1. NLPARM and NLPCI entries in the Bulk Data will not be used unless selected.
2. NLPARM may appear above or within a subcase.

Main Index
 CHAPTER C 325

NONLINEAR Nonlinear Dynamic Load Set Selection

Selects nonlinear dynamic load set for transient problems.

Format:
NONLINEAR=n

Example:
NONLINEAR=75

Describer Meaning
n Set identification of NOLINi or NLRGAP Bulk Data entry. (Integer>0)

Remark:
1. NOLINi Bulk Data entry will be ignored unless selected in the Case Control Section.

Main Index
 326 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Thermal Analysis Case Control Commands

OLOAD Applied Load Output Request

Requests the form and type of applied load vector output.

Format:


OLOAD  SORT1 , PRINT, PUNCH , REAL or IMAG , PSDF, ATOC, CRM
 SORT2 PLOT PHASE or RALL

 ALL 
RPRINT  
, RPUNCH , [ CID ]  =  n 
NORPRINT 
 
 NONE 

Examples:
OLOAD=ALL‘
OLOAD(SORT1, PHASE)=5‘
OLOAD(SORT2, PRINT, PSDF, CRMS, RPUNCH=20
OLOAD(PRINT, RALL, NORPRINT)=ALL

Describer Meaning
SORT1 Output will be presented as a tabular listing of grid points for each load, frequency, eigenvalue,
or time, depending on the solution sequence.
SORT2 Output will be presented as a tabular listing of frequency or time for each grid point.
PRINT The printer will be the output medium.
PUNCH The punch file will be the output medium.
REAL or IMAG Requests rectangular format (real and imaginary) of complex output. Use of either REAL or
IMAG yields the same output.
PHASE Requests polar format (magnitude and phase) of complex output. Phase output is in degrees.
PSDF Requests the power spectral density function be calculated and stored in the database for
random analysis post-processing. Request must be made above the subcase level and
RANDOM must be selected in the Case Control.

Main Index
 CHAPTER C 327

Describer Meaning
ATOC Requests the autocorrelation function be calculated and stored in the database for random
analysis post-processing. Request must be made above the subcase level and RANDOM must
be selected in the Case Control.
CRMS Requests all of PSDF, ATOC and CRMS be calculated for random analysis post-processing.
Request must be made above the subcase level and RANDOM must be selected in the Case
Control.
RALL Requests all of PSDF, ATOC and CRMS be calculated for random analysis post-processing.
Request must be made above the subcase level and RANDOM must be selected in the Case
Control.
RPRINT Writes random analysis results in the print file (Default).
NORPRINT Disables the writing of random analysis results in the print file.
RPUNCH Writes random analysis results in the punch file.
CID Request to print output coordinate system ID in printed output file, F06 file.
ALL Applied loads for all points will be output. See Remarks 2. and 8.
NONE Applied load for no points will be output.
n Set identification of a previously appearing SET command. Only loads on points with
identification numbers that appear on this SET command will be output. (Integer > 0)

Remarks:
1. Both PRINT and PUNCH may be requested.
2. See Remark 2 under DISPLACEMENT (Case), 298 for a discussion of SORT1 and SORT2. In the
SORT1 format, only nonzero values will be output.
3. In a statics problem, a request for SORT2 causes loads at all requested points (zero and nonzero) to
be output.
4. OLOAD=NONE overrides an overall output request.
5. In the statics superelement solution sequences, and in the dynamics SOLs 107 through 112, 118,
145, 146, and 200. OLOADs are available for superelements and the residual structure only
externally applied loads are printed, and not loads transmitted from upstream superelements.
Transmitted loads can be obtained with GPFORCE requests.
• In the nonlinear transient analysis solution sequences SOLs 129 and 159, OLOADs are available
only for residual structure points and include loads transmitted by upstream superelements.
6. In nonlinear analysis, OLOAD output will not reflect changes due to follower forces.
7. Loads generated via the SPCD Bulk Data entry do not appear in OLOAD output.
8. In SORT1 format, OLOADs recovered at consecutively numbered scalar points are printed in
groups of six (sextets) per line of output. But if a scalar point is not consecutively numbered, then it
will begin a new sextet on a new line of output. If a sextet can be formed and it is zero, then the line
will not be printed. If a sextet cannot be formed, then zero values may be output.

Main Index
 328 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Thermal Analysis Case Control Commands

9. OLOAD results are output in the global coordinate system (see field CD on the GRID Bulk Data
entry).
10. In inertia relief analysis the OLOAD output is interpreted differently for SOLs 1, 101, and 200:
• In SOL 1, the output shows only the applied loads.
• In SOLs 101 and 200, the output includes both the inertia loads and applied loads.
11. The option of PSDF, ATOC, CRMS and RALL, or any combination of them, can be selected for
random analysis. The results can be either printed in the .f06 file or punched n the punch file, or
output in both files.
12. Note that the CID keyword affects only grid point related output, such as DISPlacement, VELOcity,
ACCEleration, OLOAD, SPCForce and MPCForce. In addition, CID keyword needs to appear only
once in a grid related output request anywhere in the Case Control Section to turn on the printing
algorithm.

Main Index
 CHAPTER C 329

OUTPUT Case Control Delimiter

Delimits the various types of commands for the structure plotter, curve plotter, grid point stress, and
MSGSTRESS.

Format:

 
  PLOT 
 POST 

OUTPUT   XYOUT 
 
  XYPLOT 
  CARDS 
 

Examples:
OUTPUT
OUTPUT(PLOT)
OUTPUT(XYOUT)

Describer Meaning
PLOT Beginning of the structure plotter request. This command must precede all structure plotter
control commands. Plotter commands are described in OUTPUT(PLOT) Commands, 732.
POST Beginning of grid point stress SURFACE and VOLUME commands. This command must
precede all SURFACE and VOLUME commands.
XYOUT or Beginning of curve plotter request. This command must precede all curve plotter control
XYPLOT commands. XYPLOT and XYOUT are entirely equivalent. Curve plotter commands are
described in X-Y PLOT Commands, 651.
CARDS The OUTPUT(CARDS) packet is used by the MSGSTRESS program. See the MSGMESH
Analyst’s Guide for details. These commands have no format rules. This package must terminate
with the command ENDCARDS (starting in column 1).

Main Index
 330 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Thermal Analysis Case Control Commands

Remarks:
1. The structure plotter request OUTPUT(PLOT), the curve plotter request OUTPUT(XYOUT or
XYPLOT), and the grid point stress requests (OUTPUT(POST)) must follow the standard Case
Control commands.
2. If OUTPUT is specified without a describer, then the subsequent commands are standard Case
Control commands.
3. Case Control commands specified after OUTPUT(POST) are SURFACE and VOLUME.

Main Index
 CHAPTER C 331

PARAM Parameter Specification

Specifies values for parameters. Parameters are described in Parameters, 785.

Format:
PARAM,n,V1,V2

Examples:
PARAM,GRDPNT,0
PARAM,K6ROT,1.0

Describer Meaning
n Parameter name (one to eight alphanumeric characters, the first of which is alphabetic).
V1, V2 Parameter value based on parameter type, as follows:

Type V1 V2
Integer Integer Blank
Real, single precision Real Blank
Character Character Blank
Real, double precision Real, Double Precision Blank
Complex, single precision Real or Blank Real or Blank
Complex, double precision Real, Double Precision Real, Double Precision

Remarks:
1. The PARAM command is normally used in the Bulk Data Section and is described in the Bulk Data
Entries, 1119.
2. The parameter values that may be defined in the Case Control Section are described in Parameters, 3,
1. Case Control PARAM commands in user-written DMAPs requires the use of the PVT module,
described in the MSC Nastran DMAP Programmer’s Guide.

Main Index
 332 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Thermal Analysis Case Control Commands

SET Set Definition, General Form

Sets are used to define the following lists:

1. Identification numbers (point, element, or superelement) for processing and output requests.
2. Frequencies for which output will be printed in frequency response problems or times for transient
response, using the OFREQ and OTIME commands, respectively.
3. Surface or volume identification numbers to be used in GPSTRESS or STRFIELD commands.

Formats:
SET n = { i 1 [ ,i 2, i 3, THRU i 4, EXCEPT i 5, i 6, i 7, i 8, THRU i 9 ] }
SET n = { r 1 , [ r 2, r 3, r 4 ] }
SET n=ALL

Examples:
SET 77=5
SET 88=5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 THRU 55 EXCEPT 15, 16, 77, 78, 79, 100 THRU 300
SET 99=1 THRU 100000

SET101=1.0, 2.0, 3.0

SET105=1.009, 10.2, 13.4, 14.0, 15.0

Describer Meaning
n Set identification number. Any set may be redefined by reassigning its identification number. SETs
specified under a SUBCASE command are recognized for that SUBCASE only. (Integer>0)
i 1, i 2, etc. Identification numbers. If no such identification number exists, the request is ignored. (Integer>0)
i 3 THRUi 4 Identification numbers ( i 4 > i 3 ) . (Integer>0)
EXCEPT Set identification numbers following EXCEPT will be deleted from output list as long as they are
in the range of the set defined by the immediately preceding THRU. An EXCEPT list may not
include a THRU list or ALL.
r 1, r 2, etc. Frequencies or times for output. The nearest solution frequency or time will be output. EXCEPT
and THRU cannot be used. If an OFREQ or OTIME command references the set then the values
must be listed in ascending sequences, r 1 < r 2 < r 3 < r 4 ...etc., otherwise some output may be
missing. If an OFREQ or OTIME command is not present, all frequencies or times will be output.
(Real>0.0)
ALL All members of the set will be processed.

Main Index
 CHAPTER C 333

Remarks:
1. A SET command may be more than one physical command. A comma at the end of a physical
command signifies a continuation command. Commas may not end a set. THRU may not be used
for continuation. Place a number after the THRU.
2. Set identification numbers following EXCEPT within the range of the THRU must be in ascending
order.
3. In SET 88 above, the numbers 77, 78, etc., are included in the set because they are outside the prior
THRU range.

Main Index
 334 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Thermal Analysis Case Control Commands

SPC Single-Point Constraint Set Selection

Selects a single-point constraint set to be applied.

Format:
SPC=n

Example:
SPC=10

Describer Meaning
n Set identification number of a single-point constraint that appears on a SPC, SPC1, or SPCADD
Bulk Data entry. (Integer>0)

Remarks:
1. In cyclic symmetry analysis, this command must appear above the first SUBCASE command.
2. Multiple boundary conditions are only supported in SOLs 101, 103, 105, 145 and 200. Multiple
boundary conditions are not allowed for upstream superelements. the BC command must be
specified to define multiple boundary conditions for the residual structure in SOLs 103, 105, 145 and
200.

Main Index
 CHAPTER C 335

SUBCASE Subcase Delimiter

Delimits and identifies a subcase.

Format:
SUBCASE=n

Example:
SUBCASE=101

Describer Meaning
n Subcase identification number. (Integer>0)

Remarks:
1. The subcase identification number, n, must be greater than all previous subcase identification
numbers.
2. Plot requests and RANDPS requests refer to n.
3. See the MODES command for use of this command in normal modes analysis.
4. If a comment follows n, then the first few characters of the comment will appear in the subcase label
in the upper right-hand corner of the output.

Main Index
 336 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Thermal Analysis Case Control Commands

TEMPERATURE Temperature Set Selection

Selects the temperature set to be used in either material property calculations or thermal loading in heat
transfer and structural analysis.

Format:

 INITIAL 
 

TEMPERATURE  MATERIAL  = n
LOAD 
 
 BOTH 

Examples:
TEMPERATURE(LOAD)=15
TEMPERATURE(MATERIAL)=7
TEMPERATURE=7

Describer Meaning
MATERIAL The selected temperature set will be used to determine temperature-dependent material properties
indicated on the MATTi Bulk Data entries. See Remarks 6., 7. and 8.
LOAD The selected temperature set will be used to determine an equivalent static load and to update
material properties in a nonlinear analysis. See Remarks 2., 5., 6. and 7.
BOTH Both MATERIAL and LOAD will use the same temperature set.
n Set identification number of TEMP, TEMPD, TEMPP1, TEMPRB, TEMPF, or TEMPAX Bulk
Data entries. (Integer > 0)
INITIAL The selected temperature table will be used to determine initial temperature distribution in
nonlinear static analysis. See Remarks 4., 6., 7., 8. and 9.

Remarks:
1. In linear analysis, only one temperature-dependent material request should be made in any problem
and should be specified above the subcase level. If multiple requests are made, then only the last
request will be processed. See also Remarks 6. and 7.
2. The total load applied will be the sum of external (LOAD command), thermal (TEMP(LOAD)
command), element deformation (DEFORM command) and constrained displacement (SPC
command) loads.
3. Static, thermal, and element deformation loads should have unique set identification numbers.

Main Index
 CHAPTER C 337

4. INITIAL is used in steady state heat transfer analysis for conduction material properties and provides
starting values for iteration.
5. In superelement data recovery restarts, TEMPERATURE(LOAD) requests must be respecified in the
Case Control Section.
6. In linear static analysis, temperature strains are calculated with:

εT = A ( To ) ⋅ ( T – To )

where A ( T o ) is the thermal expansion coefficient defined on the MATi Bulk Data entries, T is
the load temperature defined with TEMPERATURE(LOAD) and T o is the initial temperature
defined with TEMPERATURE(INITIAL). The following rules apply for
TEMPERATURE(INITIAL), TEMPERATURE(MATERIAL), and TREF on the MATi entries:
• If TEMPERATURE(INITIAL) and TREF are specified, then the TEMPERATURE(INITIAL)
set will be used as the initial temperature to calculate both the loads and the material properties.
• If TEMPERATURE(MATERIAL) and TREF are specified, then TREF will be used as the initial
temperature in calculating the load and the TEMPERATURE(MATERIAL) set will be used for
the calculation of material properties.
• If no TEMPERATURE(INITIAL) or TEMPERATURE(MATERIAL) is present, TREF will be
used to calculate both the load and the material properties.
7. In nonlinear static analysis, temperature strains are calculated with

ε T = A ( T ) ⋅ ( T – TREF ) – A ( T o ) ⋅ ( T o – TREF )

where A ( T ) is the thermal expansion coefficient defined on the MATi Bulk Data entries. T is the
load temperature defined with TEMPERATURE(LOAD) and T o is the initial temperature defined
with TEMPERATURE(INITIAL). The following rules apply
• The specification of TEMPERATURE(INITIAL) is required above the subcase level. The
specification of TEMPERATURE(MATERIAL) or TEMPERATURE(BOTH) will cause a fatal
error.
• If a subcase does not contain a TEMPERATURE(LOAD) request, then the thermal load set will
default to the TEMPERATURE(INITIAL) set.
• TEMPERATURE(LOAD) will also cause the update of temperature-dependent material
properties due to the temperatures selected in the thermal load set. Temperature-dependent
material properties are specified with MATi, MATTi, MATS1, and/or TABLEST Bulk Data
entries.
• If TREF and TEMPERATURE(INITIAL) are specified, then the TEMPERATURE(INITIAL)
set will be used as the initial temperature to calculate both the loads and the material properties.
Both are used in the definition of thermal strain.

Main Index
 338 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Thermal Analysis Case Control Commands

8. TEMPERATURE(MATERIAL) and TEMPERATURE(INITIAL) cannot be specified

simultaneously in the same run.
9. TEMP(INIT) is not used with TEMPAX.
10. Temperature loads cause incorrect stresses in dynamic analysis.

Main Index
 CHAPTER C 339

TFL Transfer Function Set Selection

Selects the transfer function set(s) to be added to the direct input matrices.

Format:
TFL=n

Example:
TFL=77
TFL = 1, 25, 77

Describer Meaning
n Set identification of a TF Bulk Data entry. (Integer>0)

Remarks:
1. Transfer functions will not be used unless selected in the Case Control Section.
2. Transfer functions are supported in dynamics problems only.
3. Transfer functions are described in the MSC.Nastran Advanced Dynamic Analysis User’s Guide.
4. It is recommended that PARAM,AUTOSPC,NO be specified when using transfer functions. See
Constraint and Mechanism Problem Identification in SubDMAP SEKR in MSC Nastran Reference Guide.
5. The transfer functions are additive if multiple TF values are referenced on the TFL command.

Main Index
 340 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Thermal Analysis Case Control Commands

THERMAL Temperature Output Request

Requests the form and type of temperature output.

Format:

 ALL 
 PRINT, PUNCH   
THERMAL  SORT1 ,  =  n 
 SORT2 PLOT   
 NONE 

Examples:
THERMAL=5
THER(PRINT,PUNCH)=ALL

Describer Meaning
SORT1 Output is presented as a tabular listing of point temperatures for each load or time step.
SORT2 Output is presented as a tabular listing of loads or time steps for each.
PRINT The printer will be the output medium.
PUNCH The punch file will be the output medium.
PLOT Compute temperatures but do not print.
ALL Temperatures for all points will be output.
NONE Temperatures for no points will be output.
n Set identification of a previously appearing SET command. Only temperatures of points with
identification numbers that appear on this SET command will be output. (Integer>0)

Remarks:
1. The THERMAL output request is designed for use with the heat transfer option. The printed output
will have temperature headings. The PUNCH option produces TEMP Bulk Data entries, and the
SID on the entries will be the subcase number (=1 if no SUBCASES are specified).
2. SORT1 is the default in steady state heat transfer analysis. SORT2 is the default in transient heat
transfer analysis.
In a transient heat transfer analysis, the SID on the punched TEMP Bulk Data entries, equal the time step
number.

Main Index
 CHAPTER C 341

TSTEP Transient Time Step Set Selection

Selects integration and output time steps for linear or nonlinear transient analysis.

Format:
TSTEP=n

Example:
TSTEP=731

Describer Meaning
n Set identification number of a TSTEP or TSTEPNL Bulk Data entry. (Integer>0)

Remarks:
1. A TSTEP entry must be selected to execute a linear transient analysis (SOLs 9, 12, 109, or 112) and
TSTEPNL for a nonlinear transient analysis (SOLs 129 and 159).
2. A TSTEPNL entry must be selected in each subcase to execute a nonlinear transient problem.
3. For the application of time-dependent loads in modal frequency response analysis (SOLs 111 and
146), or TSTEP entry must be selected by the TSTEP command. The time-dependent loads will be
recomputed in frequency domain by a Fourier Transform.

Main Index
 342 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Thermal Analysis Case Control Commands

Main Index
 MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s Guide
Appendix D: Bulk Data Entries

Bulk Data Entries

D

Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

Main Index
 344 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

This appendix lists the Bulk Data entries that are often used for thermal analysis. Bulk Data entries are listed
alphabetically. The description of each entry is similar to that found in the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
The MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide describes all of the Bulk Data entries.
Figure 0-1 illustrates the interaction between the various Case Control commands and Bulk Data entries
involved in the specification of thermal loads.
Figure 0-2 illustrates the Bulk Data entry interaction for the application of heat transfer boundary conditions
involving radiation and convection.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 345

Main Index
 346 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

Case Control Bulk Data

TEMP
NLPARM NLPARM TEMPD
TSTEPNL TSTEPNL TEMPP1
TFL TF TEMPP2
MPC MPC TEMPRB NOLIN1
SPC
TEMP(INIT) SPC1
IC SPCD TABLED1
SPC TEMPBC TABLED2
NONLINEAR TABLED3
TABLED4
DLOAD GRID
LOAD NOLIN2
NOLIN3
NOLIN4

TABLED1
SLOAD TABLED2
TABLED3
GRID TABLED4
SPOINT
DLOAD
QVOL TLOAD1
TLOAD2
CBAR PBAR
CBEAM PBEAM
CBEND PBEND
CHEXA PSOLID TEMPBC
CHEX1 PROD
CHEX2 PSHELL
PTUBE DELAY
CONROD
CPENTA
CQUAD4
CQUAD8 TABLED1
CROD MAT4 TABLED2
CTETRA MAT5 TABLED3
CTRIA3 MATT4 TABLED4
CTRIA6 MATT5
CTRIAX6
CTUBE
QVECT
TABLEM1
QVECT TABLEM2
TABLEM3
TABLEM4
CHBDYE
CHBDYG RADM
CHBDYP

RADBND
PHBDY

RADMT
BDYOR

QHBDY TABLEM1
QBDY2 TABLEM2
TABLEM3
TABLEM4
GRID
BDYOR
QBDY1

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 347

Figure 0-1 Thermal Loads – Bulk Data and Case Control Interaction

Main Index
 348 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

Free and Forced Convection Radiation

CONV Radiation Exchange
BDYOR RADBND
CHBDYE RADSET
CHBDYG
CHBDYP CHBDYE RADM
PHBDY RADLST RADMT
CHBDYG
CHBDYP
PCONV MAT4 PHBDY
MAT5 RADMTX TABLEM1
MATT4 TABLEM2
MATT5 BDYOR TABLEM3
CONVM
TABLEM4

CHBDYP
TABLEM1
TABLEM2 View Factor Calculation
PCONVM TABLEM3
TABLEM4
VIEW
SPC

GRID CHBDYE
CHBDYG
CHBDYP PHBDY

RADCAV BDYOR

Radiation Boundary Condition

RADBC

CHBDYE RADBND
CHBDYG
CHBDYP
PHBDY
RADM RADMT

BDYOR

TABLEM1
TABLEM2
TABLEM3
TABLEM4

Figure 0-2 Thermal Boundary Conditions – Bulk Data Interaction

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 349

$ Comment

Used to insert comments into the input file. Comment statements may appear anywhere within the input
file.

Format:
$ followed by any characters out to column 80.

Example:
$ TEST FIXTURE-THIRD MODE

Remarks:
1. Comments are ignored by the program.
2. Comments will appear only in the unsorted echo of the Bulk Data.

Main Index
 350 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

BDYOR CHBDYi Entry Default Values

Defines default values for the CHBDYP, CHBDYG, and CHBDYE entries.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BDYOR TYPE IVIEWF IVIEWB RADMINF RADMIDB PID GO
CE E1 E2 E3

Example:
BDYOR AREA4 2 2 3 3 10

Field Contents
TYPE Default surface type. See Remark 2. (Character)
IVIEWF Default identification number of front VIEW entry. (Integer > 0 or blank)
IVIEWB Default identification number of back VIEW entry. (Integer > 0 or blank)
RADMIDF Default identification number of a RADM entry for front face. (Integer > 0 or blank)
RADMIDB Default identification number of a RADM entry for back face. (Integer > 0 or blank)
PID Default PHBDY property entry identification number. (Integer > 0 or blank)
GO Default orientation grid point. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
CE Default coordinate system for defining the orientation vector. (Integer > 0 or blank)
E1, E2, E3 Default components of the orientation vector in coordinate system CE. The origin of this
vector is grid point G1 on a CHBDYP entry. (Real or blank)

Remarks:
1. Only one BDYOR entry may be specified in the Bulk Data Section.
2. TYPE specifies the type of CHBDYi element surface; allowable values are: POINT, LINE, REV,
AREA3, AREA4, ELCYL, FTUBE, AREA6, AREA8, and TUBE.
3. IVIEWF and IVIEWB are specified for view factor calculations only (see VIEW entry).
4. GO is only used from BDYOR if neither GO nor the orientation vector is defined on the CHBDYP
entry and GO is > 0.
5. E1, E2, E3 is not used if GO is defined on either the BDYOR entry or the CHBDYP entry.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 351

CDAMP1 Scalar Damper Connection

Defines a scalar damper element.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CDAMP1 EID PID G1 C1 G2 C2

Example:
CDAMP1 19 6 0 23 2

Field Contents
EID Unique element identification number. (0 < Integer < 100,000,000)
PID Property identification number of a PDAMP property entry. (Integer > 0; Default = EID)
G1, G2 Geometric grid point identification number. (Integer > 0)
C1, C2 Component number. (0 < Integer < 6; 0 or up to six unique integers, 1 through 6 may be
specified in the field with no embedded blanks. 0 applies to scalar points and 1 through 6
applies to grid points.)

Remarks:
1. Scalar points may be used for G1 and/or G2, in which case the corresponding C1 and/or C2 must
be zero or blank. Zero or blank may be used to indicate a grounded terminal G1 or G2 with a
corresponding blank or zero C1 or C2. A grounded terminal is a point with a displacement that is
constrained to zero.
2. Element identification numbers should be unique with respect to all other element identification
numbers.
3. The two connection points (G1, C1) and (G2, C2), must be distinct.
4. For a discussion of the scalar elements, see Scalar Elements (CELASi, CMASSi, CDAMPi) (p. 172) in the .
5. When CDAMP1 is used in heat transfer analysis, it generates a lumped heat capacity.
6. A scalar point specified on this entry need not be defined on an SPOINT entry.
7. If Gi refers to a grid point then Ci refers to degrees-of-freedom(s) in the displacement coordinate
system specified by CD on the GRID entry.

Main Index
 352 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

CDAMP2 Scalar Damper Property and Connection

Defines a scalar damper element without reference to a material or property entry.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CDAMP2 EID B G1 C1 G2 C2

Example:
CDAMP2 16 2.98 32 1

Field Contents
EID Unique element identification number. (0 < Integer < 100,000,000)
B Value of the scalar damper. (Real)
G1, G2 Geometric grid point identification number. (Integer > 0)
C1, C2 Component number. (0 < Integer < 6; 0 or up to six unique integers, 1 through 6 may be
specified in the field with no embedded blanks. 0 applies to scalar points and 1 through 6
applies to grid points.)

Remarks:
1. Scalar points may be used for G1 and/or G2, in which case the corresponding C1 and/or C2 must be
zero or blank. Zero or blank may be used to indicate a grounded terminal G1 or G2 with a
corresponding blank or zero C1 or C2. A grounded terminal is a point with a displacement that is
constrained to zero.
2. Element identification numbers should be unique with respect to all other element identification
numbers.
3. The two connection points (G1, C1) and (G2, C2), must be distinct.
4. For a discussion of the scalar elements, see Scalar Elements (CELASi, CMASSi, CDAMPi) (p. 172) in the .
5. When CDAMP2 is used in heat transfer analysis, it generates a lumped heat capacity.
6. A scalar point specified on this entry need not be defined on an SPOINT entry.
7. If Gi refers to a grid point then Ci refers to degrees-of-freedom(s) in the displacement coordinate
system specified by CD on the GRID entry.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 353

CDAMP3 Scalar Damper Connection to Scalar Points Only

Defines a scalar damper element that is connected only to scalar points.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CDAMP3 EID PID S1 S2

Example:
CDAMP3 16 978 24 36

Field Contents
EID Unique element identification number. (0 < Integer < 100,000,000)
PID Property identification number of a PDAMP entry. (Integer > 0; Default = EID)
S1, S2 Scalar point identification numbers. (Integer > 0; S1 ≠ S2 )

Remarks:
1. S1 or S2 may be blank or zero, indicating a constrained coordinate.
2. Element identification numbers should be unique with respect to all other element identification
numbers.
3. Only one scalar damper element may be defined on a single entry.
4. For a discussion of the scalar elements, see Scalar Elements (CELASi, CMASSi, CDAMPi) (p. 172) in the .
5. When CDAMP3 is used in heat transfer analysis, it generates a lumped heat capacity.
6. A scalar point specified on this entry need not be defined on an SPOINT entry.

Main Index
 354 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

CDAMP4 Scalar Damper Property and Connection to Scalar Points Only

Defines a scalar damper element that connected only to scalar points and without reference to a material or
property entry.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CDAMP4 EID B S1 S2

Example:
CDAMP4 16 -2.6 4 9

Field Contents
EID Unique element identification number. (0 < Integer < 100,000,000)
B Scalar damper value. (Real)
S1, S2 Scalar point identification numbers. (Integer > 0; S1 ≠ S2 )

Remarks:
1. S1 or S2 may be blank or zero, indicating a constrained coordinate.
2. Element identification numbers should be unique with respect to all other element identification
numbers.
3. Only one scalar damper element may be defined on a single entry.
4. For a discussion of the scalar elements, see Scalar Elements (CELASi, CMASSi, CDAMPi) (p. 172) in the .
5. If this entry is used in heat transfer analysis, it generates a lumped heat capacity.
6. A scalar point specified on this entry need not be defined on an SPOINT entry.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 355

CDAMP5 Scalar Damper with Material Property

Defines a damping element that refers to a material property entry and connection to grid or scalar points.
This element is intended for heat transfer analysis only.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CDAMP5 EID PID G1 G2

Example:
CDAMP5 1 4 10 20

Field Contents
EID Unique element identification number. (0 < Integer < 100,000,000)
PID Identification number of a PDAMP5 property entry. (Integer > 0; Default = EID)
G1, G2 Grid or scalar point identification numbers. (Integer > 0 and G1 ≠ G2 )

Remarks:
1. G1 or G2 may be blank or zero indicating a constraint.
2. Element identification numbers should be unique with respect to all other element identification
numbers.
3. CDAMP5 generates a lumped heat capacity in heat transfer analysis.
4. A scalar point specified on CDAMP5 need not be defined on an SPOINT entry.

Main Index
 356 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

CELAS1 Scalar Spring Connection

Defines a scalar spring element.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CELAS1 EID PID G1 C1 G2 C2

Example:
CELAS1 2 6 8 1

Field Contents
EID Unique element identification number. (0 < Integer < 100,000,000)
PID Property identification number of a PELAS entry. (Integer > 0; Default = EID)
G1, G2 Geometric grid point identification number. (Integer > 0)
C1, C2 Component number. (0 < Integer < 6; blank or zero if scalar point.)

Remarks:
1. Scalar points may be used for G1 and/or G2, in which case the corresponding C1 and/or C2 must be
zero or blank. Zero or blank may be used to indicate a grounded terminal G1 or G2 with a
corresponding blank or zero C1 or C2. A grounded terminal is a point with a displacement that is
constrained to zero. If only scalar points and/or ground are involved, it is more efficient to use the
CELAS3 entry.
2. Element identification numbers should be unique with respect to all other element identification
numbers.
3. The two connection points (G1, C1) and (G2, C2) must be distinct.
4. For a discussion of the scalar elements, see Scalar Elements (CELASi, CMASSi, CDAMPi) (p. 172) in the .
5. A scalar point specified on this entry need not be defined on an SPOINT entry.
6. If Gi refers to a grid point then Ci refers to degrees-of-freedom(s) in the displacement coordinate
system specified by CD on the GRID entry.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 357

CELAS2 Scalar Spring Property and Connection

Defines a scalar spring element without reference to a property entry.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CELAS2 EID K G1 C1 G2 C2 GE S

Example:
CELAS2 28 6.2+3 32 19 4

Field Contents
EID Unique element identification number. (0 < Integer < 100,000,000)
K Stiffness of the scalar spring. (Real)
G1, G2 Geometric grid point or scalar identification number. (Integer > 0)
C1, C2 Component number. (0 < Integer < 6; 0 blank or zero if scalar point.)
GE Damping coefficient. See Remarks 6. and 8. (Real)
S Stress coefficient. (Real)

Remarks:
1. Scalar points may be used for G1 and/or G2, in which case the corresponding C1 and/or C2 must
be zero or blank. Zero or blank may be used to indicate a grounded terminal G1 or G2 with a
corresponding blank or zero C1 or C2. A grounded terminal is a point with a displacement that is
constrained to zero. If only scalar points and/or ground are involved, it is more efficient to use the
CELAS4 entry.
2. Element identification numbers should be unique with respect to all other element identification
numbers.
3. The two connection points (G1, C1) and (G2, C2) must be distinct.
4. For a discussion of the scalar elements, see Scalar Elements (CELASi, CMASSi, CDAMPi) (p. 172) in the .
5. A scalar point specified on this entry need not be defined on an SPOINT entry.
6. If PARAM,W4 is not specified, GE is ignored in transient analysis. See Parameters, 785.
7. If Gi refers to a grid point then Ci refers to degrees-of-freedom in the displacement coordinate system
specified by CD on the GRID entry.
8. To obtain the damping coefficient GE, multiply the critical damping ratio C ⁄ C 0 by 2.0.

Main Index
 358 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

CELAS3 Scalar Spring Connection to Scalar Points Only

Defines a scalar spring element that connects only to scalar points.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CELAS3 EID PID S1 S2

Example:
CELAS3 19 2 14 15

Field Contents
EID Unique element identification number. (0 < Integer < 100,000,000)
PID Property identification number of a PELAS entry. (Integer > 0; Default = EID)
S1, S2 Scalar point identification numbers. (Integer > 0; S1 ≠ S2 )

Remarks:
1. S1 or S2 may be blank or zero, indicating a constrained coordinate.
2. Element identification numbers should be unique with respect to all other element identification
numbers.
3. Only one scalar spring element may be defined on a single entry.
4. For a discussion of the scalar elements, see Scalar Elements (CELASi, CMASSi, CDAMPi) (p. 172) in the .
5. A scalar point specified on this entry need not be defined on an SPOINT entry.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 359

CELAS4 Scalar Spring Property and Connection to Scalar Points Only

Defines a scalar spring element that is connected only to scalar points, without reference to a property entry.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CELAS4 EID K S1 S2

Example:
CELAS4 42 6.2-3 2

Field Contents
EID Unique element identification number. (0 < Integer < 100,000,000)
K Stiffness of the scalar spring. (Real)
S1, S2 Scalar point identification numbers. (Integer > 0; S1 ≠ S2 )

Remarks:
1. S1 or S2, but not both, may be blank or zero indicating a constrained coordinate.
2. Element identification numbers should be unique with respect to all other element identification
numbers.
3. A structural damping coefficient is not available with CELAS4. The value of g is assumed to be 0.0.
4. No stress coefficient is available with CELAS4.
5. Only one scalar spring element may be defined on a single entry.
6. For a discussion of the scalar elements, see Scalar Elements (CELASi, CMASSi, CDAMPi) (p. 172) in the .
7. A scalar point specified on this entry need not be defined on an SPOINT entry.

Main Index
 360 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

CHBDYE Geometric Surface Element Definition (Element Form)

Defines a boundary condition surface element with reference to a heat conduction element.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CHBDYE EID EID2 SIDE IVIEWF IVIEWB RADMIDF RADMIDB

Example:
CHBDYE 2 10 1 3 3 2 2

Field Contents
EID Surface element identification number for a specific side of a particular element. See
Remarks 1. and 9. (Unique (0 < Integer < 100,000,000) among all elements.)
EID2 A heat conduction element identification number. (Integer > 0)
SIDE A consistent element side identification number. See Remark 6. (1 < Integer < 6)
IVIEWF A VIEW entry identification number for the front face of surface element. (Integer > 0, see
Remark 2. for default.)
IVIEWB A VIEW entry identification number for the back face of surface element. (Integer > 0, see
Remark 2. for default.)
RADMIDF RADM identification number for front face of surface element. (Integer > 0, see Remark 2.
for default.)
RADMIDB RADM identification number for back face of surface element. (Integer > 0, see Remark 2.
for default.)

Remarks:
1. EID is a unique elemental ID associated with a particular surface element. EID2 identifies the general
heat conduction element being considered for this surface element.
2. The defaults for IVIEWF, IVIEWB, RADMIDF, and RADMIDB may be specified on the BDYOR
entry. If a particular field is blank both on the CHBDYE entry and the BDYOR entry, then the
default is zero.
3. For the front face of shell elements, the right-hand rule is used as one progresses around the element
surface from G1 to G2 to ... Gn. For the edges of shell elements or the ends of line elements, an
outward normal is used to define the front surface.
4. If the surface element is to be used in the calculation of view factors, it must have an associated VIEW
entry.
5. All conduction elements to which any boundary condition is to be applied must be individually
identified with the application of one of the surface element entries: CHBDYE, CHBDYG, or
CHBDYP.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 361

6. Side conventions for solid elements.

The sides of the solid elements are numbered consecutively according to the order of the grid point
numbers on the solid element entry. The sides of solid elements are either quadrilaterals or triangles.
For each element type, tabulate the grid points (gp) at the corners of each side.
8-node or 20-node CHEXA

side gp gp gp gp
1 4 3 2 1
2 1 2 6 5
3 2 3 7 6
4 3 4 8 7
5 4 1 5 8
6 5 6 7 8

CPENTA

side gp gp gp gp
1 3 2 1
2 1 2 5 4
3 2 3 6 5
4 3 1 4 6
5 4 5 6

CTETRA

side gp gp gp
1 3 2 1
2 1 2 4
3 2 3 4
4 3 1 4

7. Side conventions for shell elements.

Side 1 of shell elements (top) are of an AREA type, and additional sides (2 through a maximum of 5
for a QUAD) are of LINE type. (See CHBDYG, 363 for surface type definition.)

Main Index
 362 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

Area Type Sides –The first side is that given by the right-hand rule on the shell elements grid points.
Line Type Sides –The second side (first line) proceeds from grid point 1 to grid point 2 of the shell
element, and the remaining lines are numbered consecutively. The thickness of the line is that of the
shell element, and the normal to the line is outward from the shell element in the plane of the shell.
Note that any midside nodes are ignored in this specification.
8. Side conventions for line elements.
LINE elements have one linear side (side 1) with geometry that is the same as that of the element and
two POINT-type sides corresponding to the two points bounding the linear element (first grid point-
side 2; second grid point-side 3).
The TUBE-type element has two linear sides of type TUBE. The first side represents the outside with
diameters equal to that of the outside of the tube. The second side represents the inside with
diameters equal to that of the inside of the tube.
Point Sides – Point sides may be used with any linear element. The direction of the outward normals
of these points is in line with the element axis, but pointing away from the element. The area assigned
to these POINT-type sides is consistent with the element geometry.
Rev Sides –The CTRIAX6 element has associated with it three REV sides. The first side is associated
with Grid Points G1, G2, and G3. The positive face identification normals point away from the
element.
9. Application of boundary conditions to CHBDYE is referenced through the EID. Boundary
conditions can reference either the front or back face of the CHBDYE by specifying +EID or -EID
respectively. Correspondingly, the back face is minus the normal vector of the front face. Similarly,
IVIEWF and RADMIDF are associated with +EID and IVIEWB and RADMIDB with -EID. For
radiation problems, if the RADMIDF or RADMIDB is zero, default radiant properties assume
perfect black body behavior.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 363

CHBDYG Geometric Surface Element Definition (Grid Form)

Defines a boundary condition surface element without reference to a property entry.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CHBDYG EID TYPE IVIEWF IVIEWB RADMIDF RADMIDB

G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 G8

Example:
CHBDYG 2 AREA4 3 3 2 2
100 103 102 101

Field Contents
EID Surface element identification number. (Unique (0 < Integer < 100,000,000) among all
elemental entries.)
TYPE Surface type. See Remark 3. (Character)
IVIEWF A VIEW entry identification number for the front face. (Integer > 0; see Remark 2. for
default.)
IVIEWB A VIEW entry identification number for the back face. (Integer > 0; see Remark 2. for
default.)
RADMIDF RADM identification number for front face of surface element. (Integer > 0; see Remark 2.
for default.)
RADMIDB RADM identification number for back face of surface element. (Integer > 0; see Remark 2.
for default.)
Gi Grid point IDs of grids bounding the surface. (Integer > 0)

Remarks:
1. EID is a unique ID associated with a particular surface element as defined by the grid points.
2. The defaults for TYPE, IVIEWF, IVIEWB, RADMIDF, and RADMIDB may be specified on the
BDYOR entry. If a particular field is blank on both the CHBDYG entry and the BDYOR entry,
then the default is zero.
3. TYPE specifies the kind of element surface; allowed types are: REV, AREA3, AREA4, AREA6, and
AREA8. See Figure 0-3, Figure 0-4, and Figure 0-5.
• TYPE = REV

Main Index
 364 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

The “REV” type has two primary grid points that must lie in the x-z plane of the basic coordinate
system with x>0. A midside grid point G3 is optional and supports convection or heat flux from
the edge of the six-noded CTRIAX6 element. The defined area is a conical section with z as the
axis of symmetry. A property entry is required for convection, radiation, or thermal vector flux.
Automatic view factor calculations with VIEW data are not supported for the REV option.
z
G2 n
T
G3 G1
x
y

Figure 0-3 . Normal Vector for CHBDYG Element of Type “REV”

The unit normal lies in the x-z plane, and is given by

n = ( ey × T ) ⁄ ey × T

e y is the unit vector in the y direction.

• TYPE = AREA3, AREA4, AREA6, or AREA8
These types have three and four primary grid points, respectively, that define a triangular or
quadrilateral surface and must be ordered to go around the boundary. A property entry is required
for convection, radiation, or thermal vector flux.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 365

G3 G4 G3

G1 G2 G1 G2

AREA3 AREA4

G3 G4 G7 G3

G6 G5 G8 G6

G1 G4 G2 G1 G5 G2
AREA6 AREA8
(Grid points G4 through G6 optional) (Grid points G5 through G8 optional)

Figure 0-4 TYPE Examples

G3 or G4
n
T 1x
G2

G1 T 12

Figure 0-5 Normal Vector for CHBDYG Element of Types “AREAi”

The unit normal vector is given by

Main Index
 366 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

( T 12 × T 1x )
n = ------------------------------
T 12 × T 1x

(G3 is used for triangles, and G4 is used for quadrilaterals.)

4. For defining the front face, the right-hand rule is used on the sequence G1 to G2 to ... Gn of grid
points.
5. If the surface element is to be used in the calculation of view factors, it must have an associated VIEW
entry.
6. All conduction elements to which any boundary condition is to be applied must be individually
identified with one of the surface element entries: CHBDYE, CHBDYG, or CHBDYP.
See Remark 9. of CHBDYE for application of boundary conditions using CHBDYG entries and a discussion
of front and back faces.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 367

CHBDYP Geometric Surface Element Definition (Property Form)

Defines a boundary condition surface element with reference to a PHBDY entry.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CHBDYP EID PID TYPE IVIEWF IVIEWB G1 G2 G0
RADMIDF RADMIDB GMID CE E1 E2 E3

Example:
CHBDYP 2 5 POINT 2 2 101 500
3 3 0.0 0.0 1.0

Field Contents
EID Surface element identification number. (Unique (0 < Integer < 100,000,000) among all
element identification numbers.)
PID PHBDY property entry identification numbers. (Integer > 0)
TYPE Surface type. See Remark 3. (Character)
IVIEWF VIEW entry identification number for the front face. (Integer > 0 or blank)
IVIEWB VIEW entry identification number for the back face. (Integer > 0 or blank)
G1, G2 Grid point identification numbers of grids bounding the surface. (Integer > 0)
GO Orientation grid point. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
RADMIDF RADM entry identification number for front face. (Integer > 0 or blank)
RADMIDB RADM entry identification number for back face. (Integer > 0 or blank)
GMID Grid point identification number of a midside node if it is used with the line type surface
element.
CE Coordinate system for defining orientation vector. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
Ei Components of the orientation vector in coordinate system CE. The origin of the
orientation vector is grid point G1. (Real or blank)

Remarks:
1. EID is a unique ID associated with a particular surface element as defined by the grid point(s).
2. The defaults for PID, TYPE, IVIEWF, IVIEWB, GO, RADMIDF, RADMIDB, CE, and Ei may
be specified on the BDYOR entry. If a particular field is blank on both the CHBDYP entry and the
BDYOR entry, then the default is zero.

Main Index
 368 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

3. TYPE specifies the kind of element surface; the allowed types are: “POINT,” “LINE,” “ELCYL,”
“FTUBE,” and “TUBE.” For TYPE = “FTUBE” and TYPE = “TUBE,” the geometric orientation
is completely determined by G1 and G2; the GO, CE, E1, E2, and E3 fields are ignored.
• TYPE = “POINT”
TYPE = “POINT” has one primary grid point, requires a property entry, and the normal vector
Vi must be specified if thermal flux is to be used.

V
n
G1

Figure 0-6 Normal Vector for CHBDYP Element of Type “POINT”

(See Remarks 4. and 5)

The unit normal vector is given by n = V ⁄ V where V is specified in the Ei field and given
in the basic system at the referenced grid point. See Remarks 4 and 5 for the determination of V .
• TYPE = “LINE,” “FTUBE,” or “TUBE”
The TYPE = “LINE” type has two primary grid points, requires a property entry, and the vector
is required. TYPE = “FTUBE” and TYPE = “TUBE” are similar to TYPE = “LINE” except they
can have linear taper with no automatic view factor calculations. GMID is an option for the
TYPE = “LINE” surface element only and is ignored for TYPE = “FTUBE” and “TUBE”.

G2
GMID
V
n T
G1

Figure 0-7 Normal Vector for CHBDYP Element with TYPE=“LINE”,

TYPE=“FTUBE”, or TYPE=“TUBE”
(See Remarks 4 and 5)

The unit normal lies in the plane V and T , is perpendicular to T , and is given by:

T × (V × T)
n = -----------------------------------
T × (V × T)

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 369

• TYPE = “ELCYL”
TYPE = “ELCYL” (elliptic cylinder) has two connected primary grid points and requires a
property entry. The vector must be nonzero. Automatic view factor calculations are not
available.

n
V
T

R1
R2

Figure 0-8 Normal Vector for CHBDYP Element of TYPE=“ELCYL”

(See Remarks 4 and 5)

The same logic is used to determine n as for TYPE = LINE. The “radius” R1 is in the n
direction, and R2 is the perpendicular to n and T (see fields 7 and 8 of PHBDY entry).
4. For TYPE = “POINT,” TYPE = “LINE,” and TYPE = “ELCYL,” geometric orientation is required.
The required information is sought in the following order:
• If GO > 0 is found on the CHBDYP entry, it is used.
• Otherwise, if a nonblank CE is found on the CHBDYP continuation entry, this CE and the
corresponding vectors E1, E2, and E3 are used.
• If neither of the above, the same information is sought in the same way from the BDYOR entry.
• If none of the above apply, a warning message is issued.
5. The geometric orientation can be defined by either GO or the vector E1, E2, E3.
• If GO > zero:
For a TYPE = “POINT” surface, the normal to the front face is the vector from G1 to GO. For
the TYPE = “LINE” surface, the plane passes through G1, G2, GO and the right-hand rule is
used on this sequence to get the normal to the front face. For TYPE = “ELCYL” surface the first
axis of the ellipse lies on the G1, G2, GO plane, and the second axis is normal to this plane. For
TYPE = “FTUBE” or “TUBE” surface, no orientation is required, and GO is superfluous.
• If GO is zero:

Main Index
 370 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

For a TYPE = “POINT” surface, the normal to the front face is the orientation vector. For the
TYPE = “LINE” surface, the plane passes through G1, G2, and the orientation vector; the front
face is based on the right-hand rule for the vectors G2-G1 and the orientation vector. For
TYPE = “ELCYL” surface, the first axis of the ellipse lies on the G1, G2, orientation vector plane,
and the second axis is normal to this plane.
6. The continuation entry is optional.
7. If the surface element is to be used in the calculation of view factors, it must have an associated VIEW
entry.
8. All conduction elements to which any boundary condition is to be applied must be individually
identified with the application of one of the surface element entries: CHBDYE, CHBDYG, or
CHBDYP entries.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 371

CONTRLT Thermal Control ELement for Heat Transfer Analysis

Defines the control mechanism for QVECT, QVOL, QBCY3, in heat transfer analysis (SOL 159).

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CONTRLT ID Sensor SFORM CTYPE Pl Ph PTYPE PZERO
DT Delay TAUc TA8

Example:
CONTRLT 100 20 3 68. 73. 1 0.

Field Contents
ID Control node ID as well as CONTROLT ID (Integer > 0, no default). See Remark 1.
Sensor Grid or scalar point ID of the sensor (Integer > 0, no default). See Remark 2.
SFORM Sensor output form (Character, T, default = T). See Remark 3.
CTYPE Control type (Character, TSTAT for thermostat, default = TSTAT). See Remark 4.
Pl, Ph Lower and upper limit value for desired temperature in the thermostat (real, no default). See
Remark 5.
PTYPE Process type (Integer value 1 thru 6). No default, see Remark 5.
PZERO Initial controller value (0. < Real < 1., Default = 0.) See Remark 4.
DT Monitoring time interval, or sampling period (Real > 0., Default = 0) See Remark 6.
Delay Time delay after the switch is triggered or time for delayed control action in PID control.
(Real < 0., Default = 0.) See Remark 7.
TAUc Decay time constant for actuator response (Real > 0., default = 0.) See Remark 7.

Remarks:
1. The CONTRLT ID is referenced by CNTRLND entry identified on any of the QVECT, QVOL,
QBDY3, Bulk Data entries. If any grid or scalar point ID is the same as the CONTRLT ID, then
the combined logic associated with the controller and the control node will be in force for the LBC
referenced. Any number of CONTROLT statements may exist in a single model.
2. Sensor point, where a feedback temperature or rate of change of temperature is measured. May be a
dependent DOF in a MPC relationship.
3. Sensor output may only be temperature (T)
4. Control type can only be TSTAT. The PZERO field cannot have any other value but 0.0 or 1.0.
5. The upper and lower limit values (Pl and Ph) define a dead band for a thermostat. The available
thermostat controller (TSTAT) formats are (PTYPE = 1 thru 6).

Main Index
 372 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

CONV Heat Boundary Element Free Convection Entry

Specifies a free convection boundary condition for heat transfer analysis through connection to a surface
element (CHBDYi entry).

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CONV EID PCONID FLMND CNTRLND TA1 TA2 TA3 TA4
TA5 TA6 TA7 TA8

Example:
CONV 2 101 3 201 301

Field Contents
EID CHBDYG, CHBDYE, or CHBDYP surface element identification number. (Integer > 0)
PCONID Convection property identification number of a PCONV entry. (Integer > 0)
FLMND Point for film convection fluid property temperature. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
CNTRLND Control point for free convection boundary condition. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
TAi Ambient points used for convection. (Integer > 0 for TA1 and Integer > 0 for TA2 through
TA8; Default for TA2 through TA8 is TA1.)

Remarks:
1. The basic exchange relationship can be expressed in one of the following forms:
EXPF
• q = H ⋅ ( T – TAMB ) ( T – TAMB ) , CNTRLND = 0

EXPF
• q = ( H ⋅ u CNTRLND ) ( T – TAMB ) ( T – TAMB ) , CNTRLND ≠ 0

EXPF EXPF
• q = H(T – TAMB ) , CNTRLND = 0

EXPF EXPF
• q = ( H ⋅ u CNTRLND ) ( T – TAMB ) , CNTRLND ≠ 0
EXPF is specified on the PCONV entry.
(See PCONV, 2809 entry for additional clarification of forms.)
2. The continuation entry is not required.
3. CONV is used with an CHBDYi (CHBDYG, CHBDYE, or CHBDYP) entry having the same EID.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 373

4. The temperature of the film convection point provides the look up temperature to determine the
convection film coefficient. If FLMND=0, the reference temperature has several options. It can be
the average of surface and ambient temperatures, the surface temperature, or the ambient
temperature, as defined in the FORM field of the PCONV Bulk Data entry.
5. If only one ambient point is specified then all the ambient points are assumed to have the same
temperature. If midside ambient points are missing, the temperature of these points is assumed to
be the average of the connecting corner points.
6. See the Bulk Data entry, PCONV, 2809, for an explanation of the mathematical relationships involved
in free convection and the reference temperature for convection film coefficient.

Main Index
 374 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

CONVM Heat Boundary Element Forced Convection Entry

Specifies a forced convection boundary condition for heat transfer analysis through connection to a surface
element (CHBDYi entry).

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CONVM EID PCONID FLMND CNTMDOT TA1 TA2

Example:
CONVM 101 1 201 301 20 21

Field Contents
EID CHBDYP element identification number. (Integer > 0)
PCONID Convection property identification number of a PCONVM entry. (Integer > 0)
FLMND Point used for fluid film temperature. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
CNTMDOT Control point used for controlling mass flow. (Integer > 0)
TA1, TA2 Ambient points used for convection. (Integer > 0 for TA1 and Integer > 0 for TA2; Default for TA2 is TA1.)

Remarks:
1. CONVM is used with an CHBDYP entry of type FTUBE having the same EID.
2. The temperature of the fluid film point may be specified to determine the material properties for the
fluid. If FLMND=0, the reference temperature has several options. It can be the average of surface
and ambient temperatures, the surface temperatures, or the ambient temperature, as defined in the
FORM field of the PCONVM Bulk Data entry.
3. CNTMDOT must be set to the desired mass flow rate (mdot) to effect the advection of energy
downstream at an mdot ⋅ C p ⋅ T rate. In addition to the effect that mdot has on the transfer of
thermal energy in the streamwise direction, this control point value is also used in computing the tube
Reynolds number and subsequently the forced convection heat transfer coefficient if requested. This
enables the fluid stream to exchange heat with its surroundings.
4. If only the first ambient point is specified then, the second ambient point is assumed to have the same
temperature.
5. See the Bulk Data entry, PCONVM, 2812, for an explanation of the mathematical relationships available
for forced convection and the reference temperature for fluid material properties.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 375

DELAY Dynamic Load Time Delay

Defines the time delay term τ in the equations of the dynamic loading function.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DELAY SID P1 C1 T1 P2 C2 T2

Example:
DELAY 5 21 6 4.25 7 6 8.1

Field Contents
SID Identification number of the DELAY entry. (Integer > 0)
Pi Grid, extra, or scalar point identification number. (Integer > 0)
Ci Component number. (Integer 1 through 6 for grid point, blank or 0 for extra point or scalar
point.)
Ti
Time delay τ for designated point Pi and component Ci. (Real)

Remarks:
1. One or two dynamic load time delays may be defined on a single entry.
2. SID must also be specified on a RLOAD1, RLOAD2, TLOAD1, TLOAD2, or ACSRCE entry. See
those entry descriptions for the formulas that define the manner in which the time delay τ is used.
3. A DAREA and/or LSEQ entry should be used to define a load at Pi and Ci.
4. In superelement analysis, DELAY entries may only be applied to loads on points in the residual
structure.

Main Index
 376 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

DLOAD Dynamic Load Combination or Superposition

Defines a dynamic loading condition for frequency response or transient response problems as a linear
combination of load sets defined via RLOAD1 or RLOAD2 entries for frequency response or TLOAD1 or
TLOAD2 entries for transient response.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DLOAD SID S S1 L1 S2 L2 S3 L3
S4 L4 -etc.- *

Examples:
DLOAD 17 1.0 2.0 6 -2.0 7 2.0 8
-2.0 9

Field Contents
SID Load set identification number. (Integer > 0)
S Scale factor. (Real)
Si Scale factors. (Real)
Li Load set identification numbers of RLOAD1, RLOAD2, TLOAD1, TLOAD2, and ACSRC entries.
(Integer > 0)

Remarks:
1. Dynamic load sets must be selected in the Case Control Section with DLOAD = SID.
2. The load vector being defined by this entry is given by

{ P } = S  Si { P i }
i
3. Each Li must be unique from any other Li on the same entry.
4. SID must be unique from all TLOADi and RLOADi entries.
5. Nonlinear transient load sets (NOLINi entries) may not be specified on DLOAD entries. NOLINi
entries are selected separately in the Case Control Section by the NONLINEAR command.
6. A DLOAD entry may not reference a set identification number defined by another DLOAD entry.
7. TLOAD1 and TLOAD2 loads may be combined only through the use of the DLOAD entry.
8. RLOAD1 and RLOAD2 loads may be combined only through the use of the DLOAD entry.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 377

DMI Direct Matrix Input

Defines matrix data blocks. Generates a matrix of the following form:

X 11 X 12 … X 1n
X 21 X 22 … X 2n
[ NAME ] =
· · · ·
X m1 … … X mn

where the elements X ij may be real ( X ij = A ij ) or complex ( X ij = A ij + iB ij ) . The matrix is defined

by a single header entry and one or more column entries. Only one header entry is required. A column entry
is required for each column with nonzero elements.

Header Entry Format:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DMI NAME “0” FORM TIN TOUT M N

Column Entry Format for Real Matrices:

DMI NAME J I1 A(I1,J) A(I1+1,J) -etc.- I2
A(I2,J) -etc.-

Column Entry Format for Complex Matrices:

DMI NAME J I1 A(I1,J) B(I1,J) A(I1+1,J) B(I1+1,J) -etc.-
I2 A(I2,J) B(I2,J) -etc.-

Example of a Real Matrix:

DMI BBB 0 2 1 1 4 2
DMI BBB 1 1 1. 3. 5.
DMI BBB 2 2 6. 4 8.

1.0 0.0
BBB = 3.0 6.0
5.0 0.0
0.0 8.0

Main Index
 378 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

Example of a Complex Matrix:

DMI QQQ 0 2 3 3 4 2
DMI QQQ 1 1 1.0 2.0 3.0 0.0 3
5.0 6.0
DMI QQQ 2 2 6.0 7.0 4 8.0 9.0

1.0 + 2.0i , 0.0 + 0.0i

[ QQQ ] = 3.0 + 0.0i , 6.0 + 7.0i
5.0 + 6.0i , 0.0 + 0.0i
0.0 + 0.0i , 8.0 + 9.0i
Field Contents
NAME Name of the matrix. See Remark 1. Name is used to reference the data block in the DMAP
sequence. (One to eight alphanumeric characters, the first of which must be alphabetic.)
FORM Form of matrix, as follows: (Integer)
1 = Square matrix (not symmetric)
2 = General rectangular matrix
3 = Diagonal matrix (M=number of rows, N = 1)
4 = Lower triangular factor
5 = Upper triangular factor
6 = Symmetric matrix
8 = Identity matrix (M=number of rows, N = M)
TIN Type of matrix being input, as follows: (Integer)
1 = Real, single precision (one field used/element)
2 = Real, double precision (one field used/element)
3 = Complex, single precision (two fields used/element)
4 = Complex, double precision (two fields used/element)

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 379

Field Contents
TOUT Type of matrix being output, as follows: (Integer)
0 = Set by precision cell
1 = Real, single precision
2 = Real, double precision
3 = Complex, single precision
4 = Complex, double precision
M Number of rows in NAME. (Integer > 0)
N Number of columns in NAME. Except for FORM 3 and 8. (Integer > 0)
"0" Indicates the header entry.
J Column number of NAME. (Integer > 0)
I1, I2, etc. Row number of NAME, which indicates the beginning of a group of nonzero elements in
the column. See Remark 15. (Integer > 0)
A(Ix,J) Real part of element (see TIN). (Real)
B(Ix,J) Imaginary part of element (see TIN). (Real)

Remarks:
1. In order to use the DMI feature, the user must write a DMAP, or make alterations to a solution
sequence that includes the DMIIN module. See the MSC Nastran DMAP Programmer’s Guide. All
of the rules governing the use of data blocks in DMAP sequences apply.
2. The total number of DMIs and DTIs may not exceed 1000.
3. Field 3 of the header entry must contain an integer of zero (0).
4. For symmetric matrices, the entire matrix must be input.
5. Only nonzero terms need be entered.
6. Leading and trailing zeros in a column do not have to be entered. However, a blank field between
nonzero fields on this entry is not equivalent to a zero. If a zero input is required, the appropriate
type zero must be entered (i.e., 0.0 or 0.0D0).
7. Complex input must have both the real and imaginary parts entered if either part is nonzero; i.e., the
zero component must be input explicitly.
8. If A(Ix,J) is followed by "THRU" in the next field and an integer row number "IX" after the THRU,
then A(lx,J) will be repeated in each row through IX. The "THRU" must follow an element value.
For example, the entries for a real matrix RRR would appear as follows:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DMI NAME J I1 A(I1,J) I1 A(I2,J)
DMI RRR 1 2 1.0 THRU 10 12 2.0

These entries will cause the first column of the matrix RRR to have a zero in row 1, the values 1.0
in rows 2 through 10, a zero in row 11, and 2.0 in row 12.

Main Index
 380 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

11. Each column must be a single logical entry. The terms in each column must be specified in increasing
row number order.
12. The "FORM" options 4, 5, and 8 are nonstandard forms and may be used only in conjunction with
the modules indicated in Table 0-1.

Table 0-1 DMI FORM Options

Modules
FORM Matrix Description ADD FBS MATPRN MPYAD
4 Lower Triangular Factor X X
5 Upper Triangular Factor X X
8 Identity X X X X

13. Form 3 matrices are converted to Form 6 matrices, which may be used by any module.
14. Form 7 matrices may not be defined on this entry.
15. I1 must be specified. I2, etc. are not required if their matrix elements follow the preceding element
in the next row of the matrix. For example, in the column entry for column 1 of QQQ, neither I2
nor I3 is specified.
16. The DMIG entry is more convenient for matrices with rows and columns that are referenced by grid
or scalar point degrees-of-freedom.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 381

DMIG Direct Matrix Input at Points

Defines direct input matrices related to grid, extra, and/or scalar points. The matrix is defined by a single
header entry and one or more column entries. A column entry is required for each column with nonzero
elements.

Header Entry Format:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DMIG NAME “0" IFO TIN TOUT POLAR NCOL

Column Entry Format:

DMIG NAME GJ CJ G1 C1 A1 B1
G2 C2 A2 B2 -etc.-

Example:
DMIG STIF 0 1 3 4
DMIG STIF 27 1 2 3 3.+5 3.+3
2 4 2.5+10 0. 50 1.0 0.

Field Contents
NAME Name of the matrix. See Remark 1. (One to eight alphanumeric characters, the first of which
is alphabetic.)
IFO Form of matrix input. IFO = 6 must be specified for matrices selected by the K2GG,
M2GG, and B2GG Case Control commands. (Integer)
1 = Square
9 or 2 = Rectangular
6 = Symmetric
TIN Type of matrix being input: (Integer)
1 = Real, single precision (One field is used per element.)
2 = Real, double precision (One field is used per element.)
3 = Complex, single precision (Two fields are used per element.)
4 = Complex, double precision (Two fields are used per element.)
TOUT Type of matrix that will be created: (Integer)
0 = Set by precision system cell (Default)
1 = Real, single precision
2 = Real, double precision
3 = Complex, single precision
4 = Complex, double precision

Main Index
 382 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

Field Contents
POLAR Input format of Ai, Bi. (Integer=blank or 0 indicates real, imaginary format; Integer > 0
indicates amplitude, phase format.)
NCOL Number of columns in a rectangular matrix. Used only for IFO = 9. See Remarks 5. and 6.
(Integer > 0)
GJ Grid, scalar or extra point identification number for column index. (Integer > 0)
CJ Component number for grid point GJ. (0 < Integer < 6; blank or zero if GJ is a scalar or
extra point.)
Gi Grid, scalar, or extra point identification number for row index. (Integer > 0)
Ci Component number for Gi for a grid point. ( 0 < CJ ≤ 6 ; blank or zero if Gi is a scalar
or extra point.)
Ai, Bi Real and imaginary (or amplitude and phase) parts of a matrix element. If the matrix is real
(TIN = 1 or 2), then Bi must be blank. (Real)

Remarks:
1. Matrices defined on this entry may be used in dynamics by selection in the Case Control with
K2PP = NAME, B2PP = NAME, M2PP = NAME for [Kpp], [Bpp], or [Mpp], respectively. Matrices
may also be selected for all solution sequences by K2GG = NAME, B2GG = NAME, and
M2GG = NAME. The g-set matrices are added to the structural matrices before constraints are
applied, while p-set matrices are added in dynamics after constraints are applied. Load matrices may
be selected by P2G = NAME for dynamic and superelement analyses.
2. The header entry containing IFO, TIN and TOUT is required. Each nonnull column is started with
a GJ, CJ pair. The entries for each row of that column follows. Only nonzero terms need be entered.
The terms may be input in arbitrary order. A GJ, CJ pair may be entered more than once, but input
of an element of the matrix more than once will produce a fatal message.
3. Field 3 of the header entry must contain an integer 0.
4. For symmetric matrices (IFO = 6), a given off-diagonal element may be input either below or above
the diagonal. While upper and lower triangle terms may be mixed, a fatal message will be issued if an
element is input both below and above the diagonal.
5. The recommended format for rectangular matrices requires the use of NCOL and IFO = 9. The
number of columns in the matrix is NCOL. (The number of rows in all DMIG matrices is always
either p-set or g-set size, depending on the context.) The GJ term is used for the column index. The
CJ term is ignored.
6. If NCOL is not used for rectangular matrices, two different conventions are available:
• If IFO = 9, GJ and CJ will determine the sorted sequence, but will otherwise be ignored; a
rectangular matrix will be generated with the columns submitted being in the 1 to N positions,
where N is the number of logical entries submitted (not counting the header entry).

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 383

• If IFO = 2, the number of columns of the rectangular matrix will be equal to the index of the
highest numbered non-null column (in internal sort). Trailing null columns of the g- or p-size
matrix will be truncated.
7. The matrix names must be unique among all DMIGs.
8. TIN should be set consistent with the number of decimal digits required to read the input data
adequately. For a single-precision specification on a short-word machine, the input will be truncated
after about eight decimal digits, even when more digits are present in a double-field format. If more
digits are needed, a double precision specification should be used instead. However, note that a
double precision specification requires a “D” type exponent even for terms that do not need an
exponent. For example, unity may be input as 1.0 in single precision, but the longer form 1.0D0 is
required for double precision.
9. On long-word machines, almost all matrix calculations are performed in single precision and on
short-word machines, in double precision. It is recommended that DMIG matrices also follow these
conventions for a balance of efficiency and reliability. The recommended value for TOUT is 0,
which instructs the program to inspect the system cell that measures the machine precision at run
time and sets the precision of the matrix to the same value. TOUT = 0 allows the same DMIG input
to be used on any machine. If TOUT is contrary to the machine type specified (for example, a
TOUT of 1 on a short-word machine), unreliable results may occur.
10. If any DMIG entry is changed or added on restart then a complete re-analysis is performed.
Therefore, DMIG entry changes or additions are not recommended on restart.

Main Index
 384 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

DPHASE Dynamic Load Phase Lead

Defines the phase lead term θ in the equation of the dynamic loading function.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DPHASE SID P1 C1 TH1 P2 C2 TH2

Example:
DPHASE 4 21 6 2.1 8 6 7.2

Field Contents
SID Identification number of DPHASE entry. (Integer > 0)
Pi Grid, extra, or scalar point identification number. (Integer > 0)
Ci Component number. (Integers 1 through 6 for grid points; zero or blank for extra or scalar
points)
THi Phase lead θ in degrees. (Real)

Remarks:
1. One or two dynamic load phase lead terms may be defined on a single entry.
2. SID must be referenced on a RLOADi entry. Refer to the RLOAD1 or RLOAD2 entry for the
formulas that define how the phase lead θ is used.
3. A DAREA and/or LSEQ entry should be used to define a load at Pi and Ci.
4. In superelement analysis, DPHASE entries may only be applied to loads on points in the residual
structure.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 385

INCLUDE Insert External File

Inserts an external file into the input file. The INCLUDE statement may appear anywhere within the input
data file.

Format:
INCLUDE’filename’

Describer:
filename Physical filename of the external file to be inserted. The user must supply the name
according to installation or machine requirements. It is recommended that the filename be
enclosed by single right-hand quotation marks.

Example:
The following INCLUDE statement is used to obtain the Bulk Data from another file called
MYBULK.DATA:
SOL 101
CEND
TITLE = STATIC ANALYSIS
LOAD = 100
BEGIN BULK
INCLUDE ’MYBULK.DATA’
ENDDATA

Remarks:
1. INCLUDE statements may be nested; that is, INCLUDE statements may appear inside the external
file. The nested depth level must not be greater than 10.
2. The total length of any line in an INCLUDE statement must not exceed 72 characters. Long file
names may be split across multiple lines. For example the file:
/dir123/dir456/dir789/filename.dat
may be included with the following input:
INCLUDE ‘/dir123
/dir456
/dir789/filename.dat’
3. See the MSC.Nastran 2004 Installation and Operations Guide for more examples.

Main Index
 386 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

LOAD Static Load Combination (Superposition)

Defines a static load as a linear combination of load sets defined via FORCE, MOMENT, FORCE1,
MOMENT1, FORCE2, MOMENT2, PLOAD, PLOAD1, PLOAD2, PLOAD4, PLOADX1, SLOAD,
RFORCE, and GRAV entries.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LOAD SID S S1 L1 S2 L2 S3 L3
S4 L4 -etc.-

Example:
LOAD 101 -0.5 1.0 3 6.2 4

Field Contents
SID Load set identification number. (Integer > 0)
S Overall scale factor. (Real)
Si Scale factor on Li. (Real)
Li Load set identification numbers defined on entry types listed above. (Integer > 0)

Remarks:
1. The load vector { P } is defined by

{ P } = S  Si { P Li }
i
2. Load set IDs (Li) must be unique.
3. This entry must be used if acceleration loads (GRAV entry) are to be used with any of the other types.
4. In the static solution sequences, the load set ID must be selected by the Case Control command
LOAD=SID. In the dynamic solution sequences, SID must be referenced in the LID field of an
LSEQ entry, which in turn must be selected by the Case Control command LOADSET.
5. A LOAD entry may not reference a set identification number defined by another LOAD entry.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 387

MAT4 Heat Transfer Material Properties, Isotropic

Defines the constant or temperature-dependent thermal material properties for conductivity, heat capacity,
density, dynamic viscosity, heat generation, reference enthalpy, and latent heat associated with a single-phase
change.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MAT4 MID K CP r H m HGEN REFENTH
TCH TDELTA QLAT

Example:
MAT4 1 204. .900 2700.

Field Contents
MID Material identification number. (Integer > 0)
K Thermal conductivity. (Blank or Real > 0.0)
CP Heat capacity per unit mass at constant pressure (specific heat). (Blank or Real > 0.0)
ρ Density. (Real > 0.0; Default = 1.0)

H Free convection heat transfer coefficient. (Real or blank)

m Dynamic viscosity. See Remark 2. (Real > 0.0 or blank)
HGEN Heat generation capability used with QVOL entries. (Real > 0.0; Default = 1.0)
REFENTH Reference enthalpy. (Real or blank)
TCH Lower temperature limit at which phase change region is to occur. (Real or blank)
TDELTA Total temperature change range within which a phase change is to occur. (Real > 0.0 or
blank)
QLAT Latent heat of fusion per unit mass associated with the phase change. (Real > 0.0 or blank)

Remarks:
1. The MID must be unique with respect to all other MAT4 and MAT5 entries. MAT4 may specify
material properties for any conduction elements as well as properties for a forced convection fluid (see
CONVM). MAT4 also provides the heat transfer coefficient for free convection (see CONV).
2. For a forced convection fluid, μ must be specified.
3. REFENTH is the enthalpy corresponding to zero temperature if the heat capacity CP is a constant.
If CP is obtained through a TABLEM lookup, REFENTH is the enthalpy at the first temperature in
the table.

Main Index
 388 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

4. Properties specified on the MAT4 entry may be defined as temperature dependent by use of the
MATT4 entry.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 389

MAT5 Thermal Material Property Definition

Defines the thermal material properties for anisotropic materials.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MAT5 MID KXX KXY KXZ KYY KYZ KZZ CP
RHO HGEN

Example:
MAT5 24 .092 .083 0.20 0.2
2.00

Field Contents
MID Material identification number. (Integer > 0)
Kij Thermal conductivity. (Real)
CP Heat capacity per unit mass. (Real > 0.0 or blank)
RHO Density. (Real>0.0; Default=1.0)
HGEN Heat generation capability used with QVOL entries. (Real > 0.0; Default = 1.0)

Remarks:
1. The thermal conductivity matrix has the following form:

KXX KXY KXZ

K = KXY KYY KYZ
KXZ KYZ KZZ

2. The material identification number may be the same as a MAT1, MAT2, or MAT3 entry but must
be unique with respect to other MAT4 or MAT5 entries.
3. MAT5 materials may be made temperature-dependent by use of the MATT5 entry.
4. When used for axisymmetric analysis (CTRIAX6), material properties are represented where:
KXX = radial conductivity component
KYY = axial conductivity component

Main Index
 390 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

MATT4 Thermal Material Temperature Dependence

Specifies table references for temperature-dependent MAT4 material properties.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MATT4 MID T(K) T(CP) T(H) T(μ) T(HGEN)

Example(s):
MATT4 2 10 11

Field Contents
MID Identification number of a MAT4 entry that is temperature dependent. (Integer > 0)
T(K) Identification number of a TABLEMj entry that gives the temperature dependence of the
thermal conductivity. (Integer > 0 or blank)
T(CP) Identification number of a TABLEMj entry that gives the temperature dependence of the
thermal heat capacity. (Integer > 0 or blank)
T(H) Identification number of a TABLEMj entry that gives the temperature dependence of the
free convection heat transfer coefficient. (Integer > 0 or blank)
T(μ) Identification number of a TABLEMj entry that gives the temperature dependence of the
dynamic viscosity. (Integer > 0 or blank)
T(HGEN) Identification number of a TABLEMj entry that gives the temperature dependence of the
internal heat generation property for QVOL. (Integer > 0 or blank)

Remarks:
1. The basic quantities on the MAT4 entry are always multiplied by the corresponding tabular function
referenced by the MATT4 entry.
2. If the fields are blank or zero, then there is no temperature dependence of the referenced quantity on
the MAT4 entry.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 391

MATT5 Thermal Anisotropic Material Temperature Dependence

Specifies temperature-dependent material properties on MAT5 entry fields via TABLEMi entries.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MATT5 MID T(KXX) T(KXY) T(KXZ) T(KYY) T(KYZ) T(KZZ) T(CP)
T(HGEN)

Example:
MATT5 24 73

Field Contents
MID Identification number of a MAT5 entry that is to be temperature dependent. (Integer > 0)
T(Kij) Identification number of a TABLEMi entry. The TABLEMi entry specifies temperature
dependence of the matrix term. (Integer > 0 or blank)
T(CP) Identification number of a TABLEMi entry that specifies the temperature dependence of the
thermal heat capacity. (Integer > 0 or blank)
T(HGEN) Identification number of a TABLEMi entry that gives the temperature dependence of the
internal heat generation property for the QVOL entry. (Integer > 0 or blank)

Remarks:
1. The basic quantities on the MAT5 entry are always multiplied by the tabular function referenced by
the MATT5 entry.
2. If the fields are blank or zero, then there is no temperature dependence of the referenced quantity on
the basic MAT5 entry.

Main Index
 392 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

MPC Multipoint Constraint

Defines a multipoint constraint equation of the form

 Aj u j = 0
j

where u j represents degree-of-freedom Cj at grid or scalar point Gj.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MPC SID G1 C1 A1 G2 C2 A2
G3 C3 A3 -etc.-

Example:
MPC 3 28 3 6.2 2 4.29
1 4 -2.91

Field Contents
SID Set identification number. (Integer > 0)
Gj Identification number of grid or scalar point. (Integer > 0)
Cj Component number. (Any one of the Integers 1 through 6 for grid points; blank or zero for
scalar points.)
Aj Coefficient. (Real; Default = 0.0 except A1 must be nonzero.)

Remarks:
1. Multipoint constraint sets must be selected with the Case Control command MPC = SID.
2. The first degree-of-freedom (G1, C1) in the sequence is defined to be the dependent degree-of-
freedom. A dependent degree-of-freedom assigned by one MPC entry cannot be assigned dependent
by another MPC entry or by a rigid element.
3. Forces of multipoint constraint may be recovered in all solution sequences, except SOL 129, with the
MPCFORCE Case Control command.
4. The m-set degrees-of-freedom specified on this entry may not be specified on other entries that define
mutually exclusive sets. See the “Degree-of-Freedom Sets” on page 1557 for a list of these entries.
5. By default, the grid point connectivity created by the MPC, MPCADD, and MPCAX entries is not
considered during resequencing, (see the PARAM,OLDSEQ description in “Parameters” on
page 1409). In order to consider the connectivity during resequencing, SID must be specified on the
PARAM,MPCX entry. Using the example above, specify PARAM,MPCX,3.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 393

MPCADD Multipoint Constraint Set Combination

Defines a multipoint constraint set as a union of multipoint constraint sets defined via MPC entries.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MPCADD SID S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7
S8 S9 -etc.-

Example:
MPCADD 101 2 3 1 6 4

Field Contents
SID Set identification number. (Integer > 0)
Sj Set identification numbers of multipoint constraint sets defined via MPC entries.
(Integer > 0)

Remarks:
1. Multipoint constraint sets must be selected with the Case Control command MPC = SID.
2. The Sj must be unique and may not be the identification number of a multipoint constraint set
defined by another MPCADD entry.
3. MPCADD entries take precedence over MPC entries. If both have the same SID, only the
MPCADD entry will be used.
4. By default, the grid point connectivity created by the MPC, MPCADD, and MPCAX entries is not
considered during resequencing, (see the PARAM,OLDSEQ description in “Parameters” on
page 1409). In order to consider the connectivity during resequencing, SID must be specified on the
PARAM,MPCX entry. Using the example above, specify PARAM,MPCX,101.

Main Index
 394 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

NLPARM Parameters for Nonlinear Static Analysis Control

Defines a set of parameters for nonlinear static analysis iteration strategy.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
NLPARM ID NINC DT KMETHOD KSTEP MAXITER CONV INTOUT
EPSU EPSP EPSW MAXDIV MAXQN MAXLS FSTRESS LSTOL
MAXBIS MAXR RTOLB

Example:
NLPARM 15 5 ITER

Field Contents
ID Identification number. (Integer > 0)
NINC Number of increments. See Remark 16. (0 < Integer < 1000; Default=10)
DT Incremental time interval for creep analysis. See Remark 3. (Real > 0.0; Default = 0.0 for no
creep.)
KMETHOD Method for controlling stiffness updates. See Remark 4. (Character = “AUTO”, “ITER”, or
“SEMI”; Default = “AUTO”.)
KSTEP Number of iterations before the stiffness update for ITER method. See Remark 5.
(Integer > 1; Default = 5)
MAXITER Limit on number of iterations for each load increment. See Remark 6. (Integer > 0;
Default = 25)
CONV Flags to select convergence criteria. See Remark 7. (Character = “U”, “P”, “W”, or any
combination; Default = “PW”.)
INTOUT Intermediate output flag. See Remark 8. (Character = “YES”, “NO”, or “ALL”;
Default = NO)
EPSU Error tolerance for displacement (U) criterion. See Remark 16. (Real > 0.0; Default = 1.0E-
2;)
EPSP Error tolerance for load (P) criterion. See Remark 16. (Real > 0.0; Usual default = 1.0E-2)
EPSW Error tolerance for work (W) criterion. See Remark 16. (Real > 0.0; Usual default = 1.0E-2)
MAXDIV Limit on probable divergence conditions per iteration before the solution is assumed to
diverge. See Remark 9. (Integer ≠ 0; Default = 3)
MAXQN Maximum number of quasi-Newton correction vectors to be saved on the database. See
Remark 10. (Integer > 0; Default = MAXITER)

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 395

Field Contents
MAXLS Maximum number of line searches allowed for each iteration. See Remark 11. (Integer > 0;
Default = 4)
FSTRESS Fraction of effective stress ( σ ) used to limit the subincrement size in the material routines.
See Remark 12. (0.0 < Real < 1.0; Default = 0.2)
LSTOL Line search tolerance. See Remark 11. (0.01 < Real < 0.9; Default = 0.5)
MAXBIS Maximum number of bisections allowed for each load increment. See Remark 13. (-
10 < MAXBIS < 10; Default = 5)
MAXR Maximum ratio for the adjusted arc-length increment relative to the initial value. See
Remark 14. (1.0 < MAXR < 40.0; Default = 20.0)
RTOLB Maximum value of incremental rotation (in degrees) allowed per iteration to activate
bisection. See Remark 15. (Real > 2.0; Default = 20.0)

Remarks:
1. The NLPARM entry is selected by the Case Control command NLPARM = ID. Each solution
subcase requires an NLPARM command.
2. In cases of static analysis (DT = 0.0) using Newton methods, NINC is the number of equal
subdivisions of the load change defined for the subcase. Applied loads, gravity loads, temperature
sets, enforced displacements, etc., define the new loading conditions. The differences from the
previous case are divided by NINC to define the incremental values. In cases of static analysis
(DT = 0.0) using arc-length methods, NINC is used to determine the initial arc-length for the
subcase, and the number of load subdivisions will not be equal to NINC. In cases of creep analysis
(DT > 0.0), NINC is the number of time step increments.
3. The unit of DT must be consistent with the unit used on the CREEP entry that defines the creep
characteristics. Total creep time for the subcase is DT multiplied by the value in the field NINC;
i.e., DT*NINC.
4. The stiffness update strategy is selected in the KMETHOD field.
• If the AUTO option is selected, the program automatically selects the most efficient strategy
based on convergence rates. At each step the number of iterations required to converge is
estimated. Stiffness is updated, if (i) estimated number of iterations to converge exceeds
MAXITER, (ii) estimated time required for convergence with current stiffness exceeds the
estimated time required for convergence with updated stiffness, and (iii) solution diverges. See
Remarks 9. and 13. for diverging solutions.
• If the SEMI option is selected, the program for each load increment (i) performs a single iteration
based upon the new load, (ii) updates the stiffness matrix, and (iii) resumes the normal AUTO
option.

Main Index
 396 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

• If the ITER option is selected, the program updates the stiffness matrix at every KSTEP iterations
and on convergence if KSTEP < MAXITER. However, if KSTEP > MAXITER, stiffness matrix
is never updated. Note that the Newton-Raphson iteration strategy is obtained by selecting the
ITER option and KSTEP = 1, while the Modified Newton-Raphson iteration strategy is obtained
by selecting the ITER option and KSTEP = MAXITER.
5. For AUTO and SEMI options, the stiffness matrix is updated on convergence if KSTEP is less than
the number of iterations that were required for convergence with the current stiffness.
6. The number of iterations for a load increment is limited to MAXITER. If the solution does not
converge in MAXITER iterations, the load increment is bisected and the analysis is repeated. If the
load increment cannot be bisected (i.e., MAXBIS is attained or MAXBIS = 0) and MAXDIV is
positive, the best attainable solution is computed and the analysis is continued to the next load
increment. If MAXDIV is negative, the analysis is terminated.
7. The test flags (U = displacement error, P = load equilibrium error, and W = work error) and the
tolerances (EPSU, EPSP, and EPSW) define the convergence criteria. All the requested criteria
(combination of U, P, and/or W) are satisfied upon convergence. See the MSC Nastran Handbook
for Nonlinear Analysis for more details on convergence criteria.
8. INTOUT controls the output requests for displacements, element forces and stresses, etc. YES or
ALL must be specified in order to be able to perform a subsequent restart from the middle of a
subcase.

INTOUT Output Processed

YES For every computed load increment.
NO For the last load of the subcase.
ALL For every computed and user-specified load increment.

• For the Newton family of iteration methods (i.e., when no NLPCI command is specified), the
option ALL is equivalent to option YES since the computed load increment is always equal to the
user-specified load increment.
• For arc-length methods (i.e., when the NLPCI command is specified) the computed load
increment in general is not going to be equal to the user-specified load increment, and is not
known in advance. The option ALL allows the user to obtain solutions at the desired intermediate
load increments.
i
9. The ratio of energy errors before and after the iteration is defined as divergence rate ( E ) , i.e.,

i T i
i { Δu } { R }
E = ----------------------------------------
i T i–1
{ Δu } { R }

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 397

Depending on the divergence rate, the number of diverging iteration (NDIV) is incremented as
follows:

i i 12
If E ≥ 1 or E < – 10 , then NDIV = NDIV + 2

12 i
If – 10 < E < – 1 , then NDIV = NDIV + 1
The solution is assumed to diverge when NDIV > |MAXDIV|. If the solution diverges and the load
increment cannot be further bisected (i.e., MAXBIS is attained or MAXBIS is zero), the stiffness is
updated based on the previous iteration and the analysis is continued. If the solution diverges again
in the same load increment while MAXDIV is positive, the best solution is computed and the analysis
is continued to the next load increment. If MAXDIV is negative, the analysis is terminated on the
second divergence.
10. The BFGS update is performed if MAXQN > 0. As many as MAXQN quasi-Newton vectors can be
accumulated. The BFGS update with these QN vectors provides a secant modulus in the search
direction. If MAXQN is reached, no additional ON vectors will be accumulated. Accumulated QN
vectors are purged when the stiffness is updated and the accumulation is resumed.
11. The line search is performed as required, if MAXLS > 0. In the line search, the displacement
increment is scaled to minimize the energy error. The line search is not performed if the absolute
value of the relative energy error is less than the value specified in LSTOL.
12. The number of subincrements in the material routines (elastoplastic and creep) is determined so that
the subincrement size is approximately FSTRESS ⋅ σ (equivalent stress). FSTRESS is also used
to establish a tolerance for error correction in the elastoplastic material; i.e.,

error in yield function < FSTRESS ⋅ σ

If the limit is exceeded at the converging state, the program will exit with a fatal message. Otherwise,
the stress state is adjusted to the current yield surface.
13. The number of bisections for a load increment/arc-length is limited to the absolute value of
MAXBIS. Different actions are taken when the solution diverges depending on the sign of MAXBIS.
If MAXBIS is positive, the stiffness is updated on the first divergence, and the load is bisected on the
second divergence. If MAXBIS is negative, the load is bisected every time the solution diverges until
the limit on bisection is reached. If the solution does not converge after |MAXBIS| bisections, the
analysis is continued or terminated depending on the sign of MAXDIV. See Remark 9.
14. MAXR is used in the adaptive load increment/arc-length method to define the overall upper and
lower bounds on the load increment/arc-length in the subcase; i.e.,

1 Δl
------------------ ≤ -------n- ≤ MAXR
MAXR Δl o

Main Index
 398 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

where Δl n is the arc-length at step n and Δl o is the original arc-length. The arc-length method for
load increments is selected by an NLPCI Bulk Data entry. This entry must have the same ID as the
NLPARM Bulk Data entry.
15. The bisection is activated if the incremental rotation for any degree-of-freedom
( Δθ x, Δθ y, or Δθ z ) exceeds the value specified by RTOLB. This bisection strategy is based on
the incremental rotation and controlled by MAXBIS.
16. Default tolerance sets are determined based on model type and desired accuracy. Accuracy is under
user control and can be specified on the PARAM, NLTOL entry. NLTOL’s value is used only if the
CONV, EPSU, EPSP and EPSW fields are blank, and if NINC is set to a value of 10 or larger.
Otherwise, the NLTOL selection will be overridden. The tables below list tolerances according to
NLTOL selections:

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 399

Table 0-2 Default Tolerances for Static Nonlinear SOL 106 Models Without Gaps, Contact or Heat Transfer
NLTOL Designation CONV EPSU EPSP EPSW
0 Very high PW _______ 1.0E-3 1.0E-7
1 High PW _______ 1.0E-2 1.0E-3
2 Engineering PW _______ 1.0E-2 1.0E-2
3 Prelim Design PW _______ 1.0E-1 1.0E-1
None Engineering PW _______ 1.0E-2 1.0E-2

Table 0-3 Default Tolerances for Static Nonlinear SOL 106 Models With Gaps or Contact (Enter NLTOL Values of
0 or 2 Only or Omit the Parameter)
NLTOL Designation CONV EPSU EPSP EPSW
0 Very high PW _______ 1.0E-3 1.0E-7
2 Engineering PW _______ 1.0E-3 1.0E-5
None Engineering PW _______ 1.0E-3 1.0E-5

Table 0-4 Default Tolerances for Static Nonlinear SOL 106 or 153 Models With Heat Transfer (Enter NLTOL Value
of 0 Only or Omit the Parameter)
NLTOL Designation CONV EPSU EPSP EPSW
0 Very high PW _______ 1.0E-3 1.0E-7
None Very high PW _______ 1.0E-3 1.0E-7

Main Index
 400 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

NOLIN1 Nonlinear Transient Load as a Tabular Function

Defines nonlinear transient forcing functions of the form

Function of displacement: Pi ( t ) = S ⋅ T ( uj ( t ) ) (0-1)

Function of velocity: P i ( t ) = S ⋅ T ( u· j ( t ) ) (0-2)

where u j ( t ) and u· j ( t ) are the displacement and velocity at point GJ in the direction of CJ.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
NOLIN1 SID GI CI S GJ CJ TID

Example:
NOLIN1 21 3 4 2.1 3 10 6

Field Contents
SID Nonlinear load set identification number. (Integer > 0)
GI Grid, scalar, or extra point identification number at which nonlinear load is to be applied.
(Integer > 0)
CI Component number for GI. (0 < Integer < 6; blank or zero if GI is a scalar or extra point.)
S Scale factor. (Real)
GJ Grid, scalar, or extra point identification number. (Integer > 0)
CJ Component number for GJ according to the following table:

Type of Point Displacement Velocity

Grid 1 < Integer < 6 11 < Integer < 16
Scalar Blank or zero Integer = 10
Extra Blank or zero Integer = 10

TID Identification number of a TABLEDi entry. (Integer > 0)

Remarks:
1. Nonlinear loads must be selected with the Case Control command NONLINEAR = SID.
2. Nonlinear loads may not be referenced on DLOAD entry.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 401

3. All degrees-of-freedom referenced on NOLIN1 entries must be members of the solution set. This
means the e-set (EPOINT entry) for modal formulation and the d-set for direct formulation.
4. Nonlinear loads as a function of velocity (Equation 2) are denoted by components ten greater than
the actual component number; i.e., a component of 11 is component 1 (velocity). The velocity is
determined by

u j, t – u j, t – 1
u· j, t = ----------------------------------
Δt

where Δt is the time step interval and u j, t – 1 is the displacement of GJ-CJ for the previous time
step.

Main Index
 402 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

NOLIN2 Nonlinear Transient Load as the Product of Two Variables

Defines nonlinear transient forcing functions of the form

Pi ( t ) = S ⋅ Xj ( t ) ⋅ Xk ( t )

where X j ( t ) and X k ( t ) can be either displacement or velocity at points GJ and GK in the directions of CJ
and CK.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
NOLIN2 SID GI CI S GJ CJ GK CK

Example:
NOLIN2 14 2 1 2.9 2 1 2

Field Contents
SID Nonlinear load set identification number. (Integer > 0)
GI Grid, scalar, or extra point identification number at which nonlinear load is to be applied.
(Integer > 0)
CI Component number for GI. (0 < Integer < 6; blank or zero if GI is a scalar or extra point.)
S Scale factor. (Real)
GJ, GK Grid, scalar, or extra point identification number. (Integer > 0)
CJ, CK Component number for GJ, GK according to the following table:

Type of Point Displacement Velocity

Grid 1 < Integer < 6 11 < Integer < 16
Scalar Blank or zero Integer = 10
Extra Blank or zero Integer = 10

Remarks:
1. Nonlinear loads must be selected with the Case Control command NONLINEAR=SID.
2. Nonlinear loads may not be referenced on a DLOAD entry.
3. All degrees-of-freedom referenced on NOLIN2 entries must be members of the solution set. This
means the e-set for modal formulation and the d-set for direct formulation.
4. GI-CI, GJ-CJ, and G
K-CK may be the same point.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 403

5. Nonlinear loads may be a function of displacement ( X = u ) or velocity ( X = u· ) . Velocities

are denoted by a component number ten greater than the actual component number; i.e., a
component of 10 is component 0 (velocity). The velocity is determined by

ut – ut – 1
u· t = -------------------------
Δt

where Δt is the time step interval and u t – 1 is the displacement of GJ-CJ or GK-CK for the
previous time step.

Main Index
 404 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

NOLIN3 Nonlinear Transient Load as a Positive Variable Raised to a Power

Defines nonlinear transient forcing functions of the form


 S ⋅ [ X j ( t ) ] A, X j ( t ) > 0
Pi ( t ) = 
 0, X j ( t ) ≤ 0


where X j ( t ) may be a displacement or a velocity at point GJ in the direction of CJ.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
NOLIN3 SID GI CI S GJ CJ A

Example:
NOLIN3 4 102 -6.1 2 15 -3.5

Field Contents
SID Nonlinear load set identification number. (Integer > 0)
GI Grid, scalar, or extra point identification number at which the nonlinear load is to be applied.
(Integer > 0)
CI Component number for GI. (0 < Integer < 6; blank or zero if GI is a scalar or extra point.)
S Scale factor. (Real)
GJ Grid, scalar, extra point identification number. (Integer > 0)
CJ Component number for GJ according to the following table:

Type of Point Displacement Velocity

Grid 1 < Integer < 6 11 < Integer < 16
Scalar Blank or zero Integer = 10
Extra Blank or zero Integer = 10

A Exponent of the forcing function. (ReaI)

Remarks:
1. Nonlinear loads must be selected with the Case Control command NONLINEAR = SID.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 405

2. Nonlinear loads may not be referenced on a DLOAD entry.

3. All degrees-of-freedom referenced on NOLIN3 entries must be members of the solution set. This
means the e-set for modal formulation and the d-set for direct formulation.
·
4. Nonlinear loads may be a function of displacement ( X j = u j ) or velocity ( X j = u j ) . Velocities
are denoted by a component number ten greater than the actual component number; e.g., a
component of 16 is component 6 (velocity). The velocity is determined by

u j, t – u j, t – 1
u· j, t = ----------------------------------
Δt

where Δt is the time step interval and u j, t – 1 is the displacement of GJ-CJ for the previous time
step.
5. Use a NOLIN4 entry for the negative range of Xj ( t ) .

Main Index
 406 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

NOLIN4 Nonlinear Transient Load as a Negative Variable Raised to a Power

Defines nonlinear transient forcing functions of the form


 – S ⋅ [ – X j ( t ) ] A, X j ( t ) < 0
Pi ( t ) = 
 0, X j ( t ) ≥ 0


where X j ( t ) may be a displacement or a velocity at point GJ in the direction of CJ.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
NOLIN4 SID GI CI S GJ CJ A

Example:
NOLIN4 2 4 6 2.0 101 16.3

Field Contents
SID Nonlinear load set identification number. (Integer > 0)
GI Grid, scalar, or extra point identification number at which nonlinear load is to be applied.
(Integer > 0)
CI Component number for GI. (0 < Integer < 6; blank or zero if GI is a scalar or extra point.)
S Scale factor. (Real)
GJ Grid, scalar, or extra point identification number. (Integer > 0)
CJ Component number for GJ according to the following table:

Type of Point Displacement Veloicty

Grid 1 < Integer < 6 11 < Integer < 16
Scalar Blank or zero Integer = 10
Extra Blank or zero Integer = 10

A Exponent of forcing function. (Real)

Remarks:
1. Nonlinear loads must be selected with the Case Control command NONLINEAR = SID.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 407

2. Nonlinear loads may not be referenced on a DLOAD entry.

3. All degrees-of-freedom referenced on NOLIN4 entries must be members of the solution set. This
means the e-set for modal formulation and the d-set for direct formulation.
·
4. Nonlinear loads may be a function of displacement ( X j = u j ) or velocity ( X j = u j ) . Velocities
are denoted by a component number ten greater than the actual component number; i.e., a
component of 10 is component 0 (velocity). The velocity is determined by

u j, t – u j, t – 1
u· j, t = ----------------------------------
Δt

where Δt is the time step interval and u j, t – 1 is the displacement of GJ-CJ for the previous time
step.

Xj ( t )
Use a NOLIN3 entry for the positive range of .

Main Index
 408 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

PARAM Parameter

Specifies values for parameters used in solution sequences or user-written DMAP programs.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PARAM N V1 V2

Example:
PARAM IRES 1

Field Contents
N Parameter name (one to eight alphanumeric characters, the first of which is alphabetic).
V1, V2 Parameter value based on parameter type, as follows:

Type V1 V2
Integer Integer Blank
Real, single-precision Real Blank
Character Character Blank
Real, double-precision Double-precision real Blank
Complex, single-precision Real or blank Real or blank
Complex, double-precision Double-precision real Double-precision real

Remarks:
1. See Parameters, 785 for a list of parameters used in solution sequences that may be set by the user on
PARAM entries.
2. If the large field entry format is used, the second physical entry must be present, even though fields 6
through 9 are blank.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 409

PCONV Convection Property Definition

Specifies the free convection boundary condition properties of a boundary condition surface element used
for heat transfer analysis.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PCONV PCONID MID FORM EXPF

Example:
PCONV 3 2 0 .25

Field Contents
PCONID Convection property identification number. (Integer > 0)
MID Material property identification number. (Integer > 0)
FORM Type of formula used for free convection. (Integer 0, 1, 10, 11, 20, or 21; Default = 0)
EXPF Free convection exponent as implemented within the context of the particular form that is
chosen. See Remark 3. (Real > 0.0; Default = 0.0)

Remarks:
1. Every surface to which free convection is to be applied must reference a PCONV entry. PCONV is
referenced on the CONV Bulk Data entry.
2. MID is used to supply the convection heat transfer coefficient (H).
3. EXPF is the free convection temperature exponent.
• If FORM = 0, 10, or 20, EXPF is an exponent of (T – TAMB), where the convective heat transfer
is represented as

EXPF
q = H ⋅ u CNTRLND ⋅ ( T – TAMB ) ⋅ ( T – TAMB ) .

• If FORM = 1, 11, or 21,

EXPF EXPF
q = H ⋅ u CNTRLND ⋅ ( T – TAMB )

where T represents the elemental grid point temperatures and TAMB is the associated ambient
temperature.
4. FORM specifies the formula type and the reference temperature location used in calculating the
convection film coefficient if FLMND = 0.

Main Index
 410 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

• If FORM = 0 or 1, the reference temperature is the average of element grid point temperatures
(average) and the ambient point temperatures (average).
• If FORM = 10 or 11, the reference temperature is the surface temperature (average of element
grid point temperatures).
• If FORM = 20 or 21, the reference temperature is the ambient temperature (average of ambient
point temperatures).

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 411

PCONVM Forced Convection Property Definition

Specifies the forced convection boundary condition properties of a boundary condition surface element used
for heat transfer analysis.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PCONVM PCONID MID FORM FLAG COEF EXPR EXPPI EXPPO

Example:
PCONVM 3 2 1 1 .023 0.80 0.40 0.30

Field Contents
PCONID Convection property identification number. (Integer > 0)
MID Material property identification number. (Integer > 0)
FORM Type of formula used for convection. (Integer = 0, 1, 10, 11, 20, or 21; Default = 0)
FLAG Flag for mass flow convection. (Integer = 0 or 1; Default = 0)
COEF Constant coefficient used for forced convection. (Real > 0.0)
EXPR Reynolds number convection exponent. (Real > 0.0; Default = 0.0)
EXPPI Prandtl number convection exponent for heat transfer into the working fluid. (Real > 0.0;
Default = 0.0)
EXPPO Prandtl number convection exponent for heat transfer out of the working fluid. (Real > 0.0;
Default = 0.0)

Remarks:
1. Every surface to which forced convection is applied must reference a PCONVM entry. PCONVM
is referenced on the CONVM entry.
2. MID specifies material properties of the working fluid at the temperature of the point FLMND.
FLMND is specified on the CONVM entry.
3. The material properties are used in conjunction with the average diameter and mass flow rate (mdot).
MID references the material properties and supplies the fluid conductivity (k), heat capacity (cp), and
viscosity ( μ ) needed to compute the Reynolds (Re) and Prandtl (Pr) numbers as follows:

Re = 4 ⋅ mdot ⁄ ( π ⋅ diameter ⋅ μ )
Pr = cp ⋅ μ ⁄ k
4. FORM controls the type of formula used in determination of the forced convection film coefficient
h. There are two cases:

Main Index
 412 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

EXPR EXPP
• If FORM = 0, 10, or 20 than h = coef ⋅ Re ⋅ Pr .
• If FORM = 1, 11, or 21 then the above h is multiplied by k and divided by the average hydraulic
diameter.
• FORM also specifies the reference temperature used in calculating material properties for the fluid
if FLMND = 0.
• If FORM = 0 or 1, the reference temperature is the average of element grid point temperatures
(average) and the ambient point temperature (average).
• If FORM = 10 or 11, the reference temperature is the surface temperature (average of element
grid point temperatures).
• If FORM = 20 or 21, the reference temperature is the ambient temperature (average of ambient
point temperature).
5. In the above expression, EXPP is EXPPI or EXPPO, respectively, for heat flowing into or out of the
working fluid. This determination is performed internally.
6. FLAG controls the convective heat transfer into the downstream point (the second point as identified
on the CHBDYi statement is downstream if mdot is positive).
• FLAG = 0, no convective flow (stationary fluid).
• FLAG = 1, convective energy flow that is consistent with the Streamwise Upwind Petrov Galerkin
(SUPG) element formulation.
7. No phase change or internal heat generation capabilities exist for this element.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 413

PDAMP Scalar Damper Property

Specifies the damping value of a scalar damper element using defined CDAMP1 or CDAMP3 entries.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PDAMP PID1 B1 PID2 B2 PID3 B3 PID4 B4

Example:
PDAMP 14 2.3 2 6.1

Field Contents
PIDi Property identification number. (Integer > 0)
Bi Force per unit velocity. (Real)

Remarks:
1. Damping values are defined directly on the CDAMP2 and CDAMP4 entries, and therefore do not
require a PDAMP entry.
2. A structural viscous damper, CVISC, may also be used for geometric grid points.
3. Up to four damping properties may be defined on a single entry.
4. For a discussion of scalar elements, see Scalar Elements (CELASi, CMASSi, CDAMPi) (p. 172) in the .

Main Index
 414 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

PDAMP5 Scalar Damper Property for CDAMP5

Defines the damping multiplier and references the material properties for damping. CDAMP5 is intended
for heat transfer analysis only.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PDAMP5 PID MID B

Example:
PDAMP5 2 3 4.0

Field Contents
PID Property identification number. (Integer > 0)
MID Material identification number of a MAT4 or MAT5 entry. (Integer > 0)
B Damping multiplier. (Real > 0.0)

Remark:
1. B is the mass that multiplies the heat capacity CP on the MAT4 or MAT5 entry.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 415

PELAS Scalar Elastic Property

Specifies the stiffness, damping coefficient, and stress coefficient of a scalar elastic (spring) element (CELAS1
or CELAS3 entry).

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PELAS PID1 K1 GE1 S1 PID2 K2 GE2 S2

Example:
PELAS 7 4.29 0.06 7.92 27 2.17 0.0032

Field Contents
PIDi Property identification number. (Integer > 0)
Ki Elastic property value. (Real)
GEi Damping coefficient, g e . See Remarks 5. and 6. (Real)
Si Stress coefficient. (Real)

Remarks:
1. Be careful using negative spring values.
2. Spring values are defined directly on the CELAS2 and CELAS4 entries, and therefore do not require
a PELAS entry.
3. One or two elastic spring properties may be defined on a single entry.
4. For a discussion of scalar elements, see Scalar Elements (CELASi, CMASSi, CDAMPi) (p. 172) in the .
5. If PARAM,W4 is not specified, GEi is ignored in transient analysis. See Parameters, 785.
6. To obtain the damping coefficient GE, multiply the critical damping ratio C ⁄ C 0 by 2.0.
7. If PELAS is used in conjunction with PELAST, Ki > 0, and the initial slope of the nonlinear force-
displacement relationship defined by the PELAST should agree with Ki.

Main Index
 416 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

PHBDY CHBDYP Geometric Element Definition

A property entry referenced by CHBDYP entries to give auxiliary geometric information for boundary
condition surface elements.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PHBDY PID AF D1 D2

Example:
PHBDY 2 .02 1.0 1.0

Field Contents
PID Property identification number. (Unique Integer among all PHBDY entries). (Integer > 0)
AF Area factor of the surface used only for CHBDYP element TYPE = “POINT”,
TYPE = “LINE”, TYPE = “TUBE”, or TYPE = “ELCYL”. For TYPE = “TUBE”, AF is the
constant thickness of the hollow tube. (Real>0.0 or blank)
D1, D2 Diameters associated with the surface. Used with CHBDYP element TYPE = “ELCYL”,
“TUBE”, and “FTUBE”. (Real > 0.0 or blank; Default for D2 = D1)

Remarks:
1. The PHBDY entry is used with CHBDYP entries.
2. AF
• For TYPE = “POINT” surfaces, AF is the area.
• For TYPE = “LINE” or TYPE = “ELCYL” surfaces, AF is the effective width:
area = AF ⋅ ( length ) .
• For TYPE = “FTUBE” and outer TYPE = “TUBE” surfaces

D1 + D2 D1 – D2 2
area = π ⋅  ---------------------- ⋅ ( LGTH ) +  ----------------------
2
2 2
3. D1 and D2 are used only with TYPE = “ELCYL”, TYPE = “TUBE”, and TYPE = “FTUBE”
surfaces.
• For TYPE = “ELCYL” surfaces, D1 and D2 are the two diameters associated with the ellipse.
• For TYPE = “FTUBE” and outer TYPE = “TUBE” surfaces, D1 and D2 are the diameters
associated with the first and second grid points, respectively.
• For inner TYPE = “TUBE” surfaces, the diameters are reduced by twice the thickness
( 2 ⋅ AF ) .

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 417

QBDY1 Boundary Heat Flux Load for CHBDYj Elements, Form 1

Defines a uniform heat flux into CHBDYj elements.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
QBDY1 SID Q0 EID1 EID2 EID3 EID4 EID5 EID6

Example:
QBDY1 109 1.-5 721

Alternate Format and Example:

QBDY1 SID Q0 EID1 “THRU” EID2
QBDY1 109 1.-5 725 THRU 735

Field Contents
SID Load set identification number. (Integer > 0)
Q0 Heat flux into element. (Real)
EIDi CHBDYj element identification numbers. (Integer ≠ 0 or “THRU”. For “THRU”
option EID2 > EID1.)

Remarks:
1. QBDY1 entries must be selected with the Case Control command LOAD = SID in order to be used
in static analysis. The total power into an element is given by the equation:

P in = ( Effective area ) ⋅ Q0

2. QBDY1 entries must be referenced on a TLOAD entry for use in transient analysis. The total power
into an element is given by the equation:

P in ( t ) = ( Effective area ) ⋅ Q0 ⋅ F ( t – τ )

where the function of time F ( t – τ ) is specified on a TLOAD1 or TLOAD2 entry.

3. The sign convention for Q0 is positive for heat input.

Main Index
 418 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

QBDY2 Boundary Heat Flux Load for CHBDYj Elements, Form 2

Defines grid point heat flux into CHBDYj elements.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
QBDY2 SID EID Q01 Q02 Q03 Q04 Q05 Q06
Q07 Q08

Example:
QBDY2 109 721 1.-5 1.-5 2.-5 2.-5

Field Contents
SID Load set identification number. (Integer >0)
EID Identification number of an CHBDYj element. (Integer > 0)
Q0i Heat flux at the i-th grid point on the referenced CHBDYj element. (Real or blank)

Remarks:
1. QBDY2 entries must be selected with the Case Control command LOAD=SID in order to be used
in static analysis. The total power into each point i on an element is given by

P i = AREA i ⋅ Q0i

2. QBDY2 entries must be referenced on a TLOAD entry for use in transient analysis. All connected
grid points will have the same time function but may have individual delays. The total power into
each point i on an element is given by

P i ( t ) = AREA i ⋅ Q0i ⋅ F ( t – τ i )

where F ( t – τ i ) is a function of time specified on a TLOAD1 or TLOAD2 entry.

3. The sign convention for Q0i is positive for heat flux input to the element.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 419

QBDY3 Boundary Heat Flux Load for a Surface

Defines a uniform heat flux load for a boundary surface.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
QBDY3 SID Q0 CNTRLND EID1 EID2 EID3 EID4 EID5
EID6 etc.

Example:
QBDY3 2 20.0 10 1 THRU 50 BY 2

Field Contents
SID Load set identification number. (Integer > 0)
Q0 Thermal heat flux load, or load multiplier. Q0 is positive for heat flow into a surface. (Real)
CNTRLND Control point for thermal flux load. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
EIDi CHBDYj element identification numbers. (Integer ≠ 0 or “THRU” or “BY”)

Remarks:
1. QBDY3 entries must be selected in Case Control (LOAD = SID) to be used in steady state. The total
power into a surface is given by the equation:
• if CNTRLND ≤ 0 then P in = ( Effective area ) ⋅ Q0
• if CNTRLND > 0 then P in = ( Effective area ) ⋅ Q0 ⋅ u CNTRLND
where u CNTRLND is the temperature of the control point and is used as a load multiplier.
2. In transient analysis SID is referenced by a TLOADi Bulk Data entry through the DAREA entry. A
function of time F ( t – τ ) defined on the TLOADi multiplies the general load, with τ specifying
time delay. The load set identifier on the TLOADi entry must be selected in Case Control (DLOAD
= SID) for use in transient analysis. If multiple types of transient loads exist, they must be combined
by the DLOAD Bulk Data entry.
3. The CNTRLND multiplier cannot be used with any higher-order elements.
4. When using “THRU” or “BY”, all intermediate CHBDYE, CHBDYG, or CHBDYP elements must
exist.

Main Index
 420 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

QHBDY Boundary Heat Flux Load

Defines a uniform heat flux into a set of grid points.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
QHBDY SID FLAG Q0 AF G1 G2 G3 G4
G5 G6 G7 G8

Example:
QHBDY 2 AREA4 20.0 101 102 104 103

Field Contents
SID Load set identification number. (Integer > 0)
FLAG Type of face involved (must be one of the following: “POINT”, “LINE”, “REV”, “AREA3",
“AREA4", “AREA6", “AREA8")
Q0 Magnitude of thermal flux into face. Q0 is positive for heat into the surface. (Real)
AF Area factor depends on type. (Real > 0.0 or blank)
Gi Grid point identification of connected grid points. (Integer > 0 or blank)

Remarks:
1. The continuation entry is optional.
2. For use in steady state analysis, the load set is selected in the Case Control Section (LOAD = SID).
3. In transient analysis SID is referenced by a TLOADi Bulk Data entry through the DAREA entry. A
function of time defined on the TLOADi entry multiplies the general load. specifies time delay.
The load set identifier on the TLOADi entry must be selected in Case Control (DLOAD = SID) for
use in transient analysis. If multiple types of transient loads exist, they must be combined by the
DLOAD Bulk Data entry.
4. The heat flux applied to the area is transformed to loads on the points. These points need not
correspond to an HBDY surface element.
5. The flux is applied to each point i by the equation

P i = AREA i ⋅ Q0

6. The number of connected points for the types are 1 (POINT), 2 (LINE, REV), 3 (AREA3), 4
(AREA4), 4-6 (AREA6), 5-8 (AREA8).
7. The area factor AF is used to determine the effective area for the POINT and LINE types. It equals
the area and effective width, respectively. It is not used for the other types, which have their area
defined implicitly and must be left blank.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 421

8. The type of face (FLAG) defines a surface in the same manner as the CHBDYi data entry. For
physical descriptions of the geometry involved, see the CHBDYG discussion.

Main Index
 422 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

QVECT Thermal Vector Flux Load

Defines thermal vector flux from a distant source into a face of one or more CHBDYi boundary condition
surface elements.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
QVECT SID Q0 TSOUR CE E1 or TID1 E2 or TID2 E3 or TID3 CNTRLND

EID1 EID2 -etc.-

Example:
QVECT 10 20.0 1000.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 101
20 21 22 23

Field Contents
SID Load set identification number. (Integer > 0)
Q0 Magnitude of thermal flux vector into face. (Real or blank)
TSOUR Temperature of the radiant source. (Real or blank)
CE Coordinate system identification number for thermal vector flux. (Integer > 0 or blank)
Ei Vector components (direction cosines in coordinate system CE) of the thermal vector flux.
(Real; Default = 0.0)
TIDi TABLEDi entry identification numbers defining the components as a function of time.
(Integer > 0)
CNTRLND Control point. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
EIDi Element identification number of a CHBDYE, CHBDYG, or CHBDYP entry.
(Integer ≠ 0 or “THRU”)

Remarks:
1. The continuation entry is required.
2. If the coordinate system CE is not rectangular, then the thermal vector flux is in different directions
for different CHBDYi elements. The direction of the thermal vector flux over an element is aligned
to be in the direction of the flux vector at the geometric center of the element. The geometric center
is measured using the grid points and includes any DISLIN specification on the VIEW entry for
TYPE=LINE CHBDYi elements. The flux is presumed to be uniform over the face of each element;
i.e., the source is relatively distant.
3. For use in steady-state analysis, the load set is selected in the Case Control Section (LOAD = SID).
The total power into an element is given by:
• If CNTRLND = 0 then, P in = – αA ( e ⋅ n ) ⋅ Q0 .

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 423

• If CNTRLND > 0 then, P in = – αA ( e ⋅ n ) ⋅ Q0 ⋅ u CNTRLND .

where

α = face absorptivity (supplied from a RADM statement).

A = face area as determined from a CHBDYi surface element.
= vector of direction cosines E1, E2, E3.
e
= face normal vector. See CHBDYi entries.
n

e⋅n =
0 if the vector product is positive, (i.e., the flux is coming from behind the face).

u cntrlnd = temperature value of the control point used as a load multiplier.

4. If the absorptivity is constant, its value is supplied by the ABSORP field on the RADM entry. If the
absorptivity is not a constant, the thermal flux is assumed to have a wavelength distribution of a black
body at the temperature TSOUR.
• For a temperature-dependent absorptivity, the element temperature is used to determine α.
• For a wavelength-dependent absorptivity, the integration of the flux times α is computed for
each wavelength band. The sum of the integrated thermal fluxes over all the wavelength bands
is Q0. The wave bands are specified with the RADBND entry.
• The user has the responsibility of enforcing Kirchhoff’s laws.
5. In transient analysis, SID is referenced by a TLOADi Bulk Data entry through the DAREA
specification. A function of timeF ( t – τ ) defined on the TLOADi entry multiplies the general
load. τ provides any required time delay. F ( t – τ ) is a function of time specified on the
TLOADi entry. The value of is calculated for each loaded grid point. The load set identifier on the
TLOADi entry must be selected in Case Control (DLOAD = SID) for use in transient analysis. If
multiple types of transient loads exist, they must be combined by the DLOAD Bulk Data entry.
The total power into an element is given by:
• If CNTRLND = 0 then, P in = – αA ( e ( t ) ⋅ n ) ⋅ Q0 ⋅ F ( t – τ ) .
• If CNTRLND > 0 then,
P in = – αA ( e ( t ) ⋅ n ) ⋅ F ( t – τ ) ⋅ Q0 ⋅ u CNTRLND .
6. If the referenced face is of TYPE = ELCYL, the power input is an exact integration over the area
exposed to the thermal flux vector.
7. If the referenced face is of TYPE = REV, the thermal flux vector must be parallel to the axis of
symmetry if an axisymmetric boundary condition is to be maintained.

Main Index
 424 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

8. When applied to a surface element associated with a radiation enclosure cavity, any incident energy
that is not absorbed ( α < 1.0 ) is lost from the system and is not accounted for in a reflective sense
( α + ρ = 1.0 ) .

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 425

QVOL Volume Heat Addition

Defines a rate of volumetric heat addition in a conduction element.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
QVOL SID QVOL CNTRLND EID1 EID2 EID3 EID4 EID5
EID6 etc.

Example:
QVOL 5 10.0 101 10 12 11 9

Field Contents
SID Load set identification. (Integer > 0)
QVOL Power input per unit volume produced by a heat conduction element. (Real)
CNTRLND Control point used for controlling heat generation. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
EIDi A list of heat conduction elements. (Integer > 0 or “THRU” or “BY”)

Remarks:
1. EIDi has material properties (MAT4) that include HGEN, the element material property for heat
generation, which may be temperature dependent. This association is made through the element
EID. If HGEN is temperature dependent, it is based on the average element temperature.
2. QVOL provides either the constant volumetric heat generation rate or the load multiplier. QVOL
is positive for heat generation. For steady-state analysis, the total power into an element is
• If CNTRLND = 0, then P in = volume ⋅ HGEN ⋅ QVOL .
• If CNTRLND > 0, then P in = volume ⋅ HGEN ⋅ QVOL ⋅ u CNTRLND .

where u CNTRLND is the temperature multiplier.

3. For use in steady-state analysis, the load set is selected in the Case Control Section (LOAD = SID).
4. In transient analysis SID is referenced by a TLOADi Bulk Data entry. A function of time
F [ t – τ ] defined on the TLOADi entry multiplies the general load where τ specifies time delay.
The load set identifier on the TLOADi entry must be selected in Case Control (DLOAD = SID) for
use in transient analysis. If multiple types of transient loads exist, they must be combined by the
DLOAD Bulk Data entry.
5. For “THRU” or “BY”, all intermediate referenced heat conduction elements must exist.
6. The CNTRLND multiplier cannot be used with any higher-order elements.

Main Index
 426 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

RADBC Space Radiation Specification

Specifies an CHBDYi element face for application of radiation boundary conditions.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RADBC NODAMB FAMB CNTRLND EID1 EID2 EID3 -etc.-

Example:
RADBC 5 1.0 101 10

Field Contents
NODAMB Ambient point for radiation exchange. (Integer > 0)
FAMB Radiation view factor between the face and the ambient point. (Real > 0.0)
CNTRLND Control point for radiation boundary condition. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
EIDi CHBDYi element identification number. ( Integer ≠ 0 or “THRU” or “BY”)

Remarks:
1. The basic exchange relationship is:
4 4
• if CNTRLND = 0, then q = σ ⋅ FAMB ⋅ ( ε e T e – α e T amb )
• if CNTRLND > 0, then
4 4
q = σ ⋅ FAMB ⋅ u CNTRLND ⋅ ( ε e T e – α e T amb )
2. NODAMB is treated as a black body with its own ambient temperature for radiation exchange
between the surface element and space. No surface element that is a member of a radiation enclosure
cavity may also have a radiation boundary condition applied to it.
3. Two PARAM entries are required when stipulating radiation heat transfer:
• ABS defines the absolute temperature scale; this value is added internally to any specified
temperature given in the problem. Upon solution completion, this value is subtracted internally
from the solution vector.
• SIGMA ( σ ) is the Stefan-Boltzmann constant.
4. RADBC allows for surface radiation to space in the absence of any cavity behavior. The emissivity
and absorptivity are supplied from a RADM entry.
5. When using “THRU” or “BY”, all intermediate referenced CHBDYi surface elements must exist.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 427

RADBND Radiation Wavelength Band Definition

Specifies Planck’s second radiation constant and the wavelength breakpoints used for radiation exchange
problems.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RADBND NUMBER PLANCK2 LAMBDA1 LAMBDA2 LAMBDA3 LAMBDA4 LAMBDA5 LAMBDA6

LAMBDA7 etc.

Example:
RADBND 6 14388.0 1.0 2.0 4.0 8.0 12.0

Field Contents
NUMBER Number of radiation wave bands. See Remarks. (Integer > 1)
PLANCK2 Planck’s second radiation constant. See Remarks. (Real > 0.0)
LAMBDAi Highest wavelength of the i-th wave band. See Remarks. (Real > 0.0)

Remarks:
1. Only one RADBND entry may be specified in the Bulk Data Section and must always be used in
conjunction with the RADM entry.
2. PLANCK2 has the units of wavelength times temperature. The same units of length must be used
for LAMBDAi as for PLANCK2. The units of temperature must be the same as those used for the
radiating surfaces. For example: 25898.μm °R or 14388.μm °K .
3. The first wavelength band extends from 0 to LAMBDA1 and the last band extends from LAMBDAn
to infinity, where n = NUMBER – 1 .
4. Discontinuous segments in the emissivity versus wavelength piecewise linear curve must be treated as
a wavelength band of zero width.
5. LAMBDAi must be specified in ascending order, and all LAMBDAi fields where i is greater than or
equal to NUMBER must be blank.

Main Index
 428 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

RADCAV Radiation Cavity Identification

Identifies the characteristics of each radiant enclosure.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RADCAV ICAVITY ELEAMB SHADOW SCALE PRTPCH NFECI RMAX NREV
SET11 SET12 SET21 SET22 SET31 SET32 etc.

Example:
RADCAV 1 1 .99
3 5 4 5 7 5

Field Contents
ICAVITY Unique cavity identification number associated with enclosure radiation. (Integer > 0)
ELEAMB CHBDYi surface element identification number for radiation if the view factors add up to
less than 1.0. (Unique Integer > 0 among all CHBDYi elements or blank.)
SHADOW Flag to control third body shading calculation during view factor calculation for each
identified cavity. (Character = “YES” or “NO”; Default = “YES”)
SCALE View factor that the enclosure sum will be set to if a view factor is greater than 1.0. (0.0 <
Real < 1.0; Default = 0.0)
PRTPCH Facilitates the blocking of view factor printing and punching onto RADLST and
RADMTX entries. (Integer = 0, 1, 2, or 3; Default = 0):

PRTPCH Print/Punch
0 (default) print and punch
1 no print
2 no punch
3 no print or punch

NFECI Controls whether finite difference or contour integration methods are to be used in the
calculation of view factors in the absence of a VIEW3D Bulk Data entry. (Character = “FD”
or “CONT”; See Remark 4. for default.)
RMAX Subelement area factor. See Remark 5. (Real > 0.0; Default = 0.1)
NREV Number of computational elements used in determination of axisymmetric view factors. See
Remark 8. (Integer > 0; Default = 31)
SETij Set identification pairs for the calculation of global view factors. Up to 30 pairs may be
specified (i = 1 to 2 and j = 1 to 30). (Integer > 0)

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 429

Remarks:
1. For the surfaces of an incomplete enclosure (view factors add up to less than 1.0), a complete
enclosure may be achieved (SUM = 1.0) by specifying an ambient element, ELEAMB. When
multiple cavities are defined, each cavity must have a unique ambient element if ambient elements
are desired. No elements can be shared between cavities.
2. Third-body shadowing is ignored in the cavity if SHADOW = “NO”. In particular, if it is known a
priori that there is no third-body shadowing, SHADOW = NO overrides KSHD and KBSHD fields
on the VIEW Bulk Data entry as well as reduces the calculation time immensely.
3. The view factors for a complete enclosure may add up to slightly more than 1.0 due to calculation
inaccuracies. SCALE can be used to adjust all the view factors proportionately to acquire a
summation equal to the value specified for SCALE. If SCALE is left blank or set to 0.0, no scaling
is performed.
4. If the VIEW3D Bulk Data entry is not specified, the view factors are calculated using finite difference
and contour integration methods. If NFECI = “FD”, then all view factors are calculated using the
finite difference technique. NFECI = “CONT” invokes contour integration for all view factor
calculations. If NFECI is blank, the program selects a method to use between any two particular
elements based on RMAX.
2
5. The comparison value for RMAX is equal to A s ⁄ d rs where A s is the area of a subelement and
d rs is the distance between two subelements r and s for which view factors are being computed.
When NFECI is blank, the program selects the contour integral method only if
2
A s ⁄ d rs > RMAX .
6. When a number of elements are grouped together and considered as a conglomerate surface, view
factors can be calculated between these groups. These are referred to as global view factors. The
SET1 Bulk Data entry is used to define the conglomerate. When using this feature, negative EIDs
are not allowed.
7. If a RADLST and RADMTX entry exists for this cavity ID, new view factors are not computed and
the existing RADLST and RADMTX are used in the thermal analysis.
8. The VIEW3D Bulk Data entry must be specified for the calculation of axisymmetric view factors.
The process relies on the internal construction of a semi-circle of computational elements. NREV
specifies the number of such elements desired.

Main Index
 430 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

RADLST Listing of Enclosure Radiation Faces

Identifies the individual CHBDYi surface elements that comprise the entire radiation enclosure.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RADLST ICAVITY MTXTYP EID1 EID2 EID3 EID4 EID5 EID6
EID7 -etc.-

Example:
RADLST 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Field Contents
ICAVITY Unique cavity identification number that links a radiation exchange matrix with its listing of enclosure radiation
faces. (Integer > 0)
MTXTYP Type of radiation exchange matrix used for this cavity. (Integer < 4 and ≠ 0; Default = 1 for an enclosure
without an ambient element. Default = 4 for an enclosure with an ambient element as specified on the
RADCAV entry.)
1: Symmetric view factor matrix [F] and nonconservative radiation matrix [R].
2: Symmetric exchange factor matrix [ ℑ ] and conservative radiation matrix [R].
3: Unsymmetric exchange factor matrix [ ℑ ] and conservative radiation matrix [R].
4: Symmetric view factor matrix [F] and conservative radiation matrix [R].
-n: The first n CHBDYi elements may lose energy to space but the remainder may not. Symmetric
exchange factor matrix [F] and nonconservative radiation matrix [R].
EIDi Identification numbers for the CHBDYi elements in this radiation cavity. (Integer ≠ 0 or “THRU”)

Remarks:
1. A radiation EIDi list isolates those CHBDYi surface element faces that are to communicate in a
radiation enclosure. View-factor calculation and RADMTX formation for an enclosure is performed
only for (or among) those faces identified within the same RADCAV.
2. A radiation exchange matrix (RADMTX) can only reference one radiative face list (RADLST). The
companion RADCAV, RADLST, and RADMTX must share a unique ICAVITY.
3. For each EIDi, the appropriate CHBDYi element is located, and the proper RADM entry ID field
found.
4. If the radiation exchange matrix or any radiation boundary conditions are available from an external
source, the RADMTX must be user generated.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 431

5. Multiple RADLST entries may be specified.

6. If any RADLST entry is changed or added on restart then a complete re-analysis may be performed.
Therefore, RADLST entry changes or additions are not recommended on restart.

Main Index
 432 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

RADM Radiation Boundary Material Property

Defines the radiation properties of a boundary element for heat transfer analysis.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RADM RADMID ABSORP EMIS1 EMIS2 EMIS3 EMIS4 EMIS5 EMIS6
EMIS7 -etc.-

Example:
RADM 11 .45 .33 .29 .20 .17 .13

Field Contents
RADMID Material identification number. (Integer > 0)
ABSORP Surface absorptivity or the temperature function curve multiplier if ABSORP is variable. See
Remark 2. (0.0 < Real < 1.0)
EMISi Surface emissivity at wavelength LAMBDAi or the temperature function curve multiplier if
EMISi is variable (See the RADBND entry.) (0.0 < Real < 1.0)

Remarks:
1. The RADM entry is directly referenced only by one of the CHBDYE, CHBDYG, or CHBDYP type
surface element entries.
2. For radiation enclosure problems, ABSORP is set equal to emissivity. For QVECT loads,
absorptivity is specified by ABSORP.
3. If there is more than one EMISi, then:
• There must be a RADBND entry.
• The number of EMISi may not exceed the number of LAMBDAi on the RADBND entry.
• The emissivity values are given for a wavelength specified by the corresponding LAMBDAi on the
RADBND entry. Within each discrete wavelength band, the emissivity is assumed to be constant.
• At any specific wavelength and surface temperature, the absorptivity is exactly equal to the
emissivity.
4. To perform any radiation heat transfer exchange, the user must furnish PARAM entries for:
• TABS to define the absolute temperature scale.
• SIGMA ( σ ) to define the Stefan-Boltzmann constant in appropriate units.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 433

RADMT Radiation Boundary Material Property Temperature Dependence

Specifies table references for temperature dependent RADM entry radiation boundary properties.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RADMT RADMID T(A) T( ε 1) T( ε 2) T( ε 3) T( ε 4) T( ε 5) T( ε 6)
T( ε 7) -etc.-

Example:
RADMT 11 1 2 3 4 5 6

Field Contents
RADMID Material identification number. (Integer > 0)
T(A) TABLEMj identifier for surface absorptivity. (Integer > 0 or blank)
T ( εi ) TABLEMj identifiers for surface emissivity. (Integer > 0 or blank)

Remarks:
1. The basic quantities on the RADM entry of the same RADMID are always multiplied by the
corresponding tabular function.
2. Tables T(A) and T ( ε i ) have an upper bound that is less than or equal to one and a lower bound
that is greater than or equal to zero.
3. The TABLEMj enforces the element temperature as the independent variable. Blank or zero fields
means there is no temperature dependence of the referenced property on the RADM entry.

Main Index
 434 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

RADMTX Radiation Exchange Matrix

Provides the F ji = A j f ji exchange factors for all the faces of a radiation enclosure specified in the
corresponding RADLST entry.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RADMTX ICAVITY INDEX Fi,j Fi+1,j Fi+2,j Fi+3,j Fi+4,j Fi+5,j
Fi+6,j -etc.-

Example:
RADMTX 2 1 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.2

Field Contents
ICAVITY Unique cavity identification number that links a radiation exchange matrix with its listing of
enclosure radiation surface elements. (Integer > 0)
INDEX Column number in the matrix. (Integer > 0)
Fk,j If symmetric, the matrix values start on the diagonal (i = j) and continue down the column
(k = i + 1, i + 2, etc.). If unsymmetric, the values start in row (i = 1). i refers to EIDi on the
RADLST entry. (Real > 0)

Remarks:
1. If the matrix is symmetric, only the lower triangle is input, and i = j = INDEX. If the matrix is
unsymmetric, i = 1, and j = INDEX.
2. Only one ICAVITY may be referenced for those faces that are to be included in a unique radiation
matrix.
3. Coefficients are listed by column with the number of columns equal to the number of entries in the
RADLST.
4. All faces involved in any radiation enclosure must be defined with an CHBDYi element.
5. If any RADMTX entry is changed or added on restart then a complete re-analysis may be performed.
Therefore, RADMTX entry changes or additions are not recommended on restart.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 435

RADSET Identifies a Set of Radiation Cavities

Specifies which radiation cavities are to be included for radiation enclosure analysis.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RADSET ICAVITY1 ICAVITY2 ICAVITY3 ICAVITY4 ICAVITY5 ICAVITY6 ICAVITY7 ICAVITY8
ICAVITY9 -etc.-

Example:
RADSET 1 2 3 4

Field Contents
ICAVITYi Unique identification number for a cavity to be considered for enclosure radiation analysis.
(Integer > 0)

Remark:
1. For multiple radiation cavities, RADSET specifies which cavities are to be included in the analysis.

Main Index
 436 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

SET1 Set Definition

Defines a list of structural grid points for aerodynamic analysis, XY-plots for SORT1 output, and the PANEL
entry.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SET1 SID G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7
G8 -etc.-

Example:
SET1 3 31 62 93 124 16 17 18
19

Alternate Format and Example:

SET1 SID G1 “THRU” G2
SET1 6 32 THRU 50

Field Contents
SID Unique identification number. (Integer > 0)
Gi List of structural grid point identification numbers. (Integer > 0 or “THRU”; for the
“THRU” option, G1 < G2 or “SKIN”; in field 3)

Remarks:
1. SET1 entries may be referenced by the SPLINEi entries, PANEL entries and XYOUTPUT requests.
2. When using the “THRU” option for SPLINEi or PANEL data entries, all intermediate grid points
must exist.
3. When using the “THRU” option for XYOUTPUT requests, missing grid points are ignored.
4. When using the “SKIN” option, MSC Nastran will generate a panel consisting of the structural
portion of the fluid-structural boundary.
5. When the SET1 entry is used in conjunction with the ACMODL entry, under rules defined on the
ACMODL entry, the Gi may be a list of element IDs.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 437

SLOAD Static Scalar Load

Defines concentrated static loads on scalar or grid points.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SLOAD SID S1 F1 S2 F2 S3 F3

Example:
SLOAD 16 2 5.9 17 -6.3 14 -2.93

Field Contents
SID Load set identification number. (Integer > 0)
Si Scalar or grid point identification number. (Integer > 0)
Fi Load magnitude. (Real)

Remarks:
1. In the static solution sequences, the load set ID (SID) is selected by the Case Control command
LOAD. In the dynamic solution sequences, SID must be referenced in the LID field of an LSEQ
entry, which in turn must be selected by the Case Control command LOADSET.
2. Up to three loads may be defined on a single entry.
3. If Si refers to a grid point, the load is applied to component T1 of the displacement coordinate system
(see the CD field on the GRID entry).

Main Index
 438 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

SPC Single-Point Constraint

Defines a set of single-point constraints and enforced motion (enforced displacements in static analysis and
enforced displacements, velocities or acceleration in dynamic analysis).

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SPC SID G1 C1 D1 G2 C2 D2

Example:
SPC 2 32 3 -2.6 5

Field Contents
SID Identification number of the single-point constraint set. (Integer > 0)
Gi Grid or scalar point identification number. (Integer > 0)
Ci Component number. (0 < Integer < 6; up to six Unique Integers, 1 through 6, may be placed
in the field with no embedded blanks. 0 applies to scalar points and 1 through 6 applies to
grid points.)
Di Value of enforced motion for all degrees-of-freedom designated by Gi and Ci. (Real)

Remarks:
1. Single-point constraint sets must be selected with the Case Control command SPC = SID.
2. Degrees-of-freedom specified on this entry form members of the mutually exclusive s-set. They may
not be specified on other entries that define mutually exclusive sets. See Degree-of-Freedom Sets, 1101
for a list of these entries.
3. Single-point forces of constraint are recovered during stress data recovery.
4. From 1 to 12 degrees-of-freedom may be specified on a single entry.
5. Degrees-of-freedom on this entry may be redundantly specified as permanent constraints using the
PS field on the GRID entry.
6. For reasons of efficiency, the SPCD entry is the preferred method for applying enforced motion rather
than the Di field described here.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 439

SPC1 Single-Point Constraint, Alternate Form

Defines a set of single-point constraints.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SPC1 SID C G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6
G7 G8 G9 -etc.-

Example:
SPC1 3 2 1 3 10 9 6 5
2 8

Alternate Format and Example:

SPC1 SID C G1 “THRU” G2
SPC1 313 12456 6 THRU 32

Field Contents
SID Identification number of single-point constraint set. (Integer > 0)
C Component numbers. (Any unique combination of the Integers 1 through 6 with no
embedded blanks for grid points. This number must be Integer 0 or blank for scalar points.)
Gi Grid or scalar point identification numbers. (Integer > 0 or “THRU”; For “THRU” option,
G1 < G2.)

Remarks:
1. Single-point constraint sets must be selected with the Case Control command SPC = SID.
2. Enforced displacements are available via this entry when used with the recommended SPCD entry.
3. Degrees-of-freedom specified on this entry form members of the mutually exclusive s-set. They may
not be specified on other entries that define mutually exclusive sets. See Degree-of-Freedom Sets, 1101
for a list of these entries.
4. Degrees-of-freedom on this entry may be redundantly specified as permanent constraints using the
PS field on the GRID entry.
5. If the alternate format is used, points in the sequence G1 through G2 are not required to exist. Points
that do not exist will collectively produce a warning message but will otherwise be ignored.

Main Index
 440 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

SPCADD Single-Point Constraint Set Combination

Defines a single-point constraint set as a union of single-point constraint sets defined on SPC or SPC1
entries.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SPCADD SID S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7
S8 S9 -etc.-

Example:
SPCADD 101 3 2 9 1

Field Contents
SID Single-point constraint set identification number. (Integer > 0)
Si Identification numbers of single-point constraint sets defined via SPC or by SPC1 entries.
(Integer > 0; SID ≠ Si)

Remarks:
1. Single-point constraint sets must be selected with the Case Control command SPC = SID.
2. No Si may be the identification number of a single-point constraint set defined by another SPCADD
entry.
3. The Si values must be unique.
4. SPCADD entries take precedence over SPC or SPC1 entries. If both have the same set ID, only the
SPCADD entry will be used.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 441

SPCD Enforced Motion Value

Defines an enforced displacement value for static analysis and an enforced motion value (displacement,
velocity or acceleration) in dynamic analysis.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SPCD SID G1 C1 D1 G2 C2 D2

Example:
SPCD 100 32 436 -2.6 5 2.9

Field Contents
SID Set identification number of the SPCD entry. (Integer > 0)
Gi Grid or scalar point identification number. (integer > 0)
Ci Component numbers. (0 < Integer < 6; up to six unique Integers may be placed in the field
with no embedded blanks.)
Di Value of enforced motion for at Gi and Ci. (Real)

Remarks:
1. In the static solution sequences, the set ID of the SPCD entry (SID) is selected by the LOAD Case
Control command.
2. In dynamic analysis, the selection of SID is determined by the presence of the LOADSET request in
Case Control as follows:
• There is no LOADSET request in Case Control
SID is selected by the EXCITEID ID of an RLOAD1, RLOAD2, TLOAD1 or TLOAD2 Bulk
Data entry that has enforced motion specified in its TYPE field
• There is a LOADSET request in Case Control
SID is selected by LID in the selected LSEQ entries that correspond to the EXCITEID entry of
an RLOAD1, RLOAD2, TLOAD1 or TLOAD2 Bulk Data entry that has enforced motion
specified in its TYPE field.
3. A global coordinate (Gi and CI) referenced on this entry must also be referenced on a SPC or SPC1
Bulk Data entry and selected by the SPC Case Control command.
4. Values of Di will override the values specified on an SPC Bulk Data entry, if the SID is selected as
indicated above.
5. The LOAD Bulk Data entry will not combine an SPCD load entry.

Main Index
 442 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

6. In static analysis, this method of applying enforced displacements is more efficient than the SPC entry
when more than one enforced displacement condition is applied. It provides equivalent answers.
7. In dynamic analysis, this direct method of specifying enforced motion is more accurate, efficient and
elegant than the large mass and Lagrange multiplier techniques.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 443

SPOINT Scalar Point Definition

Defines scalar points.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SPOINT ID1 ID2 ID3 ID4 ID5 ID6 ID7 ID8

Example:
SPOINT 3 18 1 4 16 2

Alternate Format and Example:

SPOINT ID1 “THRU” ID2
SPOINT 5 THRU 649

Field Contents
IDi Scalar point identification number. (0 < Integer < 100000000; For “THRU” option, ID1 <
ID2)

Remarks:
1. A scalar point defined by its appearance on the connection entry for a scalar element (see the CELASi,
CMASSi, and CDAMPi entries) need not appear on an SPOINT entry.
2. All scalar point identification numbers must be unique with respect to all other structural, scalar, and
fluid points. However, duplicate scalar point identification numbers are allowed in the input.
3. This entry is used primarily to define scalar points appearing in single-point or multipoint constraint
equations to which no scalar elements are connected.
4. If the alternate format is used, all scalar points ID1 through ID2 are defined.
5. For a discussion of scalar points, see Scalar Elements (CELASi, CMASSi, CDAMPi) (p. 172) in the .

Main Index
 444 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

SUPAX Conical Shell Fictitious Support

Defines determinate reaction degrees-of-freedom in free bodies for conical shell analysis.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SUPAX RID1 HID1 C1 RID2 HID2 C2

Example:
SUPAX 4 3 2

Field Contents
RIDi Ring identification number. (Integer > 0)
HIDi Harmonic identification number. (Integer > 0)
Ci Conical shell degree-of-freedom numbers. (Any unique combination of the Integers 1
through 6.)

Remarks:
1. SUPAX is allowed only if an AXIC entry is also present.
2. Up to 12 degrees-of-freedom may appear on a single entry.
3. Degrees-of-freedom appearing on SUPAX entries may not appear on MPCAX, SPCAX, or OMITAX
entries.
4. For a discussion of conical shell analysis, see Conical Shell Element (RINGAX) (p. 143) in the .

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 445

TABLED1 Dynamic Load Tabular Function, Form 1

Defines a tabular function for use in generating frequency-dependent and time-dependent dynamic loads.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TABLED1 TID XAXIS YAXIS
x1 y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 -etc.- “ENDT”

Example:
TABLED1 32
-3.0 6.9 2.0 5.6 3.0 5.6 ENDT

Field Contents
TID Table identification number. (Integer > 0)
XAXIS Specifies a linear or logarithmic interpolation for the x-axis. See Remark 6. (Character:
“LINEAR” or “LOG”; Default = “LINEAR”)
YAXIS Specifies a linear or logarithmic interpolation for the y-axis. See Remark 6. (Character:
“LINEAR” or “LOG”; Default = “LINEAR”)
xi, yi Tabular values. (Real)
“ENDT” Flag indicating the end of the table.

Remarks:
1. xi must be in either ascending or descending order, but not both.
2. Discontinuities may be specified between any two points except the two starting points or two end
points. For example, in Figure 0-9 discontinuities are allowed only between points x2 through x7.
Also, if y is evaluated at a discontinuity, then the average value of y is used. In Figure 0-9, the value of
y at x=x3 is y = ( y3 + y4 ) ⁄ 2 . If the y-axis is a LOG axis then the jump at the discontinuity is
evaluated as y = y3y4 .
3. At least one continuation must be specified.
4. Any xi-yi pair may be ignored by placing the character string “SKIP” in either of the two fields.
5. The end of the table is indicated by the existence of the character string “ENDT” in either of the two
fields following the last entry. An error is detected if any continuations follow the entry containing
the end-of-table flag “ENDT”.
6. TABLED1 uses the algorithm

y = yT ( x )

Main Index
 446 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

where x is input to the table and y is returned. The table look-up is performed using interpolation
within the table and extrapolation outside the table using the two starting or end points. See
Figure 0-9. The algorithms used for interpolation or extrapolation are:

XAXIS YAXIS yT(x)

LINEAR LINEAR
xj – x x – xi
---------------- yi + ----------------- yj
xj – xi xj – xi
LOG LINEAR
ln ( xj ⁄ x ) ln ( x ⁄ xi )
------------------------- yi + ------------------------- yj
ln ( xj ⁄ xi ) ln ( xj ⁄ xi )
LINEAR LOG
xj – x x – xi
exp ---------------- ln yi + ---------------- ln yj
xj – xi xj – xi
LOG LOG
ln ( xj ⁄ x ) ln ( x ⁄ xi )
exp ------------------------- ln yi + -------------------------- ln yi
ln ( xj ⁄ xi ) ln ( xj ⁄ xi )

where xj and yj follow xi and yi.

No warning messages are issued if table data is input incorrectly.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 447

x value
Discontinuity Range of Table
Allowed
Discontinuity
Not Allowed
Linear
Extrapolation
of Segment
x1-x2

x
x1 x2 x3, x5 x6 x7,
x4 x8
x
Extrapolated

Figure 0-9 Example of Table Extrapolation and Discontinuity

7. Linear extrapolation is not used for Fourier transform methods. The function is zero outside the
range of the table.
8. For frequency-dependent loads, xi is measured in cycles per unit time.
9. Tabular values on an axis if XAXIS or YAXIS = LOG must be positive. A fatal message will be issued
if an axis has a tabular value < 0.

Main Index
 448 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

TABLED2 Dynamic Load Tabular Function, Form 2

Defines a tabular function for use in generating frequency-dependent and time-dependent dynamic loads.
Also contains parametric data for use with the table.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TABLED2 TID X1
x1 y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 -etc.-

Example:
TABLED2 15 -10.5
1.0 -4.5 2.0 -4.2 2.0 2.8 7.0 6.5
SKIP SKIP 9.0 6.5 ENDT

Field Contents
TID Table identification number. (Integer > 0)
X1 Table parameter. See Remark 6. (Real)
xi, yi Tabular values. (Real)

Remarks:
1. xi must be in either ascending or descending order, but not both.
2. Discontinuities may be specified between any two points except the two starting points or two end
points. For example, in Figure 0-10 discontinuities are allowed only between points x2 and x7. Also
if y is evaluated at a discontinuity, then the average value of y is used. In Figure 0-10, the value of y at
x=x3 is y = ( y3 + y4 ) ⁄ 2 .
3. At least one continuation entry must be specified.
4. Any xi-yi pair may be ignored by placing “SKIP” in either of the two fields.
5. The end of the table is indicated by the existence of “ENDT” in either of the two fields following the
last entry. An error is detected if any continuations follow the entry containing the end-of-table flag
“ENDT”.
6. TABLED2 uses the algorithm

y = y T ( x – X1 )

where x is input to the table and y is returned. The table look-up is performed using linear
interpolation within the table and linear extrapolation outside the table using the two starting or end
points. See Figure 0-10. No warning messages are issued if table data is input incorrectly.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 449

x value
Discontinuity Range of Table
Allowed
Discontinuity
Not Allowed
Linear
Extrapolation
of Segment
x1-x2

x
x1 x2 x3 x5 x6 x7
x4 x8
x
Extrapolated

Figure 0-10 Example of Table Extrapolation and Discontinuity

7. Linear extrapolation is not used for Fourier transform methods. The function is zero outside the
range of the table.
8. For frequency-dependent loads, X1 and xi are measured in cycles per unit time.

Main Index
 450 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

TABLED3 Dynamic Load Tabular Function, Form 3

Defines a tabular function for use in generating frequency-dependent and time-dependent dynamic loads.
Also contains parametric data for use with the table.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TABLED3 TID X1 X2
x1 y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 -etc.-

Example:
TABLED3 62 126.9 30.0
2.9 2.9 3.6 4.7 5.2 5.7 ENDT

Field Contents
TID Table identification number. (Integer > 0)
X1, X2 Table parameters. (Real; X2 ≠ 0.0)
xi, yi Tabular values. (Real)

Remarks:
1. xi must be in either ascending or descending order, but not both.
2. Discontinuities may be specified between any two points except the two starting points or two end
points. For example, in Figure 0-11 discontinuities are allowed only between points x2 and x7. Also
if y is evaluated at a discontinuity, then the average value of y is used. In Figure 0-11, the value of y at
x=x3 is y = ( y3 + y4 ) ⁄ 2 .
3. At least one continuation entry must be present.
4. Any xi-yi pair may be ignored by placing “SKIP” in either of the two fields.
5. The end of the table is indicated by the existence of “ENDT” in either of the two fields following the
last entry. An error is detected if any continuations follow the entry containing the end-of-table flag
“ENDT”.
6. TABLED3 uses the algorithm

x – X1
y = y T  -----------------
 X2 

where x is input to the table and y is returned. The table look-up is performed using interpolation
within the table and linear extrapolation outside the table using the two starting or end points. See
Figure 0-11. No warning messages are issued if table data is input incorrectly.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 451

x value
Discontinuity Range of Table
Allowed
Discontinuity
Not Allowed
Linear
Extrapolation
of Segment
x1-x2

x
x1 x2 x3 x5 x6 x7
x4 x8
x
Extrapolated

Figure 0-11 Example of Table Extrapolation and Discontinuity

7. Linear extrapolation is not used for Fourier transform methods. The function is zero outside the
range of the table.
8. For frequency-dependent loads, X1, X2, and xi are measured in cycles per unit time.

Main Index
 452 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

TABLED4 Dynamic Load Tabular Function, Form 4

Defines the coefficients of a power series for use in generating frequency-dependent and time-dependent
dynamic loads. Also contains parametric data for use with the table.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TABLED4 TID X1 X2 X3 X4
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 -etc.-

Example:
TABLED4 28 0.0 1.0 0.0 100.
2.91 -0.0329 6.51-5 0.0 -3.4-7 ENDT

Field Contents
TID Table identification number. (Integer > 0)
Xi Table parameters. (Real; X2 ≠ 0.0; X3<X4)
Ai Coefficients. (Real)

Remarks:
1. At least one continuation entry must be specified.
2. The end of the table is indicated by the existence of “ENDT” in the field following the last entry. An
error is detected if any continuations follow the entry containing the end-of-table flag “ENDT”.
3. TABLED4 uses the algorithm
N
x – X1 i
y =  Ai  -----------------
 X2 
i = 0
where x is input to the table, y is returned, and N is the number of pairs. Whenever x < X3, use X3
for x; whenever x > X4, use X4 for x. There are N + 1 entries in the table. There are no error returns
from this table look-up procedure.
4. For frequency-dependent loads, xi is measured in cycles per unit time.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 453

TABLEM1 Material Property Table, Form 1

Defines a tabular function for use in generating temperature-dependent material properties.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TABLEM1 TID XAXIS YAXIS
xI y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 -etc.- “ENDT”

Example:
TABLEM1 32
-3.0 6.9 2.0 5.6 3.0 5.6 ENDT

Field Contents
TID Table identification number. (Integer > 0)
XAXIS Specifies a linear or logarithmic interpolation for the x-axis. See Remark 6. (Character:
“LINEAR” or “LOG”; Default = “LINEAR”)
YAXIS Specifies a linear or logarithmic interpolation for the y-axis. See Remark 6. (Character:
“LINEAR” or “LOG”; Default = “LINEAR”)
xi, yi Tabular values. (Real)
“ENDT” Flag indicating the end of the table.

Remarks:
1. xi must be in either ascending or descending order, but not both.
2. Discontinuities may be specified between any two points except the two starting points or two end
points. For example, in Figure 0-12 discontinuities are allowed only between points x2 through x7.
Also, if y is evaluated at a discontinuity, then the average value of y is used. In Figure 0-12, the value
of y at x = x3 is y = ( y3 + y4 ) ⁄ 2 .
3. At least one continuation entry must be specified.
4. Any xi-yi pair may be ignored by placing “SKIP” in either of the two fields.
5. The end of the table is indicated by the existence of “ENDT” in either of the two fields following the
last entry. An error is detected if any continuations follow the entry containing the end-of-table flag
“ENDT”.
6. TABLEM1 uses the algorithm

y = yT ( x )

Main Index
 454 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

where x is input to the table and y is returned. The table look-up is performed using linear
interpolation within the table and linear extrapolation outside the table using the two starting or end
points. See Figure 0-12. The algorithms used for interpolation or extrapolation are:

XAXIS YAXIS yT(x)

LINEAR LINEAR
xy – x x – xi
---------------- yi + ----------------- yj
xj – xi xj – xi
LOG LINEAR
ln ( xj ⁄ x ) ln ( x ⁄ xi )
------------------------- yi + ------------------------- yj
ln ( xj ⁄ xi ) ln ( xj ⁄ xi )
LINEAR LOG
xj – x x – xi
exp ---------------- ln yi + ---------------- ln yj
xj – xi xj – xi
LOG LOG
ln ( xj ⁄ x ) ln ( x ⁄ xi )
exp ------------------------- ln yi + -------------------------- ln yi
ln ( xj ⁄ xi ) ln ( xj ⁄ xi )

where xj and yj follow xi and yi.

No warning messages are issued if table data is input incorrectly.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 455

x value
Discontinuity Range of Table
Allowed
Discontinuity
Not Allowed
Linear
Extrapolation
of Segment
x1-x2

x
x1 x2 x3 x5 x6 x7
x4 x8
x
Extrapolated

Figure 0-12 Example of Table Extrapolation and Discontinuity

7. Tabular values on an axis if XAXIS or YAXIS = LOG must be positive. A fatal message will be issued
if an axis has a tabular value < 0.

Main Index
 456 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

TABLEM2 Material Property Table, Form 2

Defines a tabular function for use in generating temperature-dependent material properties. Also contains
parametric data for use with the table.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TABLEM2 TID X1
x1 yI x2 y2 x3 y3 -etc.-

Example:
TABLEM2 15 -10.5
1.0 -4.5 2.0 -4.5 2.0 2.8 7.0 6.5
SKIP SKIP 9.0 6.5 ENDT

Field Contents
TID Table identification number. (Integer > 0)
X1 Table parameter. (Real)
xi, yi Tabular values. (Real)

Remarks:
1. xi must be in either ascending or descending order, but not both.
2. Discontinuities may be specified between any two points except the two starting points or two end
points. For example, in Figure 0-13, discontinuities are allowed only between points x2 through x7.
Also, if y is evaluated at a discontinuity, then the average value of y is used. In Figure 0-13, the value
of y at x = x3 is y = ( y3 + y4 ) ⁄ 2 .
3. At least one continuation entry must be specified.
4. Any xi-yi pair may be ignored by placing “SKIP” in either of the two fields.
5. The end of the table is indicated by the existence of “ENDT” in either of the two fields following the
last entry. An error is detected if any continuations follow the entry containing the end-of-table flag
“ENDT”.
6. TABLEM2 uses the algorithm

y = zy T ( x – X1 )

where x is input to the table, y is returned and z is supplied from the MATi entry. The table look-up
is performed using linear interpolation within the table and linear extrapolation outside the table
using the two starting or end points. See Figure 0-13. No warning messages are issued if table data is
input incorrectly.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 457

x value
Discontinuity Range of Table
Allowed
Discontinuity
Not Allowed
Linear
Extrapolation
of Segment
x1-x2

x
x1 x2 x3 x5 x6 x7
x4 x8
x
Extrapolated

Figure 0-13 Example of Table Extrapolation and Discontinuity

Main Index
 458 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

TABLEM3 Material Property Table, Form 3

Defines a tabular function for use in generating temperature-dependent material properties. Also contains
parametric data for use with the table.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TABLEM3 TID X1 X2
x1 y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 -etc.-

Example:
TABLEM3 62 126.9 30.0
2.9 2.9 3.6 4.7 5.2 5.7 ENDT

Field Contents
TID Table identification number. (Integer > 0)
X1, X2 Table parameters. See Remark 6. (Real; X2 ≠ 0.0)
xi, yi Tabular values. (Real)

Remarks:
1. Tabular values for xi must be specified in either ascending or descending order, but not both.
2. Discontinuities may be specified between any two points except the two starting points or two end
points. For example, in Figure 0-14 discontinuities are allowed only between points x2 through x7.
Also, if y is evaluated at a discontinuity, then the average value of y is used. In Figure 0-14, the value
of y at x = x3 is y = ( y3 + y4 ) ⁄ 2 .
3. At least one continuation entry must be specified.
4. Any xi-yi pair may be ignored by placing “SKIP” in either of the two fields.
5. The end of the table is indicated by the existence of “ENDT” in either of the two fields following the
last entry. An error is detected if any continuations follow the entry containing the end-of-table flag
“ENDT”.
6. TABLEM3 uses the algorithm

x – X1
y = zy T  -----------------
 X2 

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 459

where x is input to the table, y is returned and z is supplied from the MATi entry. The table look-up
is performed using linear interpolation within the table and linear extrapolation outside the table
using the two starting or end points. See Figure 0-14. No warning messages are issued if table data is
input incorrectly.
y

x value
Discontinuity Range of Table
Allowed
Discontinuity
Not Allowed
Linear
Extrapolation
of Segment
x1-x2

x
x1 x2 x3 x5 x6 x7
x4 x8
x
Extrapolated

Figure 0-14 Example of Table Extrapolation and Discontinuity

Main Index
 460 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

TABLEM4 Material Property Table, Form 4

Defines coefficients of a power series for use in generating temperature-dependent material properties. Also
contains parametric data for use with the table.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TABLEM4 TID X1 X2 X3 X4
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 -etc.-

Example:
TABLEM4 28 0.0 1.0 0.0 100.
2.91 -0.0329 6.51-5 0.0 -3.4-7 ENDT

Field Contents
TID Table identification number. (Integer > 0)
Xi Table parameters. (Real; X2 ≠ 0.0; X3 < X4)
Ai Coefficients. (Real)

Remarks:
1. At least one continuation entry must be specified.
2. The end of the table is indicated by the existence of “ENDT” in the field following the last entry. An
error is detected if any continuations follow the entry containing the end-of-table flag “ENDT”.
3. TABLEM4 uses the algorithm

N
x – X1 i
y = z  Ai  -----------------
 X2 
i = 0

where x is input to the table, y is returned and z is supplied from the MATi entry. Whenever x < X3,
use X3 for x; whenever x > X4, use X4 for x. There are N + 1 entries in the table. There are no
error returns from this table look-up procedure.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 461

TEMP Grid Point Temperature Field

Defines temperature at grid points for determination of thermal loading, temperature-dependent material
properties, or stress recovery.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TEMP SID G1 T1 G2 T2 G3 T3

Example:
TEMP 3 94 316.2 49 219.8

Field Contents
SID Temperature set identification number. (Integer > 0)
Gi Grid point identification number. (Integer > 0)
Ti Temperature. (Real)

Remarks:
1. In the static solution sequences, the temperature set ID(SID) is selected by the Case Control
command TEMP. In the dynamic solution sequences, SID must be referenced in the TID field of
an LSEQ entry, which in turn must be selected by the Case Control command LOADSET. There
is a maximum of 66 unique temperature SIDs that may be specified.
2. Set ID must be unique with respect to all other LOAD type entries if TEMP(LOAD) is specified in
the Case Control Section.
3. From one to three grid point temperatures may be defined on a single entry.
4. If thermal effects are requested, all elements must have a temperature field defined either directly on
a TEMPP1, TEMPP3, or TEMPRB entry or indirectly as the average of the connected grid point
temperatures defined on the TEMP or TEMPD entries. Directly defined element temperatures
always take precedence over the average of grid point temperatures.
5. If the element material is temperature dependent, its properties are evaluated at the average
temperature.
6. Average element temperatures are obtained as a simple average of the connecting grid point
temperatures when no element temperature data are defined. Gauss point temperatures are averaged
for solid elements instead of grid point temperature.
7. For steady state heat transfer analysis, this entry together with the TEMPD entry supplies the
initialization temperatures for nonlinear analysis. The Case Control command TEMP(INIT) = SID
requests selection of this entry. The temperature values specified here must be coincident with any
temperature boundary conditions that are specified.

Main Index
 462 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

8. For transient heat transfer analysis, this entry together with the TEMPD entry supplies the initial
condition temperatures. The Case Control command IC = SID requests selections of this entry. The
temperature values specified here must be coincident with any temperature boundary condition
specified.
9. In linear and nonlinear buckling analysis, the follower force effects due to loads from this entry are
not included in the differential stiffness. See Buckling Analysis in SubDMAP MODERS, 417 and Nonlinear
Static Analysis (p. 608) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 463

TEMPAX Conical Shell Temperature

Defines temperature sets for conical shell problems.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TEMPAX SID1 RID1 PHI1 T1 SID2 RID2 PHI2 T2

Example:
TEMPAX 4 7 30.0 105.3

Field Contents
SIDi Temperature set identification number. (Integer > 0)
RIDi Ring identification number (see RINGAX entry). (Integer > 0)
PHIi Azimuthal angle in degrees. (Real)
Ti Temperature. (Real)

Remarks:
1. TEMPAX is allowed only if an AXIC entry is also present.
2. SIDi must be unique with respect to all other LOAD type entries if TEMP(LOAD) is specified in
the Case Control Section.
3. Temperature sets must be selected with the Case Control command TEMP=SID. There is a
maximum of 66 unique temperature SIDs that may be specified.
4. One or two temperatures may be defined on each entry.
5. For a discussion of the conical shell problem, see Restart Procedures (p. 360) in the MSC Nastran
Reference Guide.
6. TEMP(INIT) is not used with this entry.

Main Index
 464 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

TEMPD Grid Point Temperature Field Default

Defines a temperature value for all grid points of the structural model that have not been given a temperature
on a TEMP entry.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TEMPD SID1 T1 SID2 T2 SID3 T3 SID4 T4

Example:
TEMPD 1 216.3

Field Contents
SIDi Temperature set identification number. (Integer > 0)
Ti Default temperature value. (Real)

Remarks:
1. For structural analysis in the static solution sequences, the temperature set ID (SID) is selected by the
Case Control command TEMP. In the dynamic solution sequences, SID must be referenced in the
TID field of an LSEQ entry, which in turn must be selected by the Case Control command
LOADSET. There is a maximum of 66 unique temperature SIDs that may be specified.
2. SIDi must be unique with respect to all other LOAD type entries if TEMP(LOAD) is specified in the
Case Control Section.
3. From one to four default temperatures may be defined on a single entry.
4. If thermal effects are requested, all elements must have a temperature field defined either directly on
a TEMPP1, TEMPP3, or TEMPRB entry or indirectly as the average of the connected grid point
temperatures defined on the TEMP or TEMPD entries. Directly defined element temperatures
always take precedence over the average of grid point temperatures.
5. If the element material is temperature dependent, its properties are evaluated at the average
temperature.
6. Average element temperatures are obtained as a simple average of the connecting grid point
temperatures when no element temperature data is defined.
7. For steady-state heat transfer analysis, this entry together with the TEMP entry supplies the
initialization temperatures for nonlinear analysis. The Case Control command TEMP(INIT) = SID
requests selection of this entry. The temperature values specified here must be coincident with any
temperatures boundary conditions that are specified.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 465

8. For transient heat transfer analysis, this entry together with the TEMP entry supplies the initial
condition temperatures. The Case Control command IC=SID request selection of this entry. The
temperature values specified here must be coincident with any temperature boundary conditions that
are specified.
9. In linear and nonlinear buckling analysis, the follower force effects due to loads from this entry are
not included in the differential stiffness. See Buckling Analysis in SubDMAP MODERS, 417 and Nonlinear
Static Analysis (p. 608) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual.
10. For partitioned Bulk Data superelements and auxiliary models, TEMPD must be specified in all
partitioned Bulk Data Sections.

Main Index
 466 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

TF Dynamic Transfer Function

Defines a dynamic transfer function of the form

2 2
( B0 + B1 ⋅ p + B2 ⋅ p )u d +  ( A0 ( i ) + A1 ( i )p + A2 ( i )p )u i = 0 (0-3)
i
Can also be used as a means of direct matrix input. See Remark 4.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TF SID GD CD B0 B1 B2
G(1) C(1) A0(1) A1(1) A2(1) -etc.-

Example:
TF 1 2 3 4.0 5.0 6.0
3 4 5.0 6.0 7.0

Field Contents
SID Set identification number. (Integer > 0)
GD, G(i) Grid, scalar, or extra point identification numbers. (Integer > 0)
CD, C(i) Component numbers. (Integer zero or blank for scalar or extra points, any one of the
Integers 1 through 6 for a grid point.)
B0, B1, B2 Transfer function coefficients. (Real)
A0(i), A1(i), A2(i)

Remarks:
1. Transfer function sets must be selected with the Case Control command TFL = SID.
2. Continuation entries are optional.
3. The matrix elements defined by this entry are added to the dynamic matrices for the problem.
4. The constraint relation given in (0-3) will hold only if no structural elements or other matrix elements
are connected to the dependent coordinate u d . In fact, the terms on the left side of (0-3) are simply
added to the terms from all other sources in the row for ud .
5. See the MSC.Nastran Advanced Dynamic Analysis User’s Guide for a discussion of transfer functions.
6. For each SID, only one logical entry is allowed for each GD, CD combination.
7. For heat transfer analysis, the initial conditions must satisfy (0-3).

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 467

TLOAD1 Transient Response Dynamic Excitation, Form 1

Defines a time-dependent dynamic load or enforced motion of the form

{P(t)} = {A ⋅ F(t – τ)}

for use in transient response analysis.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TLOAD1 SID EXCITEID DELAY TYPE TID

Example:
TLOAD1 5 7 LOAD 13

Field Contents
SID Set identification number. (Integer > 0)
EXCITEID Identification number of DAREA or SPCD entry set or a thermal load set (in heat transfer
analysis) that defines A. See Remarks 2. and 3. (Integer > 0)
DELAY Defines time delay τ . (Integer > 0, real or blank) If it is a non-zero integer, it represents the
identification number of DELAY Bulk Data entry that defines τ . If it is real, then it directly
defines the value of τ that will be used for all degrees of freedom that are excited by this
dynamic load entry. See also Remark 9.
TYPE Defines the type of the dynamic excitation. See Remarks 2. and 3. (Integer, character or
blank; Default = 0)
TID Identification number of TABLEDi entry that gives F ( t ) . (Integer > 0)

Remarks:
1. Dynamic excitation sets must be selected with the Case Control command DLOAD = SID.
2. The type of the dynamic excitation is specified by TYPE (field 5) according to the following table:

TYPE TYPE of Dynamic Excitation

0, L, LO, LOA or LOAD Applied load (force or moment) (Default)
1, D, DI, DIS, or DISP Enforced displacement using large mass or SPC/SPCD data
2, V, VE, VEL or VELO Enforced velocity using large mass or SPC/SPCD data
3, A, AC, ACC or ACCE Enforced acceleration using large mass or SPC/SPCD data

Main Index
 468 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

3. TYPE (field 5) also determines the manner in which EXCITEID (field 3) is used by the program as
described below
Excitation specified by TYPE is applied load
• There is no LOADSET request in Case Control
EXCITEID may also reference DAREA, static, and thermal load set entries
• There is a LOADSET request in Case Control
The program may also reference static and thermal load set entries specified by the LID or TID
field in the selected LSEQ entries corresponding to the EXCITEID.
Excitation specified by TYPE is enforced motion
• There is no LOADSET request in Case Control
EXCITEID will reference SPCD entries. If such entries indicate null enforced motion, the
program will then assume that the excitation is enforced motion using large mass and will
reference DAREA and static and thermal load set entries just as in the case of applied load
excitation.
• There is a LOADSET request in Case Control
The program will reference SPCD entries specified by the LID field in the selected LSEQ entries
corresponding to the EXCITEID. If such entries indicate null enforced motion, the program will
then assume that the excitation is enforced motion using large mass and will reference static and
thermal load set entries corresponding to the DAREA entry in the selected LSEQ entries, just as
in the case of applied load excitation.
4. EXCITEID may reference sets containing QHBDY, QBDYi, QVECT, QVOL and TEMPBC
entries when using the heat transfer option.
5. TLOAD1 loads may be combined with TLOAD2 loads only by specification on a DLOAD entry.
That is, the SID on a TLOAD1 entry may not be the same as that on a TLOAD2 entry.
6. SID must be unique for all TLOAD1, TLOAD2, RLOAD1, RLOAD2, and ACSRCE entries.
7. If the heat transfer option is used, the referenced QVECT entry may also contain references to
functions of time, and therefore A may be a function of time.
8. If TLOADi entries are selected in SOL 111 or 146 then a Fourier analysis is used to transform the
time-dependent loads on the TLOADi entries to the frequency domain and then combine them with
loads from RLOADi entries. Then the analysis is performed as a frequency response analysis but the
solution and the output are converted to and printed in the time domain. Please refer to “Fourier
Transform” on page 176 of the MSC.Nastran Advanced Dynamic Analysis User’s Guide.

9. If DELAY is blank or zero, τ will be zero.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 469

TLOAD2 Transient Response Dynamic Excitation, Form 2

Defines a time-dependent dynamic excitation or enforced motion of the form


 0 , t < ( T1 + τ ) or t > ( T2 + τ )
{P(t)} = 
 A t̃ B e C t̃ cos ( 2πF t̃ + P ) , ( T1 + τ ) ≤ t ≤ ( T2 + τ )


for use in a transient response problem, where t̃ = t – T1 – τ

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TLOAD2 SID EXCITEID DELAY TYPE T1 T2 F P
C B

Example:
TLOAD2 4 10 2.1 4.7 12.0
2.0

Field Contents
SID Set identification number. (Integer > 0)
EXCITEID Identification number of DAREA or SPCD entry set or a thermal load set (in heat transfer
analysis) that defines A. See Remarks 2. and 3. (Integer > 0)
DELAY Defines time delay τ. (Integer > 0, real or blank). If it is a non-zero integer, it represents the
identification number of DELAY Bulk Data entry that defines τ.. If it is real, then it directly
defines the value of τ that will be used for all degrees of freedom that are excited by this
dynamic load entry. See also Remark 5.
TYPE Defines the type of the dynamic excitation. See Remarks 2. and 3. (Integer, character or
blank; Default = 0)
T1 Time constant. (Real > 0.0)
T2 Time constant. (Real; T2 > T1)
F Frequency in cycles per unit time. (Real > 0.0; Default = 0.0)
P Phase angle in degrees. (Real; Default = 0.0)
C Exponential coefficient. (Real; Default = 0.0)
B Growth coefficient. (Real; Default = 0.0)

Main Index
 470 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

Remarks:
1. Dynamic excitation sets must be selected with the Case Control command with DLOAD=SID.
2. The type of the dynamic excitation is specified by TYPE (field 5) according to the following table:

TYPE TYPE of Dynamic Excitation

0, L, LO, LOA or LOAD Applied load (force or moment) (Default)
1, D, DI, DIS, or DISP Enforced displacement using large mass or SPC/SPCD data
2, V, VE, VEL or VELO Enforced velocity using large mass or SPC/SPCD data
3, A, AC, ACC or ACCE Enforced acceleration using large mass or SPC/SPCD data

3. TYPE (field 5) also determines the manner in which EXCITEID (field 3) is used by the program as
described below
Excitation specified by TYPE is applied load
• There is no LOADSET request in Case Control
EXCITEID may also reference DAREA, static and thermal load set entries
• There is a LOADSET request in Case Control
The program may also reference static and thermal load set entries specified by the LID or TID
field in the selected LSEQ entries corresponding to the EXCITEID.
Excitation specified by TYPE is enforced motion
• There is no LOADSET request in Case Control
EXCITEID will reference SPCD entries. If such entries indicate null enforced motion, the
program will then assume that the excitation is enforced motion using large mass and will
reference DAREA and static and thermal load set entries just as in the case of applied load
excitation.
• There is a LOADSET request in Case Control
The program will reference SPCD entries specified by the LID field in the selected LSEQ entries
corresponding to the EXCITEID. If such entries indicate null enforced motion, the program will
then assume that the excitation is enforced motion using large mass and will reference static and
thermal load set entries specified by the LID or TID field in the selected LSEQ entries
corresponding to the EXCITEID, just as in the case of applied load excitation.
4. EXCITEID (field 3) may reference sets containing QHBDY, QBDYi, QVECT, and QVOL and
TEMPBC entries when using the heat transfer option.
5. If DELAY is blank or zero, τ will be zero.
6. TLOAD1 loads may be combined with TLOAD2 loads only by specification on a DLOAD entry.
That is, the SID on a TLOAD1 entry may not be the same as that on a TLOAD2 entry.
7. SID must be unique for all TLOAD1, TLOAD2, RLOAD1, RLOAD2, and ACSRCE entries.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 471

8. If the heat transfer option is used, the referenced QVECT entry may also contain references to
functions of time, and therefore A may be a function of time.
9. If TLOADi entries are selected in SOL 111 or 146 then a Fourier analysis is used to transform the
time-dependent loads on the TLOADi entries to the frequency domain and them combine them
with loads from RLOADi entries. Then the analysis is performed as a frequency response analysis
but the solution and the output are converted to and printed in the time domain. In this case, B will
be rounded to the nearest integer. Please refer to “Fourier Transform” on page 176 of the MSC.Nastran
Advanced Dynamic Analysis User’s Guide.
10. The continuation entry is optional.

Main Index
 472 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

TSTEPNL Parameters for Nonlinear Transient Analysis

Defines parametric controls and data for nonlinear transient structural or heat transfer analysis. TSTEPNL
is intended for SOLs 129, 159, and 99.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TSTEPNL ID NDT DT NO KSTEP MAXITER CONV
EPSU EPSP EPSW MAXDIV MAXQN MAXLS FSTRESS
MAXBIS ADJUST MSTEP RB MAXR UTOL RTOLB

Example:
TSTEPNL 250 100 .01 1 2 10 PW
1.E-2 1.E-3 1.E-6 2 10 2 .02
5 5 0 0.75 16.0 0.1 20.

Field Contents
ID Identification number. (Integer > 0)
NDT Number of time steps of value DT. See Remark 2. (Integer > 4)
DT Time increment. See Remark 2. (Real > 0.0)
NO Time step interval for output. Every NO-th step will be saved for output. See Remark 3.
(Integer > 0; Default = 1)
KSTEP KSTEP is the number of converged bisection solutions between stiffness updates. (Integer >
0; Default = 2)
MAXITER Limit on number of iterations for each time step. See Remark 4. (Integer ≠ 0; Default =
10)
CONV Flags to select convergence criteria. See Remark 5. (Character: “U”, “P”, “W”, or any
combination; Default = “PW.”)
EPSU Error tolerance for displacement (U) criterion. (Real > 0.0; Default = 1.0E-2)
EPSP Error tolerance for load (P) criterion. (Real > 0.0; Default = 1.0E-3)
EPSW Error tolerance for work (W) criterion. (Real > 0.0; Default = 1.0E-6)
MAXDIV Limit on the number of diverging conditions for a time step before the solution is assumed
to diverge. See Remark 6. (Integer > 0; Default = 2)
MAXQN Maximum number of quasi-Newton correction vectors to be saved on the database. See
Remark 7. (Integer > 0; Default = 10)
MAXLS Maximum number of line searches allowed per iteration. See Remark 7. (Integer > 0; Default
= 2)

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 473

Field Contents
FSTRESS Fraction of effective stress ( σ ) used to limit the subincrement size in the material routines.
See Remark 8. (0.0 < Real < 1.0; Default = 0.2)
MAXBIS Maximum number of bisections allowed for each time step. See Remark 9. (-9 <Integer < 9;
Default = 5)
ADJUST Time step skip factor for automatic time step adjustment. See Remark 10. (Integer > 0;
Default = 5)
MSTEP Number of steps to obtain the dominant period response. See Remark 11. (10 < Integer <
200; Default = variable between 20 and 40.)
RB Define bounds for maintaining the same time step for the stepping function during the
adaptive process. See Remark 11. (0.1 < Real < 1.0; Default = 0.75)
MAXR Maximum ratio for the adjusted incremental time relative to DT allowed for time step
adjustment. See Remark 12. (1.0 < Real < 32.0; Default = 16.0)
UTOL Tolerance on displacement or temperature increment below which a special provision is
made for numerical stability. See Remark 13. (0.001 < Real < 1.0; Default = 0.1)
RTOLB Maximum value of incremental rotation (in degrees) allowed per iteration to activate
bisection. See Remark 14. (Real > 2.0; Default = 20.0)

Remarks:
1. The TSTEPNL Bulk Data entry is selected by the Case Control command TSTEP = ID. Each
residual structure subcase requires a TSTEP entry and either applied loads via TLOADi data or initial
values from a previous subcase. Multiple subcases are assumed to occur sequentially in time with the
initial values of time and displacement conditions of each subcase defined by the end conditions of
the previous subcase.
2. NDT is used to define the total duration for analysis, which is NDT * DT. Since DT is adjusted
during the analysis , the actual number of time steps, in general, will not be equal to NDT). Also,
DT is used only as an initial value for the time increment.
3. For printing and plotting the solution, data recovery is performed at time steps 0, NO, 2 * NO, ...,
and the last converged step. The Case Control command OTIME may also be used to control the
output times.
4. The number of iterations for a time step is limited to MAXITER. If MAXITER is negative, the
analysis is terminated when the divergence condition is encountered twice during the same time step
or the solution diverges for five consecutive time steps. If MAXITER is positive, the program
computes the best solution and continues the analysis until divergence occurs again. If the solution
does not converge in MAXITER iterations, the process is treated as a divergent process. See Remark
6.
5. The convergence test flags (U = displacement error test, P = load equilibrium error test, W = work
error test) and the error tolerances (EPSU, EPSP, and EPSW) define the convergence criteria. All
requested criteria (combination of U, P, and/or W) are satisfied upon convergence. Note that at least
two iterations are necessary to check the displacement convergence criterion.

Main Index
 474 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

6. MAXDIV provides control over diverging solutions. Depending on the rate of divergence, the
number of diverging solutions (NDIV) is incremented by 1 or 2. The solution is assumed to diverge
when NDIV reaches MAXDIV during the iteration. If the bisection option is used (allowed
MAXBIS times) the time step is bisected upon divergence. Otherwise, the solution for the time step
is repeated with a new stiffness based on the converged state at the beginning of the time step. If
NDIV reaches MAXDIV again within the same time step, the analysis is terminated.
7. Nonzero values of MAXQN and MAXLS will activate the quasi-Newton update and the line search
process, respectively.
8. The number of subincrements in the material routines is determined such that the subincrement size
is approximately FSTRESS ⋅ σ . FSTRESS is also used to establish a tolerance for error correction
in elastoplastic material, i.e.,

error in yield function <FSTRESS ⋅ yield stress

If the limit is exceeded at the converging state, the program will terminate with a fatal error message.
Otherwise, the stress state is adjusted to the current yield surface, resulting in δ = 0.
9. The bisection process is activated when divergence occurs and MAXBIS ≠ 0. The number of
bisections for a time increment is limited to |MAXBIS|. If MAXBIS is positive and the solution does
not converge after MAXBIS bisections, the best solution is computed and the analysis is continued to
the next time step. If MAXBIS is negative and the solution does not converge in |MAXBIS| bisection,
the analysis is terminated.
10. ADJUST controls the automatic time stepping. Since the automatic time step adjustment is based
on the mode of response and not on the loading pattern, it may be necessary to limit the adjustable
step size when the period of the forcing function is much shorter than the period of dominant
response frequency of the structure. It is the user’s responsibility to ensure that the loading history is
properly traced with the ADJUST option. The ADJUST option should be suppressed for the
duration of short pulse loading. If unsure, start with a value for DT that is much smaller than the
pulse duration in order to properly represent the loading pattern.
• If ADJUST = 0, then the automatic adjustment is deactivated. This is recommended when the
loading consists of short duration pulses.
• If ADJUST > 0, the time increment is continually adjusted for the first few steps until a good value
of Δt is obtained. After this initial adjustment, the time increment is adjusted every ADJUST-th
time step only.
• If ADJUST is one order greater than NDT, then automatic adjustment is deactivated after the
initial adjustment.
11. MSTEP and RB are used to adjust the time increment during analysis. The recommended value of
MSTEP for nearly linear problems is 20. A larger value (e.g., 40) is required for highly nonlinear
problems. By default, the program automatically computes the value of MSTEP based on the
changes in the stiffness.
The time increment adjustment is based on the number of time steps desired to capture the dominant
frequency response accurately. The time increment is adjusted as follows:

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 475

Δt n + 1 = f ( r )Δt n

where
1 2π 1
r = -------------------  ------  --------
MSTEP ω n  Δt n 

with
f = 0.25 for r < 0.5 ⋅ RB
f = 0.5 for 0.5 ⋅ RB ≤ r < RB
f = 1.0 for RB ≤ r < 2.0
f = 2.0 for 2.0 ≤ r < 3.0 ⁄ RB
f = 4.0 for r ≥ 3.0 ⁄ RB

12. MAXR is used to define the upper and lower bounds for adjusted time step size, i.e.,

DT DT
MIN  ----------------------, ------------------ ≤ Δt ≤ MAXR ⋅ DT
 MAXBIS MAXR
2
13. UTOL is a tolerance used to filter undesirable time step adjustments; i.e.,

U· n
-------------------
- < UTOL
U· max

Under this condition no time step adjustment is performed in a structural analysis (SOL 129). In a
heat transfer analysis (SOL 159) the time step is doubled.
14. The bisection is activated if the incremental rotation for any degree-of-freedom
( Δθ x, Δθ y, Δθ z ) exceeds the value specified by RTOLB. This bisection strategy is based on
the incremental rotation and controlled by MAXBIS.

Main Index
 476 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

VIEW View Factor Definition

Defines radiation cavity and shadowing for radiation view factor calculations.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
VIEW IVIEW ICAVITY SHADE NB NG DISLIN

Example:
VIEW 1 1 BOTH 2 3 0.25

Field Contents
IVIEW Identification number. (Integer > 0)
ICAVITY Cavity identification number for grouping the radiant exchange faces of CHBDYi elements.
(Integer > 0)
SHADE Shadowing flag for the face of CHBDYi element. (Character, Default = “BOTH”)
NONE means the face can neither shade nor be shaded by other faces.
KSHD means the face can shade other faces.
KBSHD means the face can be shaded by other faces.
BOTH means the face can both shade and be shaded by other faces. (Default)
NB Subelement mesh size in the beta direction. (Integer > 0; Default = 1)
NG Subelement mesh size in the gamma direction. (Integer > 0; Default = 1)
DISLIN The displacement of a surface perpendicular to the surface. See Figure 0-15. (Real; Default =
0.0)

Remarks:
1. VIEW must be referenced by CHBDYE, CHBDYG, or CHBDYP elements to be used.
2. ICAVITY references the cavity to which the face of the CHBDYi element belongs; a zero or blank
value indicates this face does not participate in a cavity.
3. NB, NG, and DISLIN are used in the calculation of view factors by finite difference or contour
integration techniques. They are not used with the VIEW3D entry.
4. A summary of the shadowing conditions can be requested by the PARAM,MESH,YES Bulk Data
entry.
5. SHADE references shadowing for CHBDYi elements participating in a radiation cavity, the VIEW
calculation can involve shadowing.
6. DISLIN should only be used with LINE type CHBDYE and CHBDYP surface elements. DISLIN
> 0.0 means into the cavity. See Figure 0-15.

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 477

n Relocated Radiation Surface

DISLIN

Active Side

Location of Element

Figure 0-15 DISLIN Convention

7. NB and NG define the subelement mesh refinement when using the VIEW module (as opposed to
the VIEW3D module) for the calculation of view factors.

n
3 2

4 1

Figure 0-16 Typical AREA4 surface element where NB=2 and NG=4

Main Index
 478 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

VIEW3D View Factor Definition - Gaussian Integration Method

Defines parameters to control and/or request the Gaussian Integration method of view factor calculation for
a specified cavity.

Format:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
VIEW3D ICAVITY GITB GIPS CIER ETOL ZTOL WTOL RADCHK

Example:
VIEW3D 1 2 2 4 1.0E-6

Field Contents
ICAVITY Radiant cavity identification number on RADCAV entry. (Integer > 0)
GITB Gaussian integration order to be implemented in calculating net effective view factors in the
presence of third-body shadowing. (Integer 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 10; Default = 4)
GIPS Gaussian integration order to be implemented in calculating net effective view factors in the
presence of self-shadowing. (Integer 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 10; Default = 4)
CIER Discretization level used in the semi-analytic contour integration method. (1 < Integer < 20;
Default = 4)
ETOL Error estimate above which a corrected view factor is calculated using the semi-analytic
contour integration method. (Real > 0.0; Default = 0.1)
ZTOL Assumed level of calculation below which the numbers are considered to be zero. (Real >
0.0; Default = 1.E-10)
WTOL Assumed degree of warpage above which the actual value of F ii will be calculated. (0.0 <
Real < 1.0; Default = 0.01)

Main Index
 CHAPTER D 479

Field Contents
RADCHK Type of diagnostic output desired for the radiation exchange surfaces. (Integer; Default = 3)
RADCHK = -1, No diagnostic output requested
RADCHK = 1, Grid table and element connectivity
RADCHK = 2, Surface Diagnostics - Surface type, area, skewness, taper, warpage, grid point
sequencing, aspect ratio, and shading flags.
RADCHK = 3, Area, view factor, area-view factor product with error estimate, existence flags
for partial self-shadowing, third-body shadowing with error estimate, and enclosure
summations for view factor. (Default)
RADCHK = 0, Same as RADCHK = 1, 2, and 3
RADCHK = 12, Same as RADCHK = 1 and 2
RADCHK = 13, Same as RADCHK = 1 and 3
RADCHK = 23, Same as RADCHK = 2 and 3

Remarks:
1. For ETOL, when the error estimate exceeds the value input for the ETOL entry, the contour method
is employed to develop an improved view factor.
2. For ZTOL, the use of a geometry scale that results in small numerical values of A i F ij should be
avoided.
3. When WTOL is exceeded, the actual value of F ii will be calculated when using the adaptive view
module. Warpage will not be considered in the calculation of F ij .
4. For axisymmetric analysis, RADCHK = -1 or 3 only.

Main Index
 480 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Commonly Used Bulk Data Entries

$ Comment

Used to insert comments into the input file. Comment statements may appear anywhere within the input
file.

Format:
$ followed by any characters out to column 80.

Example:
$ TEST FIXTURE-THIRD MODE

Remarks:
1. Comments are ignored by the program.
2. Comments will appear only in the unsorted echo of the Bulk Data.

Main Index
 MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s Guide
Appendix E: View Factor Calculation Methods

View Factor Calculation

E Methods

Calculation of View Factors

Fundamentals of View Factor Calculation

Main Index
 482 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Calculation of View Factors

Calculation of View Factors

MSC Nastran has two independent routines available for the calculation of view factors between gray diffuse
surface elements. The default routine, the VIEW module, relies on a user defined combination of area and
contour discretization to determine the geometric view factor. The second module, VIEW3D, utilizes
Gaussian integration and semi-analytic contour integration to evaluate view factors. In the material that
follows, the two methods are compared and contrasted from a user standpoint in an effort to direct their most
efficient application.

Fundamentals of View Factor Calculation

1. View factors can only be determined between surfaces that have been identified with CHBDYi surface
elements.
2. Because of the geometric or visual nature of the view factor calculation, it is often necessary to identify
both sides of conduction elements with independent surface elements, particularly when third-body
shadowing is of concern. Only active surface elements can participate, or be seen, in a view factor
calculation.
3. The active side of the surface element is defined relative to the grid point connections. The right hand
rule specifies the outward surface normal as one proceeds from G1 to Gn thereby defining the active
surface element.
4. The overall quality of the view factor calculated is highly dependent on the surface element mesh
model. When the distance between any two elements is reduced below a level on the order of an
element length or width, inaccuracies can develop. At the same time, a large number of small elements
can create a very computationally intensive problem.
5. There are two types of shadowing which can also reduce the quality of the overall view factor.
Self-shadowing reduces the total view factor between two surfaces due simply to their relative
orientations in space (Figure 0-1). Third-body shadowing (Figure 0-2) takes into account the reduced
view between two surfaces due to other interelement interference surfaces. In this figure, note the
existence of both the K and L surfaces.

Main Index
 CHAPTER E 483

n̂
n̂
n̂

n̂ n̂ n̂

(NONE) (PARTIAL) (TOTAL)

Figure 0-1 Self-Shadowing

Z
J
3

r 13
K nK
2
r 12
L
nL

X I

Figure 0-2 Third Surface Shadowing

6. The CHBDYi element types available for radiation view factor calculation include:

Main Index
 484 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Fundamentals of View Factor Calculation

POINT
LINE
REV
AREA3
AREA4
AREA6–VIEW3D Module Only
AREA8–VIEW3D Module Only

All surface elements may be used for radiation enclosure analysis if the appropriate user supplied view
or exchange factors are available.
7. MSC Nastran allows for isolated surface element groupings when performing view factor calculations
– multiple radiation cavities. This procedure can eliminate a great deal of needless calculation among
surfaces when one group of elements clearly cannot see another group of elements. The surface
element groups therefore are arranged by unique cavity IDs. No surface element may reside in more
than on cavity.
8. The VIEW entry invokes the calculation of the view factors for the overall thermal analysis. It also
separates the CHBDYi surface elements into the desired cavities. The IVIEW field identifies the
CHBDYi elements and the ICAVITY field assigns the elements to a cavity.

Using the VIEW Module

1. The geometric integral equation to be solved for the view factor is given below. “Arbitrary Enclosure
Radiation Surfaces” on page 485 depicts the pertinent terms.

1  cos β i cos β j
F ij = -----
Ai    ------------------------------
πr ij
2
- dA i dA j

A A
i j (dimensionless) (0-1)

where F ij is defined as the fraction of the radiant emission leaving surface i which arrives at surface j.

Main Index
 CHAPTER E 485

Cj

z vj Aj
dA j

r
βj

y
r
nj

ni
vi
βi
x
Ai

dA i

Ci

A i and A j are diffuse emitters and reflectors

A i and A j are black.
A i and A j are isothermal.

Figure 0-3 Arbitrary Enclosure Radiation Surfaces

2. The VIEW Module solves (0-1) by two methods. The first method discretizes the surface elements
into a number of finite subelements and treats the integrals as dual summations over all the
subelements on surfaces I and J. This method is often referred to as the finite difference method, but
is just an extension of view factor algebra. Consider the surfaces I and II below with subdivision
1 → 8.

Main Index
 486 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Fundamentals of View Factor Calculation

3 8
4 7
2 5
1 6

I II

From view factor algebra,

a. f 1 – II = f 1 – 5 + f 1 – 6 + f 1 – 7 + f 1 – 8
and similarily for f 2 – II , f 3 – II , and f 4 – II

Reciprocity provides;
A1
b. A 1 f 1 – II = A II f II – 1 ; f II – 1 = ------- f 1 – II
A II

c. Now, f II – I = f II – 1 + f II – 2 + f II – 3 + f II – 4

d. and, A II f II – I = A 1 f 1 – II + A 2 f 2 – II + A 3 f 3 – II + A 4 f f – II

e. using, a. then A II F II – I = A 1 ( f 1 – 5 + f 1 – 6 + f 1 – 7 + f 1 – 8 )
+ A2 ( f2 – 5 + f2 – 6 + f2 – 7 + f2 – 8 )
+ A2 ( f3 – 5 + f3 – 6 + f3 – 7 + f3 – 8)
+ A4 ( f4 – 5 + f4 – 6 + f4 – 7 + f4 – 8)
4 8
f. so 1 cos β i cos β j A i A j
f I – II = -----   ----------------------------------------
-
AI 2
i = 1j = 5
ΠR ij
The second method transforms the area integrals into contour integrals and subdivides the perimeter
into finite line segments. A similar dual contour summation is then performed around surfaces I and
J. This method is commonly referred to as the contour integration method.
3. In general, area integration is faster than contour integration, but does not provide as accurate an
answer. Several choices can be made by the user as a result. The RADCAV entry has information
fields on it for the control and manipulation of the view factor calculation:
NFECI = FD Finite Difference methods are used to calculate the view factors (applies to the VIEW
Module only).
NFECI = CONT Contour integration methods are used to calculate the view factors (applies to the
VIEW Module only).

Main Index
 CHAPTER E 487

NFECI = blank or 0. This is the default value signifying that the code will make an estimate based
on geometry and the field value of RMAX as to whether it will use finite differences or contour
integration. Figure 0-4 below illustrates the criteria enforced.

d ij

i j

Figure 0-4

Contour integration is used on any element pair for which;

Aj
-------------- > RMAX
2
( d ij )

For example, if A j = 1 , d ij < 10 enforces contour integration.

1. Since the VIEW Module relies on element subdivision in its calculation method, a means of
requesting the level of subdivision is made available. The number of element subdivisions are
specified on the NB and NG field of the VIEW entry. The subdivision process is illustrated below
for the various surface element types.

Using the VIEW3D Module - 3D Geometries

1. The VIEW3D Module relies on Gaussian integration techniques for the solution of (0-1). This view
module is accessed by introducing the VIEW3D Bulk Data entry. This view factor calculator is
semi-adaptive in that detection of excessive error or shadowing, will automatically invoke
semi-analytic contour integration techniques or higher Gaussian integration order to reduce the
error. For a general 3D geometry, this procedure is superior in both accuracy and speed to that
available with the VIEW module.
2. The VIEW3D Module is designed for the calculation of view factors for general 3D and
axisymmetric geometries. Planar view factors must be calculated with the VIEW routine.
3. There is no surface subdivision available with VIEW3D, therefore a responsible initial mesh is
required for good results. Accuracy levels can be substantially controlled by requesting the use of
various integration orders.

Main Index
 488 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Fundamentals of View Factor Calculation

AREA4

Y G3
G4

G1

G2 X

NB = 3
NG = 4

4. This module is requested by including the Bulk Data entry VIEW3D. The VIEW3D entry contains
specific fields for defining the various integration orders desired for unobstructed view factors, self and
third-body shadowing view factors, and improved view factors when excessive error is detected.
5. The view factor error is defined as:

ERROR = F ij ⋅ ( RMAX ⁄ RMIN )

In this equation, F ij is the initially calculated view factor (always an integration order of 2 by 2) and
RMAX and RMIN represent the largest and smallest integration point (surface I) to integration point
(surface J) vector lengths. Surface proximity and orientation are reflected in this value.
6. When a large number of surfaces are involved in an enclosure (1000+), it may be advisable to reduce
the values of the field data for GITB, GIPS, and CIER to the value of (2).
7. Because view factors solely involve geometry, it is important to work in dimensions/units that do not
lead to machine accuracy problems. In particular, in transformed space, the view factor equation has
an integration point to integration point distance raised to the fourth power in the denominator.

Using the VIEW3D Module - Axisymmetric Geometries

1. Axisymmetric geometries have their radiative surfaces modeled with CHBDYG elements of
TYPE=REV. These are necessarily attached to CTRIAX6 conduction elements.

Main Index
 CHAPTER E 489

POINT

G1

NB = 2
NG = 4

LINE

G1 G2

NB = 4
NG = 3

REV

G2

NB = 2
NG = 4

G1

Y
X

Main Index
 490 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Fundamentals of View Factor Calculation

2. The module is designed to build an internal geometry composed of a 3D representation of the

axisymmetric model. This computational model represents approximately one-half of a full 3D
geometry. The number of elements employed in the computational models is set by the user through
the value NREV in field 9 of the RADCAB Bulk Data entry. Every REV element in a given cavity
then must generate the same number of computation elements. It is recommended to set NREV to a
level which will result in approximately square computation elements being created. To guarantee this
for every element then, all REV elements would need to be about the same length. This may not be
practical for many problems.
3. Although there are considerable numbers of computational elements, the liberal use of symmetry
eliminates the need to calculate many of the individual view factors in the internal half-model
representation. In the absence of any third body shadowing, the axisymmetric calculation should be
much faster than the equivalent 3D calculation.
4. The general specification of shadowing conditions for axisymmetric geometry can be complicated.
For simple geometries, the user can save considerable calculation effort by setting the NONE, KSHD,
and KBSHD flags on the shade field of the VIEW Bulk Data entry. When in doubt, it is safest to use
the designation BOTH.

Miscellaneous View Factor Capabilities (VIEW or VIEW3D)

1. Shadowing calculations absorb considerable resources while calculating view factors. If the geometry
is such that no shadowing can occur, it is recommended to turn off the calculation process by utilizing
the SHADOW field on the RADCAV entry. A NO declaration will eliminate any shadowing
calculations. The default value is YES. If a limited subset of surfaces in a problem are involved in
shadowing, the most efficient calculation will result if the SHADE field of the VIEW Bulk Data entry
is appropriately identified.
2. If a complete radiation enclosure is being analyzed, small inaccuracies in the individual view factors
may lead to view factor sums that exceed 1.0 by a small (1 or 2 percent) amount. In this case, the
view factors can be scaled to provide a sum of exactly 1.0 by utilizing the SCALE field on the
RADCAV entry.
3. If an incomplete enclosure is being analyzed and it is desirable to complete the enclosure with a
dummy or space element, this can be facilitated by using the ELEAMB field of the RADCAV entry.
The ambient element must be an existing surface element of the problem, however, it is not used
explicitly in the determination of the view factors. Subsequent to the view factor calculations, the
view factor 1.0 – SUMMATION is assigned to the space element for each individual enclosure
surface element.
4. View factor output can be controlled through the PRTPCH field of the RADCAV entry.
5. We define a global view factor as the view factor that exists between one group of surface elements
and another group of surface elements. If global view factors are of interest, perhaps for some system
level analysis, these can be determined while executing the VIEW module. The SET ij fields on the
RADCAV entry reference the desired surface element sets.

Main Index
 MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s GuideAppendix F: Radiation Enclosures
Appendix F: Radiation Enclosures

Radiation Enclosures
F

Method of Poljak

Method of Poljak - Radiation Exchange in Matrix Format

Transformation from Element Heat Flows to Grid Point Heat Flows

Example of Element/Grid Transformation

Two Element Example for Radiant Exchange

Resistive Network Approach to the Two Surface Problem

Radiation Enclosure Analysis

Main Index
 492 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Method of Poljak

Method of Poljak
N
A k q i, k =  A j q o, j f j – k (0-1)
j = 1
Aj fj – k = Ak fk – j (0-2)

N
q i, k =  f k – j q o, j (0-3)
j = 1
4
q o, k = ε k σT k + ( 1 – ε k )q i, k (0-4)

N
4
q i, k =  f k – j ( ε k σT k + ( 1 – ε k )q i, k ) (0-5)
j = 1
N N
4
q i, k =  f k – j ε k σT k +  f k – j ( 1 – ε k )q i, k (0-6)
j = 1 j = 1
 N  N
q i, k  1 –  f k – j ( 1 – ε k ) =  f k – j ε k σT k
4
(0-7)
 
 j = 1  j = 1
N  N –1

q i, k =   1 –  f k – j ( 1 – ε k ) f k – j ε k σT k
4
(0-8)
 
j = 1 j = 1 
where:

A = elemental areas
f = basic view factors
N = number of element in enclosure
q i, k = heat flux into surface element k

q o, j = heat flux leaving surface element j

Main Index
 CHAPTER F 493

Similarly for q o, k , then

NεT
qk = q i, k – q o, k (0-9)

or
NεT
Qk = A k ( q i, k – q o, k ) (0-10)

Method of Poljak - Radiation Exchange in Matrix Format

IN OUT
[ A ] { q }e = [ F ] { q }e (compare to (0-1)) (0-11)

OUT 4 IN
{ q }e = σ [ ε ] { ue } + [ I – ε ] { q }e (compare to (0-4)) (0-12)

where:

= diagonal matrix of element areas

\
A
\
IN = irradiation
{ q }e

[ F ] = matrix of exchange coefficients ( A i f ij )

OUT = radiosity
{ q }e

σ = Stephan-Boltzmann constant
= diagonal matrix of surface emissivities
\
ε
\
= diagonal matrix of surface absorptivities
\
α
\

Main Index
 494 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Transformation from Element Heat Flows to Grid Point Heat Flows

Substituting (0-12) into (0-11) yields:

IN –1 4
{ q }e = σ[(A – F(I – α)) Fε ] { u } e (0-13)

OUT –1 4
{ q }e = σ[ε + (I – α)(A – F(I – α)) Fε ] { u } e

IN OUT 4
{ Q }e = [ A ] ( { q }e – { q }e ) ≡ –[ Re ] { u }e (0-14)

Substituting (0-13) into (0-14) yields:

–1
[ R e ] = σ [ Aε – Aα ( A – F ( I – α ) ) Fε ] (0-15)

[ R e ] = radiation exchange matrix.

If ε = α and F SYM then [ R e ] .

SYM

Transformation from Element Heat Flows to Grid Point

Heat Flows
MSC Nastran solves the system equations for the grid point temperatures. The view factors, however, are
calculated between geometric surface elements. Therefore, the introduction of radiation exchange into the
system equations requires the transformation of the radiation exchange matrix from an element based
representation to a grid point based representation.
T
{ Q }g = [ G ] { Q }e (0-16)

where:

T = matrix of constant coefficients constructed from the fraction of the element area associated
[G] with the connecting grid points.

then:
4 4
{ u }e = [ G ] { ug + Ta } (0-17)

and
T
[ R ]g = [ G ] [ R ]e [ G ] (0-18)

[ R ]g if [ R ] e (0-19)
SYM SYM

Main Index
 CHAPTER F 495

4
{ Q }e = –σ [ R ]e [ G ] { ug + Ta } (0-20)

4
{ Q }g = –σ [ R ]g { ug + Ta } (0-21)

Example of Element/Grid Transformation

G3

G4 G7
G2
1 G6
G8
G1 2
G5

R 11 R 12
[ R ]e = (0-22)
R 21 R 22

   4 
 Q1  R 11 R 12  u 1 
  = –σ   (0-23)
 Q2  R 21 R 22  u 4 
e
 e 2 e

Main Index
 496 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Example of Element/Grid Transformation

Q 
 1
Q  AF1 0
 2
Q  AF2 0
 3
  AF3 0  
 Q4  AF4 0  Q1 
  =   (0-24)
 Q5  0 AF5  Q2 
  0 AF6  e
 Q6 
  0 AF7
 Q7 
  0 AF8
 Q8 
 g
Comparing (0-24) to (0-16) then,

[G] = AF1 AF2 AF3 AF4 0 0 0 0 (0-25)

0 0 0 0 AF5 AF6 AF7 AF8

Where AFi ( i = 1, 8 ) is the fractional area of the element associated with grid point Gi.
T
[ R ]g = [ G ] [ R ]e [ G ] (0-26)

AF1 0
AF2 0
AF3 0
AF4 0 R 11 R 12 AF1 AF2 AF3 AF4 0 0 0 (0-27)
0
[ R ]g =
0 AF5 R 21 R 22 0 0 0 0 AF5 AF6 AF7 AF8
e
0 AF6
0 AF7
0 AF8

Main Index
 CHAPTER F 497

AF1R 11 AF1 AF1R 11 AF2 AF1R 12 AF8

AF2R 11 AF1 AF2R 11 AF2
AF3R 11 AF1 AF3R 11 AF2

[ R ]g = AF4R 11 AF1 (0-28)

AF8R 21 AF1 AF8R 22 AF8

Two Element Example for Radiant Exchange

A1 2
1
D
A2

–1
[ R ] e = σ [ Aε – Aα ( A – F ( I – α ) ) Fε ] (0-29)

[F] = A [f] (0-30)

–1
–1 A1 0 0 A 1 f 12 1 – ε1 0
(A – F(I – α)) = –
0 A2 A 2 f 21 0 0 1 – ε2
(0-31)
–1
A1 – A 1 f 12 ( 1 – ε 2 )
=
– A 2 f 21 ( 1 – ε 1 ) A2

Main Index
 498 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Two Element Example for Radiant Exchange

For ease of illustration (and manipulation) let surfaces 1 and 2 be black bodies, then ε 1 = ε 2 = 1.0
then

1
------ 0
–1 A1
(A – F(I – α)) = (0-32)
1
0 ------
A2

1
------ 0
A1 0 A1 0 A1 0 A 1 f 12
[ R ]e = σ – (0-33)
0 A2 0 A2 1 A 2 f 21 0
0 ------
A2

A1 – A 1 f 12
[ R ]e = σ (0-34)
– A 2 f 21 A2

 4
A1 – A 1 F 12  u1 
{ Q }e = –σ  4 (0-35)
– A 2 F 21 A2  
e  u2 
e

To further define a specific problem, let A 1 = A 2 = D = 1.0, T 1 = 1000 and T 2 = 0.0 . For
this geometry then, f 12 = f 21 ≅ .20 . The resulting heat flows are:

4 4
Q 1 = – σ ( 1000 – .2 ( 0 ) ) = – σ ( 1000 )
(0-36)
4 4
Q 2 = – σ ( – .2 ( 0 ) – .2 ( 1000 ) ) = .2σ ( 1000 )

Main Index
 CHAPTER F 499

Note: Since the exchange matrix [ R ] e is not conservative, we recognize that the MSC Nastran
default condition assumes a third exchange surface representing a loss to space. Therefore, the
loss to space is:

Q 1 + Q 2 + Q 3 = 0.0
(0-37)
4
Q 3 = .8σ ( 1000 )

Resistive Network Approach to the Two Surface

Problem
E b1 J1 J2 E b2 4
E b = σT
1–ε 1 1 – ε2 is the emissive power of a
---------------1 -------------- --------------- block body, and J is referred
ε1 A1 A 1 f 12 ε2 A2 to as a radiosity node.
(surface (space (surface
resistance) resistance) resistance)

The heat flow then is;

4 4
σ ( T1 – T2 )
Q 1 – 2 = -------------------------------------------------------------- (0-38)
1 – ε1 1 - 1--------------- – ε2
--------------- + ------------- +
ε1 A1 A 1 f 12 ε2 A2
Using the same example problem considered in the exchange matrix development,

ε 1 = ε 2 = 1.0
A 1 = A 2 = 1.0
f 12 = .20

4 4
Q 1 – 2 = σA 1 f 12 ( T 1 – T 2 ) = – Q 2 – 1
(0-39)
4
= .2σ ( 1000 )

Main Index
 500 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Radiation Enclosure Analysis

in a matrix format,

 4
A 1 f 12 – A 1 f 12  u 1 
{ Q }e = –σ   (0-40)
– A 1 f 12 A 1 f 12  u 4 
 2

Note: There is no exchange with the environment in these equations.

Radiation Enclosure Analysis

Radiation Matrix Formation - General

The basic exchange relationship for a radiation enclosure is given in (0-41)
4
{ Q }n = [ R ]n { u + Ta } (0-41)

where:
–1
[ R ] n = σ [ Aε – Aα [ A – F ( I – α ) ] Fε ] n (α = ε for radiation enclosure)

{ Q } n =Vector of net elemental heat flows from radiant exchange for cavity n

[ R ] n =Radiation exchange matrix for cavity n

{ u } =Vector of grid point temperatures

σ =Stefan-Boltzmann constant
=Diagonal matrix of surface element areas
\
A
\
=Identity matrix
\
I
\

Main Index
 CHAPTER F 501

=Diagonal matrix of surface emissivities

\
ε
\
=Diagonal matrix of surface absorptivities
\
α
\

[ F ] n =Lower triangular matrix of exchange coefficients ( A j f ji ) for cavity n

T a =Scale factor to correct for absolute temperature

User supplied data:

σ =Supplied on the PARAM,SIGMA Bulk Data entry

T a =Supplied on the PARAM,TABS Bulk Data entry
=Calculated from the input data for CHBDYi surface elements
\
A
\

[ F ] =Supplied from the RADLST/RADMTX Bulk Data entries or calculated internally using the
VIEW or VIEW3D modules
=Supplied from the RADM Bulk Data entries
\ \
ε ,
α
\ \

Radiation Matrix Formation Using MSC Nastran View Factors

As described in View Factor Calculation Methods, 481, MSC Nastran can calculate diffuse grey geometric view
factors (stored as A j ⋅ f ji ) to be used in radiation enclosure analysis. Those view factors are used in (0-41)
to generate a total radiation exchange matrix. This matrix is symmetric and generally non-conservative in
the sense that the column summations will not be equal to zero. This would imply that in an isothermal
enclosure, there would exist net heat flow. This could be the result of an incomplete enclosure with resultant
energy loss to space. If a complete enclosure is desired, an ambient element can be requested. The total view

Main Index
 502 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Radiation Enclosure Analysis

factor summations can also be scaled to exactly equal 1.0 for any summations exceeding 1.0. These options
are discussed beginning on View Factor Calculation Methods, 481.
Control over the form of the radiation matrix can be effected by specifying the matrix type (MTXTYP) on
the RADLST Bulk Data entry. Once these entries are generated by the VIEW or VIEW3D module, the
matrix type can either remain as MTXTYP = 1, or it can be changed to a MTXTYP = 4. In this case, the
radiation matrix will have its diagonal terms adjusted to provide a column sum of exactly zero. This is referred
to as a conservative radiation matrix.

Radiation Matrix Formation Using User-Supplied Exchange Factors

It may be desirable to input the radiation exchange matrix directly. In this case the user provides exchange
factors with the RADLST/RADMTX Bulk Data entries. Exchange factors can be used to account for
specular effects, transmissive surface character, and enclosure gas absorption. When used in this fashion, the
input represents the following system:

RADMTX “SCRIPT-F”
[ R ] = –σ * “SCRIPT-F” ( Off Diagonal Terms)
MTXTYP = 2 – Symmetric
– Conservative
RADLST
MTXTYP = 3 – Unsymmetric
– Conservative

In this instance CONSERVATIVE means that the diagonal terms of [ R ] are adjusted to make the column
summations equal to 0.0. Since all the radiation matrix values are user supplied, no control over the system
can be effected by the view factor module. A user warning message is issued if (0-42) is satisfied.

 A i f ij > A i . ( 1.001 ) calculated for each j (0-42)

i
where:

i = Column in view factor matrix

j = Row in view factor matrix

Main Index
 CHAPTER F 503

A = Surface element area

f = View Factor

Main Index
 504 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Radiation Enclosure Analysis

Main Index
 MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s Guide
Appendix G: Radiation Exchange – Real Surface Approximation

Radiation Exchange – Real

G Surface Approximation

Real Surface Approximation and Radiation Exchange

Main Index
 506 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Real Surface Approximation and Radiation Exchange

Real Surface Approximation and Radiation Exchange

In the most general sense, radiative surface properties can vary with absorption and emission angle, surface
temperature, and spectral distribution of incident and emitted radiation. For an enclosure analysis, the many
reflections and re-reflections tend to smooth out directional behavior. Additionally, it may be difficult if not
impossible to acquire good directional, temperature, or wavelength dependent surface properties. Based on
this, many radiation problems are approximated at the first level of analysis with surfaces which exhibit
diffuse gray absorption and emission radiative character.
MSC Nastran allows for a second level of analysis which presumes that radiation surface interaction is diffuse,
but admits emissivity and absorptivity to be functions of temperature and/or wavelength. The concept of a
diffuse view factor is still applicable for this type of analysis since it is a simple geometric construct. The basic
notion involved here is to consider the energy transport associated with separate wavelength intervals
(wavebands). Numerically, this can be implemented with a method known as the band-energy
approximation.
Figure 0-1 illustrates the hemispherical spectral emissivity for tungsten. Figure 0-2 depicts a potential waveband
approximation for the hemispherical spectral emissivity for input to MSC Nastran.

Figure 0-1 Hemispherical Spectral Emissivity of Tungsten*

Main Index
 CHAPTER G 507

Figure 0-2 Band Approximations to Hemispherical Spectral Emissivity of Tungsten*

*From Siegel and Howell, Thermal Radiation Heat Transfer, Second Edition.

Radiation Exchange Relationship for Diffuse Spectral Surface Behavior

{ Qe } = { Qe }
λ

λ
=
in out
{ Q eλ }  λ   λ 
[ A ]   qe  –  qe  
    
=
in
{ q eλ } \
–1 4
σ[(A – F(I – α(λ))) Fε ( λ ) ] fe { Ue }
\
=
out
{ q eλ } \
–1 4
σ[ε(λ) + (I – α(λ))(A – F(I – α(λ))) Fε ( λ ) ] fe { Ue }
\

Main Index
 508 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Real Surface Approximation and Radiation Exchange

{ fe } =
 
 FRAC 0 – λ U – FRAC 0 – λ U 
 2 e 1 e

f e =Fraction of the total radiant output of a black body that is contained in the n-th wavelength
band where Δλ = λ 2 – λ 1 .

U e =Elemental temperatures
=
FRAC 0 – λU
e

15- – mν
e-----------
-----
π
4  m4
- { [ ( mν + 3 )mν + 6 ]mν + 6 }, ν ≥ 2
m = 1, 2, …

=
FRAC 0 – λU
e 2 4 6 8
15 3 1 ν ν ν ν ν 
1 – ------ ν  --- – --- + ------ – ------------ + ------------------ – ------------------------ , ν < 2
 3 8 60 5040 272160 13305600 
4
π
ν=
o

PLANCK2
---------------------------- , where PLANCK2 = 25898 μm R  ( TYP )
λU e 
14388 μm K 
o

=
[ R eλ ] n σ [ Aε ( λ ) – Aα ( λ ) ( A – F ( I – α ( λ ) ) ) – 1 Fε ( λ ) ] n

Main Index
 CHAPTER G 509

=
{ Q eλ } n \
λ 4
–[ Re ]n fe { Ue }
\
=
net λ net
{ Q eλ } –[ Re ] { Ue }
4

where,

n max
\
NET λ
[ R eλ ] =  [ Re ]n fe
n = 1 \ n

Key Points regarding Spectral Radiation Band Analysis within MSC Nastran
1. Only one RADBND (wavelength break point) entry can be specified with any input file. This does
not mean that all surfaces of all cavities must display spectral surface behavior. For any surfaces which
are to remain as grey or blackbody, each waveband emissivity value associated with its RADM entry
can be given the same emissivity value resulting in a constant emissivity over all wavelengths. Recall
that radiation material surface properties are associated with the CHBDYi surface element
description, so every element in every cavity can potentially exhibit its own radiative character.
2. Temperature and/or wavelength dependent radiative surface properties can be applied to radiation
enclosure analyses as well as the radiation boundary condition.
3. Within each waveband the emissivity must be a constant value. Each discontinuity (vertical jump)
in the emissivity vs. wavelength piecewise linear curve must be input as a waveband of zero width.
4. The necessary inputs for spectral exchange in MSC Nastran are given in Thermal Capabilities, 9.

Main Index
 510 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Real Surface Approximation and Radiation Exchange

Input Example - Real Surface Behavior, ε ( λ )

ε(λ)
.90

.40

∞
λ1 λ2 λ
0

RADBND 5 25898. 2.0 2.0 9.0

RADM 1 1.0 .40 .90 0.0

ε(λ)
.90

∞
0 λ1 λ2 λ

RADBND 3 25898. 2.0 9.0

RADM 1 1.0 .90

Main Index
 CHAPTER G 511

ε(λ)
.90

.40

0 λ1 λ2

RADBND 4 25898. 2.0 2.0 9.0

RADM 1 1.0 .90 .40

Main Index
 512 MSC Nastran Thermal Analysis User’s Guide
Real Surface Approximation and Radiation Exchange

Main Index
 MSC.Fatigue Quick Start Guide

Index
Thermal Analysis User’s Guide

Symbols CBAR, 10, 346

$, 42 CBEAM, 10, 346
$ Bulk Data entry CBEND, 10, 346
Index specification of, 349, 480 CDAMP1 Bulk Data entry
specification of, 351
CDAMP2 Bulk Data entry
A specification of, 352
Absolute temperature, 26
CDAMP3 Bulk Data entry
Absorptivity, 165, 267, 294, 501
specification of, 353
Ambient element, 180, 183
CDAMP4 Bulk Data entry
Ambient nodes, 91
specification of, 354
Ambient temperature, 208, 294
CDAMP5 Bulk Data entry
ANALYSIS, 64, 74
specification of, 355
Axisymmetric elements, 149
CDAMPi, 12
Axisymmetric modeling, 149
CELAS1 Bulk Data entry
Axisymmetric surface elements, 149
specification of, 356
CELAS2 Bulk Data entry
B specification of, 357
Band-energy approximation, 506 CELAS3 Bulk Data entry
BDYOR, 346, 348 specification of, 358
BDYOR Bulk Data entry CELAS4 Bulk Data entry
specification of, 350 specification of, 359
BEGIN BULK, 40, 42 CELASi, 12, 35, 248
BFGS, 68 CEND, 40
Bisection of loads, 63 CEND Executive Control statement
Blackbody, 165 specification of, 297
Boundary conditions, 19, 90 CHBDY, 91, 109, 115, 122, 267
CONV, 19 CHBDYE, 11, 21, 24, 149, 346, 348
CONVM, 19 CHBDYE Bulk Data entry
RADBC, 19 specification of, 360
RADSET, 19 CHBDYG, 11, 18, 31, 33, 149, 175, 346, 348
Bulk Data, 346, 347, 348 AREA3, 11
Bulk Data entries, 42, 344 AREA4, 11
AREA6, 11
C AREA8, 11
Case Control, 15, 24, 87, 127, 208, 210, 216, 237, REV, 11
346, 347 CHBDYG Bulk Data entry
Case Control commands, 40 specification of, 363
Case Control Section, 14 CHBDYi, 27, 28, 31, 32, 171, 248, 260, 267, 483

Main Index
 514 Thermal Analysis User’s Guide

CHBDYP, 11, 25, 119, 346, 348 D

ELCYL, 11 DELAY, 15, 18, 24, 210, 346
FTUBE, 11 DELAY Bulk Data entry
LINE, 11 specification of, 375
POINT, 11 Density, 12, 294
TUBE, 11 DIAG 50, 69, 237
CHBDYP Bulk Data entry DIAG 51, 69, 237
specification of, 367 DIAG Executive Control statement
CHEX1, 346 specification of, 298
CHEX2, 346 Directional solar heat flux, 159
CHEXA, 10, 202, 208, 346 DLOAD, 14, 15, 18, 24, 208, 210, 222, 346
Comment, 42, 480 DLOAD Bulk Data entry
Comment Bulk Data entry specification of, 376
specification of, 349 DMI Bulk Data entry
Conduction matrix, 62 specification of, 377
Conductivity, 115, 194 DMIG Bulk Data entry
CONROD, 11, 346 specification of, 381
Control node, 123, 128, 194, 224, 267 DPHASE Bulk Data entry
Control node for forced convection, 25 specification of, 384
Control node for free convection, 20 Dynamic viscosity, 13, 194, 294
Control node for radiation boundary condition, 26
CONV, 19, 20, 21, 91, 348
CONV Bulk Data entry
E
ECHO Executive Control statement
specification of, 372
specification of, 302
Convection, 208
Element connectivity, 87
Convergence criteria, 65
Elements, 10
energy error, 66
conduction elements, 10
load error, 66
special elements, 12
temperature error, 65
surface elements, 11
CONVM, 19, 25, 194, 348
Emissivity, 115, 116, 171, 294, 501
CONVM Bulk Data entry
Enclosure radiation, 29, 179
specification of, 374
Enclosure radiation exchange, 27
Correction vector, 62
ENDDATA, 42
Courant number, 26, 280
ENTHALPY, 237
CPENTA, 10, 346
Enthalpy, 237, 294
CQUAD4, 10, 21, 176, 346
Exchange factors, 502
CQUAD8, 10, 346
Execution of MSC.Nastran, 38
CROD, 11, 346
Executive Control statements, 40
CTETRA, 10, 346
CTRIA3, 10, 346
CTRIA6, 11, 346 F
CTRIAX6, 10, 149, 346 File Management statements, 39
CTUBE, 11, 346
Cutoff wavelength, 166

Main Index
 INDEX 515

Files generated, 43 Initial conditions, 36, 201

.dat, 43 steady state analysis, 36
.DBALL, 43 transient analysis, 36
.f04, 43 Input data, 38
.f06, 43 Input File
.log, 43 structure of, 38
.MASTER, 43 Internal heat generation, 127, 216, 217
.pch, 43 Internal volumetric heat generation, 123
.plt, 43 Iteration scheme, 62
.USROBJ, 43
.USRSOU, 43 J
.xdb, 43 JCL, 42
miscellaneous scratch files, 43
Film node, 102, 109, 122, 123, 194
Film node for free convection, 20 K
Finite difference view factor, 31 Kinematic viscosity, 91, 294
Fluid elements, 194
Flux load, 154 L
Forced convection, 19, 25, 194, 280 Latent heat, 13, 237
Free and forced convection, 348 Line search method, 63
Free convection, 19, 21, 22, 91, 102, 224, 230 LOAD, 14, 18, 346
Free convection exponent, 122 Load, 87, 127
Free convection film nodes, 139 LOAD Bulk Data entry
Free convection forms, 129, 139 specification of, 386
Free convection heat transfer coefficient, 12, 123, 294 Load set identification (SID), 14
Loads, 122, 128
G Lower temperature limit for phase change, 13
Gaussian integration, 171, 482 Lumped heat capacitance, 248
Gaussian integration view factor, 32 Lumped thermal capacitance, 12
Grashof's number, 91, 294
GRID, 346, 348 M
Grid point, 87 MAT4, 12, 13, 20, 21, 22, 25, 93, 95, 206, 220,
346, 348
H MAT4 Bulk Data entry
Heat capacitance, 194 specification of, 387
Heat transfer coefficient, 194 MAT4/MATT4, 127, 194
MAT4/MATT4/TABLEM2, 106
MAT5, 12, 346, 348
I MAT5 Bulk Data entry
IC, 36, 74, 346 specification of, 389
ID Executive Control statement Material properties, 87
specification of, 303 MATT4, 12, 13, 20, 21, 22, 25, 346, 348
INCLUDE, 27 MATT4 Bulk Data entry
INCLUDE Bulk Data entry specification of, 390
specification of, 385 MATT4/TABLEMi, 102

Main Index
 516 Thermal Analysis User’s Guide

MATT5, 12, 346, 348 Output requests

MATT5 Bulk Data entry ENTHALPY, 42
specification of, 391 FLUX, 41, 42
MPC, 35, 109, 112, 274, 346 HDOT, 42
MPC Bulk Data entry OLOAD, 41, 42
specification of, 392 SORT1, 42
MPCADD Bulk Data entry SORT2, 42
specification of, 393 SPCF, 41, 42
MSC.Aries, 44 THERMAL, 41, 42
MSC.Nastran
input file, structure of, 38 P
MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide, 87 PARAM Bulk Data entry
MSC.XL, 44 specification of, 408
Multiple loads, 222, 260 PARAM,POST, 44
PARAM,SIGMA, 501
N PARAM,TABS, 501
NASPLT, 43 Parameter, 26
NASTRAN definition(s), 39 SIGMA, 26
NDAMP, 242, 280 TABS, 26
Newton's method, 62 PBAR, 346
NLPARM, 40, 63, 65, 66, 67, 69, 88, 97, 346 PBEAM, 346
NLPARM Bulk Data entry PBEND, 346
specification of, 394 pch, 43, 44
NOLIN, 274 PCONV, 21, 93, 95, 348
NOLIN1, 16, 346 PCONV Bulk Data entry
NOLIN1 Bulk Data entry specification of, 409
specification of, 400 PCONVM, 348
NOLIN2, 16, 346 PCONVM Bulk Data entry
NOLIN2 Bulk Data entry specification of, 411
specification of, 402 PDAMP Bulk Data entry
NOLIN3, 16, 274, 346 specification of, 413
NOLIN3 Bulk Data entry PDAMP5 Bulk Data entry
specification of, 404 specification of, 414
NOLIN4, 16, 346 PELAS Bulk Data entry
NOLIN4 Bulk Data entry specification of, 415
specification of, 406 Phase change, 237, 242
NONLINEAR, 15, 346 PHBDY, 346, 348
Nu, 281 PHBDY Bulk Data entry
Numerical damping, 237, 242, 280 specification of, 416
Nusselt's number, 91, 294 Planck's second constant, 31, 294
Plotting, 44
O TEKPLT, 44
operation commands, 51 X-Y plotting, 51
plt, 43
Pr, 280
Prandtl's number, 25, 91, 294

Main Index
 INDEX 517

PROD, 346 Radiation exchange within an enclosure, 19

PSHELL, 346 Radiation matrix, 501
PSOLID, 346 Radiation to space, 26, 154
PTUBE, 346 RADLST, 27, 28, 31, 348
Punch file, 179, 183, 186, 190, 193 RADLST Bulk Data entry
specification of, 430
Q RADLST/RADMTX, 27, 31, 171, 501, 502
QBDY1, 15, 71, 346 RADLST/RADMTX punch files, 180
QBDY1 Bulk Data entry RADM, 12, 13, 18, 26, 27, 31, 159, 165, 171, 346,
specification of, 417 348
QBDY2, 15, 71, 346 RADM Bulk Data entry
QBDY2 Bulk Data entry specification of, 432
specification of, 418 RADM/RADBND, 26
QBDY3, 16, 71, 346 RADM/RADMT, 26
QBDY3 Bulk Data entry RADM/RADMT/RADBND, 28, 32
specification of, 419 RADMT, 12, 18, 31, 346, 348
QBDYi, 40 RADMT Bulk Data entry
QHBDY, 15, 40, 71, 346 specification of, 433
QHBDY Bulk Data entry RADMTX, 28, 31, 348
specification of, 420 RADMTX Bulk Data entry
Quasi-Newton, 63 specification of, 434
Quasi-Newton (BFGS) updates, 63 RADSET, 13, 19, 28, 31, 32, 34, 171, 187, 348
QVECT, 13, 15, 18, 27, 40, 71, 159, 165, 260, 346 RADSET Bulk Data entry
QVECT Bulk Data entry specification of, 435
specification of, 422 RADVAC Bulk Data entry
QVOL, 15, 40, 71, 122, 127, 217, 220, 346 specification of, 428
QVOL Bul Data entry Re, 280
specification of, 425 Reference enthalpy, 13
Residual vector, 62
Restart
R LOOPID, 41
RADBC, 13, 19, 26, 348 SUBID, 41
RADBC Bulk Data entry Restarts, 42
specification of, 426 LOOPID, 42
RADBND, 31, 165, 169, 346, 348, 509 SLOOPID, 42
RADBND Bulk Data entry STIME, 42
specification of, 427 Reynolds' number, 25, 294
RADCAV, 31, 32, 171, 179, 187, 348, 490
Radiation, 348
Radiation ambient element, 179 S
Radiation boundary condition, 115, 116, 154, 159, SCR, 43
260, 348 SCR (scratch) command, 43
Radiation cavities, 186, 484 Self-shadowing, 482, 483
Radiation cavity/enclosure, 170 SET1 Bulk Data entry
Radiation exchange, 170 specification of, 436
Radiation exchange with space, 19 Shadowing, 170, 176

Main Index
 518 Thermal Analysis User’s Guide

SID, 216 Steady state heat transfer, 40

SIGMA, 26, 28, 32, 119 LOAD, 40
SLOAD, 16, 248, 346 MPC, 40
SLOAD Bulk Data entry output requests, 41
specification of, 437 restarts, 41
SOL 153, 40 SORT1, 41
SOL 159, 41 SORT2, 41
SOL Executive Control statement SPC, 40
specification of, 304 TEMP(INIT), 40
Solar flux, 261 Stefan-Boltzmann, 500
Solar load, 154, 165 Stefan-Boltzmann constant, 26, 294
SPC, 35, 67, 88, 202, 208, 248, 346, 348 Streamwise-upwind Petrov-Galerkin Element (SUPG), 25
SPC Bulk Data entry Structural plotting, 44
specification of, 438 parameter definition commands, 45
SPC1, 346 plot set selection, 44
SPC1 Bulk Data entry thermal contour plots, 48
specification of, 439 undeformed structural plots, 47
SPCADD Bulk Data entry SUPAX Bulk Data entry
specification of, 440 specification of, 444
SPCD, 346 SUPG element, 25
SPCD Bulk Data entry Surface elements, 90, 176
specification of, 441
SPCs, 88 T
Specific heat, 12, 91, 194, 294 TABLED1, 15, 222, 346
Spectral emissivity, 506 TABLED1 Bulk Data entry
Spectral radiation, 165 specification of, 445
Spectral radiation exchange, 31 TABLED2, 24, 346
SPOINT, 222, 346 TABLED2 Bulk Data entry
SPOINT Bulk Data entry specification of, 448
specification of, 443 TABLED3, 346
Steady State, 18 TABLED3 Bulk Data entry
Steady state analysis, 14, 36, 63 specification of, 450
Bulk Data, 36 TABLED4, 346
Case Control, 36 TABLED4 Bulk Data entry
convergence criteria, 65 specification of, 452
equilibrium equation, 64 TABLEDi, 210
iteration control, 67 TABLEM, 139
iteration output, 69 TABLEM1, 346, 348
residual vector, 64 TABLEM1 Bulk Data entry
SOL 153, 64 specification of, 453
TABLEM2, 18, 21, 22, 30, 346, 348
TABLEM2 Bulk Data entry
specification of, 456
TABLEM3, 346, 348
TABLEM3 Bulk Data entry
specification of, 458

Main Index
 INDEX 519

TABLEM4, 346, 348 Third surface shadowing, 483

TABLEM4 Bulk Data entry Third-body shadowing, 187
specification of, 460 TIME Executive Control statement
TABLEMi, 12, 13, 31 specification of, 308
TABS, 26, 28, 32, 119 Time-varying loads, 216
Tangential matrix update strategy, 63 TLOAD, 222
Tangential stiffness matrix, 62 TLOAD1, 15, 18, 222, 346
TEMP, 36, 65, 74, 346 TLOAD1 Bulk Data entry
TEMP Bulk Data entry specification of, 467
specification of, 461 TLOAD2, 346
TEMP(ESTI), 346 TLOAD2 Bulk Data entry
TEMP(INIT), 36, 65 specification of, 469
TEMPAX Bulk Data entry TLOADi, 14, 222
specification of, 463 Transient, 18
TEMPBC, 24, 35, 208, 222, 248, 346 Transient analysis, 14, 36, 71
TEMPD, 36, 65, 74, 346 automatic time stepping, 75
TEMPD Bulk Data entry boundary temperatures, 83
specification of, 464 bulk data, 36
Temperature boundary conditions and constraints, 34 case control, 36
CELASi, 35 convergence criteria, 83
MPC, 35 equilibrium equation, 72
SPC, 35 fixed time step, 83
TEMPBC, 35 initial temperatures, 83
Temperature range for phase change, 13 integration and iteration control, 77
TEMPP1, 346 iteration equation, 73
TEMPP2, 346 iteration output, 79
TEMPRB, 346 Newmark's method, 73
TF, 346 Newmark's method with adaptive time stepping, 72
TF Bulk Data entry numerical stability, 83
specification of, 466 PARAM,NDAMP, 73
TFL, 346 residual vector, 73
Thermal conductivity, 12, 91, 294 SOL 159, 74
Thermal loads, 14, 15 tangential stiffness matrix, 73
NOLIN1, 16 time step size, 83
NOLIN2, 16
NOLIN3, 16
NOLIN4, 16
QBDY1, 15
QBDY2, 15
QBDY3, 16
QHBDY, 15
QVECT, 15
QVOL, 15
SLOAD, 16
Thermostat control, 274

Main Index
 520 Thermal Analysis User’s Guide

Transient heat transfer, 41 X

DLOAD, 41 X-Y plotting, 51, 52, 53
DMIG, 41 curve request, 55
IC, 41 curve type, 54
MPC, 41 operation, 54
NONLINEAR, 41 operation command, 51
output requests, 42 parameter definition commands, 51
SPC, 41 subcase list, 55
TEMP, 41 X-Y plots for SORT1 output, 58
TEMPBC (of TRAN type), 41 X-Y plotter terminology, 51
TEMPD, 41
TF, 41
TSTEPNL, 41
Transient solution, 201
Transient temperature specification, 201
TSTEPNL, 63, 74, 77, 206, 346
TSTEPNL Bulk Data entry
specification of, 472

U
Units, 237, 488

V
VIEW, 31, 32, 171, 187, 348, 482, 484, 485, 487,
490, 501, 502
VIEW Bulk Data entry
specification of, 476
View Factor, 482
View factor, 31, 170, 180, 186, 294, 348, 490, 501
View factor calculation, 33
VIEW3D, 32, 171, 482, 484, 487, 490, 501, 502
VIEW3D Bulk Data entry
specification of, 478
Volume coefficient of expansion, 92, 294
Volumetric internal heat generation, 13

W
Waveband, 506, 509
Wavelength, 165
Wavelength break points, 31

Main Index